Home

here - Keysight

1. Output applied to a 50M load value 2 msec DIV The ARBWAVE program shows how to generate an arbitrary waveform with a single waveform segment The example generates a 100 point ramp The AFG stores the waveform segment into segment memory as voltage data points The commands are 1 Reset the AFG RST The RST command aborts any waveform output and sets the AFG to a defined state 2 Clear the AFG Memory of All Sequence Data SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete ALL This command clears all segment sequence data stored in the sequence memory see How to Free Segment and Sequence Memory on page 113 for more information 3 Clear the AFG Memory of All Segment Data SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete ALL This command clears all segment data stored in the segment memory see How to Free Segment and Sequence Memory on page 113 for more information 4 Select the Reference Oscillator SOURce JROSCillator SOURce lt source gt This command selects the reference oscillator source see Reference Oscillator Sources on page 115 88 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter 3 5 Set the Segment Sample Rate SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FlXed lt frequency gt This command sets the rate at which the points in a waveform segment are output by the AFG The waveform frequency is determined by sample frequency number of points Refer to Table B 3 in Appendix B for the frequency limits 6 Sel
2. Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt edge gt discrete NEGative POSitive none e Executable when Initiated Query form only e Coupling Group None e Related Commands ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce e RST Condition ARM STARt LAYer2 SLOPe POSitive Setting the Start Arm Slope ARM LAY2 SLOP NEG Sets negative start arm slope Chapter 8 Command Reference 293 ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce lt source gt selects the source that will start waveform output The available sources are BUS The Group Execute Trigger GET GPIB command or the IEEE 488 2 TRG common command ECLTrg0 and ECLTrg1 The VXIbus ECL trigger lines EXTernal The Agilent E1445A s front panel Start Arm In BNC connector HOLD Suspend arming Use the ARM STARt LAYer2 IMMediate command to start the waveform IMMediate Immediate arming An arm is internally generated two to three reference oscillator cycles after the start trigger sequence enters the wait for arm state TTLTrgO through TTLTrg7 The VXIbus TTL trigger lines Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt source gt discrete BUS ECLTrgO ECLTrg1 none EXTernal HOLD IMMediate TTLTrgO through TTLTrg7 Comments Use the ARM STARt LAYer2 SLOPe command to select the active edge for the front panel Start Arm In BNC when used as
3. o L A IAS EEE Logical Address 0 p Servant Area i Access switches through top of cover ARA r Device Information Device Type message based C Size 1 Slot Connectors P1 and P2 Addressing Modes A16 A24 A24 Size 4096 bytes Dynamically Configurable Non Interrupter Non Interrupter Handler VXIbus Revision Compliance 1 3 SCPI Revision 1991 0 See side of AFG for power cooling requirements Figure 1 1 The E1445A Arbitrary Function Generator Table 1 1 Agilent E1445A VXIbus System Factory Settings Parameter Setting Logical Address 80 Servant Area 0 Bus Request Level 3 20 Getting Started Chapter 1 Note Appendix A has the complete list of Agilent E1445A VXIbus system specifications The AFG Logical The Agilent E1445A AFG logical address is used Address to place the AFG in the servant area of a commander Agilent E1406A Command Module or an embedded controller for example with the AFG servant area switch to set the AFG servant area and to address the AFG see Addressing the AFG on page 22 and Using an Embedded Controller on page 23 Assigning the AFG In a VXIbus system every device must be in the servant area of a toa Commander commander with the exception of
4. Appendix B Useful Tables 467 Table B 2 Agilent E1445A Command Coupling Groups continued Coupling Group Commands Frequency continued SOURce FREQuency 1 CENTer SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FlXed SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey SOURce SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE SOURce FREQuency 1 RANGe SOURce FREQuency 1 SPAN SOURce FREQuency 1 STARt SOURce FREQuency 1 STOP SOURce FREQuency2 CW FlXed SOURce LIST2 FREQuency SOURce PM SOURce SOURce PM STATe SOURce JROSCillator FREQuency EXTernal SOURce ROSCillator SOURce SOURce SWEep COUNt SOURce SWEep DIRection SOURce SWEep POINts SOURce SWEep SPACing SOURce SWEep TIME TRIGger STARt GATE POL arity TRIGger STARt GATE SOURce TRIGger STARt GATE STATe TRIGger STARt SOURce TRIGger STOP SLOPe TRIGger STOP SOURce TRIGger SWEep SOURce TRIGger SWEep TlMer Voltage OUTPut 1 MPedance OUTPut 1 LOAD OUTPut 1 LOAD AUTO SOURce RAMP POLarity SOURce VOLTage LE Vel IMMediate AMPLitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel MMediate OFFSet Frequency 8 Voltage SOURce ARBitrary DAC SOURce SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SOURce RAMP POINts None ABORt ARM STAR1 LAYer 1 COUNt ARM STARt LAYer2 COUNt 468 Useful Tables Appendix B Table B 2 Agilent E1445A Command Coupling Groups continued Coupling Group Commands
5. 111 Gener tine NOlSE0 cid A de a le 112 BASIC Program Example NOISE o o e 112 Arbitrary Waveform Program Comments o o e 113 Determining the Amount of Segment and Sequence Memory 113 How to Free Segment and Sequence Memory o o o e 113 Amplitude Effects on Voltage Lists o o 0 000000 00005 113 Using DAC Codes to Send Segment Data o o o o 114 Sending Segment Sequences e 114 Reference Oscillator Sources o o ooo 115 Sample SOULCES ioi dic a a A a a Geiss 115 Frequency Generator Range o o e e 116 2 Agilent E1445A User s Manual Contents Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms continued Returning the Waveform Segment Names o o 116 Determining the Waveform Segment Size o oo e 116 Returning the Segment Sequence List Names oo o 116 Returning the Repetition Count List Length o o 116 Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 117 Chapter Content oc ese rr elds E BA Seg a S 117 FSK Programming Flowchart oaoa ee 118 FSK Command Reference 2 2 e 120 Sweeping and Frequency Lists 2 2 2 eee 120 Sweeping Using Start and Stop Frequencies o e 121 BASIC Program Example S5MPESWP1 o o 122 Specifying a Frequency List
6. unused SHOLD SMUX2 SMUX1 SMUXO The ROSC N Divider SHOLD Setting bit 7 to a 1 causes sample signals to be ignored This bit 1s set while setting the divide by n counter SMUX2 SMUXO bits 2 0 select N as follows 000 selects ROSC 1 00 1 selects ROSC 2 010 selects ROSC 3 011 selects ROSC 2N The ROSC N Divider Registers contain the value of N 1 when 2N is Registers greater than or equal to 4 The reference oscillator ROSC will be divided by 4 through 131 072 when the registers are loaded with 1 through 65 535 Address 15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 base 7D16 unused value through base 7Fi6 Register 7D Contains the most significant byte of the value of N 1 Register 7F Contains the least significant byte of the value of N 1 488 Register Based Programming Appendix C Frequency Control The following programs demonstrate how to change the signal frequency Prog rams While the waveform is currently at the AFG output DDS Frequency Control The FREQ_REG program changes the signal frequency that is generated using the DDS SOURce FREQI1 subsystem and the reference oscillator from any of the available sources The program accesses the Phase Increment and Frequency Load Strobe Registers BASIC Program Example FREQ1_REG 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 IRE STORE FREQ1_REG This program changes the output frequency gene
7. Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt length gt numeric see below none The valid range for lt ength gt is 2 through the size of largest available contiguous piece of waveform segment memory in bytes 2 bytes per point lt ength gt must be an even number MINimum and MAXimum cannot be used with this command Comments Executable when Initiated Query form only e Coupling Group None e Related Commands VINStrument CONFigure TEST DATA e RST Condition None e Power On Condition Local Bus testing not configured Example Testing Local Bus Operation VINS CONF TEST CONF 100 send data VINS CONF TEST DATA Reads back test data Configures for 100 byte test Chapter 8 Command Reference 405 VINStrument CONFigure TEST DATA Comments Example VINStrument CONFigure TEST DATA returns the received V XIbus Local Bus test data The data is returned in 16 bit integer format in an IEEE 488 2 definite block e Executable when Initiated No e Coupling Group None Related Commands VINStrument CONFigure TEST CONFigure e RST Condition None e Power On Condition Local Bus testing not configured Testing Local Bus Operation VINS CONF TEST CONF 100 Configure for 100 byte test send data VINS CONF TEST DATA Read back test data CONFigure VME MODE Parameters Comments Example VINStrument CONFigure VME MODE l
8. 248 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 800 810 820 830 840 850 860 870 880 890 900 910 920 930 940 950 960 COM Afg Afg1 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Wf_del Wf_del Subprogram which deletes all sequences and segments COM Afg Afg1 OUTPUT Afg FUNC USER NONE Iselect no sequences OUTPUT Afg LIST SSEQ DEL ALL IClear sequence memory OUTPUT Afg LIST SEGM DEL ALL IClear segment memory SUBEND SUB Errmsg Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors COM Afg Afg1 DIM Message 256 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform REPEAT OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR lread AFG error queue ENTER Afg Code Message PRINT Code Message UNTIL Code 0 STOP SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program COMBUNS FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program COMBUNS C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A This program sends the combined list using Unsigned data as Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Data It is thus very similar to the UNS_DAT program beginning on page 230 and the DACBLOK2 program beginning on page 236 Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 249
9. Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 275 1700 1710 1720 1730 1740 1750 1760 1770 1780 1790 1800 1810 1820 1830 1840 1850 1860 1870 1880 1890 1900 1910 1920 1930 1940 1950 1960 1970 1980 1990 2000 2010 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100 2110 2120 2130 2140 2150 2160 2170 2180 2190 OUTPUT Afg CHR 10 END lterminate with Line Feed LF and EOI OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ ADDR Isequence location ENTER Afg Seq2_addr SUBEND SUB Spike_def Spike_def Compute the waveform sine wave with spike Download the Idata as a combined list voltage and marker of signed Inumbers in an indefinite length block Download the sequence as la combined list repetition count marker and segment address lin an indefinite length arbitrary block COM Cmd Afg Afg1 Base_addr Seq1_addr Seq2_addr Seq3_addr INTEGER Waveform 1 4096 INTEGER Sequence 1 2 REAL Addr_seg3 FOR l 1 TO 4096 Waveform l SIN 2 PI 1 4096 00125 NEXT Width 50 FOR J 1 TO Width l 1024 Width J Waveform Waveform l 9 J Width 00125 NEXT J FOR J 1 TO Width 1 1024 Width J Waveform Waveform l 9 J Width 00125 NEXT J Ishift bits to dac code positions FOR l 1 TO 4096 Waveform SHIFT Waveform I 3 NEXT OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL SPIKE Isegment name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 4096 Isegment size OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SEGM COMB 0 waveform points OUTPUT Afg1 Waveform
10. None ARM STARt LAYer2 IMMediate ARM STARt LAYer2 SLOPe ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce ARM SWEep IMMediate INITiate IMMediate OUTPut 1 FILTer LPASs FREQuency OUTPut 1 FILTer LPASs STATe OUTPut 1 STATe SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload COMPlete SOURce FUNCtion USER SOURce LIST 1 FORMat DATA SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent ADDRess SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent CATalog SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined POINts SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete ALL SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete SELected SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent FREE SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer POINts SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer SPOint SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage DAC SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage POINts SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence ADDRess SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence CATalog SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence COMBined SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence COMBined POINts SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DEFine SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete ALL SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete SELected SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt POINts SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence FREE SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer POINts SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuenc
11. OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL WAVE_OUT sequence name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 2 Isegments in sequence OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DOWN VXI WAVE_OUT 2 OUTPUT Afg OPC ENTER Afg Ready Download the waveform sequence to sequence memory using WRITEIO land the AFG s Sequence register The register s address is located in A24 address space WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL 22 16 Sequence 1 1 116 MS Bits WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL 24 16 Sequence 1 2 116 LS Bits WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL 22 16 Sequence 2 1 116 MS Bits WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL 24 16 Sequence 2 2 116 LS Bits OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DOWN COMP Idisable downloading SUBEND SUB A24 offset A24 offset Subprogram which determines the base address for Ithe AFG registers in A24 address space COM Afg Base_addr Continued on Next Page Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 267 1580 CONTROL 16 25 2 laccess A16 space with READIO and WRITEIO 1590 A16_addr DVAL D400 16 AFG A16 base address 1600 Offset READIO 16 A16_addr 6 read AFG offset register 1610 Base_addr Offset 256 Ishift offset for 24 bit address 1620 SUBEND 1630 1640 SUB Rst 1650 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 1660 COM Afg Base_addr 1670 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 1680 ENTER Afg Complete 1690 SUBEND 1700 1710 SUB Wf_del 1720 Wf_del Subprogram which deletes all sequences and segments 1730 COM Afg Base_addr 1740 OUTPUT Afg FUNC U
12. SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE lt mode gt Download the frequency list SOURce LIST2 FREQuency lt freg_list gt Set the duration of the list SOURce SWEep TIME lt number gt Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe lt shape gt Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt Place the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate IMMediate 130 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 BASIC Program Example LISTDEF 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 IRE STORE LISTDEF This program sends a definite length arbitrary block of frequencies Ito the AFG Once the AFG receives the frequencies it steps through Ithe list at a rate of one frequency per second Assign I O paths between the computer and E1445A One path sends Idata in ASCII format to the AFG the other path sends frequency list data to the AFG in binary format COM Afg Afg1 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 path for ASCII data ASSIGN Afg1 TO 70910 FORMAT OFF Ipath for binary data ISet up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 ICall the subprograms CALL Rst CALL List1 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB List1 List1 Subprogram which downloads a list of 100 frequencies 1
13. SUB List_stp List_stp Subprogram which sets up a frequency list which is armed land advanced with GPIB group execute triggers TRIGGER 7 COM Afg Pts OUTPUT Afg TRIG STAR SOUR INT15 IDDS time base OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 MODE LIST lfrequency list mode OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST2 FREQ 10E3 20E3 30E3 40E3 50E3 freq list OUTPUT Afg ARM SWE SOUR BUS larm on GPIB trigger OUTPUT Afg TRIG SWE SOUR BUS ladvance on GPIB trigger OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SQU function OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 1 V lamplitude OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state 10 kHz is output WAIT 1 wait in case of error CALL Step SUBEND SUB Step Step Subprogram which starts and advances frequency list COM Afg Pts DISP Press Continue to arm trigger system PAUSE TRIGGER 7 Istart frequency list 10 kHz is still output FOR l 1 TO 4 Triggers for the four remaining frequencies DISP Press Continue to advance to next frequency PAUSE Continued on Next Page 194 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 TRIGGER 7 ladvance to next frequency NEXT DISP SUBEND SUB Rst Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 COM Afg Pts OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Errmsg Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1
14. The Sequence Base Register Waveform Index The Waveform Index is the location in sequence base memory where the base address of the sequence in sequence memory is located When specifying a waveform index it is recommended that you begin with an index of 1 then 2 and so on Index 0 is reserved for SCPI usage The Sequence Base Register contains the base address of the selected sequence in sequence memory Address 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 41 0 base 2016 Sequence Base Address The Status Register Sequence Base Address The Sequence Base Address is the location of the sequence in sequence memory The Status Register is used to determine when a new waveform can be selected from sequence base memory Address 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 base 216 other status bits WF other status bits USED WFUSED A 0 to 1 transition of this bit indicates that a new waveform can be selected from sequence base memory This bit is cleared by reading and then writing to the Waveform Select Register Appendix C Register Based Programming 499 Seq uence Selection The WAVE_SEL program shows how to change the output waveform Prog ram sequence without aborting the current waveform and re initializing the AFG BASIC Program Example WAVE_SEL 1 IRE STORE WAVE_SEL 2 This p
15. are optional The brackets are not part of the parameter and are not sent to the AFG If you do not specify a value for an optional parameter the instrument chooses a default value For example consider the ARM STARt LAYer 1 COUNt lt MIN MAX INF gt command If you send the command without specifying a parameter the present ARM STARt LAYer 1 COUNt value is returned If you send the MIN parameter the command returns the minimum count available If you send the MAX parameter the command returns the maximum count available There must be a space between the command and the parameter Unless otherwise noted in the reference section parameter settings can be queried by adding a question mark to the command which set the parameter For example SOUR FREQ1 FIX 20E3 sets the frequency to 20 kHz The value can be queried by executing SOUR FREQ1 FIX The MINimum or MAXimum value of a parameter is determined as follows SOUR FREQ1 FIX MIN SOUR FREQ1 FIX MAX The minimum and maximum values returned are based on the settings of other AFG commands at that time Chapter 8 Command Reference 287 SCPI Command Execution Command Coupling MIN and MAX Parameters in Coupling Groups Linking Commands Command Choices The following information should be remembered when executing SCPI commands Many of the AFG SCPI commands are value coupled This means that sending a command can change parameter values s
16. 11 Select the frequency sweep mode SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE lt mode gt Set the start frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 STARt lt start_freg gt Set the stop frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 STOP lt stop_freg gt Set the direction up or down of the frequency sweep SOURce SWEep DIRection lt direction gt Set the number of points frequencies in the frequency sweep SOURce SWEep POINts lt number gt Set the number of sweeps SOURce SWEep COUNt lt number gt Set the frequency advance source TRIGger SWEep SOURce lt source gt Set the duration of the sweep SOURce SWEep TIME lt number gt Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe lt shape gt Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt Place the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate MMediate Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 135 BASIC Program Example SWP_PVST 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 IRE STORE SWP_PVST This program sweeps from 5 kHz to 15 kHz in 0 1 seconds to Idemonstrate how to set the sweep time The program also sets Ithe direction of the sweep Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg ISet up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 3
17. 53 Chapter Contents sainan eR Ro q Oe ee Ra eA AA E ed ee a DE 53 Standard Waveforms Flowchart o o o e 54 Generating DC Voltages o 56 BASIC Program Example DCVOLTS o o o ooo o 56 Generating Sine Waves ee 58 BASIC Program Example SINEWAVE 59 Generating Squate Waves vous Go eh ee a ee 61 BASIC Program Example SQUWAVE o 63 Generating Triangle Ramp Waves oo e 65 BASIC Program Example TRIWAVE 67 Agilent E1445A User s Manual Contents 1 Chapter 2 Generating Standard Waveforms continued Selecting the Output Loads 2 2 oo 69 BASIC Program Example OUTPLOAD 0 70 Selecting the Amplitude Levels and Output Units o o 72 BASIC Program Example OUTPUNIT 0 0 73 Using Phase Modulation 2 2 ee ee 75 BASIC Program Example PHS_MOD o o o o 76 Standard Waveform Program Comments o e 78 Sinusoid Function Requirements 2 2 2 0 0 0 ee eee eee 78 Reference Oscillator Sources o oo o 78 Sample SOULCES s eee ek e BO a e he de wg 78 DDS Frequency Generator Ranges o o e e e 79 Number of Points versus Frequency 2 2 0 0 000 ee eee eee 79 Output Load Comments 2 0 0 0 2 eee ee ee 79 Output Units Comments s 3 254 e Se ee ee Se ee A
18. 530 Agilent E1445A User s Manual Index W continued waveforms segment continued marker points 222 memory 113 freeing memory 113 marker pulses 337 338 342 343 multiple marker pulses 207 211 naming 86 number of points 87 output voltage 337 338 345 347 query memory 336 341 names 116 336 size 116 reserving memory for 339 sample rate 87 selecting 251 344 single marker pulses 212 213 storing in memory 86 87 using combined 250 258 combined sequence 250 258 different 93 98 sequence determining marker points 222 memory 113 freeing memory 113 registers 498 499 selecting 498 505 using combined 250 258 setting cycle count 169 171 shape selection 332 sweeping arbitrary 141 using DDS generator 99 102 divide by n generator 99 101 104 174 175 WAVSELFP Example Program 272 277 Agilent E1445A User s Manual Index 531 Notes 532 Agilent E1445A User s Manual Index
19. Chapter 2 Generating Standard Waveforms 69 5 Select the Output Load Value OUTPut 1 LOAD lt load gt This command selects the load value expected at the Output 50 75 Q terminals The values are 50 for 50 Q loads must be same as output impedance 75 for 75 Q loads must be same as output impedance 9 9E 37 or INFinity for open circuit output value is twice the normal matched load output value 6 Initiate the Waveform INITiate IMMediate This command generates an immediate output with the arm source set to IMMediate Refer to Chapter 5 for triggering information BASIC Program Example OUTPLOAD 1 IRE STORE OUTPLOAD 2 This program sets the AFG s output impedance and output load 3 lto 75 ohms 4 10 Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM Afg 50 ISet up error checking 60 ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg 70 ENABLE INTR 7 2 80 OUTPUT Afg CLS 90 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 100 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 120 ICall the subprograms 130 CALL Rst 140 CALL Out_load 150 160 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 170 OFF INTR 7 180 END 190 200 SUB Out_load 210 Out_load Subprogram which sets the output load 220 COM Afg 230 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5V lamplitude 240 OUTPUT Afg OUTP LOAD AUTO OFF Idecouple load from impedance 250 OUTPUT OAfg OUTP IMP 75 loutput impedance 260 OUTPUT Afg OUTP LOAD 75
20. Enable Register e Standard Event Status Group Standard Event Status Register Standard Event Status Enable Register e Status Byte Status Group Status Byte Register Service Request Enable Register The relationship between the registers and filters in these groups is shown in Figure 9 1 Chapter 9 AFG Status 429 Questionable Signal Status Group Condition Register STATus QUEStionable CONDition oye STATus QUEStionable NTRansition lt unmask gt Transition Filter STATus Questionable PTRansition lt unmask gt Event Register STATus QUEStionable EVENt Enable Register STATus QUEStionable ENABle lt unmask gt Status Byte Register Summary Bit Standard Event Status Group Par L E AAA E MAV A TSN eS ad Event Register ESR O lt Enable Register ESE lt unmask gt MAV O Summary Bit ESB ESB O TOPR E Operation Status Group STB SRE lt mask gt SPOLL Condition Register STATus OPERation CONDition ay p STATus OPERation NTRansition lt unmask gt TransitionisFilter STATus OPERation PTRansition lt unmask gt Event Register STATus OPERation EVENt Enable Register STATus OPERation ENABle lt unmask gt Summary Bit Figure 9 1 E1445A Status Groups and Associated Registers 430 AFG Status Chapter 9 The Questionable Signal Status Group The Condition Register The Questionable Signal Status Group monitors the quality of various aspects of the output s
21. OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 10E3 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP TRI OUTPUT Afg SOUR RAMP POIN 200 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 4V OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM OFFS 1V OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM SUBEND SUB Rst Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 COM Afg OUTPUT Afg RST OPC ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Errmsg Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors COM Afg DIM Message 256 Continued on Next Page Ireference oscillator Itrigger source frequency range frequency function Iwaveform points lamplitude Idc offset Iwait for arm state lreset the AFG Chapter 2 Generating Standard Waveforms 67 450 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 460 B SPOLL Afg 470 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 480 OUTPUT Afg 490 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 500 REPEAT 510 OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR lread AFG error queue 520 ENTER Afg Code Message 530 PRINT Code Message 540 UNTIL Code 0 550 STOP 560 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program TRIWAVE FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program TRIWAVE C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A 68 Generating Standard Waveforms Chapter 2 Selecting the Output Loads 50 Q LOADS 75 Q LOADS WwW 50Q Load Value 750 Load Valu
22. Press Continue to advance to next frequency 470 PAUSE 480 OUTPUT Afg TRIG SWE IMM Istep to next frequency 490 NEXT 500 DISP 510 SUBEND 520 530 SUB Rst 540 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 550 COM Afg Pts 560 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 570 ENTER Afg Complete 580 SUBEND 590 600 SUB Errmsg 610 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 620 COM Afg Pts 630 DIM Message 256 640 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 650 B SPOLL Afg 660 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 670 OUTPUT Afg 680 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 690 REPEAT 700 OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 710 ENTER Afg Code Message 720 PRINT Code Message 730 UNTIL Code 0 740 STOP 750 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program SWP_STEP FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program SWP_STEP C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A 192 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering a Frequency List Frequency lists are started and advanced using the same arming and triggering commands used for sweeps The LIST_STP program sets the arm and list advance sources to BUS Thus the AFG is armed and advanced through the frequency list using the GPIB group execute trigger command TRIGGER 7 Using
23. VBPROG and the Visual C example program DRIFT C is in directory Versions VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A Marker Program Comments The following program comments give additional details on the program examples in this chapter Determining the Use SOURce LIST 1 MARKer POINts to determine the length of the g Number of Marker marker pulse list selected by SOURce LIST 1 MARKer The command Points of a returns the marker list size of the currently selected waveform segment Waveform Segment Determining the Use SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer POINts to determine the Number of Marker length of the marker pulse list selected by Points of a SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer The command returns the marker list size of the currently selected segment sequence Segment Sequence 222 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations Chapter 6 Chapter 7 High Speed Operation Chapter Contents This chapter explains how to use the Agilent E1445A Arbitrary Function Generator at faster speeds and other operations Chapter 3 shows how to transfer waveform segments and segment sequences to the AFG as voltage values and ASCII data respectively This is the slowest method to transfer the lists to the AFG This chapter shows faster ways to transfer the lists to the AFG The sections are as follows e Data Transfer Methods and Speed Comparisons Page 224 e Using Signed Data to Generate Wavefo
24. e Executable when Initiated No e Coupling Group None e Related Commands OPC OPC RST WAI ABORt ARM subsystem STATus OPC INITiate TRIGger subsystem e RST Condition The trigger system is in the idle state Initiating Waveform Generation INIT Initiates waveform generation Chapter 8 Command Reference 307 OUTPut 1 OUTPut 1 The OUTPut 1 subsystem controls the characteristics of the output waveform The subsystem sets the low pass output filter sets the output source impedance and enables or disables the output Subsystem Syntax OUTPut 1 FILTer LPASs FREQuency lt frequency gt STATe lt mode gt IMPedance lt impedance gt LOAD lt load gt AUTO lt mode gt STATe lt mode gt FILTer LPASs FREQuency OUTPut 1 FILTer LPASs FREQuency lt frequency gt sets the output filter s cutoff frequency to either 250 kHz or 10 MHz Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt frequency gt numeric 250 kHz 10 MHz MINimum Hz MAXimum MINimum selects the 250 kHz filter MAXimum selects the 10 MHZz filter Comments Selecting the cutoff frequency does not enable the output filter Use the OUT Put 1 FILTer LPASg STATe command to enable or disable the output filter e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands OUTPut 1 FILTer LPASs STATe e RST Condition OUTPut1 FILTer L
25. 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM Afg 40 50 ISet up error checking 60 ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg 70 ENABLE INTR 7 2 80 OUTPUT Afg CLS 90 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 100 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 110 120 Call the subprograms which reset the AFG and which 130 generate the square wave 140 CALL Rst 150 CALL Squ_wave Continued on Next Page 174 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 160 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 170 OFF INTR 7 180 END 190 200 SUB Squ_wave 210 Squ_wave Subprogram which selects reference oscillator source 220 IINTernal2 trigger source INTernal2 and the output 230 frequency function and amplitude 240 COM Afg 250 OUTPUT Afg SOUR ROSC SOUR INT2 Ireference oscillator 260 OUTPUT Afg TRIG STAR SOUR INT2 Itrigger source 270 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ2 FIX 10E6 loutput frequency 280 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SQU loutput function 290 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 1VPP lamplitude 300 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM lwait for arm state 310 SUBEND 320 330 SUB Rst 340 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 350 COM Afg 360 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 370 ENTER Afg Complete 380 SUBEND 390 400 SUB Errmsg 410 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 420 COM Afg 430 DIM Message 256 440 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 450 B SPOLL Afg 460 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 470 OUTP
26. 476 Useful Tables Appendix B Table B 6 Agilent E1445A Error Messages continued Code Message Description 312 PUD memory lost The protected user data saved by the PUD command has been lost 313 Calibration memory lost The nonvolatile calibration data used by the CAL command has been lost 330 Self test failed Note the information associated with the message for a description of the failure 350 Too many errors The E1445A error queue is full and additional errors have occurred 410 Query INTERRUPTED The E1445A was sent a command before it was finished responding to a query command 420 Query UNTERMINATED The controller computer attempts to read a query response from the Agilent E1445A without having first sent a complete query command 430 Query DEADLOCKED The E1445A s input and output buffers are full and the AFG cannot continue 440 Query UNTERMINATED after Occurs when the IDN query is not the last query indefinite response executed in a command string 1000 Out of memory The E1445A segment or sequence memory is full 1002 Calibration security enabled Calibration security must be disabled to calibrate the E1445A to read or write calibration data to change the security code or to change the protected user data 1004 Calibration write fail Writing calibration or protected user data PUD to nonvolatile memory failed 1005 Calibr
27. Appendix C Register Based Programming 493 830 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL 63 16 BINAND Sample_hold 127 840 SUBEND 850 860 SUB Rst 870 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 880 COM Afg Base_addr 890 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 900 ENTER Afg Complete 910 SUBEND Comments e To simplify the program SCPI commands are included to select the reference oscillator the divide by n subsystem and to start the waveform This requires that the only registers written to be the Sample Hold and ROSC N Control Register and the ROSC N Divider Registers This program executes as intended when the SCPI commands in subprogram Output_function are executed before the registers are written to The subprogram Output_function sets the initial reference oscillator frequency to 40 MHz Ifa different reference oscillator frequency is used that is 42 94967296 MHz or an externally supplied oscillator specify that frequency when the Divide_by_n subprogram is called line 200 Standard function sine waves are not available with the divide by n subsystem SOURce FREQuency2 Frequency doubling should not be used with the divide by n subsystem Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program FREQ2REG FRM is in directory Visual C C Program Versions VBPROG and the Visual C example program FREQ2REG C is in directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A 494 Register Based Programm
28. COM Afg DIM Message 256 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform REPEAT OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR lread AFG error queue ENTER Afg Code Message PRINT Code Message UNTIL Code 0 STOP SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program SIN_X FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program SIN_X C is in directory Versions VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A 106 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter 3 Gene rating a The SIN_D program generates a Damped sine wave using 4096 segments or Damped Sine Wave points 5 V DIV Output applied to a 500 load value msec DIV BASIC Program Example SIN_D a 180 190 200 210 220 230 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 This program is similar to the SIN_X BASIC program on page 105 with the following differences IRE STORE SIN_D This program outputs a damped sine wave arbitrary waveform ICall the subprogram which defines a damped sine wave and Ithe output sequence CALL Sind_def ISelect the output sequence and start the waveform OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER SIN_D_ OUT OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM SUB Sind_def Sind_def
29. ENTER Afg Code Message PRINT Code Message UNTIL Code 0 STOP SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program SWP_PVST FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program SWP_PVST C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 137 Freq uency Lists To demonstrates the relationship between the number of frequencies in a Versus Time frequency list and the time to hop through the list program LIST_TME makes continuous passes through a frequency list where the frequencies are spaced 1 second apart Using the flowchart in Figure 4 1 as a guide the steps of this program are 1 Select the frequency list mode SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE lt mode gt 2 Specify the frequency list SOURce LIST2 FREQuency lt freg_list gt 3 Set the list repetition count SOURce SWEep COUNt lt number gt 4 Set the frequency advance source TRIGger SWEep SOURce lt source gt 5 Set the frequency hop rate SOURce SWEep TIME lt number gt 6 Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe lt shape gt 7 Set the number of waveform points triangle wave SOURce RAMP POINts lt number gt 8 Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel MMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt 9 Place the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate MMediate 138 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter
30. ESE 60 120 ICall the subprograms 130 CALL Rst 140 CALL Stop_trig 150 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 160 OFF INTR 7 170 END 180 190 SUB Stop_trig 200 Stop_trig Subprogram which sets up the AFG to output 5 5 000 210 Icycle bursts Sets the trigger source to INTernal1 220 Ithe stop trigger source to EXTernal the stop trigger 230 Islope to NEGative The arm source is also set to 240 EXTernal 250 COM Afg 260 OUTPUT Afg TRIG STAR SOUR INT1 Itrigger source 270 OUTPUT Afg TRIG STOP SOUR EXT Istop trigger source 280 OUTPUT Afg TRIG STOP SLOP NEG Istop trigger slope 290 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 1005 loutput frequency 300 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN loutput function 310 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5VPP lamplitude 320 OUTPUT Afg ARM STAR LAY2 SOUR EXT larm source Continued on Next Page Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 181 330 OUTPUT Afg ARM STAR LAY2 SLOP POS larm slope 340 OUTPUT Afg ARM STAR LAY2 COUN 5 larm count 350 OUTPUT Afg ARM STAR LAY1 COUN 5E3 lrepetition count 360 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state 370 SUBEND 380 390 SUB Rst 400 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 410 COM Afg 420 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 430 ENTER Afg Complete 440 SUBEND 450 460 SUB Errmsg 470 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 480 COM Afg 490 DIM Message 256 500 Read AFG status by
31. GPIB Interface Card Agilent 82341 GPIB Interface with Agilent SICL Required Program See What s Needed to Run the Programs below Mainframe Agilent 75000 Series C Slot 0 Resource Manager Agilent E1406A Command Module Agilent E1445A Logical 80 Address Instrument Language SCPI You need to include the SICL BAS program file in your Visual BASIC project to run the example programs To add the file be sure you have opened a project you will be using Then Press Ctrl D and enter the path and file name or select the Add File menu item under the File menu and select the SICL BAS file see the Visual BASIC documentation for more information You can run the example program in the Visual BASIC environment or compile it to make an executable file Use the appropriate menu in the environment to compile the program see the Visual BASIC documentation for more information Note that the program can only operate under Windows 32 Getting Started Chapter 1 Typical Visual BASIC Example Program Agilent Standard Instrument Control Library The program Using Agilent SICL receives data from the AFG shows how to send coupled commands and performs error checking of the AFG The following is an example program written in Visual BASIC using the sends commands to the AFG to generate an arbitrary waveform Only program codes are given here Refer to the actual program on the CD to see th
32. SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt FEED lt source gt selects the marker source for the specified VXIbus ECL trigger line ECLTRGO or ECLTRG1 The available sources are ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 For arbitrary waveforms the marker level changes with the first waveform point of the first repetition A marker pulse is then output with the last waveform point of each repetition For sine waves the marker is a 50 duty cycle square wave at the sine wave frequency ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer2 Once a start arm is received the marker is asserted when the first amplitude point is triggered The marker is unasserted with the last amplitude point of the last waveform repetition or following an ABORT SOURce FREQuency 1 CHANge Outputs a one sample period wide marker pulse that is output after a frequency change occurs This shows that the new steady state frequency has been reached SOURce LIST 1 Outputs marker pulses specified by the SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer and SSEQuence MARKer commands The pulse is normally one sample period wide but may be widened by placing markers on consecutive output points This source is only useful with SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe USER i e arbitrary waveform output SOURce PM DEViation CHANge Outputs a one sample period wide marker pulse that is output after a phase change occurs This shows that the new phase has been reached SOURc
33. The INTernal 1 reference oscillator is recommended for use with the Direct Digital Synthesis DDS time base SOURce FREQuency 1 subsystem for high resolution and frequency range INTernal 1 is the default reference oscillator source Thus in many programs the source is not specified Sweeping frequency lists and frequency shift keying are only available using the direct digital synthesis DDS frequency synthesis method SOURce FREQuency 1 subsystem The method by which the output is advanced to the next sample point is selected with the TRIGger STARt SOURce command The available sources are e BUS The GPIB Group Execute Trigger GET command or the TEEE 488 2 TRG common command ECLTrg0 or ECLTrg1 The VXIbus ECL trigger lines EXTernal The AFG s front panel Ref Smpl In BNC HOLD Suspends sample generation INTernal 1 The SOURce FREQuency 1 subsystem DDS frequency synthesis e NTernal2 The SOURce FREQuency2 subsystem Divide by n frequency synthesis 154 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 AFG Frequency Modes Frequency Range Sweeping and Sampling Frequency Range Frequency Lists and FSK Frequency Doubling e TTLTrgO through 7 The VXIbus TTL trigger lines INTernal 1 is the source selected at power on or following a reset but is specified in the programs to emphasize that sweeping frequency lists and frequency shift keying are only allowed w
34. This command selects the marker source for the front panel s Marker Out connector to output marker pulses at the sample rate See Available Marker Sources on page 205 for the different sources 214 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations Chapter 6 5 Select the Marker Polarity SOURce MARKer POLarity lt polarity gt NORMal lt polarity gt selects active high marker pulses INVerted selects active low marker pulses 6 Enable Marker Outputs SOURce MARKer STATe ON This commands enables the AFG to output marker pulses Although RST automatically enables the AFG for marker outputs it is given here for good programming practice 7 Setup the Waveform Segment Store it as Voltage Data Points SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine lt length gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage lt voltage_list gt 8 Setup the Sequence and Generate the Output SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DEFine lt length gt SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence lt segment_list gt SOURce FUNCtion USER lt name gt INITiate MMediate BASIC Program Example MARKTRG IRE STORE MARKTRG This program computes a ramp wave as an arbitrary waveform and outputs a marker pulse with each waveform amplitude point Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg ISet up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg
35. UP The sweep starts at the start frequency specified by SOURce FREQuency 1 STARt and STOP or CENTer and SPAN and ends at the stop frequency e Executable when Initiated Query form only e Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands SOURce FREQuency 1 CENTer MODE SPAN START and STOP SOURce SWEep POINts and SPACing e RST Condition SOURce SWEep DIRection UP Example Setting the Sweep Direction SWE DIR DOWN Sweeps down in frequency Chapter 8 Command Reference 373 SOURce SWEep POINts SOURce SWEep POINts lt number gt selects the number of points in a frequency sweep The frequencies generated by the sweep are evenly spaced linearly or logarithmically depending on the SOURce SWEep SPACing setting between the frequencies specified by SOURce FREQuency 1 STARt and STOP or CENTer and SPAN inclusive Parameters Comments Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt number gt numeric 2 through 1073741824 MINimum none MAXimum MINimum selects 2 points MAXimum selects 1073741824 points SOURce SWEep POINts specifies the number of points with SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE set to SWEep the length of the SOURce LIST2 FREQuency list specifies the points with SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE set to LIST When changing the SOURce SWEep POINts value when SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE SWEep set the SOURce SWEep TIME or the TRIGger SWEep TlMer value r
36. lindefinite length block OUTPUT Afg CHR 10 END lterminate with line feed LF and EOI OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM ADDR ENTER Afg Addr_seg3 Addr_seg3 Addr_seg3 8 1 8 to set starting address boundary of segment ISequence 1 is the repetition count and marker enable for Isegment SPIKE Sequence 2 is the starting address of segment SPIKE Sequence 1 SHIFT 4096 1 4 Addr_seg3 DIV 65536 Sequence 2 Addr_seg3 MOD 65536 65536 Addr_seg3 MOD 65536 32767 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL SEQ3 Isequence name Continued on Next Page 276 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 2200 2210 2220 2230 2240 2250 2260 2270 2280 2290 2300 2310 2320 2330 2340 2350 2360 2370 2380 2390 2400 2410 2420 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Isequence size OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SSEQ COMB 0 segm execution order OUTPUT Afg1 Sequence Isequence list in indefinite length block OUTPUT Afg CHR 10 END lterminate with Line Feed LF and EOI OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ ADDR Isequence location ENTER OAfg Seq3_addr SUBEND SUB Rst Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 COM Cmd Afg Afg1 Base_addr Seq1_addr Seq2_addr Seq3_addr OUTPUT Afg RST CLS OPC lreset the AFG ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Wf_del Wf_del Subprogram which deletes all sequences and segments COM Cmd Afg Afg1 Base_addr Seq1_addr Seq2_addr Seq3_addr OUTPUT Afg FUNC USER NONE Iselect no sequences OUTPUT Afg
37. o o o e e 124 BASIC Program Example LIST1 o o 125 Sweeping Using Start and Span Frequencies o e 127 BASIC Program Example SMPLSWP2 oo 128 Frequency Lists Using Definite and Indefinite Length Arbitrary Blocks 130 BASIC Program Example LISTDEB 131 Logarithmic Sweeping ee 133 BASIC Program Example LOG_SWP o 133 Sweep Points Versus Time eee eee 135 BASIC Program Example SWP_PVST o o 136 Frequency Lists Versus Time 2 2 oo a 138 BASIC Program Example LISTZTMB 139 Sweeping Arbitrary Waveforms 0 0000 eee eee eee 141 BASIC Program Example SWP_ARB o 141 AC Output Leveling ee ee 144 BASIC Program Example SWP_LEVL 145 Frequency Shift Keying 2 e 147 FSK Using the FSK Control Source o o e 147 BASIC Program Example ESK1 o o 148 FSK Using the TTLTrg lt m gt Control Source o oo o 150 BASIC Program Example FSK2 o o 150 FSK Using an Arbitrary Waveform o o a 152 BASIC Program Example FSK_ARB o e 152 Sweeping and FSK Program Comments o a 154 Reference Oscillator Sources o o ooo 154 Sample S
38. 420 Command Reference Chapter 8 OPC OPC causes the Agilent E1445A to wait for all pending operations to complete A single ASCII 1 is then placed in the output queue If STATus OPC INITiate OFF is set the ASCII 1 will be placed in the output queue when all commands received prior to the OPC have been executed If ON is set OPC waits for waveform generation to complete before placing the 1 in the output queue No other commands will be executed until the 1 is placed in the output queue Comments Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands OPC WAI e RST Condition None PMC PMC purges all macro definitions Comments Use the RMC command to purge an single macro definition e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands DMC RMC e RST Condition None Chapter 8 Command Reference 421 PUD and PUD PUD lt data gt stores the specified data in the Agilent E1445A s non volatile calibration memory The data must be sent in IEEE 488 2 definite or indefinite block format Calibration security must have been previously disabled PUD returns the current protected user data in IEEE 488 2 definite block format The query form may be executed regardless of the state of calibration security Note When shipped from the factory the protected user data area contains information regarding when the Agilent E1445A was last
39. Afg ISet up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 ICall the subprograms CALL Rst CALL Dc_volts WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB Dc_volts Dc_volts Isubprogram which outputs a dc voltage COM Atg OUTPUT EAfg SOUR FUNC SHAP DC Ifunction OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5V amplitude Continued on Next Page 56 Generating Standard Waveforms Chapter 2 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 SUBEND SUB Rst Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 COM Afg OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Errmsg Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors COM Afg DIM Message 256 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform REPEAT OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue ENTER Afg Code Message PRINT Code Message UNTIL Code 0 STOP SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program DCVOLTS FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program DCVOLTS C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A Ch
40. Amplitude Characteristics Low Pass Filtering Programmable choice of three configurations 250 kHz nominal 3 dB point 5th order Bessel 10 MHz nominal 3 dB point 7th order Bessel No Filter Output Impedance 50 Q or 75 Q programmable nominal Output Disconnect Uses a relay Output is unterminated when relay is open DAC Resolution 13 bits 12 bits sine waves only including sign monotonic to 11 bits DC Volt Function Output into 50 Q or 75 Q 5 12 to 5 11875 volts in nominal steps of 1 25 mv into open circuit 10 24 to 10 2375 volts in nominal steps of 2 5 mv Accuracy Temperature within 5 C of temperature at calibration Tcal module calibrated at 18 28 C output impedance 50 Q or 75 Q load 50 Q or 75 Q respectively or INF 0 3 of setting 0 2 of full scale add for each C beyond 5 from Tcal 0 05 of setting 0 015 of full scale All Built In Waveforms Output Level into 50 Q or 75 Q 0 32374 to 10 2375 Vpp into open circuit 0 64748 to 20 475 Vpp Output level adjustability is equivalent to 0 30 dB of attenuation in steps of 0 01 dB Sine Waves AC Accuracy 1 kHz maximum output 0 1 dB add beyond Tcal 5 C 0 005dB C Add if output is not at maximum 0 05 dB Add if frequency is not 1 kHz flatness error relative to 1 kHz specified for 50 Q or 75 Q only 250 kHz filter 0 1 Hz to 100 kHz 0 05 dB 100 kHz to 250 kHz 0 10 dB 10 MHz filte
41. Compute waveform damped sine wave and define segment COM Afg DIM Waveform 1 4096 A 4 4096 W 2 P1 50 FOR T 1 TO 4096 Waveform T EXP A T SIN W T NEXT T OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL SIN_D select segment to be defined OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 4096 Iset segment size OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT Waveform load waveform points OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL SIN_D_OUT Define sequence name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Define sequence size OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ SIN_D Set segment execution order SUBEND Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 107 Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program SIN_D FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program SIN_D C is in directory Versions VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A Ge nerating an The CHARGE program generates an Exponential Charge Discharge Expo nential waveform with 4096 segments or points Charge Discharge Waveform 5 V DIV Output applied to a 509 load value 2 msec DIV BASIC Program Example CHARGE This program is similar to the SIN_X BASIC program on page 105 with the following differences a IRE STORE CHARGE 2 This program generates an exponential charge discharge waveform 3 las an arbitrary waveform 180 Call the subprogram which defines the exponential charge 190 discharge waveform and output sequence 200 CA
42. DPORt The front panel Dig Port connector LBUS The VXI Local Bus VXI The VXI Backplane 4 Enable Phase Modulation SOURce PM STATe lt mode gt This command turns phase modulation on or off A 1 one or ON turns it on and a 0 zero or OFF turns it off Chapter 2 Generating Standard Waveforms 75 5 Select the Function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SiNusoid This command selects the sinusoid function Although RST automatically selects this function it is selected here for good programming practice 6 Set the Amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt This command specifies the amplitude Refer to the section called Setting the Amplitude Levels and Output Units on page 72 for more information 7 Set the Phase Modulation Deviation SOURce PM DEViation lt phase gt This command sets the deviation angle The angle can either be in radians or degrees The values can be from 3 14159265 to 3 14159265 radians II to IT or 180 to 180 See Selecting the Deviation Units for Phase Modulation on page 80 to select the different units 8 Initiate the Waveform INITiate IMMediate This command generates an immediate output with the arm source set to IMMediate Refer to Chapter 5 for triggering information BASIC Program Example PHS_MOD 180 IRE STORE PHS_MOD The following program shifts the phase of the output sine wave from O deg
43. Direct Digital Synthesis DDS 0 01 Sa s 10 73741824 MSa s 0 01 Sa s 0 03 3 nsec typical rms 0 02 Sa s 21 47483648 MSa s 0 02 Sa s 0 06 3 nsec typical rms SOURce JROSCillator SOURce INTernal1 SOURce FREQuency1 subsystem TRIGger STARt SOURce INTernal1 Sweep linear or log output frequencies from a list frequency shift keying FSK phase offset Use for most applications 454 Agilent E1445A Specifications Appendix A Frequency Generator 2 Internal Reference 40 000000 MHz Rate Generation Method Divide by N or direct use of reference Range Minimum 305 175781 Sa s 40 131072 MSa s Maximum 40 000000 MSa s Resolution Not Applicable Attainable rates are 40 N MSa s where N 1 2 3 and all even values up to 131072 Jitter 80 psec typical rms Pertinent SCPI commands SOURce ROSCillator SOURce INTernal2 SOURce FREQuency2 subsystem TRIGger STARt SOURce INTernal2 Frequency Agility No Recommendation Use if 40 MSa s is required or for lowest jitter at other sample rates Built In Waveforms using 42 94967296 MHz internal reference oscillator in each case the frequency resolution equals the minimum frequency Sine Waves 0 01 Hz to 10 73741824 MHz Square Waves 0 0025 Hz to 2 68435456 MHz normal range Average Duty cycle is 49 9 to 50 1 3 nsec 0 005 Hz to 5 36870912 MHz doubled range Average Duty cycle is 44 to 56 3 nsec Using frequency generator 1 squar
44. FUNCtion USER lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SOURce LIST 1 FORMat DATA lt format gt lt length gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent ADDRess SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent CATalog SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined lt combined list gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined POINts SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine lt length gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete ALL SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete SELected SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent FREE 410 Command Reference Chapter 8 Table 8 1 Agilent E1445A SCPI Commands continued Subsystem Commands SOURce LIST 1 SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer lt marker_list gt Cont d SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer POINts SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer SPOint lt point gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage lt voltage_list gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage DAC lt voltage_list gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage POINts SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence ADDRess SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence CATalog SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence COMBined lt combined_list gt SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence COMBined POINts SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DEFine lt ength gt SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete ALL SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete SELected SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt lt repetition list gt SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt POINts SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence FREE SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer
45. For example to send a waveform segment consisting of 1000 DAC codes 1000 points the actual number of digits and 8 bit data bytes equals 1000 2 2000 Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 231 BASIC Program Example DACBLOK1 The DACBLOK1 program shows how to store a waveform segment Le points of an arbitrary waveform into the AFG s segment memory The waveform segment is stored as DAC codes in the Signed number format This program is the same program as SIGN_DAT beginning on page 227 except the data is transferred to the AFG using the Definite Length Arbitrary Block method The example generates a 200 point 5 V to 5 V positive going ramp To transfer Definite Length Block Data to the AFG requires that the data sent with the SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage DAC command must be contiguous To do this sent no carriage return CR and line feed LF before all the data is transferred The format in line 440 disables the CR and LF The CR and LF sent in line 460 tells the AFG that the data transfer is complete 1 IRE STORE DACBLOK1 2 This program downloads arbitrary waveform data as signed 3 2 s complement DAC codes The data is sent in an IEEE 488 2 4 Idefinite length block in 16 bit integer format The waveform is 5 la 200 point 5V to 5V ramp wave 6 10 Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 ASSIGN Afg1 TO 70910 FORMAT OFF Ipath for binary data 40 COM
46. GATE SOURce lt source gt Set the gating signal polarity TRIGger STARt GATE POLarity lt polarity gt Enable trigger gating TRIGger STARt GATE STATe lt mode gt Set the output frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FlXed lt frequency gt Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe lt shape gt Set the number of waveform points SOURce RAMP POINts lt number gt Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt Place the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate MMediate Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 183 BASIC Program Example GATE 1 IRE STORE GATE 2 The following program gates the output of a 40 point triangle 3 Iwave whose frequency is 1 MHz When the signal on the Gate In BNC 4 lis high the gate is active and the output is suspended at the last 5 lamplitude point triggered When the signal is low the gate is inactive 6 land the waveform resumes 7 10 Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM Afg 40 50 ISet up error checking 60 ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg 70 ENABLE INTR 7 2 80 OUTPUT Afg CLS 90 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 100 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 110 120 ICall the subprograms 130 CALL Rst 140 CALL Tri_wave 150 160 WAIT 1 lallow interrupt to be serviced 170 OFF INTR 7 180 END 190 200 SUB Tri_wave 210 Tri_wave Subprogram which outputs a triangle wave 220 COM Af
47. ICES 001 1998 Australia New Zealand AS NZS 2064 1 The product was tested in a typical configuration with Agilent Technologies test systems Safety IEC 61010 1 1990 A1 1992 A2 1995 EN 61010 1 1993 A2 1995 Canada CSA C22 2 No 1010 1 1992 UL 3111 1 1994 1 June 2001 Date Ray Corson Product Regulations Program Manager For further information please contact your local Agilent Technologies sales office agent or distributor Authorized EU representative Agilent Technologies Deutschland GmbH Herrenberger Stra e 130 D 71034 B blingen Germany Agilent E1445A Arbitrary Function Generator User s Manual 15 Notes 16 Agilent E1445A Arbitrary Function Generator User s Manual Notes Agilent E1445A Arbitrary Function Generator User s Manual 17 Notes 18 Agilent E1445A Arbitrary Function Generator User s Manual Chapter 1 Getting Started Chapter Contents This chapter shows you how to configure install and begin using the Agilent E1445A Arbitrary Function Generator AFG The main sections of this chapter include e Preparation for Use 2 0 0 eee eee ee eee Page 19 VXIbus Factory Settings 00 00005 Page 20 The AFG Logical Address ooooooocoocooooo o Page 21 Addressing the AFG 0 0 0 eee eee Page 22 Setting the AFG Servant Area 040 Page 23 The AFG Bus Request Level o o o oo Page 24
48. INITiate IMMediate BASIC Program Example FSK2 1 IRE STORE FSK2 2 This program shifts between 1 MHz and 2 MHz based on a control 3 Isignal supplied by the Agilent E1406 Command Module on TTLTRG 4 Itrigger line 5 10 Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 ASSIGN Cmd_mod TO 70900 40 COM Afg Cmd_mod 60 ISet up error checking 70 ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg 80 ENABLE INTR 7 2 90 OUTPUT Afg CLS 100 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 110 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 120 130 ICall the subprograms which reset the AFG set up frequency shift 140 lkeying and which set up the TTLTrg5 trigger line 150 CALL Rst 160 CALL Fsk_ttl 170 CALL Setup_ttl5 180 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 190 OFF INTR 7 Continued on Next Page 150 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 END SUB Fsk_ttl Fsk_ttl Subprogram which sets up frequency shift keying and trigger line TTLTRG 5 as the control source COM Afg Cmd_mod OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 MODE FSK IFSK mode OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FSK 1E6 2E6 IFSK frequencies OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ FSK SOUR TTLT5 IFSK source OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN5 function OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMP
49. IVAL Phase 3 2 16 IVAL Phase 5 2 16 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL A1 16 IVAL Phase 7 2 16 Generate the pulse which loads the new frequency Once the pulse is lreceived it takes 20 reference oscillator clock cycles before the Inew frequency appears at the output WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL 8D 16 0 wera ra a were a a SUBEND SUB Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 COM Afg Base_addr OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND 490 Register Based Programming Appendix C Comments e To simplify the program SCPI commands are included to select the reference oscillator the DDS subsystem and to start the waveform This requires that the only registers written to be the Phase Increment and Frequency Load Strobe Registers This program executes as intended when the SCPI commands in subprogram Output_function are executed before the registers are written to The subprogram Output_function sets the initial reference oscillator frequency to 42 94967296 MHz If a different reference oscillator frequency is used that is 40 MHz or an externally supplied oscillator specify that frequency when the Freq_change subprogram is called line 200 If frequency doubling is in effect SOUR FREQ1 RANG command in subprogram Output_function the doubled frequency can be changed to another doubled frequency by passing a number other than O as the fourth parameter to the Freq_change subprogram l
50. LIST SSEQ DEL ALL IClear sequence memory OUTPUT Afg LIST SEGM DEL ALL Clear segment memory SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program WAVSELFP FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program WAVSELFP C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 277 Dig ital Port In Figure 7 6 shows a pinout of the Digital Port In connector Connector Pinout PIN SIGNAL 1 FPDOO Co 2 FPD01 25 O 3 FPDO3 ES O k 3 6 FPDO7 A 7 GND E o O 8 FPD10 S 9 FPD11 Lo 10 FPD13 Be 11 FPD14 IS E O 5 HO a E GND Q a D i FPD02 E GND HO ae ds FPDO5 O ES 43 3 18 GND H ae 2 19 FPDO8 Ng a 20 FPD09 GND Macey gt FPD12 23 GND 24 FPD15 25 GND Figure 7 6 E1445A Digital Port In Connector 278 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 Using the Digital Figure 7 7 shows the timing relationship to select a segment sequence Port In Connector tp to Select a Sequence o E e UN Fh E td i PA m PCE e E SCC _ TTT th FPDDxx y y Figure 7 7 Digital Port In Data Timing The following explains the relationship 1 The AFG generates an FPPACE signal after the next segment sequence has been selected but before completing its output 2 The AFG is now ready for a new segment sequence Set the FPCLK line low to select a new segment sequence If the li
51. NEXT FOR l 257 TO 512 Waveform l 512 1 0195313 NEXT FOR 256 TO 266 Marker_list l 1 NEXT Load waveform points and marker list OUTPUT Afg SOUR MARK FEED SOUR LIST1 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL TRI OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 512 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT Waveform OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM MARK Marker_list SUBEND SUB Seq_list Seq_list This subprogram defines the sequence list and enables Imarker signals to be output with the triangle wave Isegment COM Afg Define marker list Imarkers at fp BNC Isegment name Isegment size lamplitude points Imarker list OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL WAVE_OUT Isequence name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 2 Inumber of segments OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ SINE TRI Isegments in sequence OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ MARK 0 1 lenable marker on segment TRI SUBEND SUB Rst Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 COM Afg OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Wf_del Continued on Next Page 210 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations Chapter 6 910 Wf_del Subprogram which deletes all sequences and segments 920 930 940 950 960 970 980 990 1000 1010 1020 1030 1040 1050 1060 1070 1080 1090 1100 1110 1120 1130 COM Afg OUTPUT Afg FUNC USER NONE Iselect no sequences OUTPUT Afg LIST SSEQ DEL ALL IClear sequence memory OUTPUT Afg LIST SEGM DEL
52. Note that line 310 is used as an end of statement should a syntax error occur among coupled commands Otherwise line 320 would serve as the end of statement and the ABORT command would be ignored by the AFG parser Note An alternative BASIC error checking program can be found in the C Size VXIbus Systems Configuration Guide Error checking routines for Visual C C language and Visual BASIC programs are found in programs ARBWAVE C and ARBWAVE FRM listed previously in this chapter BASIC Program Example ERRORCHK 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 IRE STORE ERRORCHK This program represents the method used to check for programming lerrors in BASIC programs lAssign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg Define branch to be taken when an E1445A error occurs Enable GPIB interface to generate an interrupt when an error loccurs ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 Clear all bits in the standard event status register unmask the Istandard event status group summary bit in the E1445A status byte Iregister decimal weight 32 unmask the query error device Idependent error execution error and command error bits decimal sum 60 in the E1445A standard event status register OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 ISubprogram calls would be here WAIT 1 allow error branch to occur before turning intr off OFF INTR 7 END Continued on Next
53. Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program MULSEG C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A 98 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter 3 Using Different Frequency Generators Ramp generated as an Arbitrary Waveform 2 V D Output applied to a 500 load value 2 psec DIV The AFG can use either the DDS Frequency1 Frequency Generator or the Divide by N Frequency2 Frequency Generator to generate arbitrary waveforms The DDS generator gives lower frequency response with better resolution The Divide by N generator gives higher frequency response with less resolution For best operating practice use the 42 9 MHz reference oscillator source INTernal 1 for the DDS generator use the 40 MHz reference oscillator source INTernal2 for the Divide by N generator See Arbitrary Waveform Program Comments on page 113 for more information The AFGGEN1 program shows how to use the AFG s DDS generator selected at power on to generate waveforms Use this generator for better frequency resolution and to perform frequency sweeping frequency shifting and so forth see Chapter 4 See program AFGGEN2 for a frequency2 generator example This program generates a 100 point ramp at 100 kHz The commands are 1 Reset the AFG RST The RST command aborts waveform output and sets the AFG to a defined state 2 Clea
54. SOURce ARBitrary DAC SOURce VXI This command selects the source that transfers data to the DAC see DAC Sources on page 280 Use VXT to transfer data using the VXIbus 5 Place the AFG Into Hold Until All Commands are Executed OPC This commands prevents the AFG from receiving data over the VXIbus until it executes all the previous commands If OPC is not sent the AFG will try to receive data and thus generate an error even before it completes executing the previous commands 6 Download the Waveform Segment as a Combined Signed List This step directly downloads the Combined Waveform Segment List to the DAC using the Signed number format set by the Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 269 SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat SIGNed command The downloading method used depends on the device that downloads the data For example the device may be an embedded controller or a command module The AFG output depends on the data received by the DAC and the currently selected amplitude BASIC Program Example VXISRCE 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 The program uses the V360 Controller to download the data using the VXIbus instead of transferring it directly to the AFG using GPIB IRE STORE VXISRCE This program uses the V 360 embedded controller to send waveform Idata directly to the AFG dac over the VXlbus backplane Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 16
55. STOP CENTer SPAN 2 e If any two commands are sent as part of a frequency coupled group within a single program message then these two will be set as specified and the other two will change If more than two are sent in the group the sweep will be determined by the ast two received When MINimum and MAXimum are used with these commands the values that will be set are the minimum and maximum values that will not cause any of the STARt STOP CENTer and SPAN values to go beyond the minimum and maximum possible frequencies given the coupling equations above For example if SPAN is currently set to 1 MHz FREQuency1 CENTer MINimum would set 500 kHz The minimum possible frequency is 0 Hz except in the case of logarithmic frequency sweeps For logarithmic frequency sweeps the minimum frequency is the maximum possible frequency divided by 1 073 741 824 The maximum possible frequency depends on the frequency of the currently selected reference oscillator source SOURce ROSCillator SOURce the waveform shape Chapter 8 Command Reference 319 SOURce FREQuency 1 SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe and whether or not frequency doubling is enabled SOURce FREQuency 1 RANGe according to the following rules Arbitrary Waveforms and Sine Wave Outputs the maximum possible frequency is the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 4 Square Wave Outputs the maximum possible frequency is the current reference oscill
56. SWEep SPACing lt mode gt 6 Set the number of sweeps SOURce SWEep COUNt lt number gt 7 Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe lt shape gt 8 Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel MMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt 9 Place the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate MMediate BASIC Program Example LOG_SWP 1 IRE STORE LOG_SWP 2 This program logarithmically sweeps from 1 Hz to 1 MHz in seven 3 Ipoints 4 10 Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM Afg 50 Set up error checking 60 ONINTR7 CALL Errmsg 70 ENABLE INTR 7 2 80 OUTPUT Afg CLS 90 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 100 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 Continued on Next Page Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 133 110 120 ICall the subprograms 130 CALL Rst 140 CALL Swp_pvss 150 160 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 170 OFF INTR 7 180 END 190 200 SUB Swp_pvss 210 Swp_pvss Subprogram which sets a logarithmic sweep 220 COM Afg 230 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 MODE SWE Isweep mode 240 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 STAR 15 Istart frequency 250 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 STOP 1E6 Istop frequency 260 OUTPUT Afg SOUR SWE POIN 7 Isweep points 270 OUTPUT Afg SOUR SWE SPAC LOG llogarithmic sweep 280 OUTPUT Afg SOUR SWE COUN INF Isweep count 290 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN Ifunction 300 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV
57. The arming commands for continuous waveforms are uncoupled commands They are executed relative to other AFG commands in the sequence of Figure 5 2 Frequency Coupled Commands Frequency Voltage Coupled Commands i e function Voltage Coupled Commands Arm source slope arm count and cycle count commands Initiate Figure 5 2 AFG Arming Command Sequence Note Detailed information on the commands introduced in this chapter can be found in Chapter 8 Command Reference The commands in this chapter are shown in their entirety optional headers included to help you locate them in the reference Setti ng Arming The EXT_ARM program shows how to select the source which arms the Sources AFG The program selects the AFG s Start Arm In BNC connector as the arming source When an arming signal is received a 10 kHz 1 Vpp square wave is output The steps of this program are 1 Select the FIXed frequency mode SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE lt mode gt 2 Set the output frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FlXed lt frequency gt 3 Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe lt shape gt 4 Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel MMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt 166 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 5 Set the arm source ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce lt source gt 6 Set the trigger edge of the external trigger signal ARM STARt LAYer2 SLOPe lt edge gt 7 Place the AFG i
58. Thus Lines writing a logic 1 to a trigger line sets the line to an electrically low level This would select FSK frequency2 Writing a logic 0 to a trigger line sets the line to an electrically high level which selects frequency1 Refer to your Command Module manual for more information on setting up and enabling the TTLTrg trigger lines 162 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering Chapter Contents This chapter shows you how to arm and trigger the Agilent E1445A AFG in order to start and advance standard and arbitrary waveforms The sections of this chapter include e The ARM TRIG Configurati0N o ooooooooocoocooo Page 164 The ARM TRIG States 0 00 0 00000005 Page 164 Initiating Waveforms 0 0 0 c eee ee ee eee Page 165 e Arming the AFG icc vse bpd eto hued ode Page 165 Arming Commands 0 0 0 cece eee eee eee Page 165 Setting Arming Sources 00 00 0c eee eee Page 166 Setting the Arm and Waveform Cycle Count Page 169 e Triggering the AFG eroas reee ED EEr oS eee Page 172 Triggering Commands 00 00 e eee eee Page 172 Using the Divide by N Frequency Generator Page 174 Lock Stepping Multiple AFGs 0 Page 176 Using Stop Triggers 0 0 0 00 c eee eee eee Page 180 Gating Trigger Signals 0 00 0 00 0000 008 Page
59. Unaffected e Power On Condition No waveform segments are defined Example Creating a Single Point Marker List LIST SEL ABC Selects waveform segment ABC LIST DEF 8 ABC is 8 points long LIST VOLT 1 5 5 5 5 0 5 1 Defines waveform voltages LIST MARK SPO 5 Outputs a marker pulse on the fifth voltage point SEGMent SELect SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt selects a waveform segment for subsequent SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent subsystem commands This command will define the waveform segment name if it is undefined but does not reserve any waveform segment memory Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt name gt character data 1 through 12 characters NONE none NONE selects no waveform segment Comments Legal names must start with an alphabetic character and contain only alphabetic numeric and underscore _ characters Alphabetic character case upper versus lower is ignored No waveform segment may have the same name as any segment sequence e A maximum of 256 waveform segment names may be defined at any time Use the SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete ALL or SELected commands to delete names that are no longer needed e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None RST Condition Unaffected Example Selecting a Waveform Segment LIST SEL ABC Selects waveform segment ABC 344 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce LIS
60. and PC Devices in the C size mainframe and in the servant area of the Agilent E1406A Command Module are located by an GPIB address The GPIB address is a combination of the controller s interface select code the command module s primary GPIB address and the device s secondary GPIB address An address in this form in a BASIC statement appears as OUTPUT 70910 SOUR ROSC SOUR INT1 TRIG STAR SOUR INT1 Interface Select Code 7 This code is determined by the address of the GPIB interface card in the controller In most Agilent controllers this card has a factory set address of 7 including the Agilent 82340 82341 GPIB Interface Card this card was used with an HP Vectra PC to create the Visual BASIC and Visual C C example programs Primary GPIB Address 09 This is the address of the GPIB port on the command module Valid addresses are 0 to 30 The module has a factory set address of 9 Secondary GPIB Address 10 This address is derived from the logical address of the device AFG by dividing the logical address by 8 Thus for the Agilent E1445A AFG factory set logical address of 80 the secondary address is 10 22 Getting Started Chapter 1 Using an Embedded Controller As a message based device the Agilent E1445A can easily be programmed across the VXIbus backplane from an embedded controller The select code of the VXI interface board in embedded controllers is typically 16 Since no secondary GPIB address
61. been reserved by the SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF command 1107 Segment name already defined Defining a segment and a segment by that name already exists 1108 No segment name SELected Trying to load a segment that has not been selected 478 Useful Tables Appendix B Table B 6 Agilent E1445A Error Messages continued Code Message Description 1109 Segment list length less than Waveform segment has less than four points minimum 1110 Illegal sequence name Attempting to download to a sequence that doesn t exist or selecting a sequence name that s the same as an existing segment name 1111 Too many sequence names There are gt 256 sequence names defined Use SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEL SEL to delete the current selected sequence or SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEL ALL to delete all sequences 1112 Sequence in use Trying to delete a sequence currently selected by SOUR FUNC USER 1113 Sequence contains zero lengih Segment contains no voltage or dac code data segment 1114 Sequence lists of different lengths The length of a sequence s segment list does not equal the length of its marker list and its marker list does not equal 1 1115 Sequence list has zero length Query of a marker list dwell count list or sequence segment list and no data is in the list Also occurs following INIT IMM or SOUR FUNC USER when no segments are in the sequence list 1116 Sequence name not DEFine
62. e Coupling Group None e RST Condition None e Power On Condition No segment sequence names are defined Cataloging Segment Sequence Names LIST SSEQ CAT Catalogs segment sequence names SSEQuence COMBined Parameters Comments SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence COMBined lt combined_list gt defines in one step the waveform segment marker enable and repetition count lists that constitute a segment sequence The lt combined_list gt may be either a comma separated list of values or an TEEE 488 2 definite or indefinite length block containing the values in 32 bit integer format Each value has the following format Bits 31 20 Bit 19 Bit 18 Bit 17 Bits 16 0 repetition reserved marker unused segment count enable address The repetition count is 12 bit unsigned value that is 4096 the desired repetition count a value of 4095 in these bits indicates 1 repetition a value of O indicates 4096 repetitions Marker enable is 1 to enable marker pulse generation for that waveform segment Segment address is the starting address of the segment divided by 8 Use the SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent ADDRess query to obtain the address of a waveform segment MINimum and MAXimum cannot be used with this command e Ifthe comma separated list of values format is used the values must be in two s complement format 1 e values should range from 2147483648 to 2147483647 If block format is used the most significant byte o
63. lt amplitude gt 4 Select the DAC Data Format SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat SIGNed This command selects the SIGNed or UNSigned number format 5 Set the Marker Output Source SOURce MARKer FEED SOURce LIST 1 This command selects the LIST 1 source as the source that outputs a marker pulse at the Marker Out front panel terminals see Chapter 6 for information on other sources 6 Setup the First Combined Segment List SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine lt length gt 7 Select the Download Source for the First Combined Segment List SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload lt source gt lt dest gt lt length gt This command selects the source used to download DAC data into segment memory see DAC Sources on page 280 The lt source gt parameter selects the download source lt dest gt contains the name of the waveform segment to be downloaded and lt ength gt contains the size of the waveform segment in number of points i e the same size set in SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine lt length gt Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 261 8 10 11 12 13 14 Place the AFG into Hold Until All Commands are Executed OPC This commands prevents the AFG from receiving data over the VXIbus until it executes all the previous commands If OPC is not sent the AFG will try to receive data and thus generate an error even before it completes executing the p
64. lt marker_list gt SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer POINts SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer SPOint lt point gt SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence lt segment_list gt SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence SEGMents SOURce LIST2 SOURce LIST2 FORMat DATA lt format gt lt length gt SOURce LIST2 FREQuency lt freg_list gt SOURce LIST2 FREQuency POINts Chapter 8 Command Reference 411 Table 8 1 Agilent E1445A SCPI Commands continued Subsystem Commands SOURce MARKer SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt FEED lt source gt SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt STATe lt mode gt SOURce MARKer FEED lt source gt SOURce MARKer POLarity lt polarity gt SOURce MARKer STATe lt mode gt SOURce PM SOURce PM DEViation lt phase gt SOURce PM SOURce lt source gt SOURce PM STATe lt mode gt SOURce PM UNIT ANGLe lt units gt SOURce RAMP SOURce RAMP POLarity lt polarity gt SOURce RAMP POINts lt number gt SOURce SOURce JROSCillator FREQuency EXTernal lt frequency gt ROSGillator SOURce ROSCillator SOURce lt source gt SOURce SWEep SOURce SWEep COUNt lt number gt SOURce SWEep DIRection lt direction gt SOURce SWEep POINts lt number gt SOURce SWEep SPACing lt mode gt SOURce SWEep TIME lt number gt SOURce VOLTage SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMedi
65. the ramp is transferred to the AFG as voltages Include the following header files include lt stdio h gt include lt stdlib h gt include lt string h gt include lt malloc h gt Use alloc h for Turbo C c or C c include lt sicl h gt Included with SICL define DEV_ADDR hpib7 9 10 Assign the GPIB address Functions void gen_seg void void cmd_exe char commanas int length char func_tion void rst_clr void void send_data char commands float Wave_seg int num_size void run_query void void check_error char func_tion void time_out char func_name Continued on Next Page Chapter 1 Getting Started 41 INST addr GPIB Address identifier OK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK KK IK IK IK IK IK IK IK IK IK IK IK KK KK KKK void main void Run the program if defined __BORLANDC _ amp amp defined __WIN_32 _InitEasyWin Required for Borland EasyWin program endif Enable communication path to the module addr iopen DEV_ADDR if laddr printf n tUnable to communicate with the module printf n nClose the window or press Alt F4 to exit exit 1 Set GPIB Timeout to 10 seconds if itimeout addr 10000 time_out main send timeout command rst_clr Reset the AFG gen_seg Generate segment list and output sequence run_query Query segment and segment sequence memory Close communication iclose addr Release SICL resource allo
66. 12 0 097 0 05 0 48 1 0 0 086 0 025 1 10 0 5 0 043 Amplitude 5 Vpk 250 kHz filter frequency change 10 Freqi 250 kHz Freq2 0 9 Freq1 Error in Volts Settling Time ms Error dB Error 0 256 0 01 5 12 0 433 0 25 0 39 5 0 0 424 0 10 1 22 2 0 0 172 0 05 1 84 1 0 0 086 0 025 2 60 0 5 0 043 Amplitude 5 Vpk 250 kHz filter frequency change 1 Freqi 250 kHz Freq2 0 99 Freq Error in Volts Settling Time ms Error dB Error 0 025 0 32 0 5 0 043 0 01 1 20 0 2 0 0174 FSK Control The frequency shift keying control sources are Sources EXTernal The Agilent E1445A AFG s front panel Stop Trig FSK Gate In BNC connector TTL levels TTLTrg lt n gt The VXIbus TTL trigger lines TTLTrg0 through TTLTrg7 Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 161 Both the FSK BNC connector and the TTLTrg lt n gt trigger lines use TTL compatible signal levels A high level on the BNC or trigger line selects frequencyl a low level selects frequency2 Frequency Sh ift Once the control signal to shift the frequency is received there is a delay of Delay 20 reference oscillator clock cycles before the frequency is active This delay occurs with all reference oscillator sources Driving the When driving the TTLTrg lt n gt trigger lines with the Agilent E1406A TTLTrg lt n gt Trigger Command Module note that the module uses negative true logic
67. 165 291 297 CALibration 298 305 CLS 47 416 common 416 428 quick reference 428 coupling 27 28 288 groups 27 28 467 469 DMC 416 EMC 417 EMC 417 ESE 417 ESE 417 ESR 418 FSK programming 118 119 GMC 418 IDN 419 INITiate 306 307 linking 27 288 LMC 419 LRN 48 420 marker pulses 204 342 343 354 355 362 364 OPC 420 OPC 421 OUTPut 1 308 311 PMC 421 PUD 422 PUD 422 RCL 423 RMC 423 RST 47 424 SAV 424 SCPI structure 26 SOURce 312 380 SOURce ARBitrary 313 318 512 Agilent E1445A User s Manual Index C continued Commands continued SOURce FREQuency 1 319 329 SOURce FREQuency 2 330 331 SOURce FUNCtion 332 333 SOURce LIST 1 334 357 SOURce LIST2 358 360 SOURce MARKer 361 364 SOURce PM 365 367 SOURce RAMP 368 369 SOURce ROSCillator 370 371 SOURce SWEep 372 376 SOURce VOLTage 377 380 SRE 425 SRE 425 standard waveform generation 54 55 STATus 381 388 STB 426 SYSTem 389 390 TRG 426 TRIGger 391 402 triggering 172 391 402 TST 46 426 types 284 VINStrument 403 408 WAT 427 Comment Sheet reader 17 Common Commands 416 428 CLS 47 416 DMC 416 EMC 417 EMC 417 ESE 417 ESE 417 ESR 418 format 284 GMC 418 IDN 419 linking 288 LMC 419 LRN 48 420 OPC 420 OPC 421 PMC 421 PUD 422 PUD 422 quick reference 428 RCL 423 RMC 423 RST 47
68. 183 e Arming and Triggering Frequency Sweeps and DlStS tia ets cts Page 186 Frequency Sweeps Using Triggers Page 186 Arming and Triggering a Frequency Sweep Page 190 Arming and Triggering a Frequency List Page 193 e Aborting Waveforms 00 cee eee eee eee Page 196 Using ABORt Stop Triggers or Gating Page 196 e Arming and Triggering Program Comments Page 197 Reference Oscillator Sources 0005 Page 197 AFG Frequency Synthesis Modes Page 197 AFG Frequency Modes 00 00 eee eee eee Page 198 AFG Arming Sources 0 00 0 eee eee eee Page 199 AFG Arm Count soc e eee eed es Page 199 Waveform Repetition Count 005 Page 199 Stop Trigger Sources 0 0 0 eee eee eee ree Page 199 External Stop Trigger Slope 00 Page 200 AFG Gating Sources 00 0c eee eee Page 200 AFG Gate Polarity escis eo croi ereere ea eea Page 200 Enabling the Gate 0 eee eee ee ee Page 200 Frequency Sweep List Arming 4 Page 201 Frequency Sweep List Advance Trigger Page 201 Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 163 The ARM TRIG Configuration The ARM TRIG States Each standard and arbitrary waveform is a series of discrete amplitude points digital to analog DAC codes The Agile
69. 240 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 10E3 Iburst frequency 250 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN Ifunction 260 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 2 5VPP lamplitude 270 OUTPUT Afg ARM STAR LAY2 SOUR EXT larm source 280 OUTPUT Afg ARM STAR LAY2 SLOP POS larm slope 290 OUTPUT Afg ARM STAR LAY2 COUN INF larm count 300 OUTPUT Afg ARM STAR LAY1 COUN 5 Icycle count 310 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state 320 SUBEND 330 340 SUB Rst 350 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 360 COM Afg 370 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 380 ENTER Afg Complete 390 SUBEND 400 410 SUB Errmsg Continued on Next Page 170 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 420 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 COM Afg DIM Message 256 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform REPEAT OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue ENTER Afg Code Message PRINT Code Message UNTIL Code 0 STOP SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program BURST FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program BURST C is in directory Versions VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 171 Triggering th
70. 269 e Using the Front Panel s Digital Port In Connector eaa O lan Page 272 Digital Port In Connector Pinout Page 278 Using the Digital Port In Connector to Select a Se enc css sacred Sere iia Page 279 Using the Digital Port In Connector to Download Data nin Seb See a e Page 279 e High Speed Program Comments 0 Page 280 Amplitude Effects on DAC Codes Page 280 Incorrect AFG Operation from Incorrect DAC Codes ise t te ciel e a wih ah ee a e Page 280 DAC SQUICES cimiento bee os Page 280 Download Sources 0 0 00 c eee eee eee Page 280 Determining the Size of the Combined Segment A 6 saw Mele nee e na die Sadie Page 280 Determining the Size of the Combined Segment Sequence List 0 2 0 eee eee eee eee Page 280 Data Transfer Methods and Speed Comparisons Table 7 1 shows the timing relationship of the different data transfer methods used The table lists the relative timing in descending order with the slowest method on top Table 7 1 Speed Relationships of Data Transfer Methods Approximate Method Command Time Savings Segment Voltage List SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage 0 Segment DAC Code List SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage DAC 35 Segment Combined List SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined 35 Segment DAC Codes as Block Data SOURce LIST 1
71. 3 For example for a Combined list with a size of 2048 set the bit at point number 2048 3 2045 Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 259 Combined Segment Figure 7 5 shows a single 32 bit integer used to download a Combined Sequence List Format Segment Sequence List Bits 0 through 16 select the combined waveform segments for output bit 18 enables the marker output and bits 20 through 31 sets the repetition count 32 bit combined list that defines the segment lists to be executed enables the marker enables the last point and defines the repetition count for the segment lists Last Point Bit Reserved 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 2 120k 918 7 6l15 1 4 3 1 2 iro 9 8 7 615 4 3 2 1 Jo 12 Bit Code that sets the Address of the Segment segment repetition count Marker List in Memory 17 Bits Enable Bit Figure 7 5 Combined Sequence List Format e A Combined Segment Sequence List determines the order and how often a waveform segment is to be executed Thus each waveform segment marker enable and repetition count has a unique data code e Select the combined waveform segments using their starting addresses in memory Add the address to the Combined Segment Sequence List e Set bit 18 to enable the marker output for a segment sequence Add the bit value to the Combined Segment Sequence List e Determine the repetition count using 4096 the repetition count value Add the repetition count to the Combined S
72. 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 Swp_trig IRE STORE SWP_TRIG This program triggers a sweep using the Group Execute Trigger command The sweep is from 1 kHz to 1 MHz lAssign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 80910 COM Afg ISet up error checking ON INTR 8 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 8 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 ICall the subprograms CALL Rst CALL Swp_trig WAIT 1 lallow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 8 END SUB Swp_trig ISubprogram that triggers a sweep COM Afg OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 MODE SWE OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 STAR 1E3 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 STOP 1E6 OUTPUT Afg SOUR SWE COUN INF OUTPUT Afg SOUR SWE POIN 100 OUTPUT Afg SOUR SWE TIME 13 OUTPUT Afg ARM SWE SOUR LINK OUTPUT Afg ARM STAR LAY1 COUN 65536 OUTPUT Afg ARM STAR LAY2 COUN INF OUTPUT Afg ARM STAR LAY2 SOUR BUS OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 V OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM CALL Step SUBEND SUB Step Step Subprogram which starts sweep COM Afg DISP Press Continue when ready to start a sweep PAUSE TRIGGER Afg Continued on Next Page Sweep mode Istart frequency Istop frequency Irepetition count frequency points Isweep time Itrigger mode Iwaveform repetitions Iwaveform starts Itrigger source function lamplitu
73. 4 BASIC Program Example LIST_TME 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 IRE STORE LIST_TME The following program steps through a frequency list at a rate Isuch that a new frequency is output every 1 second Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg Set up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 ICall the subprograms CALL Rst CALL List_time WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB List_time List_count Subprogram which continuously outputs a frequency list lin which the frequencies are 1s apart COM Afg OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 MODE LIST list mode OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST2 FREQ 2 5E3 5E3 7 5E3 10E3 freq list OUTPUT Afg SOUR SWE COUN INF Ihop through list continuously OUTPUT Afg TRIG SWE SOUR TIM llist advance source OUTPUT Afg SOUR SWE TIME 3 Itime through list OUTPUT EAfg SOUR FUNC SHAP TRI Ifunction OUTPUT Afg SOUR RAMP POIN 1E3 11000 point waveform OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 V lamplitude OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state SUBEND SUB Rst Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 COM Afg OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Errmsg Errmsg Subprogram which displays
74. 418 GMOT hose be a eed a ER Hace a eg Baa Pek Geeta a 418 A ty ead aed ce death lh eee eS de Ee RE BAe 419 PEM G2 isco ices silane OA ae te ea et eh tee Se Sh A 419 HERNIA Pot ee eh es etek Bee 420 OPO hc Gal eon a BA LOA ae ek See Gh ed ee eh A a a aa 420 OPC aa BOs Ede ad Be Pal OE A eS Ee PAS Bake 421 PMC a oa eh te ae ape Be eo eee eG Ae Deck ee oe 421 PUD and PUD cere heh Bde Bh oe th doe nba Sk Bed Gi a de fe ooo Bete 422 O 4c tae a E De a Cha a oe A Awe ek SR de eee S 423 ERMC rd Ge Deed We Boke ED ed We de eae we ce 423 SRST A Pi ah eee eA SR eee Oo Ae Ala ee had ar eke A 424 Agilent E1445A User s Manual Contents 9 Chapter 8 Command Reference continued SAV idas amp Woe tee td o ced A ada pi 424 SRE and SRE eoo seat a bd y lo atte bed hae aa Bee 425 STB LAA RAS A Rete ta 426 A A E AN 426 LES TI AS AA ye A te ES ae De a ed 426 O separ daca aie eth Seg 427 Common Commands Quick Reference 0 000000 2s 428 Chapter 9 AFG Status 0000 a ee ee eee 429 InitroduchOn ds a eae ee Se Se Pe ee 429 Stattis Sy ste RESIStETS cora ip wakes ers rere Gee eo aes of ee Gee 429 The Questionable Signal Status GTOUP o o o 000000005 431 BASIC Program Example QSSG_RQS 0 o o o ooo o 433 The Operation Status Group o 435 BASIC Program Example OSG_RQS o o o o o e 437 The Standard Event Status Group o e 439 BASIC Program Examp
75. 420 COM Afg 430 DIM Message 256 440 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 450 B SPOLL Afg 460 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 470 OUTPUT Afg 480 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 490 REPEAT 500 OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 510 ENTER Afg Code Message 520 PRINT Code Message 530 UNTIL Code 0 540 STOP 550 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program EXT_ARM FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program EXT_ARM C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A 168 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 Setting the Arm The BURST program shows you how to set the number of arms the AFG is and Waveform toreceive before returning to the Idle state and how to set the number of Cy cle Count waveform cycles repetitions per arm The program sets a five cycle burst that occurs each time an external arm is received Square Wave Source E1445A Oscilloscope ey O AFG Output CH A 1 V DIV 5V 1KHz a Square Wave Arm Source CH B 2 V DIV Output applied to a 500 load value 2 msec DIV Channel Channel A The steps of this program are 1 Set the output burst frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FlXed lt frequency gt 2
76. 424 SAV 424 Common Commands continued SRE 425 SRE 425 STB 426 TRG 426 TST 46 426 WAL 427 Condition Register operation status group 435 query bits 383 386 questionable signal status group 431 reading 431 435 Configuration ARM TRIG 164 VXIbus local bus testing 405 Conformity declaration 15 Connector digital port in 272 279 downloading 279 pinout 278 selecting a sequence 279 specifications 460 marker out BNC 204 342 363 364 ref sample in BNC 395 398 start arm in BNC 293 stop trig FSK gate in BNC 393 Count arming 199 292 frequency list repetitions 156 sweeps 156 295 372 waveform repetition 199 291 segment sequence outputs 352 353 Coupled Commands coupling 27 288 groups 288 467 469 executing 28 288 frequencyl generator 319 Cycles arming setting 169 171 stopping 397 398 waveform setting 169 171 D DAC data source selecting 315 downloading data directly into 269 271 506 508 loading from VXIbus 506 508 output description 447 sources 280 Agilent E1445A User s Manual Index 513 D continued DAC Codes amplitude effects on 280 incorrect 280 output voltage points 346 sending segment data with 114 specifying format 313 314 transferring in signed number format 225 240 in unsigned number format 229 245 DACBLOK1 Example Program 232 234 DACBLOK2 Example Program 236 238 Damped Sine Waves generating 107 108 Data arbitrary block 156 15
77. 500 load value 2 msec DIV BASIC Program Example SPIKES a 180 190 200 210 220 230 290 This program is similar to the SIN_X BASIC program on page 105 with the following differences IRE STORE SPIKES This program generates a spiked sine wave as an arbitrary waveform ICall the subprogram which defines a sine wave with a spike and Ithe output sequence CALL Spike_def ISelect the output sequence and start the waveform OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER SPIKES OUT OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM SUB Spike_def Continued on Next Page Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 109 300 Spike_def Compute waveform sine wave with spike and define segment 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 COM Afg DIM Waveform 1 4096 FOR l 1 TO 4096 Waveform SIN 2 PI I 4096 NEXT Width 50 FOR J 1 TO Width 2 Waveform J 1024 Waveform J 1024 J 04 NEXT J FOR J 1 TO Width 2 Waveform J 1024 Width 2 Waveform J 1024 Width 2 1 J 04 NEXT J OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL SPIKES select segment to be defined OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 4096 reserve memory for segment OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT Waveform load waveform points OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL SPIKES_OUT Define sequence name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Define sequence size OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ SPIKES D
78. AFG Installation in a Mainframe Page 25 e Instrument Language SCPD 00 0000 Page 26 SCPI Programming 0 00 0c eee eee eee Page 26 Command Coupling 0 0 eee eee eee Page 27 e Program Languages 0 0 e eee eee eee eee Page 29 BASIC Language Programs 005 Page 29 Visual BASIC Language Programs Page 32 Visual C C Language Programs Page 40 e Introductory Programs 2 0 ce eee eee eee Page 46 ARG SHE i caine a Page 46 Resetting and Clearing the AFG Page 47 Querying the Power On Reset Configuration Page 48 Checking for Errors 0 0 0 cece eee eee Page 49 Generating Sine Waves 2 0 00s eee eee ee Page 51 Preparation for Use This section contains the E1445A AFG VXIbus information required to configure the device and install it in the Agilent 75000 Series C mainframe Note The following VXIbus configuration information pertains to the E1445A Arbitrary Function Generator For more V XIbus system configuration information refer to the C Size VXIbus Systems Configuration Guide Chapter 1 Getting Started 19 VXlbus Factory The Agilent E1445A AFG shown in Figure 1 1 is configured at the factory Settings as shown in Table 1 1 a T 1 CO LA ARB FUNCT GEN Failed Access HA
79. ALL OUTPUT Afg LIST SEGM DEL ALL SUBEND SUB Errmsg Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors COM Afg Seg_mem Seq_mem DIM Message 256 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg OUTPUT Afg ABORT REPEAT OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR ENTER Afg Code Message PRINT Code Message UNTIL Code 0 STOP SUBEND Iselect no sequences IClear sequence memory IClear segment memory labort output waveform Iread AFG error queue Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program ARBWAVE FRM is in directory Visual C C Program Versions VBPROG and the Visual C example program ARBWAVE C is in directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A 92 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter 3 Executing Several Waveform Segments Sinewaves and Ramp generated as Arbitrary Waveforms 2 V DIWV Output applied to a 50 load value 5 msec DIV The MULSEG program shows how to generate an arbitrary waveform using two different waveform segments One waveform segment generates a 1 kHz 5 V sine wave repeated twice The other one generates a 1 kHz 5 Vpeak triangle repeated once The commands are 1 Reset the AFG RST The RST command aborts waveform output and sets the AFG to a defined state 2 Clear t
80. Afg SOUR FREQ1 STAR 1E3 Istart frequency 270 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 SPAN 20E3 frequency span 280 OUTPUT Afg SOUR SWE COUN INF Isweep count 290 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN Ifunction 300 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 V lamplitude 310 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state 320 SUBEND 330 340 SUB Rst 350 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 360 COM Afg 370 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC Ireset the AFG 380 ENTER Afg Complete 390 SUBEND 400 410 SUB Query 420 Query Subprogram which queries sweep parameters 430 COM Afg 440 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR FREQ1 CENT Continued on Next Page 128 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 450 ENTER Afg Center 460 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR FREQ1 SPAN 470 ENTER Afg Span 480 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR FREQ1 STAR 490 ENTER Afg Start 500 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR FREQ1 STOP 510 ENTER Afg Stop 520 DISP START Start STOP Stop CENTER Center SPAN Span 530 SUBEND 540 550 SUB Errmsg 560 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 570 COM Afg 580 DIM Message 256 590 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 600 B SPOLL Afg 610 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 620 OUTPUT Afg 630 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 640 REPEAT 650 OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR lread AFG error queue 660 ENTER Afg Code Message 670 PRINT Code Message 680 UNTIL Code 0 690 S
81. COM Cmd Afg Afg1 Base_addr Seq1_addr Seq2_addr Seq3_addr 80 90 ISubprograms which reset the AFG and erase all existing waveforms 100 CALL Rst 110 CALL Wf_del 120 130 ISCPI commands which configure the AFG 140 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 4 096E6 Sample rate 150 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER lfunction 160 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 2 1V lamplitude 170 OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC SOUR INT Idac data source 180 OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC FORM SIGN Idac data format 190 Continued on Next Page 272 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 ISubprograms which define waveforms and load them into segment land sequence memory which determine the AFG s register locations lin A24 and which configure the AFG s sequence base memory CALL Waveform_def CALL A24_offset Laddr CALL Build_ram ISelect an output sequence and initiate start waveform output OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER SEQ1 Iwaveform sequence OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state Wait for AFG to start output OUTPUT Afg STAT OPC INIT OFF OPC ENTER Afg A Enable FP DPORT to control sequence selection OUTPUT ECmd DIAG PEEK Base_addr 8 16 ENTER Cmd Traffic Traffic BINIOR BIN
82. ChkName Chr 10 Chr 10 ShowTimeMsg ShowTimeMsg Press Chr 34 OK Chr 34 to exit MsgBox ShowTimeMsg 64 Verif TimeOut Close communication with instrument Call iclose Adar Clean up sicl Call siclcleanup End program End End Sub Chapter 1 Getting Started 39 Visual C C Language Programs Using Agilent SICL System Configuration What s Needed to Compile the Programs Note How to Run a Program These example programs are written in the Visual C C language for the Agilent 82340 82341 GPIB Interface Cards using the Agilent Standard Instrument Control Library SICL The following identifies the system on which the programs are written shows how to compile the programs and gives a typical example program The Visual C C programs were developed on the following system Controller HP Vectra PC GPIB Interface Card Agilent 82341 GPIB Interface with Agilent SICL Required Libraries See What s Needed to Compile the Programs below Mainframe Agilent 75000 Series C Slot 0 Resource Manager Agilent E1406A Command Module Agilent E1445A Logical 80 Address Instrument Language SCPI You need the following libraries and header files These are supplied with Agilent SICL msapp16 lib for Microsoft Visual C and C bceapp16 lib Borland C and C sicl16 lib sicl h The programs must be compiled in the Large Memory Model To run a program f
83. Condition None e Power On Condition All of the waveform segment memory is available Example Querying Waveform Segment Memory Usage LIST FREE Queries segment memory usage Chapter 8 Command Reference 341 SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer Parameters Comments SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer lt marker_list gt defines for each voltage point of a waveform segment whether the Agilent E1445A may output a marker pulse To actually output a marker pulse the marker enable list value for the segment sequence entry for the segment must also be set to 1 SOURce MARKer FEED must be set to SOURce LIST to output the marker pulse on the Marker Out BNC SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt FEED must be set to SOURce LIST to output the marker pulse on the corresponding V XIbus ECLTRG line The lt marker_list gt may be either a comma separated list of values or an IEEE 488 2 definite or indefinite length block containing the values in 16 bit integer format A value of 0 generates no marker pulse any non zero value enables marker pulse generation MINimum and MAXimum cannot be used with this command e If block format is used the most significant byte of each value must be sent first e Marker pulses are one sample period wide nominally 25 nS at 40 MHz clock rate To widen the pulses enable marker pulse generation on consecutive points e Usually marker pulse generation is enabled on no more than one point o
84. DEFine If the combined list length is less than the reserved length only the number of points specified by the combined list is generated when outputting the waveform segment e Executing the query form of this command with voltage point and marker pulse lists defined with different lengths generates Error 221 Settings conflict unless the marker pulse list has a length of 1 e Using combined lists is faster than separately defining the voltage point and marker pulse lists e Executable when Initiated No e Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage DAC e RST Condition Unaffected e Power On Condition No waveform segments are defined Chapter 8 Command Reference 337 SOURce LIST 1 Example Defining a Waveform Segment Combined List LIST SEL ABC Selects waveform segment ABC LIST DEF 8 ABC is 8 points long LIST COMB 16000 32000 16000 0 16000 32000 16000 0 Defines waveform segment SEGMent COMBined POINts SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined POINts returns a number indicating the length of the currently selected waveform segment s combined voltage point and marker pulse list Comments Executing this command with voltage point and marker pulse lists defined with different lengths generates Error 221 Settings conflict unless the marker pulse list has a length of 1 In this case the length of
85. DIRection lt direction gt POINts lt number gt SPACing lt mode gt TIME lt time gt SWEep COUNt SOURce SWEep COUNt lt number gt specifies the number of sweeps or repetitions of a frequency list the Agilent E1445A will perform after an INITiate IMMediate command before the sweep subsystem returns to the idle state This command is equivalent to the ARM SWEep COUNt command either command may be used and executing either one changes the value of the other Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt number gt numeric 1 through 2147483647 9 9E 37 none INFinity MINimum selects 1 sweep MAXimum selects 2147483647 sweeps 9 9E 37 is equivalent to INFinity Comments Executable when Initiated Query form only e Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands NITiate IMMediate 372 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce SWEep e RST Condition SOURce SWEep COUNt 1 Example Setting the Sweep Count SWE COUN 10 Sets 10 sweeps per INITiate DIRection SOURce SWEep DIRection lt direction gt selects the direction of the frequency sweep Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt direction gt discrete DOWN UP none Comments The available directions are DOWN The sweep starts at the stop frequency specified by SOURce FREQuency 1 STARt and STOP or CENTer and SPAN and ends at the start frequency
86. Define the Waveform Segments Repetition Count SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt lt repetition_list gt This command sets how many times each waveform segment is to be executed See Sending Segment Sequences on page 114 for more information Select the User Name SOURce FUNCtion USER lt name gt This command sets the AFG to output the selected segment sequence The lt name gt in this command the same name as the stored segment sequence to be executed Initiate the Waveform INITiate IMMediate This command generates an immediate output with the arm source set to IMMediate Refer to Chapter 5 for triggering information Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 95 BASIC Program Example MULSEG 1 IRE STORE MULSEG 2 This program outputs an arbitrary waveform that is comprised of 3 two waveform segments 4 10 Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM Afg 50 Set up error checking 60 ONINTR7 CALL Errmsg 70 ENABLE INTR 7 2 80 OUTPUT Afg CLS 90 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 100 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 120 Call the subprograms which reset the AFG and clear segment 130 land sequence memory 140 CALL Rst 150 CALL Wf_del 160 ISet the signal frequency the function and the amplitude 170 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 2 048E6 180 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER 190 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 1V 200 Call the subprograms which define th
87. E1445 programming errors COM Afg Continued on Next Page Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 139 450 DIM Message 256 460 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 470 B SPOLL Afg 480 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 490 OUTPUT Afg 500 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 510 REPEAT 520 OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR lread AFG error queue 530 ENTER Afg Code Message 540 PRINT Code Message 550 UNTIL Code 0 560 STOP 570 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program LIST_TME FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program LIST_TME C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A 140 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 Sweeping Arbitra ry When sweeping arbitrary waveforms the start and stop frequencies Waveforms _ specified are start and stop sample rates The corresponding output frequency is the sample rate divided by the number of points in the waveform The following programs demonstrate how to sweep arbitrary waveforms by specifying starting and stopping sample rates Sweeping Sin x x and The SWP_ARB program computes a 4096 point 81 2 cycle Pseudo Random Noise phase continuous Sin x x waveform with a peak amplitude of 1V Signals and a 4096 point pseudo random noise signal By sweeping the Sin x x signal the different frequencies o
88. ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 Call the subprograms which reset the AFG and delete all existing Iwaveform segments and sequences CALL Rst CALL Wf_del ISet up the AFG OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 1E6 frequency Continued on Next Page Chapter 6 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations 215 190 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER 200 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 1V 210 OUTPUT Afg SOUR MARK FEED TRIG STAR 220 OUTPUT Afg SOUR MARK POL NORM 230 OUTPUT Afg SOUR MARK STAT ON 240 250 CALL Ramp_wave 260 270 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER RAMP_OUT 280 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM 290 300 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 310 OFF INTR 7 320 END 330 340 SUB Ramp_wave function lamplitude Imarker source Imarker polarity lenable marker Iwaveform sequence Iwait for arm state 350 Ramp_wave Subprogram which computes a ramp wave and sets the 351 loutput sequence 360 COM Afg 370 DIM Waveform 1 10 ICalculate ramp wave 380 FOR l 1 TO 10 390 Waveform l 1 5 400 NEXT 410 420 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL RAMP Isegment name 430 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 10 Isegment size 440 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT Waveform lamplitude points 450 460 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL RAMP_OUT Isequence name 470 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Inumber of segments 480 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ
89. Enables marker output on segments A and E 354 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer POINts 2 Comments Example SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer POINts returns a number indicating the length of the currently selected segment sequence s marker pulse list Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None RST Condition None Power On Condition No segment sequences are defined Query Marker Pulse List Length LIST SSEQ SEL ABC Selects segment sequence ABC LIST SSEQ MARK POIN Queries marker pulse list length SSEQuence MARKer SPOIint Parameters Comments Example SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer SPOint lt point gt is a short cut method for defining a marker list with marker pulse generation enabled on a single waveform segment It creates a marker list whose length is the same as the current waveform segment list and which enables marker pulse generation only on the segment specified The waveform segment list must have been previously defined Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt point gt numeric see below MINimum MAXimum none The valid range for lt point gt is 1 through the length of the current waveform segment list MINimum selects the first segment of the current waveform segment list MAXimum selects the last segment e Executable when Initiated No e Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce LIST 1
90. Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors COM Afg DIM Message 256 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg OUTPUT Afg ABORT REPEAT OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR Continued on Next Page labort output waveform lread AFG error queue Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 153 770 ENTER Afg Code Message 780 PRINT Code Message 790 UNTIL Code 0 800 STOP 810 SUBEND Visual BASIC and Visual C C Program Versions The Visual BASIC example program FSK_ARB FRM is in directory VBPROG and the Visual C example program FSK_ARB C is in directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A Sweeping and FSK Program Comments Reference Oscillator Sources Sample Sources The following information is associated with sweeping frequency lists and frequency shift keying Included are details on the operation of these functions and on the various modes ranges etc used in the programs in this chapter There are five reference oscillator sources for the AFG which are selected by the SOURce ROSCillator SOURce command CLK10 The VXIbus CLK10 10 MHz line EXTernal The AFG s front panel Ref Smpl In BNC ECLTrg0 or 1 The VXIbus ECL trigger lines INTernal 1 The internal 42 94967296 MHz oscillator INTernal2 The internal 40 MHz oscillator
91. Marker Points of a Waveform Segment 222 Determining the Number of Marker Points of a Segment Sequence 222 Chapter 7 High Speed Operation o e e 223 Chapt r Contents ecs at la a ds 223 Data Transfer Methods and Speed Comparisons o o e 224 Using Signed Data to Generate Waveforms o o o e 225 Using the Signed Number Format o e 225 BASIC Program Example SIGN_DAT o o o ooo 227 Using Unsigned Data to Generate Waveforms o o o 229 Using the Unsigned Number Format o o a 229 BASIC Program Example UNS_DAD o o o ooo 230 Using Definite Length Arbitrary Blocks to Transfer Data 231 Definite Length Block Data Format o o o e o 231 Data Byte iSIZS st bet Ae ee Pe A A hoe 231 BASIC Program Example DACBLOKT o o 232 Using Indefinite Length Arbitrary Blocks to Transfer Data 235 Indefinite Length Block Data Format o o 0000000 235 Data BytEiSIZS et re GE EM BR eee Se ee eG 235 BASIC Program Example DACBLOK2 0 236 Using Combined Signed Data ooo 239 Combined Segment List Format oo e 239 Using the Combined List with the Signed Number Format 240 BASIC Program Example COMBSIGN o o o o o 242 Using Combined Unsigned Dat
92. OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 4096 Isegment size OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SEGM COMB 0 waveform points OUTPUT OAfg1 Waveform lindefinite length block OUTPUT Afg CHR 10 END lterminate with line feed LF and EOI OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM ADDR ENTER Afg Addr_seg1 Addr_seg1 Addr_seg1 8 8 to set starting address boundary of segment ISequence 1 is the repetition count and marker enable for Isegment SIN_X Sequence 2 is the starting address of segment SIN_X Continued on Next Page 274 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 1200 1210 1220 1230 1240 1250 1260 1270 1280 1290 1300 1310 1320 1330 1340 1350 1360 1370 1380 1390 1400 1410 1420 1430 1440 1450 1460 1470 1480 1490 1500 1510 1520 1530 1540 1550 1560 1570 1580 1590 1600 1610 1620 1630 1640 1650 1660 1670 1680 1690 Sequence 1 SHIFT 4096 1 4 Addr_seg1 DIV 65536 Sequence 2 Addr_seg1 MOD 65536 65536 Addr_seg1 MOD 65536 32767 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL SEQ1 sequence name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Isequence size OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SSEQ COMB 0 Isegment execution order OUTPUT Afg1 Sequence Isequence list in indefinite length block OUTPUT Afg CHR 10 END lterminate with Line Feed LF and EOI OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ ADDR sequence location ENTER Afg Seq1_addr SUBEND SUB Sind_def Sind_def Compute the damped sine waveform Download the
93. RANG 10E6 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 10E6 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 1V Iset amplitude to 5 1V ICall subprogram which defines waveform segment and sequence CALL Ramp_wave Select output sequence and initiate waveform OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER RAMP_OUT OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB Ramp_wave Ramp_wave Subprogram which defines a ramp waveform COM Afg DIM Waveform 1 100 Calculate waveform points FOR l 1 TO 100 Waveform l I 0505 NEXT OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL RAMP Define segment name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 100 Define segment size OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT Waveform load waveform points Continued on Next Page 102 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter 3 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL RAMP_OUT OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ RAMP SUBEND SUB Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 COM Afg OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Wf_del Wf_del Subprogram which deletes all sequences and segments COM Afg OUTPUT Afg FUNC USER NONE Iselect no sequences OUTPUT Afg LIST SSEQ DEL ALL I
94. Reference Oscillator Trigger Source Gating Stop Trigger Commands Remaining Frequency Coupled Commands Frequency Voltage Coupled Commands i e function Voltage Coupled Commands Figure 5 3 AFG Triggering Command Sequence Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 173 Using the The DIV_N program shows how to set the AFG trigger source The program Divide by N selects the AFG s divide by N frequency generator SOURce FREQuency2 Fre quency subsystem This generator 1s recommended for use with the AFG s 40 MHz reference oscillator also selected in the program to produce exact frequencies Generator such as 10 MHz 20 MHz etc The steps of this program are 1 Select the 40 MHz reference oscillator SOURce ROSCillator SOURce lt source gt 2 Select the divide by N time base TRIGger STARt SOURce lt source gt 3 Set the output frequency SOURce FREQuency2 CW FlXed lt frequency gt 4 Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe lt shape gt 5 Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel MMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt 6 Place the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate MMediate BASIC Program Example DIV_N 1 IRE STORE DIV_N 2 This program selects the 40 MHz reference oscillator and the 3 ISOURce FREQuency2 subsystem divide by N frequency synthesis to 4 Igenerate an exact square wave frequency of 10 MHz 5 10 Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A
95. SEGM DEF 4096 reserve memory for segment OUTPUT Afg LIST SEGM VOLT Waveform lload waveform points OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL NOISE_OUT define sequence OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Inumber segments in sequence OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ NOISE Isegment order SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program NOISE FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program NOISE C is in directory Versions VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A 112 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter 3 Arbitrary Waveform Program Comments Determining the Amount of Segment and Sequence Memory How to Free Segment and Sequence Memory Amplitude Effects on Voltage Lists The following comments give additional details on the program examples in this chapter To determine the amount of segment sequence data remaining in the AFG and the amount of data used execute the SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence FREE command The command returns two number values The first number shows in points the amount of segment sequence memory available The second number shows in points the amount of segment sequence memory used To determine the amount of segment data remaining in the AFG and the amount of segment data used execute the SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent FREE command The command returns two number values The first number shows in points the amount of segmen
96. SEGM VOLT Waveform load points OUTPUT Afg LIST SSEQ SEL S1 Iselect sequence OUTPUT Afg LIST SSEQ DEF 1 Inumber of segments OUTPUT Afg LIST SSEQ SEQ SIN_X Isegment order in sequence SUBEND SUB Noise_def Noise_def Set sweep mode specify start and stop sample rates for a 110 Hz to 20 Hz sweep set arbitrary waveform function Compute waveform Noise define waveform segment and Isequence COM Afg Continued on Next Page 142 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 710 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 MODE SWE Isweep mode 720 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 STAR 40 96E3 Istart sample rate 730 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 STOP 81 92E3 Istop sample rate 740 OUTPUT Afg SOUR SWE COUN INF Isweep count 750 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER Ifunction arbitrary 760 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 1 1V Iscale arb values 770 780 DIM Waveform 1 4096 790 FOR l 1 TO 4096 800 Waveform 2 RND 1 810 NEXT 820 OUTPUT Afg LIST SEGM SEL NOISE Iselect segment 830 OUTPUT Afg LIST SEGM DEF 4096 reserve memory 840 OUTPUT Afg LIST SEGM VOLT Waveform load points 850 860 OUTPUT Afg LIST SSEQ SEL N1 Iselect sequence 870 OUTPUT Afg LIST SSEQ DEF 1 Inumber of segments 880 OUTPUT Afg LIST SSEQ SEQ NOISE Isegment order in sequence 890 SUBEND 900 910 SUB Rst 920 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 930 COM Afg 940 OUTPUT OAfg RST OPC lreset the AFG 9
97. SEGMent VOLTage DAC 88 Segment Combined List as Block Data SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined 94 Segment Sequence Combined List as SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined 94 Block Data SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence COMBined The time saving percentages are referenced to the speed of the Segment Voltage List method 224 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 Using Signed Data to Generate Waveforms Note Using the Signed Number Format Transferring DAC Codes in the Signed Number Format Determining DAC Codes in the Signed Number Format Transferring waveform segments as Digital to Analog Converter DAC Codes to the AFG is faster than transferring a voltage list This section shows how to transfer the lists as DAC codes using the Signed number format The DAC codes are transferred to the AFG as a comma separated list The AFG can only accept a single number format at a time Thus 1f the AFG currently contains Unsigned data and you wish to send Signed data you MUST delete the data in memory first before enabling the AFG to receive Signed data This section shows how to setup the AFG to receive DAC codes in the Signed number format and how to calculate the codes from voltage values With the AFG set to receive DAC codes in the Signed number format 1t receives the codes in 16 bit two s complement numbers Use the SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat SIGNed command to select the format For outputs into matched loads and w
98. SRE STB e RST Condition Unaffected e Power on Condition STATus OPERation ENABle 0 Example Setting the Operation Register Enable Mask STAT OPER ENAB H0040 Enables summary on Waiting for Arm bit Chapter 8 Command Reference 383 STATus OPERation EVENt STATus OPERation EVENt returns the contents of the Operation Event Register Reading the register clears it to 0 Comments The Operation Event Register is also cleared to 0 by the CLS common command e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands STATus commands SRE STB e RST Condition Unaffected e Power on Condition Operation Event Registers are cleared to 0 Example Querying the Operation Event Register STAT OPER EVEN Queries the Operation Event Register OPERation NTRansition STATus OPERation NTRansition lt unmask gt sets the negative transition mask For each bit unmasked a 1 to 0 transition of that bit in the Operation Condition Register will set the same bit in the Operation Event Register Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt unmask gt numeric or 0 through 32767 none non decimal numeric The non decimal numeric forms are the H Q or B formats specified by IEEE 488 2 Comments Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands STATus commands SRE STB e RST Condition Unaffected e Power on Condition STATus OPE
99. TRIGger STARt MMediate command to advance the waveform INTernal 1 The SOURce FREQuency 1 subsystem Sine wave output SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SlNusoid set requires that this source be selected INTernal The SOURce FREQuency2 subsystem TTLTrg0 through TTLTrg7 The VXIbus TTL trigger lines e Use the TRIGger STARt SLOPe command to select the active edge for the front panel Ref Sample In BNC when used as the start trigger source e Executable when Initiated No e Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands TRIGger STARt SLOPe e RST Condition TRIGger STARt SOURce INTernal1 Example Setting the Start Trigger Source TRIG SOUR EXT Trigger source is front panel s Ref Sample In BNC 396 Command Reference Chapter 8 STOP IMMediate TRIGger TRIGger STOP IMMediate terminates the current start arm cycle at the end of the current waveform repetition regardless of the selected stop trigger source The command aborts the remaining ARM STARt LAYer 1 COUNt repetitions of the current trigger cycle The start trigger sequence is placed into the wait for arm state at the end of the current waveform repetition The selected stop trigger source remains unchanged Comments Executing this command with the start trigger sequence in the idle or wait for arm states generates Error 211 Trigger ignored If the start trigger sequence is on the last of ARM STARt LAYer2 COUNt trigger cycl
100. The register also contains the message available bit MAV and the service request bit RQS E A A A OPER RQS ESB MAV QUES unused Questionable Signal Summary Bit QUES Bit 3 is set 1 when a condition monitored by the Questionable Signal Status Group is present when the appropriate bit is latched into the group s Event Register and when the bit is unmasked by the group s Enable Register Message Available Bit MAV Bit 4 is set 1 when data such as a query response is in the AFG s output queue Standard Event Summary Bit ESB Bit 5 is set 1 when a condition monitored by the Standard Event Status Group is present and the appropriate bit is set in the group s Event Register and when the bit is unmasked by the group s Enable Register Service Request Bit RQS Bit 6 is set 1 when any other bit in the Status Byte Register is set Operation Status Summary Bit OPER Bit 7 is set 1 when a condition monitored by the Operation Status Group is present when the appropriate bit is latched into the group s Event Register and when the bit is unmasked by the group s Enable Register Reading the Status Byte Register The Status Byte Register can be read with either of the following commands STB SPOLL Both commands return the decimal weighted sum of all set bits in the register The difference between the commands is that STB does not clear bit 6 RQS service request The se
101. UNS_DAT SUB Ramp_wave Ramp_wave Subprogram which defines a ramp waveform and output Isequence COM Afg DIM Waveform 1 200 Calculate waveform points as dac codes FOR I 100 TO 99 Waveform I 101 I 050505 00125 4096 NEXT OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC SOUR INT Idac data source OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC FORM UNS dac data format unsigned OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL RAMP segment name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 200 Isegment size OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT DAC Waveform waveform pts OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL RAMP_OUT sequence name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Isequence size OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ RAMP segment order SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program UNS_DAT FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program UNS_DAT C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A These program is very similar to the example programs used in Chapter 3 The only difference is that this program transfers the segment data as DAC codes in the Unsigned number format instead of voltage values 230 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 Using Definite Length Arbitrary Blocks to Transfer Data The AFG can receive DAC codes as Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data using either the Signed or Unsigned number format This is a much faster method to transfer data than using a comma sepa
102. VBPROG and the Visual C example program SINEWAVE C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A 60 Generating Standard Waveforms Chapter 2 Generating Square Waves 2 VIDIV Output applied to a 50 Q load O5us DIV The SQUWAVE program outputs a square wave at 1 Mhz 4 V output level and 1 V offset The commands are 1 Reset the AFG RST This command aborts any waveform output and selects the 42 9 MHz reference oscillator source DDS sample source that is trigger start source sinusoid function arm start immediate O V offset and a 50 Q output impedance and output load 2 Select the Reference Oscillator SOURce JROSCillator SOURce INTernal 1 This command selects the reference oscillator source see Reference Oscillator Sources on page 78 Although RST selects 42 9 MHz reference oscillator it is selected here for good programming practice 3 Select the Sample Source TRIGger STARt SOURce INTernal 1 This command selects the sample source that is trigger start source Although RST selects trigger start source that selects the DDS frequency generator it is selected here for good programming practice The SQUare function can use any of the trigger start sources see Sample Sources on page 78 4 Set the Frequency Range SOURce FREQuency 1 RANGe lt range gt This command specifies the square wave upper frequency limit see DDS Frequency Gen
103. WAVE SOURce FREQuenecy 1 RANGe RESET VALUE 0 0Hz SET THE OUTPUT FREQUENCY SOURce FREQuency 1 CWI FIXed RESET VALUE 10kHz SET PHASE MODULATION SOURCE SOURce PM SOURce RESET VALUE INTernal ENABLE PHASE MODULATION SOURce PM STATe RESET VALUE OFF FREQUENCY COUPLED FREQUENCY COUPLED FUNCTION AMPLITUDE AND OUTPUT SET THE FUNCTION SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe RESET VALUE SiNusoid SET TRIANGLE OR RAMP WAVEFORM POINTS SOURce RAMP POINts RESET VALUE 100 SET TRIANGLE OR RAMP WAVEFORM POLARITY SOURce RAMP POLarity RESET VALUE NORMal SET THE WAVEFORM AMPLITUDE SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude RESET VALUE 16187V SET THE DC OFFSET SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate OFFSet RESET VALUE OV SET OUTPUT IMPEDANCE OUTPut 1 IMPedance RESET VALUE 50 SET OUTPUT LOAD OUTPut 1 LOAD RESET VALUE AUTO ON LOAD MATCHED TO IMPEDANCE FREQUENC Y VOL TAGE VOL TAGE COUPLED ie COUPLED VOLTAGE COUPLED ad Figure 2 1 Commands for Generating Standard Waveforms continued on next page 54 Generating Standard Waveforms Chapter 2 SET FILTER FREQUENCY OUTPut 1 FILTer LPASs FREQuency RESET VALUE 250kHz ENABLE FILTER OUTPut 1 FILTer LPASs STATe RESET VALUE OFF UNCOUPLED ENABLE OUTPUT OUTPut 1 STATe RESET VAL
104. Waveform Segments 86 query 336 Negative Transition Filter 384 387 431 435 NOISE Example Program 112 Noise generating 112 Non Sinusoid Arbitrary Waveforms 447 Number of arms setting 169 171 of frequency sweep points 374 of marker points determining 222 of points 87 374 of points vs frequency 79 of sweep arms setting 295 372 of waveform cycles setting 169 171 signed number format 225 226 combined list 240 unsigned number format 229 combined list 245 Numeric Command Parameters 286 O Offset A24 address space 407 485 486 circuitry description 451 register reading 485 486 OPC 420 OPC 421 Operation from incorrect DAC codes 280 high speed 223 280 multiple AFGs 203 222 together 218 222 Operation Status condition register 383 435 enable register 383 436 event register 383 436 query contents 384 group 435 437 negative transition filter 384 positive transition filter 385 register 381 435 437 summary bit 383 Operatiion Status continued transition filter 435 using 436 437 Optional SCPI Commands 27 285 parameters 287 Oscillator Sources 78 115 154 197 OSG_RQS Example Program 437 OUTPLOAD Example Program 70 71 OUTPUNIT Example Program 73 74 Output amplifier description 451 amplitude default voltage units 379 setting 72 74 377 379 circuitry 450 description 451 DAC description 447 filters 160 cutoff frequency 308 enabling disabling 309 fre
105. Wf_del ISet up the AFG OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 512E3 lfrequency OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER lfunction OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 1V lamplitude OUTPUT Afg SOUR MARK FEED SOUR LIST1 Imarker source OUTPUT Afg SOUR MARK POL INV Imarker polarity OUTPUT Afg SOUR MARK STAT ON lenable marker CALL Sine_wave CALL Tri_wave CALL Seq_list OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER WAVE_OUT Iwaveform sequence OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB Sine_wave Sine_wave Subprogram which computes a sine wave COM Afg DIM Waveform 1 512 Calculate sine wave FOR l 1 TO 512 Waveform 5 SIN 2 PI I 512 Continued on Next Page Chapter 6 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations 209 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 800 810 820 830 840 850 860 870 880 890 900 NEXT OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL SINE OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 512 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT Waveform SUBEND SUB Tri_wave Isegment name Isegment size lamplitude points Tri_wave Subprogram which computes a triangle wave and marker list COM Afg DIM Waveform 1 512 Marker_list 1 512 FOR l 1 TO 256 Calculate triangle wave Waveform l 1 0195313
106. a he hw A ea we a 377 LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude 377 LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude UNIT VOLTage 379 LEVel IMMediate OFFSet 2 0 o 380 STATUS a A teal ee ee eee sod Wha Poste eh OS ces 381 OPC INITiate a bo a ee a ak a ag 382 OPERation CONDition e 383 OPERati on ENAB E 20 ia at ts ees 383 OPERation EVEN 006 8 ac a a ee de ee owe Seed 384 OPERation NTRansition ee 384 OPERation PTRansition s e spunea a a e ee 385 PRESET gd vs a 6 Ae eA ete E E GA Ga A E SNS A 385 8 Agilent E1445A Users Manual Contents Chapter 8 Command Reference continued QUEStionable CONDition o e 386 QUEStionable ENABle o 386 QUEStionable EVENt ee 387 QUEStionable NTRansiti0M o 387 QUEStionable PTRansition e 388 SYS TEN a he ee Se A 2 die IA mar eet ah Ss 389 ERRO cick Gens Gekko eat R aie aes ee geet Ga Galion tae Sede o Sieg 389 VERSION regi Gk end a MEER EE ie do 390 TRIGget sita ete eh BR PA EAM ae he Ba aa hd 391 FESTARI COUN fi tte icc a r RE ee AR Rise Oh oe Le Pe dad ge 392 ESTARt GATE POLartty iia ek a Ge at eae 393 ESTARtGATE SOURCS siii bok heh de is Ge Ee WO A Pea da ee hs 393 STARt GATE STATC 200 kei ea he wt ake eae Ge 394 ESTARt EIMMediate 4 foc5 a ee ee eke ee ee ee ee ie 395 ESTARE ESLOPE ssi s op pa Ges ea A a a e ole Geer 395 ES
107. and frequency list advance timing default source e TTLTrgO through TTLTrg7 The VXIbus TTL trigger lines Placing the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate IMMediate puts the first frequency in the sweep or list at the output Trigger signals output the remaining frequencies Thus for multiple sweeps or passes through the frequency list n 1 triggers are required for the first pass and n triggers are required for all subsequent passes n number of points number of triggers When the sweep and frequency list arming and triggering sources are set to HOLD the starting frequency is output when the AFG is set to the wait for arm state INITiate IMMediate Once the sweep or frequency list arm is received ARM SWEepf IMMediate the sweep or list can be advanced when a sweep or list advance trigger TRIGger SWEep IMMediate is received Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 201 Notes 202 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations Chapter Contents This chapter shows how to generate the different signals at the front panel s Marker Out BNC and how to select the ECL trigger lines Use these signals and trigger lines to synchronize multiple AFGs generate trigger pulses etc The sections are as follows e Marker Pulse Enable Flowchart o o o ooooo Page 204 e Available Marker Sources 00 00 00 eee eee Page 205 e Arbitrary Generated Marker P
108. and sequences CALL Rst Continued on Next Page 242 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 CALL Wf_del OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 200E3 frequency OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER function OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 11875V lamplitude CALL Ramp_wave OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER RAMP_OUT Iwaveform sequence OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB Ramp_wave Ramp_wave Subprogram which defines a ramp waveform and output Isequence COM Afg Afg1 INTEGER Waveform 1 200 ICalculate waveform points as dac codes FOR l 100 TO 99 IF I 0 THEN Waveform l 101 0 2 Iset marker bit with this amplitude point ELSE Waveform l 101 1 050505 00125 Ishift bits to dac code positions Waveform l 101 SHIFT Waveform l 101 3 END IF NEXT OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC SOUR INT Idac data source OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC FORM SIGN Idac data format signed loutput marker as defined by segment list OUTPUT Afg SOUR MARK FEED SOUR LIST1 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL RAMP Isegment name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 200 Isegment size OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SEGM COMB 3402 OUTPUT Afg1 Wa
109. and triggering the AFG Included are details on the operation of the AFG s arming and triggering functions and on the various modes ranges etc used in the programs in this chapter There are five reference oscillator sources for the AFG which are selected by the SOURce ROSCillator SOURce command e CLK10 The VXIbus CLK10 10 MHz line e EXTernal The AFG s front panel Ref Smpl In BNC TTL levels e ECLTrg0 or 1 The VXIbus ECL trigger lines e NTernal 1 The internal 42 94967296 MHz oscillator default source e NTernal2 The internal 40 MHz oscillator The INTernal 1 reference oscillator is recommended for use with the Direct Digital Synthesis DDS time base SOURce FREQuency 1 subsystem for high resolution and frequency range The INTernal2 reference oscillator is recommended for use with the divide by n time base SOURce FREQuency2 subsystem to produce exact frequencies such as 10 MHz 20 MHz etc When outputting a fixed continuous frequency signal the DDS time base SOURce FREQuency 1 or the divide by N time base SOURce FREQuency2 are the most often used In addition to these time bases other sources which can be selected with the TRIGger STARt SOURce command are e BUS the GPIB Group Execute Trigger GET command or the TEEE 488 2 TRG common command e ECLTrg0 or ECLTrg1 the VXIbus ECL trigger lines e EXTernal the AFG s front panel Ref Smpl In BNC e HO
110. block containing the counts in 16 bit integer format The legal range for the counts is 1 to 4096 MINimum and MAXimum cannot be used with this command Comments If block format is used the most significant byte of each value must be sent first e The segment sequence s repetition count list length must be the same length as its waveform segment and marker enable lists or must have a length of 1 If not executing INITiate IMMediate generates Error 1114 Sequence lists of different lengths e A repetition count list of length 1 is treated as though it were the same length as the waveform segment list with all repetition count values the same as the specified value e Changing repetition count values preserves the waveform segment and marker enable lists and vice versa e Executable when Initiated No e Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence COMBined e RST Condition Unaffected e Power On Condition No segment sequences are defined Example Defining a Segment Sequence Repetition Count List LIST SSEQ SEL ABC Selects sequence ABC LIST SSEQ DEF 8 ABC is 8 points long LIST SSEQ SEQ A B C D E F G H Defines segment sequence LIST SSEQ DWEL COUN 6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Outputs segment A six times others once 352 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DWELI I COUNt POINis Comments SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt POINts returns a number indicating the length of the
111. calibrated Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt mask gt block data 0 through 63 characters none or string Comments Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e RST Condition Unaffected e Power On Condition Unaffected Example Setting the Protected User Data PUD 17Unit 5 Sets data to Unit 5 422 Command Reference Chapter 8 RCL RMC Parameters Comments Comments RCL lt number gt restores a previously stored programming state from one of the 10 possible stored state areas The lt number gt indicates which of the stored state areas should be used This command affects the same command settings as does RST Notable exceptions include the DAC code format signed vs unsigned the SOURce LIST commands including waveform segment segment sequence and frequency list definitions the STATus subsystem commands and the CALibration SECure command state Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt number gt numeric 0 through 9 none e Executable when Initiated No e Coupling Group None Related Commands LRN RST SAV e RST Condition all saved states set to the same state as the RST state RMC lt name gt purges only the specified macro definition NOTE At printing time RMC is a command proposed and accepted for a revision and re designation of IEEE 488 2 e Use
112. calibration constants in IEEE 488 2 arbitrary block program data format The query form returns this portion of the calibration constants in TEEE 488 2 definite block data format Both forms require that calibration security have been previously disabled e Executing this command with calibration security disabled increments the calibration count CALibration COUNt query e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands CALibration COUNt CALibration SECure STATe e RST Condition Unaffected Chapter 8 Command Reference 299 CALibration DATA DC Comments DC BEGin Comments CALibration DATA DC lt block gt transfers the DC portion of the Agilent E1445A s calibration constants in IEEE 488 2 arbitrary block program data format The query form returns the current DC portion of the calibration constants in IEEE 488 2 definite block data format Both forms require that calibration security have been previously disabled See the Agilent E1445A Service Manual for detailed information on the use of this command e Executing this command with calibration security disabled increments the calibration count CALibration COUNt query e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands CALibration COUNt CALibration SECure STATe e RST Condition Unaffected CALibration DC BEGin starts the DC calibration procedure for the Agilent E1445A It sets the Agilent
113. de Sil ee 313 DAC SOURCEC as atna a a Me Maa e is a ke ee bee 315 DOW NIA ihn eid eh ye Tk he Beh ent SP Reh whee te de Wee ae Bee 316 sDOWNload COMPlete 1 ee 318 SOURce FREQuency 1 ee ee 319 CENT Sa o Rat ce ot ah Lact as Be ig he ot es Ay dat a da AS ig 321 RC WILEEXE ws sc Sete oh ce A eee eR ESO RA nth O A Rh ees 322 PESKY oras She 2a e ve se es ee oe ge ek ets Se od 323 ES Key SOURCE 50 ee is ei eA eee E A pao 324 MODE 4 ooh SS ao ees et ore A el et ar bes teed Ses 325 RANGE uta aa ere a OL A A AAS 326 SPAN rh deste a Rte te hae BM Po Oh Bee oT Pe EG 327 STARE 53 A a a tt as eee 328 SPOR dis de a AEM de Be de BAe pte A es daca d Stee 329 SOURce FREQuency2 ee ess 330 LG WelsBEXed 2 s te a be Shade Gad We Mee naka Gee ee 331 SOURce JEUNCt ON aa a ee edd EN Se Hee PD E i 332 SHAP CI nare C cyst a eon seh Sd footie mae dona eS Ses 332 USER 65 42 Galak acGh wel eed Se A oe eee ewe E 333 SOURCE LISTO ne Ooh ee A ESS Be OE LR 334 FORMatl DATA DD x fac ose fet aise A Se eee eB a dis See e 335 SEGMentl ADDResS ita ha BOOTS ih ee a he RE A BS eG 336 SEGMent CAT aloe 34255 jean oa ee AAA Ss Se a ies 336 SEGMent COMBined o ooa 337 SEGMent COMBined POINts e 338 ESEGMent DERNE 000 tt a da ds ele Be 339 SEGMent DELete ALL urraca a AD a tras Gd 340 SEGMent DELete SELected o ee 340 LESEGMent EREE 0006 eR ee ee
114. factory Before using read the calibration count to determine its initial value e The Agilent E1445A stores the calibration number in its non volatile calibration memory which remains intact even with power off e The maximum value of the number is 2 147 483 647 after which it wraps around to 0 Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None Related Commands CALibration SECure STATe CALibration DC BEGin e RST Condition Unaffected 298 Command Reference Chapter 8 Example DATA AC 1 Comments DATA AC2 Comments CALibration Querying the Calibration Count CAL COUN Queries calibration count CALibration DATA AC 1 lt block gt transfers the 250 kHz filter portion of the Agilent E1445A s calibration constants in IEEE 488 2 arbitrary block program data format The query form returns this portion of the calibration constants in TEEE 488 2 definite block data format Both forms require that calibration security have been previously disabled See the Agilent E1445 Service Manual for detailed information on the use of this command e Executing this command with calibration security disabled increments the calibration count CALibration COUNt query e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands CALibration COUNt CALibration SECure STATe e RST Condition Unaffected CALibration DATA AC2 lt block gt transfers the 10 MHz filter portion of the Agilent E1445A s
115. interprets the ASCII command strings and returns ASCII formatted results SCPI Command The Agilent E1445A SCPI command set is found in Chapter 8 SCPI Structure commands are based on a hierarchical structure also known as a tree system In this system associated commands are grouped together under a common node or root thus forming subtrees or subsystems An example is the Agilent E1445 s ARM subsystem shown below ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 COUNt lt number gt LAYer2 COUNt lt number gt IMMediate no query SLOPe lt edge gt SOURce lt source gt SWEep SEQuence3 COUNt lt number gt IMMediate no query LINK lt link gt SOURce lt source gt ARM is the root keyword of the command STARt SEQuence 1 and SWEep SEQuence3 are second level keywords LAYer 1 and LAYer2 26 Getting Started Chapter 1 Manual Format Note Command Coupling are third level keywords and so on A colon always separates a command keyword from a lower level keyword as shown below ARM LAY2 SOUR EXT A semicolon is used to separate two commands within the same subsystem and can also save typing For example sending this command message ARM LAY2 SOUR EXT SLOP POS COUN 10 Is the same as sending these three commands ARM LAY2 SOUR EXT ARM LAY2 SLOP POS ARM LAY2 COUN 10 The typical format of commands listed in the command reference and throughout this manual is SOURce F
116. is to be executed of the second waveform segment to the value in the second element of the data array 15 Setup the Sequence List SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DEFine lt length gt 16 Store the Segment Sequence as Unsigned Combined Data SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence COMBined lt combined_list gt This command stores the segment sequence in the data array into sequence memory The list is in the Unsigned format and sent as Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Data can also be sent as Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data 17 Generate the Output SOURce FUNCtion USER lt name gt INITiate MMediate 254 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 BASIC Program Example COMBSEQ Sending the Combined Segment Lists is similar to the other BASIC programs in this chapter However since BASIC does not support 32 Bit Integer variables sending a Combined Segment Sequence List is done differently How BASIC Transfers The Combined Segment Sequence List must be treated in BASIC as 2 16 Bit 32 Bit Integer Data Integers The first integer contains the repetition count marker enable and the most significant bit MSB of and the segment address The second bit contains the rest of the segment address For example Figure 7 3 shows two 16 Bit Integers for a combined sequence that contains a waveform segment with an address of 256 the marker enable bit set and 2 repetition counts Unused Reserved 1st 16
117. is the default mode but is specified in many of the programs to emphasize that the arm source specified by ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce lt source gt is for fixed continuous frequency waveforms Frequency sweeping and frequency lists are only available using the DDS time base When setting the frequency mode SWEep must be selected for frequency sweeps and LIST must be selected for frequency lists 198 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 AFG Arming The arming sources set by the ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce lt source gt command are Sources AFG Arm Count Waveform Repetition Count Stop Trigger Sources BUS The GPIB Group Execute Trigger GET command or the TEEE 488 2 TRG common command ECLTrg0 and ECLTrg1 The VXIbus ECL trigger lines EXTernal The Agilent E1445A s front panel Start Arm In BNC connector TTL levels HOLD Suspend arming Use the ARM STARt LAYer2 IMMediate command to start the waveform IMMediate Immediate arming An arm is internally generated two to three reference oscillator cycles after the start trigger sequence enters the wait for arm state TTLTrg0 through TTLTrg7 The VXIbus TTL trigger lines The arm count specifies the number of arms the AFG is to receive before it returns to the Idle state The arm count is set with the ARM STARt LAYer2 COUNt command The range is 1 through 65535 or INFinity The default value is 1 The waveform repetition cycle count speci
118. lt gt 0 Then Work Work in Sub SubName ShoweErr Addltem Work End If Loop Until ErrNum 0 Close communication with instrument Call iclose Addr Clean up sicl Call siclcleanup Press to exit DispErr The program detected errors in sub function SubName Chr 10 DispErr DispErr Chr 10 ShowErr Press Chr 34 OK Chr 34 to exit MsgBox DispErr 64 sw_vbs CheckError End End If ChkName TempName End Sub Sub CmdExe Cmd As String This sub sends SCPI commands Dim Cnt As Integer Dim Actual As Long Continued on Next Page 34 Getting Started Chapter 1 Cnt 1 While Len Cmd Cnt Send SCPI command Call iwrite Addr ByVal Cmd Cnt Chr 10 Len Cmd Cnt 1 1 Actual Cnt Cnt 1 Wend End Sub Sub ExitProg_Click End program End End Sub Sub Form_Load Disable showing exit program button and lists ExitProg Visible False ShowQuery Visible False Show Action Action Enabled False Action Visible True Enable form Arbwave Visible True Call program to execute instrument Call Main Enable showing exit program button and make it the focus ExitProg Visible True ExitProg SetFocus End Sub Sub GenSeg Setup AFG to generate an arbitrary waveform Static SetCommands 1 To 10 As String Static OutCommands 1 To 10 As String Dim SegCommand As String Continued on Next Page Cha
119. lt name gt This command names the segment sequence Set the Segment Sequence Length SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DEFine lt length gt This command defines the length of the selected segment sequence Define the Segment Sequence Order SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence lt segment_list gt This command determines the order in which the waveform segments are to be executed Select the User Name SOURce FUNCtion USER lt name gt This command sets the AFG to output the selected segment sequence Initiate the Waveform INITiate IMMediate This command generates an immediate output with the arm source set to IMMediate Refer to Chapter 5 for triggering information Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 101 BASIC Program Example AFGGEN1 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 IRE STORE AFGGEN1 This program outputs a ramp arbitrary waveform using the AFG s frequency1 generator Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg Set up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 ICall the subprograms which reset the AFG and which clear Isegment and sequence memory CALL Rst CALL Wf_del Set waveform parameters OUTPUT Afg SOUR ROSC SOUR INT1 OUTPUT Afg TRIG STAR SOUR INT15 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1
120. lt shape gt 6 Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel MMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt 7 Place the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate MMediate 124 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 BASIC Program Example LIST1 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 IRE STORE LIST1 The following program outputs the frequencies 1 kHz 10 kHz 1100 kHz and 1 MHz in a default period of 1 second Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg Set up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 ICall the subprograms CALL Rst CALL List1 CALL List_length WAIT 1 lallow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB Listi Listi ISubprogram which outputs a frequency list COM Afg OUTPUT Afg SOUR ROSC SOUR INT1 Ireference oscillator OUTPUT Afg TRIG STAR SOUR INT1 Ifrequency1 generator OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 MODE LIST list mode OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST2 FREQ 1E3 10E3 100E3 1E6 freq list OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN lfunction OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 V lamplitude OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state SUBEND SUB Rst Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 COM Afg OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG ENTER Af
121. lt state gt boolean OFF 0 ON 1 none e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None Related Commands CALibration STATe e RST Condition CALibration STATe AC ON Disabling AC Calibration Corrections CAL STAT AC OFF Disables AC corrections 304 Command Reference Chapter 8 CALibration STATe DC CALibration STATe DC lt state gt specifies whether DC corrections using the calibration constants are made or not If state is OFF then no DC corrections are made If state is ON DC corrections will be made if CALibration STATe ON is also set Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt state gt boolean OFF 0 ON 1 none Comments Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands CALibration STATe e RST Condition CALibration STATe DC ON Example Disabling DC Calibration Corrections CAL STAT DC OFF Disables DC corrections Chapter 8 Command Reference 305 INITiate INITiate Subsystem Syntax IMMediate The INITiate subsystem initiates the trigger subsystem and prepares the Agilent E1445A for waveform generation Once initiated a start arm received from the programmed arm source TRIGger STARt SOURce command starts the waveform output For frequency sweeping the initial sample or waveform frequency is the STARt frequency when SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE SWEep is set or the first f
122. multiple of 4 for best waveform shape e When SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe RAMP or TRlangle is selected the greater of the SOURce RAMP POINts value and 8 points of contiguous waveform segment memory must be available When SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SQUare is selected 8 points of contiguous waveform segment memory must be available Attempting to select one of these functions with less contiguous waveform segment memory available or to set SOURce RAMP POINts to a value larger than the largest contiguous amount of available waveform segment memory when ramp or triangle wave output is selected will generate Error 1000 Out of memory e Executable when Initiated Query form only e Coupling Group Frequency and voltage e Related Commands SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe e RST Condition SOURce RAMP POINts 100 Example Setting Ramp Length RAMP POIN 1000 Sets ramp length 368 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce RAMP POLarity SOURce RAMP POLarity lt polarity gt selects the polarity of the ramp triangle or square wave For ramps NORMal generates a positive going ramp INVerted generates a negative going ramp For triangles NORMal generates a triangle with an initial positive going slope INVerted generates an initial negative going slope For square waves NORMal generates a waveform with initial voltage being the more positive voltage INVerted generates the more negative voltage first Parameters Parameter Parameter R
123. of 0 disables marker pulse generation for the waveform segment any non zero value enables marker pulse generation MINimum and MAXimum cannot be used with this command Comments If block format is used the most significant byte of each value must be sent first Frequently marker pulse generation is enabled on no more than one waveform segment of a segment sequence The SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer SPOint command is the most efficient way to enable marker pulse generation for a single waveform segment The segment sequence s marker enable list length must be the same length as its waveform segment and repetition count lists or must have a length of 1 If not executing INITiate IMMediate generates Error 1114 Sequence lists of different lengths A marker enable list of length 1 is treated as though it were the same length as the waveform segment list with all marker enable values the same as the specified value Changing marker enable values preserves the waveform segment and repetition count lists and vice versa Executable when Initiated No Coupling Group None Related Commands SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence COMBined RST Condition Unaffected Power On Condition No segment sequences are defined Example Defining a Segment Sequence Marker Enable List LIST SSEQ SEL ABC Selects sequence ABC LIST SSEQ DEF 8 ABC is 8 points long LIST SSEQ SEQ A B C D E F G H Defines segment sequence LIST SSEQ MARK 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
124. of waveform offset into 50 Q or 75 Q waveform peak volts gt 1 02486 5 5v waveform peak volts lt 1 02486 11v into high impedance load waveform peak volts gt 2 04972 11 v waveform peak volts lt 2 04972 2 2v As used in this table waveform peak volts means the voltage corresponding to DAC full scale Accuracy 1 of setting 0 2 of limit Beyond Tcal 5 C add 0 015 of limit per C 458 Agilent E1445A Specifications Appendix A Interface Characteristics BNC Connector TTL levels except for analog output Functions Outputs Output 50 75 Ohm analog output 50 Q or 75 Q nominal or open Marker Out marker bits stored with arbitrary This output is parallel waveforms terminated with 50 Q nominal reference frequency waveform clock a pulse indicating each waveform repetition a level change at the start and the end of each burst of waveform repetitions frequency change phase change Inputs Ref Sample In external reference frequency 40 MHz maximum trigger source i e the waveform clock Start Arm In start arm enables waveform clock for a burst of waveform repetitions Stop Trig FSK Gate In waveform clock stop causes the current waveform repetition to be the last until another Start Arm FSK Input waveform clock gate NOTE High impedance pulled up to 5 V through 4 7 KQ resistor External source m
125. program RSTSINE C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A Chapter 1 Getting Started 51 Notes 52 Getting Started Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Generating Standard Waveforms Chapter Contents This chapter shows how to generate standard waveforms sinusoid square triangle and ramps using the Agilent E1445A 13 Bit Arbitrary Function Generator called the AFG The following sections show how to generate standard waveforms how to setup the AFG for different output loads how to select the output amplitude units for example V Vpeak etc and how to set the waveform amplitude and offset The sections are as follows e Standard Waveforms Flowchart 0 5 Page 54 e Generating DC Voltages 0 00 eee eee eee Page 56 e Generating Sine Waves 00 cece eee eee eee Page 58 e Generating Square Waves 0 0 cece eee eee Page 61 e Generating Triangle Ramp Waves 04 Page 65 e Selecting the Output Loads 0000 Page 69 e Selecting the Amplitude Levels and Output Units Page 72 e Using Phase Modulation 0 00020 e Page 75 e Standard Waveform Program Comments Page 78 Sinusoid Function Requirements Page 78 Reference Oscillator Sources oooooooooooooo o Page 78 Sample Sources siii dret Kaew ends oles Page 78 DDS Frequency Ge
126. s Output INITiate MMediate Chapter 6 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations 219 BASIC Program Example DRIFT akRWND o 10 30 40 50 60 70 80 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 IRE STORE DRIFT This program sets up two AFG s to output 1 MHz square waves To prevent these signals from drifting and creating a phase Idifference the reference oscillator of a master AFG is shared by a servant AFG The master s reference oscillator signal is loutput on VXI backplane trigger line ECLTO Assign I O paths between the computer and the AFGs ASSIGN Afg_m TO 70910 Imaster AFG ASSIGN Afg_s TO 70911 Iservant AFG COM Afg_m Afg_s ISet up error checking CALL Rst OUTPUT Afg_m CLS Imaster OUTPUT Afg_m SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg_m ESE 60 OUTPUT Afg_m OPC ENTER Afg_m Complete OUTPUT Afg_s CLS Iservant OUTPUT Afg_s SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg_s ESE 60 OUTPUT Afg_s OPC ENTER Afg_s Complete ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 Call the subprograms which reset the AFGs output sine waves 180 Idegrees out of phase CALL Square_wave_m CALL Square_wave_s ISet master AFG to wait for arm state OUTPUT Afg_m INIT IMM Istart waveform WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB Square_wave_m Square_wave_m S
127. s last point Marker enable is 1 to enable marker pulse generation for that waveform segment Segment address is the starting address of the segment divided by 8 Use the SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent ADDRess query to obtain the address of a waveform segment 316 Command Reference Chapter 8 Parameters SOURce ARBitrary When downloading segment sequence data from the VXIbus data transfer bus the most significant 16 bits should be written to offset 34 decimal 22 hex in the Agilent E1445A s A24 address space The least significant 16 bits should be written to offset 36 decimal 24 hex Comments Example Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt source gt discrete DPORt LBUS VXI none lt dest gt char defined waveform segment none or segment sequence name lt length gt numeric see below none MINimum MAXimum For waveform segments the ength in terms of points must be greater than or equal to 4 and less than or equal to the defined waveform segment length The current waveform segment length is set to this length MINimum selects 4 points MAXimum selects the defined waveform segment length For segment sequences the ength in terms of points must be greater than or equal to 1 and less than or equal to the defined segment sequence length The current segment sequence length is set to this length MINimum selects 1 point MAXimum selects the defined waveform segmen
128. set the least significant DAC code bit represents 1 4095 of this value Output amplitude for ramp sine square and triangle wave output may be programmed in volts peak volts peak to peak volts RMS volts or dBM Output amplitude for DC must be programmed in volts for arbitrary waveform output volts or peak volts The query form returns the amplitude in terms of the default units specified by the SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude UNIT VOLTage command Chapter 8 Command Reference 377 SOURce VOLTage Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt amplitude gt numeric see below MINimum MAXimum see below DC Output When a matched load has been specified MINimum selects 5 12 V MAXimum selects 5 11875 V Arbitrary Waveform Ramp Sine Square and Triangle Outputs When a matched load has been specified if the current offset voltage is less than or equal to 1 V MINimum selects the equivalent of 16187 V peak in the default voltage units if the current offset voltage is greater than 1 V MINimum selects the equivalent of 1 02486 V in the current voltage units MAXimum selects the equivalent of the lesser of 6 025 V Joutput offset value rounded down to a value that is a multiple of 01 dB from 5 11875 and 5 11875 V For all waveform shapes when an open circuit load has been specified double the all the above voltages These values bound the
129. the PMC command to purge all macro definitions in one command e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands DMC PMC e RST Condition None Chapter 8 Command Reference 423 RST RST resets the Agilent E1445A as follows Sets all commands to their RST state Aborts all pending operations including waveform generation RST does not affect The state of VXIbus word serial protocol The output queue The Service Request Enable Register The Standard Event Status Enable Register The enable masks for the Operation Status and Questionable Signal Registers Calibration data Calibration security state Protected user data The DAC code format signed vs unsigned Waveform segment segment sequence and frequency list definitions Comments Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e RST Condition None SAV SAV lt number gt stores the current programming state into one of the 10 possible stored state areas The lt number gt indicates which of the stored state areas should be used This command stores the states of all commands affected by RST Notable exceptions include the DAC code format signed vs unsigned the SOURce LIST commands including waveform segment segment sequence and frequency list definitions the STATus subsystem commands and the CALibration SECure command state Parameters Parameter P
130. the Offset Register to a 24 bit address The register number is identified in the register descriptions found in the following sections 484 Register Based Programming Appendix C Reading the AFG s Offset Register As shown in Figure C 1 the AFG s configuration registers are mapped into the upper 25 of A16 address space The Offset Register is one of the AFG s configuration registers FFFF 16 x SS FFFF16 a Register e Offset 16 BIT WORDS 600016 3E16 X REGISTER ais ADDRESS e e SPACE e e A16 Pa e e ADDRESS OE 16 Data Low Register SPACE x 0C16 Data High Register Response Data 2000 on OA 16 Extended Register 16 0816 Protocol Signal Register 49 152 0616 Offset Register 0416 Status Control Register 0216 Device Type Register 0016 ID Register E1445A 000016 Register Map Base Address COOO16 Logical Address 64 16 or 49 152 Logical Address 64 19 Register Address Base address Register Offset ADDRESS MAP Register 16 BIT WORDS FFFFFF16 Offset SE16 3C16 e O 00000 6 20000016 gt IFCOOO SS e o 16 S 20000016 OE 16 Data Low Register A16 0C16 Data High Register ADDRESS AS N ADDRESS DA 16 Response Data
131. the least significant bits of a word to offset 176 decimal BO hex The most significant byte should be written in the least significant bits of a word to offset 178 decimal B2 hex After both bytes are written a word write of any data to offset 138 decimal 8A hex is required to activate the new phase deviation Phase deviation may be changed at a maximum rate of one change every 5 reference oscillator cycles or 2 MHz whichever is less Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group Frequency Related Commands SOURce PM DEViation SOURce PM STATe RST Condition SOURce PM SOURce INTernal Example Setting Modulation Source PM SOUR DPOR Sets Digital Port In connector as modulation source 366 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce PM STATe SOURce PM STATe lt mode gt enables or disables phase modulation for sine wave output Phase modulation is always disabled for other waveform shapes Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt mode gt boolean OFF 0 ON 1 none Comments Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe e RST Condition SOURce PM STATe OFF Example Enabling Phase Modulation FUNC SHAP SIN PM STAT ON INIT Starts output PM DEV 78648 Selects sine wave output Enables phase modulation Sets deviation to 14 PM UNIT ANGL DEG UNIT
132. the sample source that is trigger start source Although RST selects trigger start source that selects the DDS frequency generator it is selected here for good programming practice The TRlangle RAMP functions can use any of the trigger start sources see Sample Sources on page 78 4 Set the Frequency Range SOURce FREQuency 1 RANGe lt range gt This command specifies the triangle ramp wave upper frequency limit see DDS Frequency Generator Ranges on page 79 Since RST automatically sets the range to the lower range it is executed in this program for good programming practice Chapter 2 Generating Standard Waveforms 65 5 Set the Frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 FlXed lt frequency gt This command specifies the frequency Refer to Table B 3 in Appendix B for the frequency limits 6 Select the Function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe TRlangle This command selects the TRlangle function For the RAMP function use the RAMP parameter instead of the TRlangle parameter 7 Set the Number of Ramp Points SOURce RAMP POINts lt number gt This command specifies the number of ramp points The more points give better resolution but lower frequency response 8 Select the Triangle Wave Polarity SOURce RAMP POLarity INVerted This command selects the polarity of the TRlangle RAMP wave Use NORMal for the initial voltage to go positive Use INVerted for the initial voltage to go negative 9 Set the Amplitude SOU
133. the top level commander Note the following when assigning the Agilent E1445A AFG to a commander e A commander s servant area is defined as Servant area logical address 1 through logical address servant area switch setting e The Agilent E1445A AFG is a message based device If an embedded controller and an Agilent E1406A Command Module are part of your VXIbus system put the AFG in the servant area of the controller This enables you to program the AFG at higher speeds across the VXIbus backplane rather than over the Agilent Interface Bus GPIB via the command module e If your system uses an external controller and the Agilent E1406A Command Module put the AFG in the servant area of the command module This enables the module to function as the GPIB interface to the arbitrary function generator The Agilent E1406A Command Module has a factory set logical address of 0 and a servant area switch setting of 255 Using the factory settings it is not necessary to change the logical address of the AFG 80 to place it in the servant area of the command module The Agilent E1445A AFG logical address switch is shown in Figure 1 2 GPIB is the implementation of IEEE Std 488 1 1978 Chapter 1 Getting Started 21 Logical Address Servant Area Switch Servant Area O Logical Address Switch Figure 1 2 E1445A Logical Address and Servant Area Switch Location Addressing the AFG External Controller
134. uta lacada 339 MA 340 Aase e e ea 340 ESC AA 340 FREE coito 341 MARKEE aiiin ra 342 POINTS Picos orar ti 343 O ddedaed 343 SELe inuit 344 VOLTA e Gran aa nano 345 DAG sen ni tot 346 POINTS Pineaha rta 347 SSSEQUENCE iiron 347 ADDRESS Point 347 CATAl0Q vse 348 COMBined c ccccceeeeeeeeeereeeees 348 POINTS Z e220 reckons thn hee 349 DEFINEN 350 DEl ete mantis 351 AEC na enni 351 SELected cocinar 351 DWEDL etna dl 352 GOUN kecsin 352 PONS ee 353 FREE coran acti 353 MAR Keri ici 354 POINTS Z conc n 355 Ss ed 0 355 SEC Chisccsd font ctiretcertanddemcict 356 SEQUENCE hei ote 357 SEGMentS aoii 357 SOURCE liviana 358 MIS lo a cd 358 FOR Mat ice 358 DATA Sits 358 FREQUENCY wx seccusteveteseccginedes 359 POINIS nina iia 360 SOURCO Li as 361 MARKET eooni cnn 361 A A 361 Am ol De 361 ESTATE araen 362 FEED aaa a tei 363 POLA iia 364 OA 364 ay ROG Sickie e 365 IRE 365 k DEWiation annann 365 SOURCE E 366 STA TO ede de aAa 367 UNIT ano 367 PNC 367 282 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURCE lu d soci da 368 RAMP ius lidia 368 POINTS unn 368 POM arity cotas 369 SOURCE sissies aii een 370 ROSCillator nnna 370 FREQUENCY coccccccccnnoonnonnnonnconocononnnons 370 TEX TO rina ect erect user caves R 370 SOURCE unico 371 SOUR CO loncha cti Siete 372 SWECDP iris 372 COUN cee ee ee ne 372 DIRGCtON diaria tasa Dale
135. waveform The source and slope of the signal that may gate sample generation The source and slope for prematurely stopping one trigger cycle without aborting the entire trigger system The source for advancing a frequency sweep or list Subsystem Syntax TRIGger STARt SEQuence 1 COUNt lt number gt GATE POLarity lt polarity gt SOURce lt source gt STATe lt state gt IMMediate no query SLOPe lt edge gt SOURce lt source gt STOP SEQuence2 IMMediate no query SLOPe lt edge gt SOURce lt source gt SWEep SEQuence3 IMMediate no query LINK lt link gt SOURce lt source gt TlMer lt period gt Chapter 8 Command Reference 391 TRIGger STARt COUNt TRIGger STARt COUNt lt number gt would normally specify the number of triggers the Agilent E1445A would accept after an INITiate IMMediate command before returning the start trigger sequence to the wait for arm state However since this is equal to the length of the current waveform and is not configurable here the only legal value for this command is 9 91e37 or NaN not a number There is no need to send this command It is included for SCPI compatibility purposes only Parameters Parameter Name Parameter Type Range of Values Default Units lt number gt numeric 9 91e37 NAN MINimum MAXimum none MINimum and MAXimum select 9 91e37 triggers 9 91
136. 0 TRIGger 391 402 VINStrument 403 408 Summing Amplifier DAC See Agilent E1446A Suspending Output Waveforms 183 Agilent E1445A User s Manual Index 527 S continued Sweep advance source 158 trigger 201 399 linking 400 source 401 time 402 arm linking 296 arming 190 192 201 295 297 372 count 156 setting 295 372 direction 157 373 linear 375 points 374 versus time 135 137 159 sources setting 297 spacing 157 time 158 376 specifying 158 versus points 135 137 159 triggering 190 192 399 402 using triggers 186 189 with output leveling 30 31 Sweeping and frequency lists 120 and frequency shift keying 117 162 arbitrary waveforms 141 frequency range 155 logarithmic frequency spacing 133 134 program comments 154 162 pseudo random noise 141 143 sin x x 141 143 using start and span frequencies 127 129 stop frequencies 121 123 Switches logical address 22 servant area 23 SWP_ARB Example Program 141 143 SWP_LEVL 30 31 SWP_LEVL Example Program 145 146 SWP_PVST Example Program 136 137 SWP_STEP Example Program 191 192 SWP_TRIG Example Program 188 189 System Configuration BASIC programming 29 Visual BASIC programming 32 Visual C C programming 40 SYSTem Subsystem 389 390 SYSTem ERRor 389 SYSTem VERSion 390 T Time sweep advance trigger 402 sweeps 376 versus frequency lists 138 140 159 points 135 137 159 Traffic Register 498 Transferring calibrati
137. 0 OUTPUT Afg LIST SSEQ DEL ALL IClear sequence memory 2580 OUTPUT Afg LIST SEGM DEL ALL IClear segment memory 2590 SUBEND Comments e SCPI commands are included in this program to load segment and Visual BASIC and Visual C C Program Versions sequence memory and initialize the AFG This program executes as intended when the SCPI commands are executed prior to writing to the registers e The sequence in which the Waveform Selection Registers are written to and the register contents are summarized below The Traffic Register selects the source which specifies addresses in sequence base memory that in turn select the waveform sequences The Waveform Select Register selected by the Traffic Register contains the waveform index which is the location in sequence base memory where the base address of the sequence in sequence memory is located Waveform Select Register Traffic Register Sequence Base Register Sequence Memory 0 reserved 1 Seq1_addr _ 2 Seq2_addr 3 Seq3_addr 816 A16 2016 The Visual BASIC example program WAVE_SEL FRM is in directory VBPROG and the Visual C example program WAVE_SEL C is in directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A Appendix C Register Based Programming 505 Loading the DAC from the VXIbus This section shows how to load waveform data into the AFG s DAC directly from the VXIbus backplane For additional information on loading the DAC direc
138. 00 80920 Figure 1 4 Installing the AFG Module in a VXlbus Mainframe Removing a Module To remove a module from a mainframe 1 Loosen the top and bottom screws securing the module in the mainframe 2 Move the extraction levers away from each other As the levers are moved the module will detach from the backplane connectors 3 Slide the module out Chapter 1 Getting Started 25 Note The extraction levers will not seat and unseat the backplane connectors on older Agilent VXIbus mainframes and non A gilent mainframes You must manually seat the connectors by pushing the module into the mainframe until the front panel is flush with the front of the mainframe The extraction levers may be used to guide or remove the module Instrument Language SCPI The Agilent E1445A AFG uses the Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments called SCPD as the instrument control language The programs shown in this manual are written in BASIC which uses the SCPI commands for instrument controls These programs and also programs in other languages are contained on the CD that came with the instrument see Program Languages on page 29 for more information SCPI Prog rammi ng SCPI Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments is an ASCII based instrument command language designed for test and measurement instruments The message based AFG has an on board microprocessor which
139. 10 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 IRE STORE SQUWAVE This program outputs a 1 MHz 4V square wave with a 1V DC offset Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg Set up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT OAfg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 ICall the subprograms CALL Rst CALL Squ_wave WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR END SUB Squ_wave Squ_wave Subprogram which outputs a square wave COM Afg OUTPUT Afg SOUR ROSC SOUR INT1 Ireference oscillator OUTPUT Afg TRIG STAR SOUR INT15 Itrigger source OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ RANG 0 frequency range OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ FIX 1E6 frequency OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SQU function OUTPUT Afg SOUR RAMP POL INV Ipolarity more negative OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 4V lamplitude OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM OFFS 1V Idc offset OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state SUBEND SUB Rst Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 COM Afg OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Errmsg Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors COM Afg DIM Message 256 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit Continued on Next Page Chapter 2 Generating Standard Wav
140. 10 END lterminate with Line Feed LF and EOI Continued on Next Page Appendix C Register Based Programming 503 1880 1890 1900 1910 1920 1930 1940 1950 1960 1970 1980 1990 2000 2010 2020 2030 2040 2050 2060 2070 2080 2090 2100 2110 2120 2130 2140 2150 2160 2170 2180 2190 2200 2210 2220 2230 2240 2250 2260 2270 2280 2290 2300 2310 2320 2330 2340 2350 2360 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ ADDR Isequence location ENTER Afg Seq2_addr SUBEND SUB Spike_def Spike_def Compute the waveform sine wave with spike Download the Idata as a combined list voltage and marker of signed Inumbers in an indefinite length block Download the sequence as la combined list repetition count marker and segment address lin an indefinite length arbitrary block COM Afg Afg1 Base_addr Seq1_addr Seq2_addr Seq3_addr INTEGER Waveform 1 4096 INTEGER Sequence 1 2 REAL Addr_seg3 FOR l 1 TO 4096 Waveform l SIN 2 PI 1 4096 00125 NEXT Width 50 FOR J 1 TO Width 1024 Width J Waveform Waveform l 9 J Width 00125 NEXT J FOR J 1 TO Width 1 1 1024 Width J Waveform Waveform l 9 J Width 00125 NEXT J Ishift bits to dac code positions FOR l 1 TO 4096 Waveform SHIFT Waveform I 3 NEXT OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL SPIKE Isegment name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 4096 Isegment size OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SEGM COMB 0 waveform points OUTPUT Afg1 Wavefor
141. 100 1110 1120 1130 1140 1150 1160 1170 1180 1190 1200 1210 1220 1230 1240 1250 1260 1270 1280 1290 1300 1310 1320 1330 1340 1350 1360 1370 1380 1390 1400 1410 1420 1430 1440 1450 1460 1470 1480 1490 1500 1510 1520 1530 1540 1550 1560 1570 SUB Seq_list Seq_list This subprogram downloads the sequence list repetition Icount marker segment address to sequence memory over Ithe VXIbus INTEGER Sequence 1 2 1 2 REAL Addrm1 Addrm2 COM Afg Base_addr CONTROL 16 25 3 access A24 space with WRITEIO OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL SINE Idetermine segment address OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM ADDR ENTER Afg Addrm1 Addrm1 Addrm1 8 8 to set starting address boundary of segment ISequence 1 1 is the repetition count and marker enable for Isegment SINE Sequence 1 2 is the starting address of segment SINE Sequence 1 1 SHIFT 4096 2 4 Addrm1 DIV 65536 Sequence 1 2 Addrm1 MOD 65536 65536 Addrm1 MOD 65536 gt 32767 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL TRI Idetermine segment address OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM ADDR ENTER Afg Addrm2 Addrm2 Addrm2 8 8 to set starting address boundary of segment ISequence 2 1 is the repetition count marker enable and last point lindication for the segment sequence Sequence 2 2 is the starting laddress of segment TRI Sequence 2 1 SHIFT 4096 1 4 Addrm2 DIV 65536 12 Sequence 2 2 Addrm2 MOD 65536 65536 Addrm2 MOD 65536 gt 32767
142. 11 COM Afg_m Afg_s REAL Waveform 1 4096 ISet up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg_m CLS OUTPUT Afg_m SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg_m ESE 60 OUTPUT Afg_s CLS OUTPUT Afg_s SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg_s ESE 60 Call the subprograms which reset the AFGs delete all lexisting waveform segments and sequences and which set up the AFGs to output arbitrary waveforms CALL Rst CALL Wf_del CALL Sinx_def CALL Sinx_m CALL Sinx_s ISelect the waveform sequence of the master AFG place the Imaster AFG in the Wait for arm state OUTPUT Afg_m SOUR FUNC USER SINX_M OUTPUT Afg_m INIT IMM WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 Continued on Next Page Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 177 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 800 810 820 830 END SUB Sinx_def Sinx_def Subprogram which computes the sin x x waveform amplitudes lused by both AFGs COM Afg_m Afg_s Waveform FOR 2047 TO 2048 IF 1 0 THEN I 1 E 38 Waveform l 2048 SIN 2 PI 53125 1 256 53125 1 256 159154943092 NEXT SUBEND SUB Sinx_m COM Afg_m Afg_s Waveform Sinx_m Set the reference oscillator source trigger source frequency mode frequency and amplitude f
143. 18 Illegal while calibrating Commands cannot be sent to the Agilent E1445A while the device is calibrating 1019 Illegal while not calibrating The command is only valid while the Agilent E1445A is calibrating 1020 Illegal while initiated and Frequency changes during phase modulation can SOUR PM SOUR not INT only occur when SOUR PM SOUR is INTernal 1021 Test data byte count not even The length parameter for the command number VINS CONF TEST CONF is not an even number 1022 VXI data transfer bus not active VINS CONF VME REC ADDR DATA is executed and A24 address space is not being written to 1100 Illegal segment name Attempting to download to a segment that doesn t exist or selecting a segment name that s the same as an existing sequence name 1101 Too many segment names There are gt 256 segment names defined Use SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEL SEL to delete the current selected segment or SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEL ALL to delete all segments 1102 Segment in use Trying to delete a segment that is within a sequence 1103 Segments exist Trying to change the data format of a segment that already exists 1104 Segment lists of different lengths The length of a segment s voltage list does not equal the length of its marker list and its marker list does not equal 1 1105 Segment list has zero length Querying a voltage marker or dac code list that has no data 1106 Segment name not DEFined Trying to load segment memory and memory has not
144. 2 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 ICall the subprograms CALL Rst CALL Swp_pvst WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB Swp_pvst Swp_pvst Subprogram which sets sweep direction points and time COM Afg OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 MODE SWE Isweep mode OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 STAR 5E3 Istart frequency OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 STOP 15E3 Istop frequency OUTPUT Afg SOUR SWEEP DIR DOWN Isweep direction OUTPUT Afg SOUR SWEEP POIN 1005 Isweep points OUTPUT Afg SOUR SWE COUN INF Isweep count OUTPUT Afg TRIG SWE SOUR TIM Isweep advance source OUTPUT Afg SOUR SWE TIME 12375 Isweep time OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN5 function OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 V lamplitude OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for trigger state SUBEND SUB Rst Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 COM Afg OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Errmsg Continued on Next Page 136 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 440 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 560 COM Afg DIM Message 256 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform REPEAT OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue
145. 20 430 440 450 IRE STORE SINEWAVE The following program generates a 1 kHz 5 Vp sine wave Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg ISet up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 ICall the subprograms CALL Rst CALL Sine_wave WAIT 1 lallow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB Sine_wave Sine_wave Subprogram which outputs a sine wave COM Afg OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 1E3 frequency OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN lfunction OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5V lamplitude OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state SUBEND SUB Rst Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 COM Afg OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Errmsg Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors COM Afg DIM Message 256 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform REPEAT Continued on Next Page Chapter 2 Generating Standard Waveforms 59 460 OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 470 ENTER Afg Code Message 480 PRINT Code Message 490 UNTIL Code 0 500 STOP 510 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program SINEWAVE FRM is in directory Visual C C Program
146. 3 MARKSEG1 Example Program 209 211 MARKSEG2 Example Program 213 MARKTRG Example Program 215 217 Maximum arbitrary waveform frequency 155 sample rates 454 frequencies in frequency list 155 parameters in coupling groups 288 using 81 ramp wave frequency 155 sine wave frequency 155 square wave frequency 155 triangle wave frequency 155 Memory characteristics 453 454 deleting segment sequence definitions 351 waveform segment definitions 340 description 448 452 determining amount 113 downloading segment data into 259 268 freeing 113 query segment sequence 347 353 waveform segment 336 341 reserving for segment sequence 350 for waveform segment 339 segment characteristics 453 sequence characteristics 454 storing segment sequence 87 waveform segment 86 Microprocessor Description 450 Minimum arbitrary waveform frequency 155 parameters in coupling groups 288 using 81 ramp wave frequency 155 sine wave frequency 155 square wave frequency 155 triangle wave frequency 155 Module getting started 19 52 installing in mainframe 25 removing from mainframe 25 MULSEG Example Program 96 98 Multiple AFG operations 203 222 program comments 222 together 218 222 AFGs lock stepping 176 180 marker pulses 207 211 Agilent E1445A User s Manual Index 519 M continued Multiple continued SCPI commands linking 288 segment lists 207 211 N Naming Segment Sequences query 348 Naming
147. 30 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 800 810 142 94967296 MHz reference oscillator to set DDS frequency synthesis to set the output frequency function amplitude and to start the waveform COM Afg Base_addr OUTPUT Afg SOUR ROSC SOUR INT1 reference oscillator 42 MHz OUTPUT Afg TRIG STAR SOUR INT1 frequency1 generator OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 1E3 Ifrequency OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN function OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5V lamplitude OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait_for_arm state OUTPUT Afg STAT OPC INIT OFF OPC Iwait for INIT to complete ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Freg_change Freq Npts Reference_osc Range Freq_change Subprogram which changes the output frequency by writing Ithe frequency to registers on the AFG COM Afg Base_addr CONTROL 16 25 3 access A24 space with READIO and WRITEIO ICalculate frequency value written to registers IF Range gt 0 THEN Phase DVAL Freq Npts Reference_osc 2 4 294967296E 9 16 ELSE Phase DVAL Freq Npts Reference_osc 4 294967296E 9 16 END IF Write the first byte of the frequency value to register A7 the Isecond byte to register A5 the third byte to register A3 and the fourth byte to register A1 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL A7 16 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL A5 16 IVAL Phase 1 2 16 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL A3 16
148. 341 names 116 336 size 116 voltage point list 347 Questionable Signal Status condition register 386 431 enable register 386 432 event register 386 432 query contents 387 group 431 434 negative transition filter 387 431 435 positive transition filter 388 register 381 431 434 summary bit 386 using 432 434 Quick Reference common commands 428 SCPI commands 409 413 R Ramp Waves doubling frequency 156 generating 65 68 minimum frequency 155 number of waveform points 157 368 polarity 369 Ranges DDS frequency generator 79 frequency 155 frequency generator 116 RCL 423 Reader Comment Sheet 17 Reading condition register 431 435 error queue 389 offset register 485 486 standard event status register 439 status byte status register 442 REAL Data Format 358 Rectified Sine Waves generating 111 Ref Sample In BNC trigger slope 395 398 Reference Oscillator description 448 frequency 370 sources 78 115 154 197 371 Register Based Programming 483 508 accessing registers 484 changing output frequency 487 signal phase 495 497 frequency control programs 489 494 registers 487 488 offset register reading 485 486 phase control program 496 497 selecting waveform sequence 498 505 system configuration 484 Registers accessing 484 486 condition register 431 435 enable register 383 386 432 436 event register 432 436 query contents 384 387 summary bit 383 386 frequenc
149. 40 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 IRE STORE OSG_RQS This program generates a service request when the AFG enters the Iwait for arm state Assign an I O path between the computer and the E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg Reset the AFG CALL Rst Set up the computer to respond to the service request ON INTR 7 CALL Afg_ready ENABLE INTR 7 2 ISet up the AFG to generate a service request when it enters the Iwait for arm state OUTPUT Afg CLS Iclear Status Byte and Event Registers OUTPUT Afg STAT OPER PTR 64 Ipos transition of ARM bit OUTPUT Afg STAT OPER ENAB 64 lallow ARM bit to generate summary bit OUTPUT Afg SRE 128 lenable summary bit to generate RQS OUTPUT Afg STAT OPC INIT OFF lallow intr branching after wait for arm Call subprogram which sets up and initiates the AFG Isubsystem CALL Afg_setup WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB Afg_setup Afg_setup Subprogram which sets up the AFG and places it in the lwait for arm state COM Afg OUTPUT Afg ABORT Istop current waveform Continued on Next Page Chapter 9 AFG Status 437 320 OUTPUT Afg SOUR ROSC SOUR INT15 Ireference oscillator 330 OUTPUT Afg TRIG STAR SOUR INT15 frequency generator 340 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 1E3 frequency 350 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN Ifunction 360 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 1V lamplitude 370 OUTPUT Afg ARM
150. 445 programming errors COM Afg Pts DIM Message 256 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform REPEAT OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR lread AFG error queue ENTER Afg Code Message PRINT Code Message UNTIL Code 0 STOP SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program LIST_STP FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program LIST_STP C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 195 Aborting Waveforms Aborting a waveform places the AFG in the Idle state Figure 5 4 The waveform is halted and the output remains at the last amplitude point triggered when the abort was executed The command which aborts a waveform is ABORt Using ABORT Stop Figure 5 4 compares the effects of aborting a waveform or using stop Trig gers or Gating triggers or gating to stop or suspend the output ARM STAR LAY2 COUN 3 ARM STAR LAY1 COUN 3 j START ARM 3 ARMS 3 CYCLES PER ARM ABORT o aO STOP TRIGGER Figure 5 4 Effects of ABORt Stop Triggers and Gating 196 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering Program Comments Reference Oscillator Sources AFG Frequency Synthesis Modes The following information is associated with arming
151. 50 1160 1170 1180 1190 OUTPUT OCmd DIAG POKE Base_addr 8 16 Traffic Write the location of the sequence base address waveform index lto the Waveform Select register Write the base address of lof the sequence in sequence memory to the Sequence Base register OUTPUT Cmd DIAG POKE Base_addr 10 8 252 OUTPUT Cmd DIAG POKE Base_addr 32 16 Seq3_addr OUTPUT Cmd DIAG POKE Base_addr 10 8 253 OUTPUT Cmd DIAG POKE Base_addr 32 16 Seq1_addr OUTPUT Cmd DIAG POKE Base_addr 10 8 254 OUTPUT Cmd DIAG POKE Base_addr 32 16 Seq2_addr OUTPUT Cmd DIAG POKE Base_addr 10 8 255 OUTPUT Cmd DIAG POKE Base_addr 32 16 Seq3_addr OUTPUT Cmd DIAG POKE Base_addr 10 8 0 SUBEND SUB Sinx_def Sinx_def Define the waveform Sin x x Download the waveform data las a combined list voltage and marker of signed numbers lin an indefinite length block Download the sequence as a Icombined list repetition count marker and segment address lin an indefinite length arbitrary block COM Cmd Afg Afg1 Base_addr Seq1_addr Seq2_addr Seq3_addr INTEGER Waveform 1 4096 INTEGER Sequence 1 2 REAL Addr_seg1 FOR 2047 TO 2048 IF 1 0 THEN 1 E 38 Waveform l 2048 SIN 2 PI 53125 1 256 53125 1 256 159154943092 00125 Ishift bits to dac code positions Waveform 2048 SHIFT Waveform 2048 3 NEXT OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL SIN_X Isegment name
152. 50 ENTER Afg Complete 960 SUBEND 970 980 SUB Wf_del 990 Wf_del Subprogram which deletes all sequences and segments 1000 COM Afg 1010 OUTPUT Afg FUNC USER NONE Iselect no sequences 1020 OUTPUT Afg LIST SSEQ DEL ALL Idelete all sequences 1020 OUTPUT Afg LIST SEGM DEL ALL Idelete all waveform segments 1040 SUBEND 1050 1060 SUB Errmsg 1070 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 1080 COM Afg 1090 DIM Message 256 1100 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 1110 B SPOLL Afg 1120 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 1130 OUTPUT Afg 1140 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 1150 REPEAT 1160 OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR lread AFG error queue 1170 ENTER Afg Code Message 1180 PRINT Code Message 1190 UNTIL Code 0 1200 STOP 1210 SUBEND Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 143 Program Modifications To select another waveform comment out line 180 or 190 depending on the waveform sequence S1 or N1 you DO NOT want to output You must also comment out line 330 if line 180 is commented or line 340 if line 190 is commented Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program SWP_ARB FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program SWP_ARB C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A AC Output Leveling The SWP_LEVL program sets up a si
153. 56 Read master AFG status byte register clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg_m End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg_m OUTPUT Afg_m ABORT labort output waveform REPEAT OUTPUT Afg_m SYST ERR read master AFG error queue ENTER Afg_m Code Message PRINT Code Message UNTIL Code 0 Read servant AFG status byte register clear service request bit Continued on Next Page Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 179 1340 B SPOLL Afg_s 1350 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 1360 OUTPUT Afg_s 1370 OUTPUT Afg_s ABORT labort output waveform 1380 REPEAT 1390 OUTPUT Afg_s SYST ERR Iread servant AFG error queue 1400 ENTER Afg_s Code Message 1410 PRINT Code Message 1420 UNTIL Code 0 1430 STOP 1440 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program LOCKSTEP FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program LOCKSTEP C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A Using Stop Trigge rS The STOPTRIG program shows you how to use stop triggers to abort the remaining cycles of a cycle count ARM STARt LAYer 1 COUNt The program sets up five 5 000 cycle bursts Stop triggers are used to abort the burst before all of the 5 000 cycles occurs An external arm is used to start the bursts A stop trigger aborts a burst at the end of the current cycle The steps of the progr
154. 6 for the DDS generator Do not send this command if using the Divide by N generator 7 Set the Segment Sample Rate SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FlXed lt frequency gt This command sets the rate at which the points in a waveform segment are output by the AFG The frequency is sample frequency number of points Refer to Table B 3 in Appendix B for the frequency limits 8 Select the Arbitrary Waveform Function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe USER This command selects the arbitrary waveform function Couple the command to the previous frequency command 9 Set the Maximum Output Amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt This command specifies the maximum output amplitude The amplitude must be equal or greater than the maximum voltage value of the waveform segment Refer to Table B 4 in Appendix B for the amplitude limits 100 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter 3 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Name the Waveform Segment SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt This command names the waveform segment Set the Waveform Segment Size SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine lt ength gt This command defines the size of the selected waveform segment Store the Waveform Segment as Volts SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage lt voltage_list gt This command stores the segments into the AFG s segment memory Name the Segment Sequence SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect
155. 60 1070 1080 1090 1100 1110 1120 1130 1140 1150 1160 1170 1180 1190 1200 1210 1220 1230 1240 1250 1260 1270 1280 1290 1300 1310 1320 1330 1340 1350 1360 1370 1380 Wav_sel READIO 16 Base_addr IVAL A 16 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL A 16 Wav_sel ISelect a waveform by writing to the Waveform Select register following a O to 1 transition of the WFUSED bit in the Status lregister The transition indicates a new waveform can be selected 1256 selects sequence 1 512 selects sequence 2 and 768 selects Isequence 3 Wav_sel BINAND READIO 16 Base_addr IVAL A 16 IVAL OOFF 16 LOOP FOR 256 TO 768 STEP 256 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL A 16 BINIOR Wav_sel REPEAT UNTIL BIT READIO 16 Base_addr 2 10 NEXT END LOOP SUBEND SUB Sinx_def Sinx_def Define the waveform Sin x x Download the waveform data las a combined list voltage and marker of signed numbers lin an indefinite length block Download the sequence as a Icombined list repetition count marker and segment address lin an indefinite length arbitrary block COM Afg Afg1 Base_addr Seq1_addr Seq2_addr Seq3_addr INTEGER Waveform 1 4096 INTEGER Sequence 1 2 REAL Addr_seg1 FOR 2047 TO 2048 IF I 0 THEN 1 E 38 Waveform l 2048 SIN 2 PI 53125 1 256 53125 1 256 159154943092 00125 Ishift bits to dac code positions Waveform 2048 SHIFT Waveform 2048 3 NEXT OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL SIN_X Isegment nam
156. 7 byte size definite length blocks 231 indefinite length blocks 235 downloading directly into the DAC 269 271 506 508 segment into memory 259 268 using backplane 259 using digital in port 279 format ASCii 335 358 definite length blocks 231 indefinite length blocks 235 PACKed 335 REAL 358 phase modulation 366 segment sequence 316 sending DAC codes 114 signed combined 239 244 to generate waveforms 225 228 transfer bus 24 operating mode 406 transfer methods 224 transferring 32 bit integer 255 unsigned combined 245 249 to generate waveforms 229 230 VXIbus local bus test 406 waveform segment 316 DC calibration corrections 305 starting 300 301 voltage generating 56 57 DCVOLTS Example Program 56 57 DDS Frequency Generator control 489 491 description 449 generating waveforms with 99 102 ranges 79 Declaration of Conformity 15 Definite Length Arbitrary Blocks 130 132 156 data byte size 231 data format 231 transferring data using 231 234 Deviation angle default units 367 setting 76 365 units for phase modulation 80 365 367 Digital Port In Connector downloading data 279 pinout 278 selecting a sequence 279 specifications 460 using 272 279 Disabling analog output 311 calibration corrections 304 305 downloading mode 318 ECL trigger lines 362 frequency doubling 326 low pass output filter 309 marker signal 362 364 phase modulation 367 sample gating 394 security
157. 80 COM Afg Addr ICall the subprograms which reset the AFG and determine the base laddress of the registers in A24 address space CALL Rst CALL A24_ offset IScale the amplitude set the dac data format and dac data source OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 11875V lamplitude OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC FORM SIGN Idac data format signed OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC SOUR VXI Idac data source OUTPUT Afg OPC Wait for the SCPI commands to complete ENTER Afg Complete ICall the subprogram which sends data directly to the dac CALL Dac_drive END SUB A24 offset A24 offset Subprogram which determines the base address for Ithe AFG registers in A24 address space then adds the loffset and register number to the base to get the Icomplete address COM Afg Addr ICONTROL 16 25 2 laccess A16 space with READIO and WRITEIO A16_addr DVAL D400 16 AFG A16 base address Offset READIO 16 A16_addr 6 read AFG offset register Base_addr Offset 256 Ishift offset for 24 bit address Add the register number of the high speed data register lto the A24 base address Addr Base_addr IVAL 26 16 SUBEND Continued on Next Page 270 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 SUB Dac_drive Dac_drive Subprogram which computes a 128 point 5 Vpp triangle wav
158. 80 90 100 110 120 130 IRE STORE SLFTST ISend the self test command enter and display the result DIM Message 256 OUTPUT 70910 TST ENTER 70910 Rsit IF Rslt lt gt 0 THEN REPEAT OUTPUT 70910 SYST ERR ENTER 70910 Code Message PRINT Code Message UNTIL Code 0 END IF PRINT Rest END Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program SLFTST FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C C example program SLFTST C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A Resetti ng and The commands used to reset and clear the AFG are Clearing the AFG RST CLS Resetting the AFG sets it to its power on configuration and clearing the AFG clears its Status Registers Status Register programming is covered in Chapter 9 BASIC Program Example RSTCLS 4 IRE STORE RSTCLS 10 Assign an I O path between the computer and AFG 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM Afg 40 Call the subprogram 50 CALL Rst_cls 60 END 70 80 SUB Rst_cls 90 Rst_cls Isubprogram which resets and clears the AFG 100 COM Afg 110 OUTPUT Afg RST CLS OPC Ireset and clear the AFG 120 ENTER Afg Complete 130 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program RSTCLS FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C C example program RSTCLS C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A Chap
159. 875 V In addition the amplifier can also be set for open circuit or infinite loads applied to the Output connector For open circuit outputs the amplitude range is twice the matched load values Offset Circu itry This circuitry offsets the output amplifier to provide an offset voltage Chapter 10 Block Diagram Description 451 AFG Memory Description The segment memory that stores the segment list as DAC codes can store the codes either in the Signed or Unsigned number format This memory uses 16 bit integer values for the codes To change the number format to a different format the memory must be completely empty before selecting the different format Because of hardware restrictions the segment space in memory allocates for a multiple of 8 words for each waveform segment 452 Block Diagram Description Chapter 10 Appendix A Agilent E1445A Specifications Appendix Contents This appendix contains the Agilent E1445A Arbitrary Function Generator operating specifications Except as noted the specifications apply under the following conditions e Period 1 year e Temperature 0 55 C e Relative Humidity lt 65 0 40 C e Warm up Time 1 hour Typical typ or nominal values are non warranted supplementary information provided for applications assistance Memory Segment Memory contains DAC code and Marker Bit for each sample point Characteristics DAC Word 13 bits Digital Marke
160. 9 EXT_ARM Example Program 167 168 External reference oscillator frequency 370 stop trigger slope 200 F Factory Settings 20 Filter description 451 low pass output 308 309 negative transition 384 387 431 435 positive transition 385 388 431 435 Flowchart arbitrary waveform commands 84 85 ARM TRIG 164 frequency lists commands 118 119 frequency sweep commands 118 119 frequency shift keying FSK commands 118 119 marker pulse commands 204 standard waveform commands 54 55 Format combined segment list 239 240 245 segment sequence list 250 260 waveform segment list 259 common commands 284 DAC codes 313 314 definite length block data 231 indefinite length block data 235 Format continued SCPI commands 284 285 signed number 225 226 combined list 240 unsigned number 229 combined list 245 FREQ1_REG Example Program 489 491 FREQ2_REG Example Program 492 494 Frequency agility 456 characteristics 454 456 external reference oscillator 370 generator DDS 79 99 102 449 489 491 description 448 449 divide by n 99 101 104 174 175 449 492 494 limits 470 list advance trigger 201 arming 193 195 201 295 defining 359 query length 360 setting up 124 126 specifying 124 126 triggering 193 195 using arbitrary blocks 130 132 versus time 138 140 159 lists and sweeping 120 commands flowchart 118 119 frequency range 155 maximum number 155 repetition count 156 load strobe regi
161. 9 Waveform Repetition Count oaoa a a 199 Stop Tri eper Sources a e er E e Be 199 External Stop Trigger Slope o ee 200 AFG Gating Sources ee 200 AEG Gate Polarity tania A ov heh had a ee Maw Bee dodo E a 200 EBnabling the Gate 24 2 bh ae Rw a Pw ee Pe OS ee ee e 200 Frequency Sweep List Arming 2 000000 eee eee eee 201 Frequency Sweep List Advance Trigger 2 o oo ee eee 201 4 Agilent E1445A User s Manual Contents Chapter 6 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations 203 Chapter Contents ca ios o e eA A ae e ee ee A 203 Marker Pulse Enable Flowchart o e ee ee 204 Available Marker Sources o 205 Arbitrary Generated Marker Pulses o o e e 206 Generating Marker Pulses for Arbitrary Waveforms 206 Generating Multiple Marker Pulses in Multiple Segment Lists 207 BASIC Program Example MARKSEG1 00 209 Generating Single Marker Pulses in Single Waveform Segments 212 BASIC Program Example MARKSEG2 o o o 213 Generating Marker Pulses for Each Waveform Point o o ooo 214 BASIC Program Example MARKTRG 215 Operating Multiple AFGs Together o o ee e 218 BASIC Program Example DRIFT 220 Marker Program Comments 222 Determining the Number of
162. 90 500 510 520 530 COM Afg Afg1 ISet up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 ICall the subprograms CALL Rst CALL Wf_del OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 2 048E6 lfrequency OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER lfunction OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 11875V lamplitude OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC SOUR INT Idac data source OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC FORM SIGN Idac data format signed CALL Sine_wave CALL Tri_wave CALL Seq_list OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER M_OUT lwaveform sequence OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB Sine_wave Sine_wave Subprogram which computes a sine wave and downloads Ithe corresponding dac codes as signed numbers in a Idefinite length block to segment memory A combined list lis used but no marker pulse is specified COM Afg Afg1 INTEGER Waveform 1 2048 Calculate sine wave dac codes FOR l 1 TO 2048 Waveform 5 SIN 2 PI 1 2048 00125 Waveform SHIFT Waveform l 3 Ishift bits to dac code positions NEXT OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL M1 Isegment name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 2048 Isegment size OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SEGM COMB 44096 OUTPUT Afg1 Waveform 14096 bytes 4 digits 2 bytes ampl point OUTPUT Afg ICR LF SUBEND SUB Tri_wave Continued on N
163. 99 IMMediate cooonnoonncnnnnnncnnncccccccnccnos 399 e 400 SOURCE eeina ideta i 401 TIMET krini 402 VINStrument 0cceeeceeeeeeeeeeeesteeseeeeeeees 403 CONFigure oococnccccnnnnonocinncconccanoronornos 403 LBUS unida 403 MODE eaaa epe 403 AUTO tio 404 TES P a ot is ab 405 CAN 405 DATAZ ct e eto 406 MME wcrc eter alias ai 406 EMODE t ricas tend de rides 406 REGGIVE inier 407 ADDRESS eococccccconcconcnooncnonnnnnnnos 407 DATA inanipa 407 READ Y Pinioiniconoco caian init 407 IDENtity cocina iia 408 Chapter 8 Command Reference 283 Command Types Commands are separated into two types IEEE 488 2 Common Commands and SCPI Commands Common The IEEE 488 2 standard defines the Common Commands that perform functions like Command reset self test status byte query etc Common commands are four or five characters in Format length always begin with the asterisk character and may include one or more parameters The command keyword is separated from the first parameter by a space character Some examples of Common Commands are shown below RST CLS ESE lt unmask gt OPC STB SCPI Command Format The functions of the AFG are programmed using SCPI commands SCPI commands are based on a hierarchical structure also known as a tree system In this system associated commands are grouped together under a common node or root thus forming subtrees or subsystems An example is the AFG s A
164. A User s Manual Contents Appendix B Useful Tables o e e 463 Example Program Listing e 464 Command Coupling Groups ee 467 Frequency Limits sisi y eu ea bea Be AES OR a he Pe OS ew RP 470 Amplitude LIM S sa e RA AE ag A ES 471 Power On Reset Configuration ee 472 Error Messages prod a A A ee ow Re aS 475 Settings Conflict Error Messages o e a 480 Appendix C Register Based Programming 483 System Configuration 2 ee 484 Accessing the Registers o o 484 Determining the A24 Base Address o o a 484 Reading the Offset Register oo e e 486 Changing the Output Frequency e 487 The Frequency Control Registers 0 o e e 487 Frequency Control Programs 2 2 e 489 BASIC Program Example FREQI_REG o o 489 BASIC Program Example FREQ2_REG o o o 492 Changing the Signal Phase o o ee ee 495 The Phase Control Registers o o o ee 495 Phase Control Program o 496 BASIC Program Example PHAS_CHNG 0 496 Selecting the Waveform Sequence oo 498 The Waveform Sequence Registers o e ee eee 498 Sequence Selection Program oo 500 BASIC Program Example WAVE_SED o 500 Loading the DA
165. ACKed none lt length gt numeric see below MINimum MAXimum none If ASCII format is specified lt ength gt must either be omitted or must be 9 or MINimum or MAXimum Packed format ignores the lt ength gt parameter Comments Executable when Initiated Query form only e Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent commands SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence commands e RST Condition SOURce LIST1 FORMat DATA ASCii Example Setting PACKed Return Data Format LIST FORM PACK Sets packed format Chapter 8 Command Reference 335 SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent ADDRess Comments Example SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent ADDRess returns the address in the waveform segment memory at which the currently selected waveform segment is located e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e RST Condition No waveform segment is selected e Power On Condition No waveform segments are defined Query Waveform Segment Memory Address LIST SEGM ADDR Queries segment address SEGMent CATalog Comments Example SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent CATalog returns a comma separated list of quoted strings each containing the name of a defined waveform segment If no waveform segment names are defined a single null string is returned e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e RST Condition None e Power On Condition No waveform segment names are defined Cataloging Wavefo
166. AFG s ARM subsystem and immediately outputs the DAC data point when received The DAC code received by the AFG only sets the DAC to output to the received value It thus does not disables the AFG s DAC code format triggering marker selection and enabling and amplitude setting Send the DAC codes as Combined lists e The lists can be downloaded either in the Signed or Unsigned number formats and as Definite Length or Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Data e Since the AFG stores no data into memory do not set the last point bit in the list e Download the segment data directly into the AFG s High Speed Data Register The data must go to the register address with a 38 decimal 26 hex offset in the AFG s A24 address space see Appendix C for information on registers The VXISRCE program shows how to download segment data directly to the DAC The program downloads the lists using the VXIbus The segment lists are downloaded in the Signed number format and as Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Data The example generates a 0 to 5 V triangle wave The frequency of the triangle depends on the speed at which downloading occurs The commands are 1 Reset the AFG RST 2 Set the AFG s Output Amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel MMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt 3 Select the DAC Data Format SOURce JARBitrary DAC FORMat SIGNed This command selects the SIGNed or UNSigned number format 4 Select the DAC Data Source
167. ALL IClear segment memory SUBEND SUB Errmsg Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors COM Afg Seg_mem Seq_mem DIM Message 256 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform REPEAT OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR lread AFG error queue ENTER Afg Code Message PRINT Code Message UNTIL Code 0 STOP SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program MARKSEG1 FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program MARKSEGL C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A Chapter 6 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations 211 Gene rating Sing le The MARKSEGZ2 program shows how to generate marker pulses using Marker Pulses in SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer SPOint and SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer SPOint The program generates a Single Waveform sine wave and triangle wave It outputs Active high marker pulse at the Segments center of the triangle waveform The program generates a 512 point 5 V sine wave and 5 V triangle wave Chan A applied to AFG s Output Connector Chan B applied to AFG s Marker Out Connector Chan A 5V DIV Chan B 5V DIV Output applied to a 509 load value 5 msec DIV The commands are the sam
168. AND Traffic IVAL 3FFF 16 IVAL 4000 16 OUTPUT Cmd DIAG POKE Base_addr 8 16 Traffic END SUB Waveform_def COM Cmd Afg Afg1 Base_addr Seqi_addr Seq2_addr Seq3_ addr CALL Sinx_def CALL Sind_def CALL Spike_def SUBEND SUB A24_offset Laddr A24 offset Subprogram which determines the base address for Ithe AFG registers in A24 address space COM Cmd Afg Afg1 Base_addr Seqi_addr Seq2_addr Seq3_addr OUTPUT ECmad DIAG PEEK DVAL 1FC000 16 64 Laddr 6 16 ENTER Cmd Offset IAFG A24 base address Base_addr Offset 256 Ishift offset for 24 bit address SUBEND SUB Build_ram Build_ram This subprogram configures the AFG s sequence base memory Isuch that there are valid sequence base addresses in memory before the AFG is INITiated and waveforms are selected COM Cmd Afg Afg1 Base_addr Seq1_addr Seq2_addr Seq3_addr IPreserve Traffic register contents Set bits 15 14 to 1 0 to set Ithe Waveform Select register as the source which selects the output lwaveform sequence OUTPUT Cma DIAG PEEK Base_addr 8 16 ENTER Cmd Traffic Traffic BINIOR BINAND Traffic IVAL 3FFF 16 IVAL 8000 16 Continued on Next Page Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 273 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 800 810 820 830 840 850 860 870 880 890 900 910 920 930 940 950 960 970 980 990 1000 1010 1020 1030 1040 1050 1060 1070 1080 1090 1100 1110 1120 1130 1140 11
169. ANGLe SOURce PM UNIT ANGLe lt units gt sets the default angle units for subsequent SOURce PM DEViation commands The available default units are DEG Degrees RAD Radians Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt units gt discrete DEG RAD none Comments Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce PM DEViation e RST Condition SOURce PM UNIT ANGLe RAD Example Setting the Default Angle Units Sets default units to degrees Chapter 8 Command Reference 367 SOURce RAMP SOURce RAMP The SOURce RAMP subsystem selects the polarity of ramp waveforms and the number of points on generated ramps and triangle waveforms Subsystem Syntax SOURce RAMP POINts lt number gt POLarity lt polarity gt POINts SOURce RAMP POINts lt number gt specifies the number of points to be used to generate the stepped ramp or triangle waveform Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt number gt numeric see below MINimum MAXimum none The valid range for lt number gt is 4 through the length of the largest available contiguous piece of waveform segment memory MINimum selects 4 points MAXimum selects the largest available contiguous piece of waveform segment memory or 262 144 points whichever is less 4 points minimum Comments For triangle waves make lt number gt a
170. ARB 141 143 SWP_LEVL 30 31 145 146 SWP_PVST 136 137 SWP_STEP 191 192 SWP_TRIG 188 189 system configuration 29 TRIWAVE 67 68 UNS_DAT 230 VXIDOWN 264 268 VXISRCE 270 271 506 508 WAVE_SEL 500 505 WAVSELFP 272 277 Bits operation condition register 383 operation event summary bit 383 questionable signal condition register 386 questionable signal event summary bit 386 Block Diagram description 445 452 Boolean Command Parameters 286 BURST Example Program 170 171 Bus data transfer bus 24 request level 24 lines 24 Byte size definite length block data 231 size indefinite length block data 235 C CALibration Subsystem 298 305 CAL COUNt 298 CAL DATA AC 1 299 CAL DATA AC2 299 CAL DATA DC 300 CAL DC BEGin 300 CAL DC POINt 301 CAL SECure CODE 302 CAL SECure STATe 303 CAL STATe 304 CAL STATe AC 304 CAL STATe DC 305 Cataloging segment sequence names 348 waveform segment names 336 Certification 13 Changing output frequency 487 security passwords 302 signal phase 495 CHARGE Example Program 108 109 Checking for Errors 49 Clearing AFG 47 example program 47 CLS 47 416 Combined segment list 239 250 defining 337 determining size 280 format 239 240 245 query 338 Agilent E1445A User s Manual Index 511 C continued Combined continued segment sequence list 250 348 349 determining size 280 format 250 260 query 349 segments and sequence
171. AYer 1 RESET VALUE ECLTrg1 TRIGger STARt SEQuence 1 SELECT THE MARKER POLARITY SOURce MARKer POLarity RESET VALUE ENABLE THE MARKER OUTPUT NORMal SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt STATe RESET VALUE OFF ENABLE THE MARKER OUTPUT SOURce MARKer STATe RESET VALUE ON Is the Marker Source SOURce LIST 1 YES NO SET MARKER LIST IN SEGMENT LIST SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer or SOURce UIST 1 SEGMent MARKer SPOint SET MARKER LIST IN SEGMENT SEQUENCE LIST SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer or SOURce JLIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer SPOint FINISH Figure 6 1 Commands for Marker Pulses 204 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations Chapter 6 Available Marker Sources There are six marker sources available for output at the AFG s front panel Marker Out BNC and the ECL Trigger Lines Use the SOURce MARKer FEED lt source gt command to select the Marker Out BNC use SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt FEED lt source gt command to select the ECL trigger lines The sources for the Marker Out BNC not the ECL trigger lines can output the marker pulses as either active high NORMal or active low INVerted Use the SOURce MARKer POLarity lt polarity gt command to select the polarity The different marker sources are as follows ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 For arbitrar
172. Afg Afg1 50 60 ISet up error checking 70 ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg 80 ENABLE INTR 7 2 90 OUTPUT Afg CLS 100 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 110 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 130 Call the subprograms which reset the AFG and erase all waveform 140 Isegments and sequences 150 CALL Rst 160 CALL Wf_del 170 180 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 200E3 frequency 190 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER Ifunction 200 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 11875V lamplitude 210 220 CALL Ramp_wave 230 240 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER RAMP_OUT lwaveform sequence 250 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state 260 270 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 280 OFF INTR 7 Continued on Next Page 232 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 END SUB Ramp_wave Ramp_wave Subprogram which defines a ramp waveform and output Isequence COM Afg Afg1 INTEGER Waveform 1 200 FOR 100 TO 99 Waveform l 101 1 050505 00125 ICalculate waveform points as dac codes NEXT OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC SOUR INT Idac data source OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC FORM SIGN Idac data format signed OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL RAMP Isegment name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 200 Isegment si
173. Appendix B Useful Tables Appendix Contents The tables in this appendix contain information often referred to during Agilent E1445A programming The tables in this appendix include e Table B 1 Agilent E1445A Example Program ETS Po Soe ee cathe tod Page 464 e Table B 2 Agilent E1445A Command Coupling GLOUPS cion es Pe ek Ge Bed eS ee eee hes Page 467 e Table B 3 Agilent E1445A Frequency Limits Page 470 e Table B 4 Agilent E1445A Amplitude Limits Page 471 e Table B 5 Agilent E1445A Power on Reset Conditions da Page 472 e Table B 6 Agilent E1445A Error Messages Page 475 e Table B 7 Agilent E1445A Settings Conflict Error Messages ersi ers 0 0 c eee ee eee eee Page 480 Appendix B Useful Tables 463 Example Program Listing Table B 1 Agilent E1445A Example Program Listing Program Type Program Name Language Description Introductory SLFTST BASIC Visual BASIC E1445A Self Test Visual C C Chapter 1 RSTCLS Resetting and clearing the AFG LRN i Power on reset configuration ERRORCHK i Error checking program RSTSINE Sine wave output from reset settings Standard DCVOLTS BASIC Visual BASIC 5V DC voltage Functions Visual C C Chapter 2 SINEWAVE i 1kHz 5Vp sine wave SQUWAVE d 4V 5 MHz square wave 1V DC offset TRIWAVE 200 point 4V 10 kHz triangle wave OUTPLOAD il Sets AFG s output impedance and load OUTPUNIT Sets amplitude units to vol
174. B e RST Condition Unaffected e Power on Condition STATus QUEStionable ENABle 0 Setting the Questionable Signal Register Enable Mask STAT QUES ENAB H0040 Enables summary on Waiting for Arm bit 386 Command Reference Chapter 8 STATus QUEStionable EVENt STATus QUEStionable EVENt returns the contents of the Questionable Signal Event Register Reading the register clears it to 0 Comments The Event Register is also cleared to 0 by the CLS common command e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands STATus commands SRE STB e RST Condition Unaffected e Power on Condition The Event Register is cleared to 0 Example Querying the Questionable Signal Event Register STAT QUES EVEN Queries the Questionable Signal Event Register QUEStionable NTRansition STATus QUEStionable NTRansition lt unmask gt sets the negative transition mask For each bit unmasked a 1 to 0 transition of that bit in the Questionable Signal Condition Register will set the same bit in the Questionable Signal Event Register Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt unmask gt numeric or 0 through 32767 none non decimal numeric The non decimal numeric forms are the H Q or B formats specified by IEEE 488 2 Comments Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands STATus commands SRE STB e RST Condition Una
175. Bit Integer 2nd 16 Bit Integer 3130 29 28 27 26 2524 2322 212019181716 1514131211109 8 765432 10 aa lajifatifrfifrjsfrijofo fofoljfofolofojofojof1jofojofojojofojo Repetition Count Segment Address Marker Enable Figure 7 3 Sending 32 Bit Integers in BASIC BASIC determines the value for the first integer as follows Repetition Count Marker SHIFT 4096 lt repetition count gt 4 lt segment address gt DIV 65536 4 BASIC determines the value for the second integer as follows Segment Address lt segment address gt MOD 65536 65536 lt segment address gt MOD 65536 gt 32767 DIV returns the integer portion of the Dividend MOD returns the remainder of the division 1 IRE STORE COMBSEQ 2 This program downloads two arbitrary waveforms as combined lists 3 voltage and marker of signed 2 s complement DAC codes The 4 lists are downloaded in definite length arbitrary blocks The 5 loutput sequence is a combined list repetition count marker and 6 Iwaveform segment address downloaded in an indefinite length 7 larbitrary block 8 10 Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 ASSIGN Afg1 TO 70910 FORMAT OFF Ipath for binary block data Continued on Next Page Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 255 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 4
176. C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A Sample Programs The programs in this section generate various arbitrary waveforms All programs output waveforms at a 1 kHz repetition frequency and 5 V amplitude These programs do not delete any waveform segments and segment sequences stored in memory Thus once a program is executed it generates Error 1100 Illegal segment name and Error 1110 Hllegal sequence name if executed again Due to the similarity of all the programs only the first program is completely presented here Only the differences are shown by the other programs 104 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter 3 Gene rating a The SIN_X program generates a Sin X X waveform using 4096 segments Sin X X Waveform points 5 V DIV Output applied to a SOQ load value 2 msec DIV BASIC Program Example SIN_X 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 IRE STORE SIN_X This program generates the arbitrary waveform Sin x x Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg ISet up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 Call the subprogram which resets and clears the AFG CALL Rst ISet the signal frequency function and amplitude OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 4 096E6 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER OU
177. C from the VXIbUS o e e e 506 BASIC Program Example VXISRCE o 506 IM EX caca a es heck A a a bei 509 Agilent E1445A User s Manual Contents 11 Notes 12 Agilent E1445A User s Manual Contents Certification Agilent Technologies certifies that this product met its published specifications at the time of shipment from the factory Agilent Technologies further certifies that its calibration measurements are traceable to the United States National Institute of Standards and Technology formerly National Bureau of Standards to the extent allowed by that organization s calibration facility and to the calibration facilities of other International Standards Organization members Warranty This Agilent Technologies product is warranted against defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one 1 year from date of shipment Duration and conditions of warranty for this product may be superseded when the product is integrated into becomes a part of other Agilent products During the warranty period Agilent Technologies will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective For warranty service or repair this product must be returned to a service facility designated by Agilent Technologies Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to Agilent and Agilent shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer However Buyer shall pay all shipping char
178. CE TO INTernal1 TRIGger STARt SOURce RESET VALUE INTernal1 SET FREQUENCY MODE TO CW OR FlXed SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE RESET VALUE FiXed SET THE SAMPLE FREQUENCY SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FIXed RESET VALUE 10kHz SET THE FUNCTION TO USER SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe RESET VALUE SiNusoid FREQUENCY COUPLED CE ad FREQUENCY VOLTAGE COUPLED Ea AMPLITUDE AND OUTPUT SET THE WAVEFORM AMPLITUDE SOURce VOLTage LEVel lMMediate AMPLitude RESET VALUE 16187V OUTPut 1 FiLTer LPASs FREQuency SET THE DC OFFSET SOURce VOLTage LEVel MMediate OFFSet RESET VALUE OV SET OUPUT IMPEDANCE OUTPut 1 IMPedance RESET VALUE 500 SET OUTPUT LOAD OUTPut 1 LOAD RESET VALUE AUTO ON LOAD MATCHED TO IMPedance VOLTAGE COUPLED SET FILTER FREQUENCY RESET VALUE 250kHz ENABLE FILTER OUTPut 1 FILTer LPASs STATe RESET VALUE OFF ENABLE OUTPUT OUTPut 1 STATe RESET VALUE ON Figure 3 1 Commands for Generating Arbitrary Waveforms continued on next page 84 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter 3 SET THE ARM SOURCE DEFINE SEGMENT SEQUENCE NAME ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce SOURce LIST 1 SSEQ SELect RESET VALUE IMMediate DEFINE SEGMENT SEQUENCE LENGTH SOURce JLIST 1 SSEO DEFine SET THE ARM COUNT ARM STARt LAYer2 COUNt RESET VALU
179. COUNT lt repetition_list gt POINts FREE MARKer lt marker_list gt POINts SPOint lt points gt SELect lt name gt SEQuence lt segment_list gt SEGMents LIST2 FORMat DATA lt format gt lt length gt MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt FEED lt source gt STATe lt mode gt RAMP POLarity lt polarity gt POINts lt number gt ROSGillator FREQuency EXTernal lt frequency gt STATus OPC INITiate lt state gt TRIGger STARt SEQuence 1 GATE POLarity lt polarity gt SOURCe lt source gt STATe lt state gt VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE lt mode gt AUTO lt state gt TEST CONFigure lt length gt DATA VME RECeive ADDRess DATA READY IDENtity Chapter 8 Command Reference 415 IEEE 488 2 Common Commands CLS CLS clears the Standard Event Status Register the Operation Status Register the Questionable Signal Register and the error queue This clears the corresponding summary bits 3 5 and 7 in the Status Byte Register CLS does not affect the enable masks of any of the Status Registers Comments DMC Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None Related Commands STATus PRESet RST Condition None DMC lt name gt lt data gt creates a macro with the specified name and assigns zero one or a sequence of commands to the name The sequence may be composed of SCPI and or Common Commands The sequence may be
180. Clear sequence memory OUTPUT Afg LIST SEGM DEL ALL IClear segment memory SUBEND SUB Errmsg Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors COM Afg DIM Message 256 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform REPEAT OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR lread AFG error queue ENTER Afg Code Message PRINT Code Message UNTIL Code 0 STOP Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program AFGGEN1 FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program AFGGENL C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 103 BASIC Program Example AFGGEN2 This program is similar to the AFGGEN1 program on page 102 except it selects different reference oscillator and sample sources The differences are as follows 1 IRE STORE AFGGEN2 2 This program outputs a ramp arbitrary waveform using the 3 AFG s frequency2 generator 160 ISet waveform parameters 170 OUTPUT Afg SOUR ROSC SOUR INT2 180 OUTPUT Afg TRIG STAR SOUR INT2 190 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ2 RANG 40E6 200 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ2 FIX 40E6 Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program AFGGEN2 FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program AFGGEN2
181. Commands SOURce LIST2 FREQuency SOURce SWEep POINts SOURce SWEep TIME TRIGger SWEep SOURce e RST Condition SOURce SWEep TIME 1 is set TRIGger SWEep TlMer is the dependent value Example Setting the Sweep Advance Period TRIG SWE TIM 1 Sets 1 S per frequency value 402 Command Reference Chapter 8 VINStrument VINStrument The VINStrument subsystem operates with the SOURce ARBitrary and SOURce PM subsystems to control the virtual instrument features of the Agilent E1445A These features include the ability to use the VXIbus Local Bus and normal data transfer bus to download data to the segment and segment sequence memories directly drive the main output DAC and provide phase deviations for sine waves Subsystem Syntax VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE lt mode gt AUTO lt state gt TEST CONFigure lt length gt no query DATA query only VME RECeive ADDRess DATA query only READy query only MODE lt edge gt IDENtity CONFigure LBUS MODE VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE lt mode gt selects the operating mode for the VXIbus Local Bus Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt mode gt discrete CONSume OFF PlPeline none Comments The available modes are CONSume Local Bus data is used and not passed through This mode must be selected when downloading segment and segment sequence mem
182. E 1 UNCOUPLED DEFINE SEGMENT SEQUENCE LIST SOURce LIST 1 SSEQ SEQuence SET THE REPETITION COUNT ARM STARt LAYer 1 COUNt RESET VALUE INFinity ARMING SET DWELL COUNT SOURce LIST 1 SSEQ DWELI COUNt SEQUENCE DEFINITION AND SELECTION DEFINE SEGMENT NAME SELECT WAVEFORM SEGMENT SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect SEQUENCE SOURCe FUNCtion USER UNCOUPLED DEFINE SEGMENT LENGTH SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine UNCOUPLED LOAD WAVEFORM POINTS INITIATE THE WAVEFORM SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage INITiate IMMediate SEGMENT DEFINITION FINISH Figure 3 1 Commands for Generating Arbitrary Waveforms continued from previous page Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 85 How the AFG Generates Arbitrary Waveforms Refer to Figure 3 2 An arbitrary waveform consists of two parts a waveform segment or all points on a waveform and a segment sequence The segments are the actual voltage points of the waveform The segment sequence determines the order in which one or more waveform segments are output Voltage X v A or J Waveform Segment A Waveform Segment B Time qq Segment Sequence Outputs Segment A And Then Segment B Figure 3 2 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms To output a waveform the waveform segment must be stored into the AFG s segment memory To
183. E 37 is equivalent to NAN Comments Executable when Initiated Query form only e Coupling Group None e Related Commands ABORT INITiate IMMediate e RST Condition TRIGger STARt COUNt 9 91e37 Example Setting the Start Trigger Count TRIG COUN NAN 392 Command Reference Chapter 8 STARt GATE POLarity TRIGger STARt GATE POLarity lt polarity gt selects the polarity of the Agilent E1445A s front panel Stop Trig FSK Gate In BNC which gates the TRIGger STARt subsystem NORMal polarity selects an active high gate INVerted polarity selects an active low gate This polarity is significant only when TRIGger STARt GATE SOURce is set to EXTernal The programmed value is retained but not used when other sources are selected Parameters Comments Example TRIGger Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt polarity gt discrete INVerted NORMal none e Executable when Initiated Query form only e Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands TRIGger STARt GATE SOURce e RST Condition TRIGger STARt GATE POLarity INVerted Setting the Sample Gate Polarity TRIG STARt GATE POL NORM STARt GATE SOURce TRIGger STARt GATE SOURce lt source gt selects the source which gates the TRIGger STARt subsystem The TRIGger STARt subsystem is suspended no new samples are generated while the selected gate source is asserted Normal sample generation re
184. E 80 Selecting the Deviation Units for Phase Modulation 80 Using MINimum and MAXimum Parameters 20000 81 Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 83 Chapter Contents pe ee a Se ge ee see ae Sy aoe 83 Arbitrary Waveforms Flowchart 0 00 eee eee eee 84 How the AFG Generates Arbitrary Waveforms o o o 86 Generating a Simple Arbitrary Waveform ooo 88 BASIC Program Example ARBWAVE 91 Executing Several Waveform Segments 0000000 eae 93 BASIC Program Example MULSEG o o 96 Using Different Frequency Generators o o e 99 BASIC Program Example AFGGENI o o o o e 102 BASIC Program Example AFGGEN2 o o o o e 104 Sample Programs os se u at E a A ld e 104 Generating a Sin X X Waveform o 105 BASIC Program Example SIN_X o o e 00020000 105 Generating a Damped Sine Wave o o o 107 BASIC Program Example SIN_D 107 Generating an Exponential Charge Discharge Waveform 108 BASIC Program Example CHARGE o 108 Generating a Sine Wave with Spikes o o a 109 BASIC Program Example SPIKES o e 109 Generating a 2 Rectified Sine Wave o o 111 BASIC Program Example SIN_R o
185. E1445A up for the first of the 44 measurements in the procedure Calibration security must have been previously disabled See the Agilent El445A Service Manual for detailed information on the use of this command e Most of the Agilent E1445A s commands cannot be executed while calibration is in progress The RST command may be used to prematurely terminate the calibration procedure without affecting the stored calibration constants e Executable when Initiated No e Coupling Group None e Related Commands CALibration DC POINt CALibration SECure STATe e RST Condition None 300 Command Reference Chapter 8 DC POINt Comments CALibration CALibration DC POINt lt value gt takes the measured value for the current DC calibration point computes needed calibration constants and sets up the Agilent E1445A for the next measurement When all measurements have been made the calibration constants are checked for validity If the validity check passes the constants are stored in the Agilent E1445A s non volatile calibration memory and the calibration count CALibration COUNt query is incremented The RST command should be sent after completing the calibration procedure to restore normal operation Calibration security must have been previously disabled See the Agilent E1445A Service Manual for detailed information on the use of this command Most of the Agilent E1445A s commands cannot be executed while calibra
186. EQUENCY MODE SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE SET SWEEP SPACING RESET VALUE Fixed SOURce SWEep SPACing FREQUENCY MODE FSKey SET FSKey FREQUENCIES SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey RESET VALUE 10kHz 10MHz SET FSKey SOURCE SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey SOURce RESET VALUE EXTernal RESET VALUE LiNear FREQUENCY MODE FREQUENCY MODE SWEep LIST SET SWEEP COUNT SOURce SWEep COUNt or ARM SWEep COUNt SET FREQUENCY LIST RESET VALUE 1 SOURce LIST2 FREQuency a Ly T y o Da S S Ss E Le RESET VALUE NONE SET SWEEP ARM SOURCE TO IMMediate ARM SWEep SOURce RESET VALUE IMMediate SET START FREQUENCY SOURce FREQuency 1 STARt RESET VALUE 0 0Hz SET CENTER FREQUENCY SOURce FREQuency 1 CENTer RESET VALUE 5 36 MHz SET STOP FREQUENCY SOURce FREQuency 1 STOP RESET VALUE 10 73 MHz SET FREQUENCY SPAN SOURce FREQuency 1 SPAN RESET VALUE 10 73 MHz SET SWEEP TRIGGER SOURCE TO TlMer TRIGger SWEep SOURce RESET VALUE TlMer SET SWEEP TIME SOURce SWEep TIME or TRIGger SWEep TlMer Figure 4 1 Commands for Frequency Sweeps Frequency Lists and FSK Keying continued on next page 118 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 FUNCTION AMPLITUDE AND OUTPUT SET THE FUNCTION SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe RESET VALUE SiNusold
187. ERSion STARt lt start_freq gt STOP lt stop_freq gt TRIGger FREQuency2 CW FlXed lt frequency gt FUNCtion SHAPe lt shape gt LIST2 FREQuency lt freq_list gt POINts STARt SEQuence 1 COUNt lt number gt IMMediate SLOPe lt edge gt SOURCe lt source gt STOP IMMediate SLOPe lt edge gt SOURce lt source gt SWEep IMMediate LINK lt link gt SOURCe lt source gt TlMer lt period gt 414 Command Reference Chapter 8 Table 8 3 Non SCPI Commands CALibration COUNt DATA AC 1 lt block gt AC2 lt block gt DC lt block gt C SECure CODE lt code gt STATe lt mode gt lt code gt STATe lt state gt AC lt state gt DC lt state gt OUTPut 1 LOAD lt load gt AUTO lt mode gt SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat lt format gt SOURce lt source gt DOWNload lt source gt lt dest gt lt length gt COMPlete FUNCtion USER LIST 1 FORMat DATA lt format gt lt length gt SEGMent ADDRess CATalog COMBined lt combined_list gt POINts DEFine lt length gt DELete ALL SELected FREE MARKer lt marker_list gt POINts SELect lt name gt VOLTage lt voltage_list gt DAC lt dac_list gt POINts SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence ADDRess CATalog COMBined lt combined _list gt DEFine lt length gt DELete ALL SELected DWELI
188. Figure 4 2 Arbitrary Block Data Diagram e P indicates the data to be sent is in an arbitrary block e non zero digit is a single digit number which shows the number of digits contained in digits For example if the digits value is 100 or 2000 the non zero digit value is 3 or 4 respectively e 8 bit data bytes is the data i e frequencies sent to the AFG Note that there are eight bytes per frequency list frequency In the LISTDEF program on page 131 a list of 100 frequencies is downloaded using the definite length block format In the definite length encoding syntax digit specifies the number of bytes downloaded 800 Since 800 is three characters non zero digit is 3 156 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 In an indefinite length arbitrary block e indicates the data to be sent is in an arbitrary block e 0 indicates that an indefinite length block of data is to be sent e 8 bit data bytes is the data i e frequencies sent to the AFG There are eight bytes per frequency list frequency e NL END means a line feed LF is sent with END EOD asserted It indicates to the AFG that the end of the data block has been reached Additional information on arbitrary block data can be found in ANSIEEE Standard 488 2 1987 IEEE Standard Codes Formats Protocols and Common Commands Frequency Points The number of frequencies generated po
189. Fine initializes the waveform segment voltage point list to zero length and the marker pulse list to a length of 1 with a value of 0 no markers will be generated e While the reserved length must be a multiple of 8 rounded up if necessary the only restriction on the current waveform segment length number of voltage points stored is that it be at least four points long e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect e RST Condition Unaffected e Power On Condition No waveform segments are defined Example Reserving Memory for a Waveform Segment LIST SEL ABC Selects waveform segment ABC LIST DEF 1024 Reserves 1024 points for ABC Chapter 8 Command Reference 339 SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete ALL SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete ALL deletes all defined waveform segment definitions from memory and makes all of the waveform memory available for new waveform segment definitions Comments Example If any waveform segment is used in any segment sequence executing this command generates Error 1102 Segment in use No waveform segments will be deleted Use SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete SELected to delete only the currently selected waveform segment definition Executable when Initiated No Coupling Group None Related Commands SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete SELected RST Condition None Power On Condition No waveform segments ar
190. GATE STATe TRIGger STARt GATE STATe lt mode gt enables or disables sample gating When enabled the TRIGger STARt subsystem is suspended no new samples are generated while the gate source selected by TRIGger STARt GATE SOURce is asserted Normal sample generation resumes when the gate is unasserted Parameters Comments Example Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt mode gt boolean OFF 0 ON 1 none e Executable when Initiated Query form only e Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands TRIGger STARt GATE SOURce e RST Condition TRIGger STARt GATE STATe OFF Enabling Sample Gating TRIG GATE STAT ON Enables sample gating 394 Command Reference Chapter 8 TRIGger STARt IMMediate Comments Example STARt SLOPe Parameters Comments Example TRiGger STARt MMediate immediately advances to the next sample in a waveform regardless of the selected trigger source provided that the trigger system has been initiated and a start arm received The selected trigger source remains unchanged e Executing this command with the start trigger sequence not in the wait for trigger state generates Error 211 Trigger ignored e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands INITiate IMMediate TRIGger e RST Condition None Single Stepping a Waveform ARM LAY2 SOUR IMM Sets immediate arming TRIG SOUR HOLD Sets manual sam
191. GM DEF 2048 Isegment size OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT Waveform waveform points SUBEND SUB Seq_def Seq_def Subprogram which defines the output sequence COM Atg OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL WAVE_OUT Isequence name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 2 Isequence size OUTPUT EAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ SINEWAVE TRI lexecution order OUTPUT EAfg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DWEL COUN 2 1 Isegment dwell count SUBEND SUB Rst ISubprogram which resets the E1445 COM Afg OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Wf_del Wf_del Subprogram which deletes all sequences and segments COM Afg OUTPUT Afg FUNC USER NONE Iselect no Sequences OUTPUT Afg LIST SSEQ DEL ALL IClear sequence memory OUTPUT Afg LIST SEGM DEL ALL IClear segment memory SUBEND SUB Errmsg Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors COM Afg DIM Message 256 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg Continued on Next Page Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 97 950 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 960 OUTPUT Afg 970 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 980 REPEAT 990 OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 1000 ENTER Afg Code Message 1010 PRINT Code Message 1020 UNTIL Code 0 1030 STOP 1040 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program MULSEG FRM is in directory Visual C C
192. IMM AMPL 5 V lamplitude 310 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state 320 SUBEND 330 340 SUB Rst 350 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 360 COM Afg 370 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 380 ENTER Afg Complete 390 SUBEND 400 410 SUB Errmsg 420 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 430 COM Afg 440 DIM Message 256 450 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 460 B SPOLL Afg 470 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 480 OUTPUT Afg 490 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 500 REPEAT 510 OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR lread AFG error queue 520 ENTER Afg Code Message 530 PRINT Code Message 540 UNTIL Code 0 550 STOP 560 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program LOG_SWP FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program LOG_SWP C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A 134 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 Sweep Points To demonstrate the relationship between the number of points frequencies Versus Time na frequency sweep and the time of the sweep the SWP_PVST program uses 100 frequency points to continuously sweep from 5 kHz to 15 kHz in 0 125 seconds The program also shows you how to control the direction of a sweep Using the flowchart in Figure 4 1 as a guide the steps of this program are 1 10
193. KK KK IK IK IK IK IK IK IK IK IK IK IK IK KK KK KK void time_out char func_name printf n n tThe program timed out in function s func_name Close communication iclose addr Release SICL resource allocation not needed for Windows NT _ siclcleanup printf n nClose the window or press Alt F4 to exit exit 1 Chapter 1 Getting Started 45 Introductory Programs AFG Self Test The introductory programs in this section include AFG Self Test Resetting the AFG and clearing its status registers Querying the AFG power on reset settings Checking for Errors Generating a sine wave with a single command The AFG self test is executed with the command TST The AFG parameters tested include internal interrupt lines waveform select RAM segment sequence RAM waveform segment RAM DDS NCO operation sine wave generation arbitrary waveform generation marker generation waveform cycle and arm counters sweep timer frequency shift keying stop trigger DC analog parameters amplitude offset attenuators filters calibration DACs Upon completion of the test one of the self test codes listed in Table 1 2 is returned Table 1 2 Agilent E1445A Self Test Codes Self Test Code Description 0 Test passed 1 Test failed An error message describes the failure 46 Getting Started Chapter 1 BASIC Program Example SLFTST 4 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
194. L 3 Setup the AFG for Output SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FlXed lt frequency gt SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe USER SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt 4 Select the DAC Data Source SOURce ARBitrary DAC SOURce INTernal This command selects the source that transfers data to the DAC see DAC Sources on page 280 Use INTernal to transfer the data using the SOURce LIST 1 subsystem 252 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 10 11 12 Select the DAC Data Format SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat SIGNed This command selects the SIGNed data or UNSigned data format Setup the First Waveform Segment SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine lt length gt Store the First Waveform Segment as Signed Combined Data SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage DAC lt voltage_list gt This command stores the waveform segment into segment memory in the format set by the SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat command The data is sent as Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data can also be sent as Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Data Setup the Second Waveform Segment SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine lt length gt Store the Second Waveform Segment as Signed Combined Data SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage DAC lt voltage_list gt This command stores the waveform segment and marker bit into segment memory in the
195. L 5 V lamplitude OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for trigger state SUBEND SUB Setup_ttl5 Setup_ttl5 Subprogram which sets up trigger line TTLTrg5 to Ichange the AFG frequency shift keying frequencies COM Afg Cmd_mod OUTPUT Cmd_mod OUTP TTLT5 STAT ON lenable line TTLTrg5 OUTPUT Cmd_mod OUTP TTLT5 SOUR INT Idrive TTLTrg5 internally Loop which shifts frequency DISP Press Continue to shift frequency PAUSE DISP FOR l 1 TO 10 IF BIT 1 0 THEN OUTPUT ECmd_mod OUTP TTLT5 LEV IMM 1 level is electrically low ELSE OUTPUT ECmd_mod OUTP TTLT5 LEV IMM 0 level is electrically high END IF WAIT 1 NEXT SUBEND SUB Rst Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 COM Afg OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Errmsg Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors COM Afg Cmd_mod DIM Message 256 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform Continued on Next Page Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 151 700 REPEAT 710 OUTPUT OAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 720 ENTER Afg Code Message 730 PRINT Code Message 740 UNTIL Code 0 750 STOP 760 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program FSK2 FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example
196. LD suspends sample generation e NTernal 1 the SOURce FREQuency 1 subsystem DDS frequency synthesis e NTernal2 the SOURce FREQuency2 subsystem Divide by n frequency synthesis e TTLTrgO through 7 the VXIbus TTL trigger lines In programs where the time base trigger source is not specified the default DDS time base SOURce FREQuency 1 is used Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 197 Note Divide by N Frequency Synthesis AFG Frequency Modes Frequency Sweeping and Lists Direct frequency control that is the SOURce FREQuency commands is only available with the INTernall and INTernal2 time base sources For all other sources the output frequency depends upon the frequency of the time base source SOURce FREQuency commands will be accepted with other time base sources but become effective when the source is changed to INTernal1 or INTernal2 Fixed frequency continuous waveforms are the only signals allowed by the Divide by N frequency synthesis method SOURce FREQuency2 subsystem All waveforms except standard function sine waves can be output using Divide by N frequency synthesis There are four frequency modes available using the DDS time base SOURce FREQuency 1 The modes selected by the SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE command are e CW FIXed single frequency mode FSKey frequency shift keying mode e LIST frequency list mode e SWEep frequency sweep mode CW or FIXed
197. LL Charge_def 210 ISelect the output sequence and start the waveform 220 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER CHARGE_OUT 230 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM 280 SUB Charge_def 290 Charge_def Compute waveform exponential and define segment and 300 Isequence 310 COM Afg 320 DIM Waveform 1 4096 330 Rc 400 340 FOR T 1 TO 4096 350 IF T gt 0 AND T lt 2047 THEN 360 Waveform T 1 1 EXP T Rc 370 END IF Continued on Next Page 108 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter 3 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 IF T gt 2047 THEN Waveform T 1 1 EXP 2048 Rc 1 1 EXP T 2047 Re END IF NEXT T OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL CHARGE select segment to be defined OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 4096 reserve memory for segment OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT Waveform load waveform points OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL CHARGE_OUT Define sequence name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Define sequence size OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ CHARGE ISet execution order SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program CHARGE FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program CHARGE C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A Ge nerating a Sine The SPIKES program generates a sine wave with spikes using 4096 segments Wave with Spikes or points 5 V DWV Output applied to a
198. LS Clear Status Command ESE lt mask gt Standard Event Status Enable Command ESE Standard Event Status Enable Query ESR Standard Event Status Register Query SRE Service Request Enable Command SRE Service Request Enable Query STB Read Status Byte Query Trigger TRG Trigger Command Stored Settings RCL Recall Command SAV Save Command 428 Command Reference Chapter 8 Chapter 9 AFG Status Introduction This chapter describes the Agilent E1445A Arbitrary Function Generator status system Included is information on the status groups used by the AFG the conditions monitored by each group and information on how to enable a condition to interrupt the computer This main sections of this chapter include e Status System RegisSterS ooo ooococooocooooomoooo Page 429 The Questionable Signal Status Group Page 431 The Operation Status Group 0005 Page 435 The Standard Event Status Group Page 439 The Status Byte Status Group 040 Page 442 Status System Registers Operating conditions within the AFG are monitored by registers in various status groups The status groups implemented by the AFG are e Questionable Signal Status Group Condition Register Transition Filter Event Register Enable Register e Operation Status Group Condition Register Transition Filter Event Register
199. Law dd Oe ee a 341 ESEGM nt MARKET re uh we PE Ok eR A PA a ed 342 SEGMent MARKer POINts 0 0 0 0 0 e 343 SEGMent MARKer SPOint 0 343 SEGMentlSELSC n ald hs doen Seed eee eS al A ee oe es eros Shs 344 SEGMent VOLTage o o ee a es 345 SEGMent VOLTage DAC ooo o 346 SEGMent VOLTage POINts o o ee 347 SSEQuence ADDRess o ee ee so 347 SSEQuence CA Talos vita a dae ete Aa a 348 SSEQuence COMBined 2 2 20 02 ee ee 348 SSEQuence COMBined POINts o o o 349 Agilent E1445A User s Manual Contents 7 Chapter 8 Command Reference continued SSEQuence DEFIME iaa ee Ee ee A A de eS 350 SSEQuence DELete AEL e 351 SSEQuence DELete SELected eee 351 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt 0 2 e eee eee 352 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt POINts 2 0 2 0020 2 ee eee 353 SSEQuence PREE Soo dee ete de cee ek See A hare a ck cork Sows 353 SSEQuence MARKer 200 Sete Goda WS Ae ea Gee Re aR aa th a 354 SSEQuence MARKer POINts 2 ee ee 355 SSEQuence MARKer SPOint 2 2 ee 355 SSEQuence SELECt bye a A ew ee Bie Maal ae eR ae Bl wt ees 356 SSEQuence SHQueNCe gt Fa sek shes oa a Sk ae awe a oes Gok Se eed 357 SSEQuence SEQuence SEGMents 2 0 ee ee 357 SOURCE LISTE 20 aed Late Loe oh Maa ee he ea a ee ea e 358 FORMAati DATA as a dhe oe 6 tek ete Sek Be ee ee ce
200. List Format it Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 239 Using the Combined This section shows how to setup the AFG to receive a combined list in the List with the Signed Signed number format and how to generate the list from voltage values Number Format Transferring the Listin With the AFG set to receive codes in the Signed number format it receives the Signed Number the codes in 16 bit two s complement numbers Use the Format SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat SIGNed command to select the format Determining Codes in For outputs into matched loads and with the amplitude set to maximum the Signed Number 5 11875V the following codes generate the following outputs Format Code 0 outputs 0 V Code 32768 outputs 5 12 V or negative full scale voltage Code 32760 outputs 5 11875 V or positive full scale voltage To calculate combined DAC codes from voltage values use the formula Code voltage value 00125 shift left by 3 For example to output 2V DAC Code 2 00125 shift left by 3 12800 To output a marker at a particular point of a waveform add 2 to the combined list DAC code value of the point For example to add a marker bit of a point with a voltage value of 5 V Code 5 00125 shift left by 3 2 32000 2 32002 240 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 The COMBSIGN program shows how to store a combined list 1 e points and or marker bit of an arbitrary waveform into the AFG s
201. M SOUR INTernal Phase modulation state PM STAT O off External waveform advance TRIG SLOP POS trigger slope External stop trigger slope TRIG STOP SLOP POS Local bus mode VINS LBUS REC MODE OFF 1 on 474 Useful Tables Appendix B Error Messages Table B 6 Agilent E1445A Error Messages Code Message Description 101 Invalid character Unrecognized character in parameter 102 Syntax error Command is missing a space or comma between parameters 103 Invalid separator Parameter is separated by a character other than a comma 104 Data type error The wrong data type number character string expression was used when specifying the parameter 108 Parameter not allowed Parameter specified in a command which does not require one 109 Missing parameter Command requires a parameter s 112 Program mnemonic too long Command keyword gt 12 characters 113 Undefined header Command header keyword was incorrectly specified 121 Invalid character in number A character other than a comma or number is in the middle of a number 123 Numeric overflow A parameter value is greater than what can be represented with the number format 124 Too many digits More than 256 digits were used to specify a number 128 Numeric data not allowed A number was specified when a letter was required 131 Invalid suffix Parameter suffix incorrectly specified
202. Mediate AMPLitude 5 11875 V set and a matched output load the least significant bit LSB represents 1 25 mV The legal range for the DAC codes is 4096 through 4095 for signed numbers 0 through 8191 for unsigned numbers MINimum and MAXimum cannot be used with this command e If block format is used the most significant byte of each value must be sent first e The voltage point list length must be at least four points long but no longer than the reserved length specified by SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine If the voltage point list length is less than the reserved length only the number of points specified by the most recent voltage point and marker pulse list is generated when the waveform segment is output e The waveform segment s marker pulse list length must be the same length as its voltage point list or must have a length of 1 If not executing the INITiate IMMediate command generates Error 1104 Segment lists of different lengths e Changing marker pulse values preserves the waveform segment s voltage point list and vice versa e Executable when Initiated No e Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined SOURce VOLTage LEVel MMediate AMPLitude e RST Condition Unaffected 346 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce LIST 1 Example e Power On Condition No waveform segments are defined Defining a Waveform Segment Volta
203. NC arm slope 293 Status register 499 system registers 429 430 Status Byte register 442 status group 442 Status Register 429 430 description 381 operation 381 operation status group 435 437 questionable signal 381 questionable signal group 431 434 standard event status group 439 441 status byte status group 442 STATus Subsystem 381 388 STAT OPC INITiate 382 STAT OPERation CONDition 383 STAT OPERation ENABle 383 STAT OPERation EVENt 384 STAT OPERation NTRansition 384 STAT OPERation PTRansition 385 STAT PRESet 385 STAT QUEStionable CONDition 386 STAT QUEStionable ENABle 386 STAT QUEStionable EVENt 387 STAT QUEStionable NTRansition 387 STAT QUEStionable PTRansition 388 STB 426 Stop arm cycle 397 398 frequencies 121 123 setting 329 trigger slope setting 398 sources 398 triggers external slope 200 sources 199 using 180 182 196 Stop Trig FSK Gate In BNC gating polarity 393 STOPTRIG Example Program 181 182 Subsystems SCPI Commands ABORt 290 ARM 291 297 CALibration 298 305 INITiate 306 307 OUTPut 1 308 311 SOURce 312 380 SOURce ARBitrary 313 318 SOURce FREQuency 1 319 329 SOURce FREQuency 2 330 331 SOURce FUNCtion 332 333 SOURce LIST 1 334 357 SOURce LIST2 358 360 SOURce MARKer 361 364 SOURce PM 365 367 SOURce RAMP 368 369 SOURce ROSCillator 370 371 SOURce SWEep 372 376 SOURce VOLTage 377 380 STATus 381 388 SYSTem 389 39
204. OFF INTR 7 180 END 190 200 SUB Swp_levi 210 Swp_levi Subprogram which sets output leveling for sweeping from 220 10 TO 10 MHz 230 COM Afg 240 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 MODE SWE Isweep mode 250 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 STAR 0 Istart frequency 260 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 STOP 10E6 Istop frequency 270 OUTPUT Afg SOUR SWE COUN INF Isweep count 280 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN Ifunction 290 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 V lamplitude 300 OUTPUT Afg OUTP1 FILT LPAS FREQ 10 MHZ lfilter cutoff frequency 310 OUTPUT Afg OUTP1 FILT LPAS STAT ON lenable output filter 320 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state 330 SUBEND 340 350 SUB Rst 360 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 370 COM Afg 380 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC Ireset the AFG 390 ENTER Afg Complete 400 SUBEND 410 420 SUB Errmsg 430 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 440 COM Afg Continued on Next Page 30 Getting Started Chapter 1 450 DIM Message 256 460 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 470 B SPOLL Afg 480 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 490 OUTPUT Afg 500 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 510 REPEAT 520 OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR lread AFG error queue 530 ENTER Afg Code Message 540 PRINT Code Message 550 UNTIL Code 0 560 STOP 570 SUBEND Turning Off As mentioned earlier coupled commands must be
205. OG and the Visual C example program OUTPUNIT C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A 74 Generating Standard Waveforms Chapter 2 Using Phase Modulation Use the ac power line frequency triggering feature of the oscilloscope to trigger the waveform The dashed lines 2 VIDIV indicate output after the phase shift to a 50 Q load 2 msec DIV Phase modulation allows you to change the output deviation or phase of a sinusoid wave while it is output This only works in the sinusoid function The PHS_MOD program shows how change the deviation from 0 to 180 The commands are 1 Reset the AFG RST This command aborts any waveform output and selects the 42 9 MHz reference oscillator source DDS sample source that is trigger start source sinusoid function arm start immediate O V offset and a 50 Q output impedance and output load 2 Set the Waveform Frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 FlXed lt frequency gt This command specifies the waveform frequency You must use the direct synthesis frequency generator for the sinusoid function Refer to Table B 3 in Appendix B for the frequency limits 3 Select the Phase Modulation Source SOURce PM SOURce lt source gt This command sets the phase modulation source The command determines which source to use for a phase change The available sources are INTernal SOURce PM DEViation sets the deviation angle power on value
206. ONFigure VME RECeive ADDRess READy VINStrument IDENtity Chapter 8 Command Reference 413 SCPI Conformance Information The Agilent E1445A Arbitrary Function Generator conforms to the SCPI 1991 0 standard Table 8 2 and 8 3 list all the SCPI confirmed approved and non SCPI commands that the Agilent E1445A can execute Table 8 2 SCPI Confirmed Commands ABORt SOURce MARKer ARM STATe lt mode gt START SEQuence 1 PM LAYer 1 DEViation lt phase gt COUNt lt number gt SOURCe lt source gt LAYer2 STATe lt mode gt COUNt lt number gt UNIT IMMediate ANGLe lt units gt SLOPe lt edge gt ROSSCillator SOURce lt source gt SOURCe lt source gt SWEep SEQuence3 SWEep COUNt lt number gt COUNt lt number gt IMMediate DIRection lt direction gt LINK lt link gt POINts lt number gt SOURCe lt source gt SPACing lt mode gt TIME lt time gt INITiate IMMediate STATus OPERation OUTPut 1 CONDition FiLTer ENABle lt mask gt LPASs NTRansition lt mask gt FREQuency lt frequency gt PTRansition lt mask gt STATe lt mode gt PRESet IMPedance lt impedance gt QUEStionable STATe lt mode gt CONDition ENABle lt mask gt SOURce NTRansition lt mask gt FREQuency 1 PTRansition lt mask gt CENTer lt center_freq gt CW FlXed lt frequency gt SYSTem MODE lt mode gt ERRor SPAN lt freq_span gt V
207. OTHER LEGAL THEORY Notice The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice Agilent Technologies MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO THIS MATERIAL INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Agilent shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material This document contains proprietary information which is protected by copyright All rights are reserved No part of this document may be photocopied reproduced or translated to another language without the prior written consent of Agilent Technologies Inc Agilent assumes no responsibility for the use or reliability of its software on equipment that is not furnished by Agilent U S Government Restricted Rights The Software and Documentation have been developed entirely at private expense They are delivered and licensed as commercial computer software as defined in DFARS 252 227 7013 Oct 1988 DFARS 252 211 7015 May 1991 or DFARS 252 227 7014 Jun 1995 as a commercial item as defined in FAR 2 101 a or as Restricted computer software as defined in FAR 52 227 19 Jun 1987 or any equivalent agency regulation or contract clause whichever is applicable You have only those rights provided for such Software and Documentation by the applicable FAR or DFARS clause or the A
208. OURce ARBitrary DOWNload SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage DAC e Executable when Initiated Query form only e Coupling Group None e RST Condition Unaffected e Power On Condition SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat SIGNed Example Setting Unsigned DAC Code Format ARB DAC FORM UNS Sets unsigned format 314 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce ARBitrary DAC SOURce SOURce ARBitrary DAC SOURce lt source gt selects the DAC s data source Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt source gt discrete DPORt INTernal LBUS VXI none Comments The available sources are DPORt The Agilent E1445A s front panel Digital Port In connector LBUS The VXIbus local bus INTernal The SOURce LIST 1 subsystem or built in waveforms VXI The V XIbus data transfer bus e When driving the DAC from the VXIbus data transfer bus the address for writing the data is offset 38 decimal 26 hex in the Agilent E1445A s A24 address space e Setting the DAC data source to a setting other than INTernal disables the ARM subsystem the INITiate command the SOURce subsystem except for the SOURce ARBitrary SOURce MARKer and SOURce VOLTage subsystems and the TRIGger subsystem The Agilent E1445A immediately outputs each DAC data point when received Also the output amplitude must be specified in terms of volts or volts peak
209. OUTCES nicas a eR ee a Ga 154 AFG Frequency Modes e 155 Frequency Range Sweeping and Sampling o 155 Frequency Range Frequency Lists and FSK o o o oo 155 Sweep Count and Frequency List Repetition Count 156 Arbitrary Block Data ee ee 156 Frequency Points saya ob bathe Bl hw aoe de ede MAR A a 157 SWeep Spacing sich ae a Ge eo aed Ge PE ese 157 Sweep Direction aie igisa dete A dh de lo o HO teh da a 157 Sweep TIME sorte we Ras ee he wl ake o ete 158 Output Frequency and Sample Rate oo a 160 AC Tevelng aii RA A A Gel Se a aa Gee 160 FSK Control Sources ieas is e oe 161 Frequency Shift Delay ooo ee ee 162 Driving the TTLTrg lt n gt Trigger Lines o oo e 162 Agilent E1445A User s Manual Contents 3 Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering e 163 Chapter Contents e clio ae a ee we a ae A ee A 163 The ARM TRIG Configuration aoaaa ee 164 The ARM TRIG States 2 ee ee 164 Initiating Waveforms 25 og acdsee ah A ee IE oe Se A ee da 165 Arming the AFG i035 3 5 bide ae Eb Sled ha A Shel et 165 Arming Commands 2 E E B RE E e a E 165 Setting ATMINS SQUIC S o acn a Gee Ae ele Sow a a Seed Gees 166 BASIC Program Example EXT_ARM 000 167 Setting the Arm and Waveform Cycle Count o o o o ooo o 169 BASIC Program Example BURSD o
210. OUTPut 1 IMPedance value Indicating Open Circuit Output Load OUTP LOAD INF Indicates open circuit 310 Command Reference Chapter 8 LOAD AUTO Parameters Comments OUTPut 1 OUTPut 1 LOAD AUTO lt mode gt indicates whether the OUTPut 1 LOAD value should be coupled to track the OUTPut 1 IMPedance value Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt mode gt boolean OFF 0 ON 1 ONCE none e With OUTPut 1 LOAD AUTO ON set the OUTPut 1 LOAD value is coupled to STATe Example the OUTPut 1 IMPedance value Changing the IMPedance changes the LOAD value Specifying a value for LOAD sets AUTO OFF AUTO ONCE sets the LOAD value to the IMPedance value and sets AUTO OFF e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group Voltage e Related Commands OUTPut 1 MMPedance OUTPut 1 LOAD e RST Condition OUTPut1t LOAD AUTO ON Uncoupling OUTPut 1 IMPedance and OUTPut 1 LOAD OUTP LOAD AUTO OFF Uncouples impedance and load OUTPut 1 STATe lt mode gt closes or opens the Agilent E1445A s output relay to enable or disable the analog output Disabling the output does not stop waveform generation however the output appears as an open circuit Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt mode gt boolean OFF 0 ON 1 none Comments Executable when Initiated Yes Example e Coupling Group None
211. Outputs a marker pulse on first and fifth voltage points SEGMent MARKer POINts SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer POINts returns a number indicating the length of the currently selected waveform segment s marker pulse list Comments Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e RST Condition None e Power On Condition No waveform segments are defined Example Query Marker Pulse List Length LIST SEL ABC Selects waveform segment ABC LIST MARK POIN Queries the marker pulse list length SEGMent MARKer SPOint SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer SPOint lt point gt is a short cut method for defining a marker list with marker pulse generation enabled on a single point It creates a marker list whose length is the same as the current voltage point list and which enables marker generation only on the point specified The voltage point list must have been previously defined Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt point gt numeric see below MINimum MAXimum none The valid range for lt point gt is 1 through the length of the current voltage point list MINimum selects the first point of the current voltage point list MAXimum selects the last point Comments Executable when Initiated No e Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer Chapter 8 Command Reference 343 SOURce LIST 1 e RST Condition
212. PASs FREQuency 250 KHZ Example Setting the Low pass Filter to 10 MHz OUTP FILT FREQ 10 MHZ Selects 10 MHz output filter OUTP FILT ON Enables output filtering 308 Command Reference Chapter 8 OUTPut 1 FILTer LPASs STATe OUTPut 1 FILTer LPASs STATe lt mode gt enables or disables the output filter Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt mode gt boolean OFF 0 ON 1 none Comments Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands OUTPut 1 FILTer LPASs FREQuency e RST Condition OUTPut1 FILTer LPASs STATe OFF Example Enabling the 10 MHz Low pass Filter OUTP FILT FREQ 10 MHZ Selects 10 MHz output filter OUTP FILT ON Enables output filtering IMPedance OUTPui 1 IMPedance lt impedance gt sets the Agilent E1445A s output impedance to either 50Q or 75Q Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt impedance gt numeric 50 75 MINimum MAXimum Ohms MINimum selects 50Q output impedance MAXimum selects 75Q Comments Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group Voltage e Related Commands OUTPut 1 LOAD OUTPut 1 LOAD AUTO e RST Condition OUTPut1 IMPedance 50 Example Setting 75 Output Impedance OUTP IMP 75 Sets 75 Q output impedance Chapter 8 Command Reference 309 OUTPut 1 LOAD Parameters Comments Example OUTPut 1 LOAD lt lo
213. PIB GET or TRG commands EXTernal the front panel Ref Smpl In BNC 78 Generating Standard Waveforms Chapter 2 DDS Frequency Generator Ranges Number of Points versus Frequency Output Load Comments ECLTrg0 or 1 the VXIbus ECL trigger lines HOLD suspends sample generation TTLTrg0 through 7 the VXIbus TTL trigger lines The SOURce FREQuency 1 RANGe command selects frequency doubling of the DDS frequency generator for the SQUare TRlangle and RAMP functions This command is only used with DDS frequency1 frequency generator The lower frequency setting that 1s normal setting for the SQUare function is determined by e Reference Oscillator frequency 16 The high frequency setting for the SQUare function is determined by e Reference Oscillator frequency 8 The lower frequency setting that is normal setting for the TRIangle and RAMP functions is determined by e Reference Oscillator frequency 4 number of points The doubled frequency setting for the TRlangle and RAMP functions is determined by e Reference Oscillator frequency 2 number of points The doubled setting worsens the frequency resolution by a factor of two and introduces some sample rate jitter The number of points SOURce RAMP POINts determine the maximum frequency of the TRlangle and RAMP functions The more points results in a lower maximum frequency but with a better waveform shape The fewer points results in a higher
214. POINts value Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt range gt numeric see below MINimum MAXimum Hz MINimum selects O Hz MAXimum selects twice the maximum undoubled frequency The above values bound the legal range for lt range gt Since the maximum undoubled frequency depends on waveform shape and the reference oscillator frequency frequency doubling may be alternately enabled and disabled as these settings change if lt range gt is greater than 0 Setting SOURce FREQuency1 RANGe 0 is a good way to guarantee that frequency doubling is always disabled Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group Frequency Related Commands TRIGger STARt SOURce SOURce FREQuency 1 CENTer MODE STARt and STOP SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SOURce ROSCillator commands RST Condition SOURce FREQuency1 RANGe 0 0 Hz 326 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce FREQuency 1 Example Enabling Frequency Doubling FUNC SHAP SQU Selects square wave output ROSC SOUR INT1 Selects 42 94 MHz oscillator FREQ RANG 5MHZ Sets frequency range to 5 MHz SPAN SOURce FREQuency 1 SPAN lt freg_span gt sets the sample rate or waveform frequency span for a frequency swept waveform Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt freq_span gt numeric see below MINimum MAXimum Hz The legal range for lt freg_span gt as well as th
215. PUT Afg SOUR ROSC SOUR INT1 Ireference oscillator OUTPUT Afg TRIG STAR SOUR INT1 Ifrequency1 generator OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 MODE FSK IFSK mode OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FSK 5E6 10E6 IFSK frequencies OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FSK SOUR EXT IFSK source OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN Ifunction OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 V lamplitude OUTPUT Afg OUTP1 FILT LPAS FREQ 10 MHZ tfilter OUTPUT Afg OUTP1 FILT LPAS STAT ON lenable filter OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state SUBEND Continued on Next Page 148 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 SUB Rst ISubprogram which resets the E1445 COM Afg OUTPUT OAfg RST OPC lreset the AFG ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Fsk_info Fsk_info Subprogram which queries FSK frequencies and source COM Afg DIM Frequencies 80 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FSK Iquery FSK frequencies ENTER Afg Frequencies OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ FSK SOUR Iquery FSK source ENTER Afg Source PRINT FSK frequencies are Frequencies PRINT FSK control source is Source SUBEND SUB Errmsg Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors COM Afg DIM Message 256 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL A
216. Page Chapter 1 Getting Started 49 230 240 SUB Errmsg 250 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 COM Afg DIM Message 256 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform REPEAT OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue ENTER Afg Code Message PRINT Code Message UNTIL Code 0 STOP SUBEND 50 Getting Started Chapter 1 Gene rating From the power on reset configuration you can output a 0 16187 Vp Sine Waves 10 kHz sine wave by setting the AFG to the wait for arm state with the INITiate IMMediate command This is done with the RSTSINE program 20us DIV BASIC Program Example RSTSINE 100 110 Rst 120 130 140 150 IRE STORE RSTSINE This program outputs a sine wave based on the reset conditions lof the AFG Assign an I O path between the computer and AFG ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg Reset the AFG CALL Rst OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM output sine wave using reset conditions END SUB Rst Isubprogram which resets the AFG COM Afg OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program RSTSINE FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C C example
217. R ROSC SOUR INT set TRIG STAR SOUR and TRIG STOP SOUR both BUS TRIG STOP SOUR HOLD set TRIG STOP SOUR EXT and TRIG STAR GATE SOUR EXT TRIG STOP SOUR HOLD set TRIG STOP SOUR EXT and SOUR FREQ1 FSK SOUR EXT TRIG STOP SOUR HOLD set OUTP LOAD not equal to OUTP IMP or INF OUTP LOAD set to OUTP IMP value SOUR FUNC SHAP DC and INIT INIT ignored SOUR ARB DAC SOUR not INT and INIT INIT ignored Frequency list value out of range SOUR FREQ1 MODE FIX set SOUR FREQ1 MODE LIST and no frequency list defined SOUR FREQ1 MODE FIX set SOUR VOLT SOUR VOLT OFFS lt minimum SOUR VOLT OFFS MIN set SOUR VOLT SOUR VOLT OFFS gt maximum SOUR VOLT OFFS MAX set SOUR2 VOLT OFFS lt minimum SOUR2 VOLT OFFS MIN set 480 Useful Tables Appendix B Table B 7 Agilent E1445A Settings Conflict Error Messages continued Settings Conflict Error Messages SOUR2 VOLT OFFS gt maximum SOUR2 VOLT OFFS MAX set SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN and TRIG STAR SOUR not INT1 TRIG STAR SOUR INT1 set SOUR FREQ1 START gt SOUR FREQ1 STOP values exchanged SOUR FREQ1 STAR frequency lt minimum SOUR FREQ1 STAR MIN set SOUR FREQ1 STAR frequency gt maximum SOUR FREQ1 STAR MAX set SOUR FREQ1 STOP frequency lt minimum SOUR FREQ1 STOP MIN set SOUR FREQ1 STOP frequency gt maximum SOUR FREQ1 STOP MAX set ARM SWE SOUR TTLT lt n gt and TRIG SWE SOUR TTLT lt n gt ARM SWE
218. RB DOWN COMP Indicates download complete 318 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce FREQuency 1 SOURce FREQuency 1 Coupling Rules The SOURce FREQuency 1 subsystem controls the first of the Agilent E1445A s two frequency generators SOURce FREQuency2 controls the second generator The first generator uses a direct digital synthesis NCO technique to generate the specified frequencies It has an upper frequency limit of the reference oscillator frequency divided by 4 the second generator operates up to the reference oscillator frequency This generator has excellent resolution 01 Hz with the 42 94 MHz reference oscillator and allows frequency sweeping Sine wave output is possible only with this generator The second generator has better phase noise characteristics and permits higher frequency operation The values programmed by this subsystem are only used when TRIGger STARt SOURce is set to INTernal1 The swept commands STARt STOP CENTer and SPAN are coupled commands When sending these commands the following rules apply e If either STARt or STOP is sent singly the value of the other is preserved but the CENTer and SPAN values will change according to the following equations CENTer STARt STOP 2 SPAN STOP STARt e If either CENTer or SPAN is sent singly the value of the other is preserved but the STARt and STOP values will change according to the following equations STARt CENTer SPAN 2
219. REQuency 1 MODE lt mode gt Command headers enclosed in square brackets are optional Upper case letters in the header are required lower case letters can be omitted The brackets are not part of the command and are not sent to the instrument To aid in learning the AFG command set all headers are included in the example programs however the headers are abbreviated In an example program the previous statement with a lt mode gt parameter of FIX would appear as SOUR FREQ1 MODE FIX Many of the AFG SCPI commands are value coupled This means that the value set by one command may affect the valid limits for the values of other commands This can result in Settings Conflict errors when the program executes To prevent these errors the AFG commands must be executed in Coupling Groups The coupling groups are frequency and voltage Some commands like SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe are associated with both groups These commands are a bridge linking coupling the two groups Commands not in a coupling group must precede or follow commands in the coupling groups Executing uncoupled commands in a coupling group breaks the coupling and can cause a Settings Conflict error The coupling groups and associated commands can be found in Table B 2 in Appendix B Chapter 1 Getting Started 27 Executing Coupled Command coupling determines the AFG programming sequence The Commands Note high level sequence based on the
220. RM subsystem ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 COUNt lt number gt LAYer2 COUNt lt number gt IMMediate no query SLOPe lt edge gt SOURce lt source gt SWEep SEQuence3 COUNt lt number gt IMMediate no query LINK lt link gt SOURce lt source gt ARM is the root keyword of the command STARt SEQuence1 and SWEep SEQuence3 are second level keywords LAYer1 and LAYer2 are third level keywords and so on 284 Command Reference Chapter 8 Command Separator Abbreviated Commands Implied Optional Commands Variable Command Syntax A colon always separates one command keyword from a lower level command keyword as shown below ARM LAY2 SOUR EXT The command syntax shows most commands as a mixture of upper and lower case letters The upper case letters indicate the abbreviated spelling for the command For shorter program lines send the abbreviated form For better program readability you may send the entire command The AFG will accept either the abbreviated form or the entire command For example if a command s syntax contains the keyword COUNt then COUN and COUNT are acceptable forms Other forms of COUNt such as COU will generate an error You can use upper or lower case letters Therefore COUNT coun or Coun are all acceptable Implied or optional commands are those which appear in square brackets in the command syntax The brackets are not part of th
221. Ration NTRansition 0 Example Setting the Operation Register Negative Transition Mask STAT OPER NTR H0008 Sets the Event bit when sweeping condition is cleared 384 Command Reference Chapter 8 STATus OPERation PTRansition STATus OPERation PTRansition lt unmask gt sets the positive transition mask For each bit unmasked a 0 to 1 transition of that bit in the Operation Condition Register will set the same bit in the Operation Event Register Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt unmask gt numeric or 0 through 32767 none non decimal numeric The non decimal numeric forms are the H Q or B formats specified by IEEE 488 2 Comments Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None Related Commands STATus commands SRE STB e RST Condition Unaffected e Power on Condition STATus OPERation PTRansition 32767 Example Setting the Operation Register Positive Transition Mask STAT OPER PTR H0040 Sets the event bit when Waiting for Arm condition is set PRESet STATus PRESet initializes the Enable Registers and transition masks for the Operation Status and Questionable Signal Status Registers and sets STATus OPC INITiate ON For both Status Registers the Enable Registers are set to 0 the negative transition masks are set to 0 and the positive transition masks are set to 32767 Comments Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group No
222. Rce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt This command specifies the amplitude Refer to the section called Selecting the Amplitude Levels and Output Units on page 72 for more information 10 Set the Offset SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate OFFSet lt offset gt This command specifies the offset Refer to the section called Selecting the Amplitude Levels and Output Units on page 72 for more information 11 Initiate the Waveform INITiate IMMediate This command generates an immediate output with the arm source set to IMMediate Refer to Chapter 5 for triggering information 66 Generating Standard Waveforms Chapter 2 BASIC Program Example TRIWAVE 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 IRE STORE TRIWAVE This program outputs a 200 point 10 kHz 4V triangle wave lwith a 1V DC offset Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg Set up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 ICall the subprograms CALL Rst CALL Tri_wave WAIT 1 lallow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR END SUB Tri_wave Tri_wave Subprogram which outputs a triangle wave COM Afg OUTPUT Afg SOUR ROSC SOUR INT1 OUTPUT Afg TRIG STAR SOUR INT15 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 RANG 0
223. Related Commands TRIGger STARt SOURce SOURce FREQuency 1 subsystem SOURce LIST2 subsystem SOURce SWEep subsystem e RST Condition SOURce FREQuency1 MODE FIXed Example Setting the Frequency Sweep Mode FREQ MODE LIST Sets the frequency sweep mode Chapter 8 Command Reference 325 RANGe SOURce FREQuency 1 SOURce FREQuency 1 RANGe lt range gt enables or disables frequency doubling for non sine wave outputs When doubling is enabled the waveform is advanced on both edges instead of one edge of the square wave generated by the direct digital synthesis chip thus doubling the maximum sample output rate However since the square wave symmetry is not perfect doubling introduces some systematic jitter in the sample rate Also in doubled mode the frequency resolution worsens by a factor of two Setting lt range gt to any value less than or equal to the maximum undoubled frequency specified below disables frequency doubling Values greater than the maximum undoubled frequency enable frequency doubling Parameters Comments Arbitrary Waveforms The maximum undoubled frequency is the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 4 Square Wave Outputs The maximum undoubled frequency is the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 16 Ramps and Triangle Outputs The maximum undoubled frequency is the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 4 further divided by the SOURce RAMP
224. SEQ RAMP Isegments in sequence 490 SUBEND 500 510 SUB Rst 520 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 530 COM Afg 540 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 550 ENTER Afg Complete 560 SUBEND 570 580 SUB Wf del 590 Wf_del Subprogram which deletes all sequences and segments 600 COM Afg 610 OUTPUT Afg FUNC USER NONE 620 OUTPUT Afg LIST SSEQ DEL ALL 630 OUTPUT Afg LIST SEGM DEL ALL 640 SUBEND 650 660 SUB Errmsg Continued on Next Page Iselect no sequences Clear sequence memory IClear segment memory 216 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations Chapter 6 670 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 800 810 COM Afg DIM Message 256 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform REPEAT OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue ENTER Afg Code Message PRINT Code Message UNTIL Code 0 STOP SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program MARKTRG FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program MARKTRG C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A Chapter 6 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations 217 Operating Multiple AFGs Together The DRIFT program
225. SER NONE Iselect no sequences 1750 OUTPUT Afg LIST SSEQ DEL ALL IClear sequence memory 1760 OUTPUT Afg LIST SEGM DEL ALL IClear segment memory 1770 SUBEND 1780 1790 SUB Errmsg 1800 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 1810 COM Afg Base_addr 1820 DIM Message 256 1830 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 1840 B SPOLL Afg 1850 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 1860 OUTPUT Afg 1870 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 1880 REPEAT 1890 OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR lread AFG error queue 1900 ENTER Afg Code Message 1910 PRINT Code Message 1920 UNTIL Code 0 1930 STOP 1940 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program VXIDOWN FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program VXIDOWN C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A The above example programs use the Agilent E1406A Command Module to download the data into memory However the command module is only used to demonstrate the downloading method for those programs A better method is to use an embedded controller If you wish to use the Agilent E1406A Command Module to download data use the method described in Using Combined Waveform Segments and Segment Sequences on page 250 268 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 Downloading Data Directly into the DAC This method disables the
226. SET TRIANGLE OR RAMP WAVEFORM POINTS SOURce RAMP POINts RESET VALUE 100 SET TRIANGLE OR RAMP WAVEFORM POLARITY SOURce RAMP POLarity RESET VALUE NORMal SET WAVEFORM AMPLITUDE SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude RESET VALUE 16187V SET DC OFFSET SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate OFFSet RESET VALUE OV SET OUTPUT IMPEDANCE OUTPut 1 lMPedance RESET VALUE A 50 SET OUTPUT LOAD OUTPut 1 LOAD RESET VALUE AUTO ON LOAD COUPLED TO IMPEDANCE FREQUENCY VOL TAGE COUPLED VOLTAGE COUPLED VOLTAGE COUPLED AMPLITUDE AND OUTPUT ie ARMING SET OUTPUT FILTER OUTPut 1 FiLTer LPASs FREQuency RESET VALUE 250kHz ENABLE OUTPUT FILTER OUTPut 1 FiLTer LPASs STATe RESET VALUE OFF ENABLE OUTPUT OUTPut 1 STATe RESET VALUE ON SET THE ARM SOURCE TO IMMEDIATE ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce RESET VALUE IMMediate SET THE ARM COUNT ARM STARt LAYer2 COUNt RESET VALUE 1 SET THE REPETITION COUNT TO INFINITY ARM STARE LAYer 1 COUNt RESET VALUE INFinity INITIATE THE WAVEFORM INITiate IMMediate FINISH UNCOUPLED UNCOUPLED Figure 4 1 Commands for Frequency Sweeps Frequency Lists and FSK Keying continued from previous page Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 119 FSK Command Reference Detailed information on the commands introduced in this chap
227. SOUR IMM set SWE TIME lt minimum SWE TIME MIN set SWE TIME gt maximum SWE TIME MAX set TRIG SWE TIM lt minimum TRIG SWE TIM MIN set TRIG SWE TIM gt maximum TRIG SWE TIM MAX set SOUR FUNC SHAP not SIN and SOUR PM STAT ON SOUR PM STAT OFF set SOUR FUNC MODE LIST SWE and SOUR PM SOUR not INT SOUR PM SOUR INT set SOUR VOLT voltage lt minimum SOUR VOLT MIN set SOUR VOLT voltage gt maximum SOUR VOLT MAX set SOUR FUNC SHAP not DC and SOUR VOLT voltage lt 0 0V absolute value of SOUR VOLT set OUTP LOAD INF and current SOUR VOLT unit W DBM OR DBMW SOUR VOLT AMPL MIN in V set SOUR ARB DAC SOUR not INT or SOUR FUNC SHAP USER and current SOUR VOLT unit not V VPK SOUR VOLT AMPL MIN in V set SOUR FUNC SHAP DC and current SOUR VOLT unit not V SOUR VOLT value converted to volts Appendix B Useful Tables 481 Table B 7 Agilent E1445A Settings Conflict Error Messages continued Settings Conflict Error Messages when Agilent E1445A is used with the Agilent E1446A Amplifier OUTP2 ATT 20 and OUTP2 IMP 0 OUTP2 IMP 50 set SOUR2 VOLT OFFS lt minimum SOUR2 VOLT OFFS MIN set SOUR2 VOLT OFFS gt maximum SOUR2 VOLT OFFS MAX set 482 Useful Tables Appendix B Appendix C Register Based Programming Appendix Contents The Agilent E1445A Arbitrary Function Generator AFG is a message based device As such
228. SOURce PM SOURce is set to INTernal The query form returns the amplitude in terms of the default units specified by the SOURce PM UNIT ANGLe command Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt phase gt numeric n through x MINimum MAXimum see below MINimum selects 1 MAXimum selects n The default units for DEViation are specified by the SOURce PM UNIT ANGLe command Acceptable units are lt suffix_multiplier gt RAD radians and lt suffix_multiplier gt DEG degrees Comments Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None Related Commands SOURce PM SOURce SOURce PM UNIT ANGLe e RST Condition SOURce PM DEViation O Example Setting Phase Deviation PM DEV 180 DEG Sets deviation to 180 Chapter 8 Command Reference 365 SOURce PM SOURce SOURce PM SOURce lt source gt selects the source for phase modulation data Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt source gt discrete DPORt INTernal LBUS VXI none Comments The available sources are DPORt The Agilent E1445A s front panel Digital Port In connector LBUS The VXIbus local bus INTernal The SOURce PM DE Viation command VXI The VXIbus data transfer bus When the source for phase deviation data is the VXIbus data transfer bus the least significant byte of the data should be written either in
229. SPACE SPACE e SPACE Extended Register xk 0816 Protocol Signal Register 0616 Offset_Register ye IFOO0015 IFCOOO16 E 0416 Status Control Register 2 080 768 S 0216 Device Type Register 20000016 N 0016 ID Register IF000016 Base Address IFC00016 Logical Address 64 16 E1445A or A16 REGISTER MAP 2 080 768 Logical Address 64 19 00000016 Register Address Base address Register Offset Figure C 1 E1445A AFG Registers within A16 Address Space Appendix C Register Based Programming 485 In a system using a V 360 Agilent E1480 controller for example the base address of the configuration registers is computed as C00016 LADDR 64 16 or 49 152 LADDR 64 where C00016 49 152 is the starting location of the register addresses LADDR is the AFG s logical address and 64 is the number of address bytes in A16 per VXI device The AFG s factory set logical address is 80 If this address is not changed the base address of the AFG s configuration registers in A16 is C00016 80 64 16 C00016 140016 D40016 or decimal 49 152 80 64 49 152 5120 54 272 Given the base address and number of the Offset Register 06 in Figure C 1 the base address of the operational registers in A24 can be determined as in the following program Reading the Offset Register 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 ASSIGN Afg to 1680 Path from V 360 to AFG via VXI backplane COM Afg Base_add
230. SSEQuence MARKer e RST Condition Unaffected e Power On Condition No segment sequences are defined Creating a Single Segment Marker List LIST SSEQ SEL ABC Selects segment sequence ABC LIST SSEQ DEF 8 ABC is 8 points long LIST SSEQ SEQ A B C D E F G H Defines segment sequence LIST SSEQ MARK SPO 3 Enables marker pulse on segment C Chapter 8 Command Reference 355 SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect lt name gt selects a segment sequence for subsequent SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence subsystem commands This command will define the segment sequence name if it is undefined but does not reserve any segment sequence memory Parameters Comments Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt name gt character data 1 through 12 characters NONE none NONE selects no segment sequence Legal names must start with an alphabetic character and contain only alphabetic numeric and underscore _ characters Alphabetic character case upper versus lower is ignored No segment sequence may have the same name as any waveform segment A maximum of 128 segment sequence names may exist at any time Use the SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete ALL or SELected commands to delete names that are no longer needed Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None Power On Condition SOURce LIST1 SSEQuence SELect NONE RST Condition Unaffected Exam
231. ST 1 FORMat DATA lt format gt lt length gt specifies the format of numeric waveform segment and segment sequence list return data in the SOURce LIST 1 subsystem The available numeric list return data formats are ASCii Returns numeric data as an NR1 or NR3 number as defined in IEEE 488 2 PACKed Returns data in IEEE 488 2 definite block format Internal to the block the format depends on the query being executed as list below The most significant byte of each value is always sent first SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined The data is returned in the format described under the SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined command SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer The data is returned in 16 bit integer format SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage The data is returned in IEEE 754 64 bit floating point format SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage DAC The data is returned as 16 bit signed or unsigned DAC codes as specified by the SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat command SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt The data is returned in 16 bit integer format SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence COMBined The data is returned in the format described under the SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence COMBined command SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer The data is returned in 16 bit integer format Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt format gt discrete ASCii P
232. ST is set the SOURce SWEep TIME or the TRIGger SWEep TIMer value remains the same depending on which command was most recently sent The other value is changed based on the new frequency list length e Executable when Initiated Query form only e Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands TRIGger STARt SOURce SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE SOURce SWEep e RST Condition Unaffected e Power On Condition No frequency list is defined Defining a Frequency List LIST2 FREQ 1000 10e3 100e3 1 MHz Defines the frequency list Chapter 8 Command Reference 359 SOURce LIST2 FREQuency POINts SOURce LIST2 FREQuency POINts returns a number that shows the length of the currently defined frequency list Comments Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e RST Condition Unaffected e Power On Condition No frequency list is defined Example Query the Frequency List Length LIST FREQ2 POIN Queries frequency list length 360 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce MARKer SOURce MARKer The SOURce MARKer subsystem controls Which signal is routed to the Marker Out BNC The polarity of the Marker Out BNC signal Which signals if any are routed to the VXIbus ECL trigger lines Subsystem Syntax SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt FEED lt source gt STATe lt mode gt FEED lt source gt POLarity lt polarity gt STATe lt mode gt ECLTrg lt n gt FEED
233. ST2 FORMat DATA ASCii Setting REAL Return Data Format LIST FORM REAL Sets real format 358 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce LIST2 FREQuency Parameters Comments Example SOURce LIST2 FREQuency lt freg_list gt defines the list of sample rates or frequencies to be generated when SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE is set to LIST The lt freq_list gt has one of the two following formats 1 A comma separated list of frequency values 2 An IEEE 488 2 definite or indefinite length block containing the frequency values in IEEE 754 64 bit floating point format The maximum length of the list is 256 frequency values The legal range for frequency values is given below Default units are hertz MINimum and MAXimum cannot be used with this command The minimum frequency is 0 Hz for all waveform shapes Arbitrary Waveforms and Sine Wave Outputs The maximum frequency is the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 4 Square Wave Outputs The maximum frequency is the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 16 Ramps and Triangle Outputs The maximum frequency is the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 4 further divided by the SOURce RAMP POINts value For non sine wave outputs multiply the maximum frequency by 2 if frequency doubling is in effect see the SOURce FREQuency 1 RANGe command e When changing the frequency list length when SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE LI
234. STAR LAY2 SOUR HOLD hold off arm signal 380 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM OPC Iset wait for arm state 390 ENTER Afg Ready 400 OUTPUT Afg ARM STAR LAY2 IMM larm AFG output signal 410 SUBEND 420 430 SUB Afg_ready 440 Afg_ready Subprogram which is called when the AFG enters the 450 Iwait for arm state 460 COM Afg 470 Read Status Byte Register and clear service request bit RQS 480 B SPOLL Afg 490 DISP AFG is in the wait for arm state press Continue to send ARM 500 PAUSE 510 DISP 520 SUBEND 530 540 SUB Rst 550 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 560 COM Afg 570 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 580 ENTER Afg Complete 590 SUBEND Comments e Clearing the Operation Status Event Register line 140 allows new events to be latched into the register Clearing the service request bit bit 6 RQS in the Status Byte Register line 480 when the interrupt is serviced allows the bit to be set again when the next summary bit is received e STAT OPC INIT OFF line 180 allows the OPC command line 380 to execute following INIT IMM rather than waiting for the AFG to return to the Idle state Pending Operation Flag set false Thus when the AFG enters the wait for arm state following INIT IMM OPC executes and allows time for the interrupt to be serviced Afg_ready called before line 400 executes Refer to page 382 for more information on the STATus OPC INITiate command Visual BASIC an
235. Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe lt shape gt 3 Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel MMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt 4 Set the arm source ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce lt source gt 5 Set the slope of the external arm signal ARM STARt LAYer2 SLOPe lt edge gt 6 Set the arm count ARM STARt LAYer2 COUNt lt number gt 7 Set the number of waveform cycles burst count ARM STARt LAYer 1 COUNt lt number gt 00 Place the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate MMediate Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 169 BASIC Program Example BURST 1 IRE STORE BURST 2 This program sets the arm count to infinity and the cycle count 3 Icount to 5 The arm source is set to external and a 1 kHz square 4 Iwave is applied to the AFG s Start Arm In BNC connector The 5 AFG outputs a 5 cycle burst on each positive edge of the external 6 larm signal 7 10 Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM Afg 40 50 ISet up error checking 60 ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg 70 ENABLE INTR 7 2 80 OUTPUT Afg CLS 90 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 100 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 110 120 ICall the subprograms 130 CALL Rst 140 CALL Burst_arm 150 160 WAIT 1 lallow interrupt to be serviced 170 OFF INTR 7 180 END 190 200 SUB Burst_arm 210 Burst_arm Subprogram which outputs a 5 cycle burst on each 220 Ipositive edge of an external arm signal 230 COM Afg
236. Signed format set by the SOURce JARBitrary DAC FORMat SIGNed command The data is sent as Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data can also be sent as Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Data In this example the marker bit is set at the center of the triangle Select the First Waveform Segment and Return its Address SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent ADDRess These commands selects the first waveform segment and then returns the address Divide the address by 8 and store it into the first element of the 32 bit Integer data array that is used to transfer the sequence list to the AFG Add the First Waveform Segment s Repetition Count Add the repetition count number of times the waveform segment is to be executed of the first waveform segment to the value in the first element of the data array Select the Second Waveform Segment and Return its Address SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent ADDRess These commands selects the second waveform segment and then returns the address Divide the address by 8 and store it into the second element of the data array Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 253 13 Add the Marker Enable Add the value of the marker enable bit of the second waveform segment to the value in the second element of the data array 14 Add the Second Waveform Segment s Repetition Count Add the repetition count number of times the waveform segment
237. T Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Isequence size OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ RAMP Isegment order SUBEND SUB Rst Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 COM Afg OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Wf_del Wf_del Subprogram which deletes all sequences and segments COM Afg OUTPUT Afg FUNC USER NONE Iselect no sequences OUTPUT Afg LIST SSEQ DEL ALL IClear sequence memory OUTPUT Afg LIST SEGM DEL ALL IClear segment memory SUBEND SUB Errmsg Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors COM Afg DIM Message 256 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform REPEAT OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR lread AFG error queue ENTER Afg Code Message PRINT Code Message UNTIL Code 0 STOP SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program SIGN_DAT FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program SIGN_DAT C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A These programs are very similar to the example programs used in Chapter 3 The only difference is that this program transfers the segment data as DAC codes in the Signed number format instead of voltage values 228 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 Using Unsigned Data to Genera
238. T 1 SEGMent VOLTage SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage lt voltage_list gt defines the series of output voltage points that constitute a waveform segment The points are specified in terms of volts Parameters Comments The lt voltage_list gt may be either a comma separated list of voltage values or an TEEE 488 2 definite or indefinite length block containing the values in IEEE 754 64 bit floating point format The legal range for voltage values is specified by the SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude command Default units are volts MINimum and MAXimum cannot be used with this command If block format is used the most significant byte of each value must be sent first The voltage point list length must be at least four points long but no longer than the reserved length specified by SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine If the voltage point list length is less than the reserved length only the number of points specified by the most recent voltage point and marker pulse list is generated when the waveform segment is output The waveform segment s marker pulse list length must be the same length as its voltage point list or must have a length of 1 If not executing the INITiate IMMediate command generates Error 1104 Segment lists of different lengths Changing marker pulse values preserves the waveform segment s voltage point list and vice versa The voltage values specified by this command are scaled r
239. T Condition SOURce FUNCtion USER NONE Selecting an Arbitrary Waveform FUNC USER Selects arbitrary waveform mode FUNC USER ABC Selects segment sequence Chapter 8 Command Reference 333 SOURce LIST 1 SOURce LIST 1 The SOURce LIST 1 subsystem defines the waveform segments and segment sequence for arbitrary waveform generation The Agilent E1445A can simultaneously store up to 256 waveform segments and up to 128 segment sequences Subsystem syntax SOURce LIST 1 FORMat DATA lt format gt lt length gt SEGMent ADDRess query only CATalog query only COMBined lt combined_list gt POINts query only DEFine lt length gt DELete ALL no query SELected no query FREE query only MARKer lt marker_list gt POINts query only SPOint lt point gt no query SELect lt name gt VOLTage lt voltage_list gt DAC lt voltage_list gt POINts query only SSEQuence ADDRess query only CATalog query only COMBined lt combined_list gt POINts query only DEFine lt ength gt DELete ALL no query SELected no query DWELI COUNt lt repetition_list gt POINts query only FREE query only MARKer lt marker_list gt POINts query only SPOint lt point gt no query SELect lt name gt SEQuence lt segment_list gt SEGMents query only 334 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce LIST 1 FORMat DATA SOURce LI
240. TAR SOURCE mii asco GE te ela lea ee Ee ee a ts 396 STOPEIMMedt ate cortita ard ak eth A eee oh tors Se 397 SSTOP SLOPG eae ok ea we hk HR Ea we A eek A ek a eek 398 ISTOP SOURCE 0000 cet aoe Gece Bae Ee Be E A de Oe ed ee ped ee le 398 SWEep IMMediatel A E E E EREE 399 SWED LIN sorori eua o a a A o 400 SWEep SOURCE n wia ee de a A R rd EA di ah 401 S WEep TIMer 0 O tp e A 402 VINStrUmeMd 5 sb Aw ee eee eet Swe E R a te ee ee 403 CONFigure LBUS MODE 0 e a A y 403 CONFigure LBUS MODE AUTO o o e 404 CONFigure TEST CONFigure o o e 405 CONFigure TEST DATA 0200200002 eee ee eee 406 CONFigure VME MODE 00 e 406 CONFigure VME RECeive ADDRess DATA 2 2 200 407 CONFigure VME RECeive ADDRess READy oo 407 IDENA Teis hee he fe OR ete te eA el ae aa ge be 408 SCPI Command Quick Reference 2 0000 eee ee ee eee 409 SCPI Conformance Information 20000 e eee ee eee 414 TEEE 488 2 Common Commands 00 0b eee ee eee 416 ICES y fcc he aa tes hv tet hgh A A as eA oe Sect dE vk ek ee Hel dig Sou debida MP O thet a 416 DMG Ave tee sate tan eee Rf Ok ee eo he SP UR OO te te ee ae BG 416 EMC atid EMG hr ye cue as Goi Get Groh aia Gi a a ANE 4 ae dG hea Ghee 417 ESE and SESE bo vale ee ae EE EE eed BEARS EA oe ed 417 ESRI le hint ony i ae ANA at o ha ho aed aati ho iio bo E of
241. TOP 700 SUBEND The start stop center and span values returned are START 1 000000000E 003 STOP 2 100000000E 004 CENTER 1 100000000E 004 SPAN 2 000000000E 004 Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program SMPLSWP2 FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program SMPLSWP2 C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 129 Freq uency Lists When specifying a large frequency list up to 256 frequencies the ease in Using Definite and Which the list is specified and the speed at which data is loaded into the Indefinite Length Arbitrary Blocks AFG is enhanced by using definite or indefinite length arbitrary blocks The data in an arbitrary block is in IEEE 754 64 bit floating point format The LISTDEF program sends a definite length arbitrary block of 100 frequencies to the AFG Once the frequencies are received the AFG steps through the list at one frequency per second At the end of the listing are program modifications for sending the data in an indefinite length arbitrary block Using the flowchart in Figure 4 1 as a guide the steps of this program are 1 Select the reference oscillator SOURce JROSCillator SOURce lt source gt Select the frequency generator which allows frequency lists hopping TRIGger STARt SOURce lt source gt Select the frequency list mode
242. TPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 1 1V Call the subprogram which defines the Sin x x waveform and loutput sequence CALL Sinx_def ISelect the output sequence and start the waveform OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER SIN_X_OUT OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END Continued on Next Page Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 105 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 SUB Sinx_def Sinx_def Define Sin x x waveform and output sequence COM Afg DIM Waveform 1 4096 FOR l 2047 TO 2048 IF 1 0 THEN 1 E 38 Waveform 2048 SIN 2 PI 53125 1 256 53125 1 256 159154943092 NEXT OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL SIN_X select segment to be defined OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 4096 lreserve memory for segment OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT Waveform load waveform points OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL SIN_X_OUT Iselect sequence to be defined OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Ispecify segments in sequence OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ SIN_X set segment order in sequence SUBEND SUB Rst ISubprogram which resets the E1445 COM Afg OUTPUT Afg RST OPC reset the AFG ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Errmsg Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors
243. TPUT Afg_s INIT IMM Iwait for arm state OUTPUT Afg_s STAT OPC INIT OFF OPC lallow setup to complete ENTER Afg_s Complete SUBEND SUB Rst Rst Subprogram which resets the AFGs COM Afg_m Afg_s OUTPUT Afg_m RST OPC lreset the master AFG ENTER Afg_m Complete OUTPUT OAfg_s RST OPC lreset the servant AFG ENTER Afg_s Complete SUBEND SUB Errmsg Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors COM Afg_m Afg_s DIM Message 256 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg_m IF B THEN Imaster error End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg_m OUTPUT Afg_m ABORT labort output waveform PRINT Master AFG PRINT REPEAT OUTPUT Afg_m SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue ENTER Afg_m Code Message Continued on Next Page Chapter 6 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations 221 910 920 930 940 950 960 970 980 990 1000 1010 1020 1030 1040 1050 1060 1070 1080 PRINT Code Message UNTIL Code 0 STOP ELSE Iservant error B SPOLL Afg_s End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg_s OUTPUT Afg_s ABORT labort output waveform PRINT Servant AFG PRINT REPEAT OUTPUT Afg_s SYST ERR lread AFG error queue ENTER Afg_s Code Message PRINT Code Message UNTIL Code 0 STOP END IF SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program DRIFT FRM is in directory Visual C C Program
244. TrgO or ECLTrg1 sources for custom frequency values However any reference oscillator source can be used with any frequency generator Sample Sources e The USER function operates with any of the sample sources selected by the TRIGger STARt SOURce command The INTernal 1 source automatically selects the DDS frequency generator The INTernal2 source selects the Divide_by_N frequency generator The other sources are not used with any frequency generator The sample frequency thus depends on the externally generated sample signal The different sample sources are INTernal 1 power on value selects the DDS frequency generator INTernal2 selects the Divide by N frequency generator BUS the GPIB GET or TRG commands EXTernal the front panel Ref Smpl In BNC ECLTrg0 or ECLTrg1 the VXIbus ECL trigger lines HOLD suspends sample generation TTLTrg0 through 7 the VXIbus TTL trigger lines Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 115 Frequency1 Generator Range Returning the Waveform Segment Names Determining the Waveform Segment Size Returning the Segment Sequence List Names Returning the Repetition Count List Length e The SOURce FREQuency 1 RANGe command allows for higher sample frequency operations of the USER function This command is only used with frequency1 generator If set to 0 MINimum the normal setting the maximum sample frequency is the Reference Oscillator frequency 4 e If set to MAX
245. UE ON AMPLITUDE AND OUTPUT SET PHASE MODULATION UNITS SOURce PM UNIT ANGLe RESET VALUE RADians SET PHASE MODULATION DEVIATION SOURce PM DEViation RESET VALUE O RADians PHASE MODULATION UNCOUPLED SET THE ARM SOURCE ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce RESET VALUE IMMediate SET THE ARM COUNT ARM STARt LAYer2 COUNt RESET VALUE 1 ARMING SET THE REPETITION COUNT ARM STARt LAYer 1 COUNt RESET VALUE INFinity INITIATE THE WAVEFORM INITiate IMMediate UNCOUPLED Figure 2 1 Commands for Generating Standard Waveforms continued from previous page Chapter 2 Generating Standard Waveforms 55 Generating DC Voltages The DCVOLTS program outputs a 5 Vdc voltage The commands are 1 Reset the AFG RST This command aborts any waveform output and selects the sinusoid function output impedance and output load to 50 Q Select the Function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe DC This command selects the DC function Set the Amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt This command specifies the amplitude Refer to the section called Selecting the Amplitude Levels and Output Units on page 72 for more information BASIC Program Example DCVOLTS IRE STORE DCVOLTS This program outputs a 5V DC voltage Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM
246. UT Afg 480 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 490 REPEAT 500 OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR lread AFG error queue 510 ENTER Afg Code Message 520 PRINT Code Message 530 UNTIL Code 0 540 STOP 550 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program DIV_N FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program DIV_N C is in directory Versions VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 175 Lock Stepping The LOCKSTEP program configures two AFGs such that they share the Mu Itiple AFGs _ same trigger source A master AFG is programmed to output its triggers on ECLTrg trigger line 0 The trigger source of a servant AFG is set to ECLTrg 0 Thus both AFGs output waveforms sin x x at the same frequency and changing the frequency of the master changes the frequency of the servant simultaneously E1445A ra Logical Address Oscilloscope AFG Master CH A 5 V DIV AFG Slave CH B 5 V DIV ECLTO Line on Backplane Output applied to a 502 load value 2 msec DI Channel A ddress 88 The programming sequence for lock stepping multiple AFGs is given below 1 Set the reference oscillator source for the master and slave as desired or use the default source SOURce ROSCilla
247. Using Combined Waveform Segments and Segment Sequences Using Combined Segment Lists and Combined Segment Sequence Lists to generate arbitrary waveforms is one of the fastest methods to download or transfer waveform segments and segment sequences to the AFG Both can be downloaded to the AFG either as Definite Length or Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Data The Combined Segment Lists transfers both the arbitrary waveform segment data and marker pulses to the AFG The lists are sent as 16 bit Integers in either the Signed or Unsigned number format See Using Combined Signed Data on page 239 for more information The Combined Segment Sequence List selects the waveform segments enables the marker output and sets the repetition count for each waveform segment to be output Each data code in a Combined Segment Sequence List is sent as a 32 bit Integer in the Unsigned number format Combined Seg ment Figure 7 2 shows a single 32 bit integer used for a Combined Segment Sequence List Sequence List Bits 0 through 16 select the combined or regular waveform Format segments for output bit 18 enables the marker output and bits 20 through 31 sets the repetition count A Combined Segment Sequence List determines the order and how often a waveform segment is to be executed Thus each waveform segment marker enable and repetition count has a unique data code 32 Bit Combined List that defines the segment lists to be executed enables the ma
248. V or VPK e Use the SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat command to select the format of the data two s complement or unsigned when directly driving the DAC from the VXIbus local bus the front panel Digital Port or the VXI backplane or when programming waveforms using DAC codes via the SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined or SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage DAC commands e Executable when Initiated Query form only e Coupling Group Frequency and voltage e Related Commands VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE e RST Condition SOURce ARBitrary DAC SOURce INTernal Example Setting the DAC Data Source ARB DAC SOUR DPOR Selects front panel Digital Port connector as source Chapter 8 Command Reference 315 SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload lt source gt lt dest gt lt length gt enables the direct download mode to the waveform segment or segment sequence memory It selects the download source waveform segment or segment sequence name and number of points The available download sources are DPORt The Agilent E1445A s front panel Digital Port In connector Only waveform segment memory may be downloaded via this source LBUS The VXIbus local bus Only waveform segment memory may be downloaded via this source VXI The VXIbus data transfer bus Waveform The waveform segment data consists of a single 16 bit word for each voltage point Segmen
249. Ximum selects 5 0 V Arbitrary Waveform Ramp Sine Square and Triangle Outputs When a matched load has been specified if the output amplitude in volts is greater than 1 02426 V peak MINimum selects the greater of 6 025 V output amplitude value and 5 0 V rounded down if needed to a multiple of 2 5 mV MAXimum selects the lesser of 6 025 V output amplitude value and 5 0 V again rounded down If the output amplitude in volts is less than or equal to 1 02426 V MINimum selects the greater of 1 205 V output amplitude value and 99993 V rounded down if needed to a multiple of 499966 mV MAXimum selects the lesser of 1 205 V output amplitude value and 99993 V again rounded down For all waveform shapes when an open circuit load has been specified double all the above voltages The above values bound the legal range for lt offset gt Comments Related Commands SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group Voltage e RST Condition SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate OFFSet 0 V Example Setting Offset Voltage VOLT OFFS 3 Sets offset voltage to 3 volts 380 Command Reference Chapter 8 STATus STATus The STATus subsystem controls the SCPI defined Operation and Questionable Signal status registers Each is comprised of a Condition Register an Event Register an enable mask and negative and positive transition filters Each Status Reg
250. YE 358 EREQUE COY lt s ue eet cid a Bel ance O Ee a a tN Gee E e 359 FREQuency POINIS gt 24 che te gis toe RA ee ee Bee ek ee ae 360 SOURce MARRET ofc a ete tee ek Be Sod ek eter de O ee 361 ECL Tre lt A gt FEED ot a a a a eh eed EA a he ee nd 361 ECLTre lt n gt STAT ics sc Ge eee Be a e SA ae ee 362 FEED ut At BEE Ga Pee E ety Tae Pah se Ae ge Sok ey A 363 O wert oe OR 364 ESTARE geil ace op art eae A as Ge T SEG OH D A RAS 364 SOURCE PM 23 002 2 On A Pal ON EI ES ee PA Bh 365 DEViation La oia a Bast shes Dhak ewe ad OHSS Hees 365 SOURCE elo ma Bodh ne eth de pace sesh an Pose Aol dete doa wee ess 366 STATE amp ct ek AG Ea ah a a Se AE heed eg ee A eek 367 SUNTTEANGEE voice ee tee ek Be a Wa ee Be ils Ga Gee 367 SOURces RAMP si lea bt aa aa Ga oe eR ree eee 368 PONS iaa AS ey He PS a caw Pan E Res E nce da Sh dae te tee Ty LE a 368 POL ALY a aa a Ry eae Gel he ot Ob eee ES Sek a 369 SOURce JROSCillator 2 ee 370 FREQuency EXTemal oso a ka ee ee a 370 SOURCE 16 otk i a Ba oe a RA Se MD SE a BS ae 371 ISOUR ce IS WEP aici ddd Hie a BS AA ioe SS Ok So SR aides 372 SWEEP COUNTY drisk Satie deh Pee hd Ge ee OM a a ee 372 DIRCCHON dia Bek he ee Ae ke A hw Boe a A tt Shee te dal cos ds 373 BOINA Pe veg tee Pa ee Pe ea O the Oe ee ct Ba a 374 SPACE alae Rt Belge Ges hath Gets So ee Od e eee Ee Geet aed 375 TIME La 24 E ele BREA EAE EOE eed A EAL A in 376 SOURce VOUT ase 4 avs abla oo ee
251. _LEVL FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program SWP_LEVL C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A 146 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 Frequency Shift Keying FSK Using the FSK Control Source Note Frequency shift keying FSK changes the frequency of the output waveform or sample rate based on the signal level of the frequency shift keying control source FSK frequencies can range from 0 0 Hz to 10 MHz The command subsystems associated with frequency shift keying include e SOURce ROSCillator e TRiGger e SOURce FREQuency 1 FSK mode and related commands The FSK1 program shows the basic steps involved in setting up and using the frequency shift keying function of the AFG A 5 V 1 MHz square wave control signal is applied to the AFG s front panel FSK port Output frequencies of 5 MHz and 10 MHz occur as the level of the 1 MHz signal changes When the frequency shifts there is a delay of 20 reference oscillator clock cycles before the frequency is active This delay occurs with all reference oscillator sources Using the flowchart in Figure 4 1 as a guide the steps of this program are 1 Select the 42 9 MHz reference oscillator SOURce JROSCillator SOURce lt source gt 2 Select the frequency generator which allows frequency shift keying TRIGger STARt SOURce lt source gt 3 Select
252. _size time_out run_query seg memory printf nSegment Memory Available Used s mem_size Query sequence memory if lipromptf addr SOUR LIST1 SSEQ FREEAn t mem_size time_out run_query seq memory printf nSequence Memory Available Used s mem_size OK KK KK KR KK IK KK KK IK IK IK KK IK IK IK IK IK IK IK IK KK KK KKK KK void rst_clr void int into Executes the commands that resets the AFG and clears its error register if lipromptf addr RST OPC n i amp into time_out rst_clr send RST commana if lipromptf addr CLS OPCAn i amp into time_out rst_clr send CLS command OK KKK KK KK KK IK KK IK KK IK IK IK IK IK IK IK IK IK IK IK KK KK KK KK void check_error char func_tion char into 257 Continued on Next Page 44 Getting Started Chapter 1 ipromptf addr SYSTem ERRorAn t into Query error register if atoi into Determine if error is present If errors present print and exit printf n nThe program detected the following error s n n while atoi into printf s t in function s n into func_tion ipromptf addr SYSTem ERRor n t into Query error register Close communication iclose addr Release SICL resource allocation not needed for Windows NT _ siclcleanup printf n nClose the window or press Alt F4 to exit exit 1 KKK KK KK KK IK KK
253. a o o o e e 245 Using the Combined List with the Unsigned Number Format 245 BASIC Program Example COMBUNS o o o o o o oo e 247 Using Combined Waveform Segments and Segment Sequences 250 Combined Segment Sequence List Format o o e 250 BASIC Program Example COMBSEQ o o o 255 Using the VXIbus Backplane o o ee 259 Downloading Segment Data o o 259 Downloading Segment Data into Memory o o o oo e 259 BASIC Program Example VXIDOWN o o o 264 Downloading Data Directly into the DAC o ooo oo 269 BASIC Program Example VXISRCE o e 270 Agilent E1445A User s Manual Contents 5 Chapter 7 High Speed Operation continued Using the Front Panel s Digital Port In Connector o o ooo 272 BASIC Program Example WAVSELFP o 272 Digital Port In Connector Pinout o o 278 Using the Digital Port In Connector to Select a Sequence 279 Using the Digital Port In Connector to Download Data 279 High Speed Operation Program Comments o o e 280 Amplitude Effects on DAC Codes o o oo e e o 280 Incorrect AFG Operation from Incorrect DAC Codes oo 280 DAC SQUICES 0 h srs o ll o e ds a a et a 280 Down
254. able when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands OPC OPC RST WAI ABORT INITiate IMMediate STATus PRESet e RST Condition Unaffected e Power on Condition STATus OPC INITiate ON Example Setting Immediate Completion Mode STAT OPC INIT OFF Completes immediately for OPC etc 382 Command Reference Chapter 8 STATus OPERation CONDition STATus OPERation CONDition returns the contents of the Operation Condition Register Reading the register does not affect its contents Comments Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands STATus commands SRE STB e RST Condition All bits of the Operation Condition Register are cleared as a result of the state present after RST Example Querying the Operation Condition Register STAT OPER COND Queries the Operation Condition Register OPERation ENABle STATus OPERation ENABle lt unmask gt specifies which bits of the Operation Event Register are included in its Summary bit The Summary bit is the bit for bit logical AND of the Event Register and the unmasked bit s Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt unmask gt numeric or 0 through 32767 none non decimal numeric The non decimal numeric forms are the H Q or B formats specified by TEEE 488 2 Comments Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands STATus commands
255. ac code positions NEXT Continuously write data in 16 bit words to the dac via the VXlbus and High Speed Data register LOOP FOR l 1 TO 128 WRITEIO 16 Addr Waveform l NEXT END LOOP SUBEND SUB Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 COM Afg Addr OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND Appendix C Register Based Programming 507 Comments e To simplify the program SCPI commands are included so that the only register written to is the High Speed Data Register This program executes as intended when those SCPI commands which configure the AFG are executed before the register is written to e This program was written using the system configuration described on page 484 Data is written to the DAC at a rate of 115 us per amplitude point which is limited by the execution speed of BASIC Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program VXISRCE FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program VXISRCE C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A 508 Register Based Programming Appendix C CLS 47 416 DMC 416 EMC 417 EMC 417 ESE 417 ESE 417 ESR 418 GMC 418 IDN 419 LMC 419 LRN 48 420 OPC 420 OPC 421 PMC 421 PUD 422 PUD 422 RCL 423 RMC 423 RST 47 424 SAV 424 SRE 425 SRE 425 STB 426 TRG 426 TST 46 426 WAI 427 32 Bit Int
256. ad gt indicates whether the actual load applied to the Agilent E1445A s Output 50 750 is either matched to the output impedance specified by OUTPut 1 IMPedance or is an open circuit The output voltage into an open circuit is twice that into a matched load Setting OUTPut 1 LOAD INFinity compensates for this effect so that the SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage and SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude and OFFSet commands will output the specified voltages into an open circuit Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt load gt numeric 50 75 9 9E 37 INFinity Ohms MINimum MAXimum MINimum selects 50 Q load impedance MAXimum selects 75 Q Use 9 9E 37 or INFinity to indicate an open circuit output e The lt oad gt value specified by this command either must be the same as that specified by OUTPut 1 IMPedance or must be 9 9E 37 or INFinity or Error 221 Settings conflict will be generated e With OUTPut 1 LOAD AUTO ON set the OUTPut 1 LOAD value is coupled to tracks the OUTPut 1 MPedance value Changing the IMPedance changes the LOAD value Specifying a value for LOAD sets AUTO OFF e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group Voltage e Related Commands OUTPut 1 IMPedance OUTPut 1 LOAD AUTO SOURce LIST subsystem SOURce VOLTage subsystem e RST Condition OUTPut 1 LOAD AUTO ON is set and the OUTPut 1 LOAD value is coupled to the
257. alue the VXIbus ECL trigger lines e If using either the EXTernal or ECLTrg0 or 1 reference oscillator sources enter the source frequency to the AFG using SOURce ROSCillator FREQuency EXTernal lt frequency gt e For best frequency linearity use the 42 9 MHz that is INTernal 1 reference oscillator source with the DDS frequency1 frequency generator This combination provides 01 Hz resolution For higher frequency values use the 40 MHz that is INTernal2 reference oscillator source with the Divide by N frequency2 frequency generator Use the other sources for custom frequency values However any reference oscillator sources can be used with any frequency generator Sample Sources e The SINUsoid function only operates with the INTernal 1 sample source e The SQUare TRlangle and RAMP functions operate with any of the sample sources selected by the TRIGger STARt SOURce command The functions can use either the DDS frequency1 frequency generator or the Divide by N frequency2 frequency generator for waveform generation However the DDS frequency generator gives better frequency resolution and should be used for the these functions The Divide by N frequency generator should be used for arbitrary waveform generation where high frequency values are needed The different sample sources are INTernal 1 power on value selects the DDS frequency generator INTernal2 selects the Divide by N frequency generator BUS the G
258. alues Units lt edge gt discrete NEGative POSitive none Example STOP SOURce e Executable when Initiated Query form only e Coupling Group Frequency Related Commands TRIGger STOP SOURce e RST Condition TRIGger STOP SLOPe POSitive Setting the Stop Trigger Slope TRIG STOP SLOP NEG Sets negative stop trigger slope TRIGger STOP SOURce lt source gt selects the source that can terminate the current start arm cycle at the end of the current waveform repetition When the Agilent E1445A receives a stop trigger the start trigger sequence is placed into the wait for arm state at the end of the current waveform repetition aborting the remaining ARM STARt LAYer 1 COUNt repetitions of the current arm cycle Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt source gt discrete BUS EXTernal HOLD TTLTrgO none through TTLTrg7 Comments The available sources are BUS The Group Execute Trigger GET GPIB command or the IEEE 488 2 TRG common command EXTernal The Agilent E1445A s front panel Stop Trigger FSK Gate In BNC connector HOLD Suspend stop triggering Use the TRIGger STOP lMMediate command to terminate a start arm cycle TTLTrg0 through TTLTrg7 The VXIbus TTL trigger lines 398 Command Reference Chapter 8 Example TRIGger If a stop trigger is received while the start trigger sequence is in the idle or wait for arm st
259. am are 1 Set the start trigger source TRIGger STARt SOURce lt source gt 2 Set the stop trigger source TRIGger STOP SOURce lt source gt 3 Set the external stop trigger slope TRiGger STOP SLOPe lt edge gt 4 Set the output frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FlXed lt frequency gt 5 Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe lt shape gt 6 Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel MMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt 7 Set the arm source ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce lt source gt 8 Set the external arm slope ARM STARt LAYer2 SLOPe lt edge gt 9 Set the arm count ARM STARt LAYer2 COUNt lt number gt 180 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 10 Set the number of waveform cycles ARM STARt LAYer 1 COUNt lt number gt 11 Place the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate MMediate BASIC Program Example STOPTRIG 1 IRE STORE STOPTRIG 2 This program sets the arm count to 5 and the repetition count to 3 15 000 A stop trigger applied to the Stop Trig BNC connector 4 laborts the remaining cycles of the current burst An arm signal 5 lapplied to the Start Arm In BNC re arms the AFG which then 6 loutputs the next burst 7 10 Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM Afg 50 Set up error checking 60 ONINTR7 CALL Errmsg 70 ENABLE INTR 7 2 80 OUTPUT Afg CLS 90 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 100 OUTPUT Afg
260. ange of Default Name Type Values Units lt polarity gt discrete INVerted NORMal none Comments Executable when Initiated Query form only e Coupling Group Voltage e Related Commands SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe e RST Condition SOURce RAMP POLarity NORMal Example Selecting Ramp Polarity FUNC SHAP RAMP Selects ramp output RAMP POL INV Selects negative going ramp Chapter 8 Command Reference 369 SOURce ROSCillator SOURce ROSCillator The SOURce ROSCillator subsystem controls the reference oscillator s source and indicates the frequency of an external oscillator The Agilent E1445A uses the source and frequency information to generate sample output rate for arbitrary waveforms or waveform frequency for ramp sine square and triangle wave output Subsystem Syntax SOURce ROSCillator FREQuency EXTermnal lt frequency gt SOURce lt source gt FREQuency EXTernal SOURce ROSCillator FREQuency EXTernal lt frequency gt indicates to the Agilent E1445A the frequency of an external reference oscillator source The SOURce FREQuency 1 and SOURce FREQuency2 subsystems use this value to generate sample rate and waveform frequencies when SOURce JROSCillator SOURce is set to EXTernal or ECLTrgn Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt frequency gt numeric 1 Hz through 42 94967296 MHz Hz MINimum MAXimum MINimum selects 1 H
261. ange that is greater than the maximum undoubled frequency allowed for a given waveform The maximum undoubled frequencies for the various waveforms are given below e Arbitrary Waveforms The maximum undoubled frequency is the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 4 e Square Waves The maximum undoubled frequency is the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 16 Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 155 e Triangle and Ramp Waves The maximum undoubled frequency is the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 4 further divided by the SOURce RAMP POINts value Sweep Countand The sweep count specifies the number of sweeps to occur or the number of Frequency List passes through the frequency list before the AFG returns to the idle state R ep etition Count from the wait for arm state see Chapter 5 The sweep count set with the SOURce SWEep COUNt command has a range from 1 to 2 147 483 647 or INFinity The default count is 1 Continuous sweeps or loops through a frequency list can be stopped with the ABORt command Arbitra ry Block Data Data sent to the AFG in an arbitrary block is in a binary format The encoding syntax for downloading frequency list data in this format is shown Figure 4 2 In a definite length arbitrary block Definite Length Arbitrary Block non zero digit l 8 bit data bytes l Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block 8 bit data bytes
262. ansfer 32 bit integer data 255 BASIC Language Programs 29 31 464 466 AFGGEN1 102 AFGGEN2 104 ARBWAVE 91 92 BURST 170 171 CHARGE 108 109 ARBWAVE C Program Example 41 45 ARBWAVE FRM Program Example 33 39 91 92 ARM Subsystem 291 297 ARM STAR LAY 1 COUN 291 ARM STAR LAY2 COUN 292 ARM STAR LAY2 IMM 293 ARM STAR LAY2 SLOP 293 ARM STAR LAY2 SOUR 294 ARM SWEep COUN 295 ARM SWEep IMM 295 ARM SWEep LINK 296 ARM SWEep SOUR 297 ARM TRIG 163 202 configuration 164 flowchart 164 states 164 COMBSEQ 255 258 COMBSIGN 242 244 COMBUNS 247 249 DACBLOK1 232 234 DACBLOK2 236 238 DCVOLTS 56 57 DIV_N 174 175 DRIFT 220 222 end of line terminator 31 ERRORCHK 49 441 EXT_ARM 167 168 FREQ1_REG 489 491 FREQ2_REG 492 494 FSK1 148 149 510 Agilent E1445A User s Manual Index B continued BASIC Language Programs continued FSK2 150 151 FSK_ARB 152 153 GATE 184 185 LISTI 125 126 LIST_STP 194 195 LIST_TME 139 140 LISTDEF 131 132 LOCKSTEP 177 180 LOG_SWP 133 134 LRN 48 MARKSEG1 209 211 MARKSEG2 213 MARKTRG 215 217 MULSEG 96 98 NOISE 112 OSG_RQS 437 OUTPLOAD 70 71 OUTPUNIT 73 74 PHAS_CHNG 496 497 PHS_MOD 76 77 QSSG_RQS 433 434 RSTCLS 47 RSTSINE 51 SIGN_DAT 227 228 SIN_D 107 108 SIN_R 111 SIN_X 105 106 SINEWAVE 59 60 SLFTST 47 SMPLSWP1 122 123 SMPLSWP2 128 129 SPIKES 109 SQUWAVE 63 64 STOPTRIG 181 182 SWP_
263. apter 2 Generating Standard Waveforms 57 Generating Sine Waves 2 VIDIV Output applied to a 50 Q load 2 msec DIV The SINEWAVE program outputs a Sine Wave at 1 kHz and 5 V output level The commands are 1 Reset the AFG RST This command aborts any waveform output and selects the sinusoid function output impedance and output load to 50 Q 2 Set the Waveform Frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 FlXed lt frequency gt This command specifies the waveform frequency You must use the direct synthesis frequency generator for the sinusoid function Refer to Table B 3 in Appendix B for the frequency limits 3 Select the Function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SiNusoid This command selects the sinusoid function Although RST automatically selects this function it is selected here for good programming practice 4 Set the Amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt This command specifies the amplitude Refer to the section called Selecting the Amplitude Levels and Output Units on page 72 for more information 5 Initiate the Waveform INITiate IMMediate This command generates an immediate output with the arm source set to IMMediate Refer to Chapter 5 for triggering information 58 Generating Standard Waveforms Chapter 2 BASIC Program Example SINEWAVE 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 4
264. arameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt number gt numeric 0 through 9 none Comments Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None 424 Command Reference Chapter 8 e Related Commands LRN RCL RST e RST Condition unaffected e Power on Condition all saved states set to the same state as the RST state SRE and SRE SRE lt mask gt specifies which bits of the Status Byte Register are enabled to generate a service request VXIbus regt signal Event and summary bits are always set and cleared in the Status Byte Register regardless of the enable mask The lt mask gt is the sum of the decimal weights of the bits to be enabled SRE returns the current enable mask Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt mask gt numeric 0 through 255 none A 1 ina bit position enables service request generation when the corresponding Status Byte Register bit is set a 0 disables it Comments Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e RST Condition Unaffected e Power On Condition No bits are enabled Example Enable Service Request on Message Available Bit SRE 16 Enables request on MAV Chapter 8 Command Reference 425 STB TRG TST Comments Comments STB returns the value of the Status Byte Register Bit 6 decimal weight 64 is set if a service request is pending STB should not be used t
265. arity gt selects active high marker pulses INVerted selects active low marker pulses Chapter 6 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations 207 10 11 12 13 14 Enable Marker Outputs SOURce MARKer STATe ON This commands enables the AFG to output marker pulses However before the marker pulses can be output they must be selected in the waveform segment and the waveform segment must be selected for marker output in the segment sequence Although RST automatically enables the AFG for marker outputs it is given here for good programming practice Setup the First Waveform Segment SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine lt length gt Store the First Waveform Segment as Voltage Data Points SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage lt voltage_list gt Setup the Second Waveform Segment SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine lt length gt Store the Second Waveform Segment as Voltage Data Points SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage lt voltage_list gt Store the Marker List for the Second Waveform Segment SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer lt marker_list gt This command stores the marker list into memory as a comma separated list A 1 selects a marker pulse and a 0 does not You can also send this list as Definite or Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Data as explained in Chapter 7 Setup the Se
266. arker pulse enable lists and repetition count lists of the currently selected segment sequence 280 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 Chapter 8 Command Reference Chapter Contents This chapter describes the Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments SCPI command set and the IEEE 488 2 Common Commands for the Agilent E1445A Arbitrary Function Generator AFG Included in this chapter are the following sections e Command Types 2 0000000084 Page 284 e SCPI Command Format 0 Page 284 e SCPI Command Parameters o o Page 286 e SCPI Command Execution o o Page 288 e SCPI Command Reference o o Page 289 e SCPI Command Quick Reference o Page 409 e SCPI Conformance Information Page 414 e EEE 488 2 Common Commands Page 416 e Common Commands Quick Reference Page 428 ABORU ckstetiscentkadcceneee init 290 SA rickety 304 Au eas 304 ARM eee 291 Data Aes 305 STARt SEQuencel 1 291 ELAN er 1 soci mtti 291 INTiatezic standar 306 COUNT aaen ie 291 IMMediatel ooooonconconnnnnnonncnnccccnconornos 306 LA Yelo ias 292 CON be Post n 200 OU Pe ete ins 308 IMMediate 0 00 ee 293 TRITON aips 308 SLOPE ita 293 ELPAS Sion dd 308 SOURCE ciiin aa 294 FREQUENCY cncocccccccnnnccancnnninnnonnn n 308 SWEep SEQuence3 cooonccicccocccccccnnnn
267. ases or fumes For continued protection against fire replace the line fuse s only with fuse s of the same voltage and current rating and type DO NOT use repaired fuses or short circuited fuse holders Keep away from live circuits Operating personnel must not remove equipment covers or shields Procedures involving the removal of covers or shields are for use by service trained personnel only Under certain conditions dangerous voltages may exist even with the equipment switched off To avoid dangerous electrical shock DO NOT perform procedures involving cover or shield removal unless you are qualified to do so DO NOT operate damaged equipment Whenever it is possible that the safety protection features built into this product have been impaired either through physical damage excessive moisture or any other reason REMOVE POWER and do not use the product until safe operation can be verified by service trained personnel If necessary return the product to an Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained DO NOT service or adjust alone Do not attempt internal service or adjustment unless another person capable of rendering first aid and resuscitation is present DO NOT substitute parts or modify equipment Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification to the product Return the product to a
268. ata las a combined list voltage and marker of signed numbers lin an indefinite length block Download the sequence as a Icombined list repetition count marker and segment address lin an indefinite length arbitrary block COM Afg Afg1 Base_addr Seq1_addr Seq2_addr Seq3_addr INTEGER Waveform 1 4096 INTEGER Sequence 1 2 REAL Addr_seg2 A 4 4096 W 2 P1 50 FOR T 1 TO 4096 Waveform T EXP A T SIN W T 00125 Ishift bits to dac code positions Waveform T SHIFT Waveform T 3 NEXT T OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL SIN_D Isegment name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 4096 Isegment size OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SEGM COMB 0 waveform points OUTPUT Afg1 Waveform lindefinite length block OUTPUT Afg CHR 10 END lterminate with line feed LF and EOI OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM ADDR ENTER Afg Addr_seg2 Addr_seg2 Addr_seg2 8 1 8 to set starting address boundary of segment ISequence 1 is the repetition count and marker enable for Isegment SIN_D Sequence 2 is the starting address of segment SIN_D Sequence 1 SHIFT 4096 1 4 Addr_seg1 DIV 65536 Sequence 2 Addr_seg2 MOD 65536 65536 Addr_seg2 MOD 65536 gt 32767 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL SEQ2 Isequence name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Isequence size OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SSEQ COMB 0 segm execution order OUTPUT OAfg1 Sequence Isequence list in indefinite length block OUTPUT Afg CHR
269. ate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude UNIT VOLTage lt units gt SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate OFFSet lt offset gt STATus STATus OPC INITiate lt state gt STATus OPERation QUEStionable CONDition STATus OPERation QUEStionable ENABle lt unmask gt STATus OPERation QUEStionable EVENt STATus OPERation QUEStionable NTRansition lt unmask gt STATus OPERation QUEStionable PTRansition lt unmask gt STATus PRESet 412 Command Reference Chapter 8 Table 8 1 Agilent E1445A SCPI Commands continued Subsystem Commands SYSTem SYSTem ERRor SYSTem VERsion TRIGger TRIGger STARt GATE POLarity lt polarity gt TRIGger STARt GATE SOURce lt source gt TRIGger STARt GATE STATe lt mode gt TRIGger STAR1 MMediate TRIGger STARt SLOPe lt edge gt TRIGger STARt SOURce lt source gt TRIGger STOP IMMediate TRIGger STOP SLOPe lt edge gt TRIGger STOP SOURce lt source gt TRIGger SWEep IMMediate TRIGger SWEep LINK lt link gt TRIGger SWEep SOURce lt source gt TRIGger SWEep TlMer lt period gt VINStrument VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE lt mode gt VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE AUTO lt mode gt VINStrument CONFigure TEST CONFigure lt ength gt VINStrument CONFigure TEST DATA VINStrument CONFigure VME MODE lt mode gt VINStrument CONFigure VME RECeive ADDRess DATA VINStrument C
270. ate The selected sweep arm source remains unchanged e Executing this command when frequency sweeps or lists are not enabled or with the sweep trigger sequence not in the wait for arm state generates Error 212 Arm ignored e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands NITiate MMediate SOURce SWEep e RST Condition None Chapter 8 Command Reference 295 ARM Example Starting a Frequency Sweep SWE START 1E3 STOP 10E3 Sets sweep frequency limits SWE POIN 10 Sets 1 kHz steps ARM SOUR IMM Sets output to start immediately ARM SWE SOUR HOLD Sets manual sweep arm INIT Initiates trigger system ARM SWE Starts sweep SWEep LINK ARM SWEep LINK lt link gt selects the internal event that starts a frequency sweep or list when ARM SWEep SOURce is set to LINK The only defined internal event to start a sweep or list is ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer2 There is no need to send this command since there is only one defined internal event The command is included for SCPI compatibility purposes only Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt link gt string ARM STARt SEQuence1 LAYer2 none Comments Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands ARM SWEep SOURce e RST Condition ARM SWEep LINK ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer2 Example Linking the Sweep Arm ARM SWE SOUR LINK Lin
271. ates it is ignored with no error generated If the start trigger sequence is on the last of ARM STARt LAYer2 COUNt arm cycles a stop trigger places the trigger system in the idle state at the end of the current waveform repetition A stop trigger differs from the ABORt command in that ABORt terminates all start arm cycles immediately whereas a stop trigger terminates only the current arm cycle at the end of the current waveform repetition Use the TRIGger STOP SLOPe command to select the active edge rising or falling for the front panel Stop Trig FSK Gate In BNC when used as the stop trigger source The front panel Stop Trig FSK Gate In BNC is a three use connector for FSK control as a stop trigger source or as a sample gate source Only one of these uses may be active at any time Ifa VXIbus TTLTrg trigger line is used as the stop trigger source then no TTLTrg trigger lines can be used for FSK control or as the gating source Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group Frequency Related Commands ABORT INITiate IMMediate TRIGger STARt COUNt RST Condition TRIGger STOP SOURce HOLD Setting the Stop Trigger Source TRIG STOP SOUR TTLT1 Selects VXIbus trigger line TTLTRG1 as source SWEep IMMediate Comments TRIGger SWEep IMMediate advances a frequency sweep or list to the next frequency regardless of the selected trigger source The trigger system must have been initiated and
272. ating 51 58 60 450 damped 107 108 half rectified 111 noise 112 spiked 109 minimum frequency 155 number of waveform points 157 Sine Waves See also Sinusoid SINEWAVE Example Program 59 60 Single marker pulses 212 213 waveform segments 212 213 Single Point Marker 343 355 Sinusoid function requirements 78 phase modulation 75 365 367 waveforms generating 450 Sinusoid Waves See Sine Waves SLFTST Program Example 47 Slope external stop trigger 200 start arm setting 293 start trigger setting 395 stop trigger setting 398 SMPLSWP1 Example Program 122 123 SMPLSWP2 Example Program 128 129 Soft Front Panel See VXIplug amp play Online Help SOURce Subsystem 312 380 SOURce ARBitrary Subsystem 313 318 DAC FORMat 313 314 DAC SOURCce 315 DOWNload 316 317 DOWNload COMPlete 318 SOURce FREQuency 1 Subsystem 319 329 CENTer 321 CWI FIXed 322 FSKey 323 FSKey SOURce 324 MODE 325 RANGe 326 SPAN 327 STARt 328 STOP 329 SOURce FREQuency2 Subsystem 330 331 CWI FIXed 331 SOURce FUNCtion Subsystem 332 333 SHAPe 332 USER 333 SOURce LIST 1 Subsystem 334 357 FORMat DATA 335 SEGMent ADDRess 336 SEGMent CATalog 336 SEGMent COMBined 337 SEGMent COMBined POINts 338 SEGMent DEFine 339 SEGMent DELete ALL 340 SEGMent DELete SELected 340 Agilent E1445A User s Manual Index 525 S continued SOURce LIST 1 Subsyste
273. ating and storing segments into string For 0 To 99 If 99 Then SegCommand SegCommand Str I 0505 Else SegCommand SegCommand Str I 0505 End If Next Send command with segment data Call iwrite Addr ByVal SegCommand Chr 10 Len SegCommana 1 1 Actual Call sub to check for AFG errors Call CheckError GenSeg SegCommand Setup the AFG for output Call CmdExe OutCommands Continued on Next Page 36 Getting Started Chapter 1 Call sub to check for AFG errors Call CheckError GenSeg OutCommands End Sub Sub Main Main sub Dim Actual As Long Set error routine On Error GoTo AfgErr ChkName Main Open communication path Addr open ShowAddr Set timeout for 10 Sec Call itimeout Addr 10000 Reset and clear the module Action Text Resetting the AFG please wait ChkName RstClr Call RstClr Generate segment list and output sequence Action Text Generate Segments ChkName GenSeg Call GenSeg Query segment and segment sequence memory Action Text Getting Memory Data ChkName RunQuery Call RunQuery Action Text DONE Close communication with instrument Call iclose Addr Clean up sicl Call siclcleanup Exit Sub In case of timeout AfgErr Continued on Next Page Chapter 1 Getting Started 37 Call TimeOut End Sub Sub RsiClr Dim RdMsg As String 10 Dim Actual A
274. ation constant out of range Illegal calibration constant was computed 1006 Calibration constant conflict Calibration constants used during calibration set an illegal condition 1007 Calibration security defeated CALibration secure state disabled and detected at power on 1011 Illegal while download enabled or Commands such as SOUR LIST1 cannot be testing local bus executed under current conditions Execute SOUR ARB DOWN COMP to disable downloading or VINS CONF TEST DATA to complete the local bus test 1012 Illegal when not downloading SOUR ARB DOWN COMP disables downloading only after it has previously been enabled 1013 Illegal when not testing local bus VINS CONF TEST DATA was executed and the local bus test was not performed 1014 Illegal while initiated Command cannot be executed while the E1445A is in the initiated instrument action state Appendix B Useful Tables 477 Table B 6 Agilent E1445A Error Messages continued Code Message Description 1015 Illegal when SOUR ARB DAC not SOUR LIST1 commands cannot be executed unless INT the DAC data source is internal 1016 Illegal when VIN LBUS MODE not The operating mode for the local bus is off and CONS SOUR ARB DOWN is set to LBUS 1017 Illegal when SOUR FUNC SHAP The output function must be SINusoid when testing RAMP SQU TRI set the local bus VINS CONF TEST CONP 10
275. ations In order to download the frequency list as an indefinite length arbitrary 350 360 370 block modify lines 350 through 370 as follows OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST2 FREQ 0 Idownload fregs OUTPUT A fg1 Freqlist OUTPUT Afg CHR 10 END ILF EOI NL END Additional information on definite and indefinite length arbitrary blocks is located under Arbitrary Block Data on page 156 Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program LISTDEF FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program LISTDEF C is in directory Versions VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A 132 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 Logarithmic Sweeping The LOG_SWP program shows you how to select logarithmic spacing between the frequencies in a frequency sweep The program sets up a seven point logarithmic frequency sweep from 1 Hz to 1 MHz Thus the swept frequencies are 1 Hz 10 Hz 100 Hz 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz 1 MHz Using the flowchart in Figure 4 1 as a guide the steps of this program are 1 Set the frequency sweep mode SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE lt mode gt 2 Set the start frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 STARt lt start_freg gt 3 Set the stop frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 STOP lt stop_freg gt 4 Set the number of points frequencies in the frequency sweep SOURce SWEep POINts lt number gt 5 Set linear or logarithmic spacing SOURce
276. ator frequency divided by 16 Ramps and Triangle Outputs the maximum possible frequency is the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 4 further divided by the SOURce RAMP POINts value For non sine wave outputs multiply the above values by 2 if frequency doubling is in effect see the SOURce FREQuency 1 RANGe command on page 326 Subsystem Syntax SOURce FREQuency 1 CENTer lt center_freq gt CW FlXed lt frequency gt FSKey lt frequencyl gt lt frequency2 gt SOURCce lt source gt MODE lt mode gt RANGe lt range gt SPAN lt freg_span gt STARt lt start_freq gt STOP lt stop_freq gt 320 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce FREQuency 1 CENTer SOURce FREQuency 1 CENTer lt center_freg gt sets the center sample rate or waveform frequency for a frequency swept waveform Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt center_freq gt numeric see below MINimum MAXimum Hz The legal range for lt center_freq gt as well as the MINimum and MAXimum values are context dependent See Coupling Rules on page 319 for a description of the coupling between STARt STOP CENTer and SPAN Comments Executable when Initiated Query form only e Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands TRIGger STARt SOURce SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE RANGe SPAN STARt and STOP SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SOURce ROSCilla
277. ble when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt FEED e RST Condition SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt STATe OFF Enabling Marker Output to ECLTRG0 MARK ECLTO ON Enables ECLTRGO 362 Command Reference Chapter 8 FEED SOURce MARKer SOURce MARKer FEED lt source gt selects the source for the front panel Marker Out BNC The available sources are Parameters ARMI STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 P For arbitrary waveforms the marker level changes with the first waveform point of the first repetition A marker pulse is then output with the next to last waveform point of each repetition For sine waves the marker is a 50 duty cycle square wave at the sine wave frequency ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer2 Once a start arm is received the marker is asserted when the first amplitude point is triggered The marker is unasserted with the last amplitude point of the last waveform repetition or following an ABORT SOURce FREQuency 1 CHANge Outputs a one sample period wide marker pulse that is output after a frequency change occurs This shows that the new steady state frequency has been reached SOURce LIST 1 Outputs marker pulses specified by the SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer and SSEQuence MARKer commands The pulse is normally one sample period wide but may be widened by placing markers on consecutive output points This source is on
278. both must be set to the same trigger line lt n gt e Executable when Initiated Query form only e Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce e RST Condition ARM SWEep SOURce IMMediate Example Setting the Sweep Arm Source ARM SWE SOUR TTLT1 Selects VXIbus trigger line TTLTRG1 as sweep arm source Chapter 8 Command Reference 297 CALibration CALibration The CALibration subsystem has commands that calibrate the Agilent E1445A The subsystem also includes commands to prevent and detect accidental or unauthorized calibration of the Agilent E1445A The calibration procedure using these commands is located in the Agilent E1445A Service Manual Subsystem Syntax CALibration COUNt query only DATA AC 1 lt block gt AC2 lt block gt DC lt block gt DC BEGin no query POINt lt value gt query only SECure CODE lt code gt no query STATe lt mode lt code gt STATe lt state gt AC lt state gt DC lt state gt COUNt CALibration COUNt returns a number that shows how often the Agilent E1445A has been calibrated Since executing CALibration DATA AC1 AC2 and DC commands and the CALibration POINt query upon completion of the calibration procedure increment the number the CALibration COUNt command may be used to detect any accidental or unauthorized Agilent E1445A calibration Comments The Agilent E1445A was calibrated before it left the
279. calculated as follows MINimum 1 25 mS points 1 MAXimum 4 19430375 S points 1 Again for continuous sweeping list repetitions the desired minimum or maximum time must be multiplied by the quantity points 1 points The default sweep time is 1 second for any number of points or frequencies specified The function in this program is a 1 000 point triangle wave The maximum frequency allowed in the frequency list is the reference oscillator frequency divided by the quantity four multiplied by the number of waveform points Rosc 4 npts 42 94967296E6 4 1000 10 7374 kHz Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 159 Output Frequency The output frequency of an arbitrary waveform is defined as and Sample Rate Fo sample rate waveform_ points For frequency sweeps the sample rate s are the start and stop frequencies For example with an arbitrary waveform with 4096 amplitude points a start frequency of 4 096E6 and a stop frequency of 8 192E6 produces a sweep from 1 kHz to 2 kHz For frequency shift keying the sample rates are frequency1 and frequency2 specified by the SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey command The output frequencies are the sample rates divided by the number of amplitude points in the arbitrary waveform AC Leveling The AFG has a 250 kHz output filter and a 10 MHz output filter When the filter has been selected and enabled AC output leveling maintains the amplitude at a constant
280. cation not needed for Windows NT _ siclcleanup printf n nClose the window or press Alt F4 to exit exit 0 OK KK KK KK KK KK KK IK KK IK IK IK IK IK IK KK IK IK KK KK KK KK void gen_seg void char set_commands Use set_commands to setup the AFG SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEL ALL Clear sequence memory SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEL ALL Clear segment memory SOUR ROSC SOUR INT1 Select the Ref Oscillator TRIG STAR SOUR INT1 Select the sample source SOUR FREQ1 FIX 100E3 Set the sample frequency SOUR FUNC SHAP USER Command to select the user function Continued on Next Page 42 Getting Started Chapter 1 SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 1V Set the amplitude SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL ramp Define the ramp segment name SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 100 Define the segment size seg_ commands Use seg_commands to store segments SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT Command to send volts data out_commands Use the out_commands array to generate output SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL ramp_out Define the sequence name as ramp_out SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Define the sequence size SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ ramp Set the segment execution order SOUR FUNC USER ramp_out Define the user name INIT IMM Start waveform generation i float Wave_seg int loop seg_size 100 Set the segment size to 100 points char send_str 50 Allocate sufficient memory for storing the segm
281. ce SWEep SPACing LlNear Example Setting the Frequency Sweep Spacing SWE SPAC LOG Selects logarithmic spacing Chapter 8 Command Reference 375 SOURce SWEep TIME SOURce SWEep TIME lt number gt selects the duration of the sweep or frequency list generation when TRIGger SWEep SOURce is set to TIMer The duration is the time from the start of the sweep or list until when the last frequency begins to be output The value set by this command is coupled to the TRIGger SWEep TIMer command value by the following equation TIME TIMer points 1 where points is the SOURce SWEep POINts value for frequency sweeps or the length of the frequency list for frequency list generation When changing the frequency list length when SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE LIST is set or the SOURce SWEep POINts value when any other MODE is set the TIME or TlMer value remains the same depending on which command SOURce SWEep TIME or TRIGger SWEep TIMer respectively was most recently sent The other value is changed based on the new points value Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt time gt numeric see below MINimum MAXimum seconds MINimum selects 1 25 mS points 1 MAXimum selects 4 19430375 S points 1 The above values bound the valid range for time Comments When performing multiple sweeps or list generations with ARM SWEep SOURce IMMediate set the last f
282. code 303 trigger system 290 Discrete Command Parameters 286 DIV_N Example Program 174 175 Divide by N Frequency Generator control 492 494 description 449 generating waveforms with 99 101 104 174 175 DMC 416 Documentation History 14 Doubling Frequency Ranges 155 326 Downloading 316 317 combined segment sequence list 260 waveform segment list 259 data directly into the DAC 269 271 506 508 using digital in port 279 disabling 318 segment data into DAC 269 271 506 508 514 Agilent E1445A User s Manual Index D continued Downloading continued into memory 259 268 using backplane 259 sources 280 DRIFT Example Program 220 222 Driving TTLTrg lt n gt Trigger Lines 162 E ECLTrg lt n gt functions 460 trigger lines 204 205 361 362 Embedded Controller using 23 EMC 417 EMC 417 Enable Register 383 386 operation status group 436 questionable signal status group 432 Enabling analog output 311 calibration corrections 304 305 ECL trigger lines 362 frequency doubling 326 gate 200 low pass output filter 309 marker signal 362 364 phase modulation 367 sample gating 394 security code 303 End Of Line Terminator suppressing 31 Error AC leveling amplitude 160 161 checking for 49 messages in error queue 389 list of 475 479 settings conflict 480 482 numbers 475 479 queue 389 ERRORCHK Example Program 49 441 ESE 417 ESE 417 ESR 418 Event Register operation
283. contiguous and executed Suppressing the inthe same program statement By suppressing the end of line EOL End Of Line Terminator terminator Line Feed on a command line coupled commands can be sent on separate lines yet as a single program statement In BASIC programs the EOL terminator is suppressed by placing a semicolon following the quotation mark which closes the command string In the previous program the commands in lines 240 270 are in the frequency coupling group line 280 is in the frequency voltage coupling group and line 290 is in the voltage coupling group The semicolons following the command strings in lines 240 through 280 suppress the EOL terminator therefore lines 240 290 are sent as a single statement Since the command in line 290 is not coupled to the commands in lines 300 320 the EOL terminator is not suppressed on line 290 Chapter 1 Getting Started 31 Visual BASIC Language Programs Using Agilent SICL System Configuration What s Needed to Run the Programs How to Run a Program These example programs are written in the Visual BASIC language for the Agilent 82340 82341 GPIB Interface Cards using the Agilent Standard Instrument Control Library SICL The following identifies the system on which the programs are written shows how to compile the programs and gives a typical example program The Visual BASIC programs were developed on the following system Controller HP Vectra PC
284. coupling groups is shown in Figure 1 5 Frequency Coupled Commands l Frequency Voltage Coupled Commands Voltage Coupled Commands Uncoupled Commands Figure 1 5 High Level E1445A Programming Sequence Coupled commands must be contiguous and executed in the same program statement This is done by placing the commands in the same program line or by suppressing the end of line terminator until the last coupled command has been sent To send multiple commands in a single line or in a single statement the commands are linked with a semicolon and a colon This is illustrated in the following lines SOUR ROSC SOUR INT2 TRIG STAR SOUR INT2 or SOUR ROSC SOUR INT2 TRIG STAR SOUR INT2 Both techniques are used in the programs found throughout this manual Note that the semicolon and colon link commands within different subsystems Only a semicolon is required to link commands within the same subsystem see SCPI Command Structure on page 26 See page 31 for information on suppressing the end of line terminator 28 Getting Started Chapter 1 Program Languages The program language shown in this manual is BASIC This language was selected since it easily shows how to program the AFG However the same programs except where noted are also supplied in Visual C C and Visual BASIC using the A gilent Standard Instrument Control Library SICL T
285. crement Registers A7 AS A3 and A1 contain the 32 bit phase Registers increment data that is written to the DDS micro chip The phase increment value determines the output frequency Address 15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 base A716 unused frequency value through base A116 Register A7 Bits 31 24 of the phase increment value These are the most significant bits MSBs Register A5 Bits 23 16 of the phase increment value Register A3 Bits 15 8 of the phase increment value Register Al Bits 7 0 of the phase increment value These are the least significant bits LSBs Appendix C Register Based Programming 487 The Frequency Load Strobe Register Writing any value to the Frequency Load Strobe Register loads the contents of the Phase Increment Registers into the DDS micro chip Address 15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 base 8D 16 unused Strobe Data The Sample Hold and ROSC N Control Register Stobe Data Writing any value to this register loads the contents of the Phase Increment Registers into the DDS micro chip Once the data has been loaded it takes 20 reference oscillator clock cycles for the new frequency to appear at the output The Sample Hold and ROSC N Control Register enables and disables signal sampling and specifies the N value used to generate ROSC N frequencies Address 15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 base 6316
286. currently selected segment sequence s repetition count list e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e RST Condition None e Power On Condition No segment sequences are defined Example Query Repetition Count List Length LIST SSEQ SEL ABC Selects segment sequence ABC LIST SSEQ DWEL COUN POIN Queries repetition count list length SSEQuence FREE Comments Example SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence FREE returns information on segment sequence memory availability and usage The return data format is lt numeric_value gt lt numeric_value gt The first numeric value shows the amount of segment sequence memory available in points the second the amount of segment sequence memory used in points e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e RST Condition None e Power On Condition All of the segment sequence memory is available Querying Segment Sequence Memory Usage LIST SSEQ FREE Queries segment memory usage Chapter 8 Command Reference 353 SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer lt marker_list gt defines for each waveform segment of a segment sequence whether the Agilent E1445A may output the marker pulses defined by the marker list for that waveform segment Parameters The lt marker_list gt may be either a comma separated list of values or an IEEE 488 2 definite or indefinite length block containing the values in 16 bit integer format A value
287. cy divide by n generator Reference oscillator source External oscillator frequency Sweep count Sweep direction Sweep points TRIG GATE STAT FREQ FIX FREQ FSK FREQ FSK SOUR FREQ MODE FREQ RANG FREQ STAR FREQ STOP FREQ2 FIX ROSC SOUR FREQ EXT SWE COUN SWE DIR SWE POIN Parameter Command Power on Reset Setting Macro usage EMC 1 Calibration state CAL STAT 1 enabled AC calibration CAL STAT AC 1 enabled DC calibration CAL STAT DC 1 enabled DAC data source ARB DAC SOUR INTernal Phase modulation units PM UNIT ANGL RADians Waveform amplitude units VOLT AMPL UNIT VOLT V Sample source TRIG SOUR INTernal Sample gate polarity TRIG GATE POL INVerted Sample gate source TRIG GATE SOUR EXTernal 0 off 1 000000000E 004 1 000000000E 004 1 000000000E 007 EXTernal FIXed 0 000000000E 000 0 000000000E 000 1 073741824E 007 1 000000000E 004 INTernal1 4 294967296E 007 1 000000000E 000 UP 800 472 Useful Tables Appendix B Table B 5 Agilent E1445A Power On Reset Configuration continued Parameter Command Power on Reset Setting Sweep spacing points SWE SPAC LiNear Sweep time SWE TIME 1 000000000E 000 Stop trigger source Sweep start source Sweep advance source Function Ramp triangle waveform points Ramp triangle waveform polarity Output amplitude DC offset Output impedance Output load Load Impedance coup
288. d All other bits are always 0 Signal Status Register Bit 5 Frequency Set 1 when the SOURce FREQuency2 divide by n frequency generator is selected and the generated frequency differs from the specified frequency by greater than 1 Cleared 0 otherwise Bit 8 Calibration Set 1 if an error has been detected in the non volatile calibration memory Cleared 0 otherwise Chapter 8 Command Reference 381 STATus Subsystem Syntax STATus OPC INiTiate lt state gt OPERation CONDition query only ENABle lt unmask gt EVENt query only NTRansition lt unmask gt PTRansition lt unmask gt PRESet no query QUEStionable CONDition query only ENABle lt unmask gt LEVEN query only NTRansition lt unmask gt PTRansition lt unmask gt OPC INITiate STATus OPC INITiate lt state gt controls whether the OPC OPC and WAI commands will complete immediately or whether they will wait for waveform generation to complete With state OFF set these commands will complete immediately With state ON set they will wait for the Pending Operation Flag set true by INITiate IMMediate to return false indicating that the trigger system is in the idle state and that waveform generation has completed or been aborted by the ABORt or RST commands Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt state gt boolean OFF 0 ON 1 none Comments Execut
289. d The Visual BASIC example program OSG_RQS FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program OSG_RQS C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A 438 AFG Status Chapter 9 The Standard Event Status Group The Standard Event Status Register The Standard Event Status Group monitors command execution programming errors and the power on state It is the status group used by the error checking routine in the BASIC example programs found throughout the manual The conditions monitored by the Standard Event Status Register are identified below 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 PON unused CME EXE DDE QYE unused OPC Power on PON Bit 7 is set 1 when an off to on transition has occurred Command Error CME Bit 5 is set 1 when an incorrect command header is received or 1f an unimplemented common command is received Execution Error EXE Bit 4 is set 1 when a command parameter is outside its legal range Device Dependent Error DDE Bit 3 is set 1 when an error other than a command error execution error or query error has occurred Query Error QYE Bit 2 is set 1 when the AFG output queue is read and no data is present or when data in the output queue has been lost Operation Complete OPC Bit 0 is set 1 when the OPC command is received OPC is used to indicate when all pendi
290. d Triggering Chapter 5 840 850 860 870 880 890 900 910 920 930 940 950 960 970 980 990 1000 1010 1020 1030 1040 1050 1060 1070 1080 1090 1100 1110 1120 1130 1140 1150 1160 1170 1180 1190 1200 1210 1220 1230 1240 1250 1260 1270 1280 1290 1300 1310 1320 1330 OUTPUT Afg_s SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL SIN_X OUTPUT Afg_s SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 4096 OUTPUT Afg_s SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT Waveform OUTPUT Afg_s SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL SINX_S OUTPUT Afg_s SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 OUTPUT Afg_s SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ SIN_X OUTPUT Afg_s SOUR FUNC USER SINX_S OUTPUT Afg_s INIT IMM SUBEND SUB Rst Rst Subprogram which resets the master and slave AFGs COM Afg_m Afg_s Waveform OUTPUT Afg_m RST OPC lreset master AFG ENTER Afg_m Complete OUTPUT Afg_s RST OPC lreset servant AFG ENTER Afg_s Complete SUBEND SUB Wf_del Wf_del Subprogram which deletes all sequences and segments COM Afg_m Afg_s Waveform OUTPUT Afg_m FUNC USER NONE Iselect no sequences OUTPUT Afg_m LIST SSEQ DEL ALL Idelete all sequences OUTPUT Afg_m LIST SEGM DEL ALL Idelete all segments OUTPUT Afg_s FUNC USER NONE Iselect no sequences OUTPUT Afg_s LIST SSEQ DEL ALL Idelete all sequences OUTPUT Afg_s LIST SEGM DEL ALL Idelete all segments SUBEND SUB Errmsg Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors COM Afg_m Afg_s Waveform DIM Message 2
291. d Trying to define an ordered sequence of waveform segments and sequence memory has not been reserved with the SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF command 1117 Sequence name already defined Defining a sequence and a sequence by that name already exists 1118 No sequence name SELected SOUR LIST1 SSEQ subsystem command executed without a segment sequence first selected by SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL 1121 Frequency list has zero length SOUR FREQ1 MODE LIST is set and no frequency list exists 1122 Frequency list length less than Frequency list has less than two frequencies minimum Appendix B Useful Tables 479 Settings Conflict Error Messages Table B 7 Agilent E1445A Settings Conflict Error Messages Settings Conflict Error Messages SOUR FREQ1 FIX frequency lt minimum SOUR FREQ1 FIX MIN set SOUR FREQ1 FIX frequency gt maximum SOUR FREQ1 FIX MAX set SOUR FREQ2 FIX frequency lt minimum SOUR FREQ2 FIX MIN set SOUR FREQ2 FIX frequency gt maximum SOUR FREQ2 FIX MAX set SOUR FREQ1 RANG frequency gt maximum SOUR FREQ1 RANG MAX set TRIG STAR GATE SOUR EXT and SOUR FREQ1 FSK SOUR EXT TRIG STAR GATE STAT OFF set TRIG STAR GATE SOUR TTLT lt n gt and SOUR FREQ1 FSK SOUR TTLT lt n gt TRIG STAR GATE STAT OFF set SOUR FREQ1 FSK frequency lt minimum SOUR FREQ1 FSK MIN set SOUR FREQ1 FSK frequency gt maximum SOUR FREQ1 FSK MAX set TRIG STAR SOUR and SOUR ROSC SOUR both EXT SOU
292. d by the SOURce FREQuency2 subsystem differs from the programmed frequency by more than 1 Assign an I O path between the computer and the E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg Reset the AFG CALL Rst ISet up the computer to respond to the service request ON INTR 7 CALL Disp_msg ENABLE INTR 7 2 Set up the AFG to monitor the output frequency OUTPUT Afg CLS Iclear Status Byte and Event Registers OUTPUT Afg STAT QUES PTR 32 Ipos transition of FREQ bit OUTPUT Afg STAT QUES ENAB 32 lallow FREQ bit to generate summary bit OUTPUT Afg SRE 8 lenable summary bit to generate RQS ICall subprogram which outputs a signal using the SOURce FREQ2 Isubsystem CALL Freg2 WAIT 1 lallow interrupts to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB Freq2 Freq2 Subprogram which outputs a 10 MHz square wave using the ISOURce FREQ2 subsystem COM Afg OUTPUT Afg SOUR ROSC SOUR INT2 Ireference oscillator OUTPUT Afg TRIG STAR SOUR INT2 frequency generator Continued on Next Page Chapter 9 AFG Status 433 310 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ2 10E6 frequency 320 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SQU function 330 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 1V lamplitude 340 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait_for_arm state 350 LOOP loop continuously until frequency error occurs 360 END LOOP 370 SUBEND 380 390 SUB Disp_msg 400 Disp_msg Subprogram which is called when output frequency 410 Ivaries f
293. data las a combined list voltage and marker of signed numbers lin an indefinite length block Download the sequence as a Icombined list repetition count marker and segment address lin an indefinite length arbitrary block COM Cmd Afg Afg1 Base_addr Seq1_addr Seq2_addr Seq3_addr INTEGER Waveform 1 4096 INTEGER Sequence 1 2 REAL Addr_seg2 A 4 4096 W 2 P1 50 FOR T 1 TO 4096 Waveform T EXP A T SIN W T 00125 Ishift bits to dac code positions Waveform T SHIFT Waveform T 3 NEXT T OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL SIN_D Isegment name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 4096 Isegment size OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SEGM COMB 0 waveform points OUTPUT Afg1 Waveform lindefinite length block OUTPUT Afg CHR 10 END lterminate with line feed LF and EOI OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM ADDR ENTER Afg Addr_seg2 Addr_seg2 Addr_seg2 8 8 to set starting address boundary of segment ISequence 1 is the repetition count and marker enable for Isegment SIN_D Sequence 2 is the starting address of segment SIN_D Sequence 1 SHIFT 4096 1 4 Addr_seg1 DIV 65536 Sequence 2 Addr_seg2 MOD 65536 65536 Addr_seg2 MOD 65536 32767 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL SEQ2 Isequence name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Isequence size OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SSEQ COMB 0 segment execution order OUTPUT Afg1 Sequence Isequence list in indefinite length block Continued on Next Page
294. ddress Space Ready Indication Offset VINS VME REC ADDR READ Queries A24 offset for ready indication VINStrument IDENtity returns a response consisting of 4 fields indicating the virtual instrument capability of the Agilent E1445A HEWLETT PACKARD VIRTUAL INSTRUMENT ANY DTOA 0 A 01 00 The first and last fields indicate that the Agilent E1445A conforms to revision A 01 00 of Agilent s Virtual Instrument Local Bus System Specification The second field indicates that the Agilent E1445A is a digital to analog converter The third field is reserved for future use e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e RST Condition None Querying Virtual Instrument Capability VINS IDEN Queries capability 408 Command Reference Chapter 8 SCPI Command Quick Reference Table 8 1 Agilent E1445A SCPI Commands Subsystem Commands TRIGger ABORt ARM ARM STARt LAYer 1 COUNt lt number gt ARM STARt LAYer2 COUNt lt number gt ARM STARt LAYer2 IMMediate ARM STARt LAYer2 SLOPe lt edge gt ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce lt source gt ARM SWEep COUNt lt number gt ARM SWEeplI MMediate ARM SWEep LINK lt ink gt ARM SWEep SOURce lt source gt CALibration CALibration COUNt CALibration DATA AC 1 lt block gt CALibration DATA AC2 lt block gt CALibration DATA DC lt block gt CALibration DC BEGin CALibration DC POINt lt value gt CALibrat
295. de Iwait for arm state ltrigger AFG 188 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 FOR l 1 TO 10 DISP Wait until sweep completes then press Continue to start a new sweep PAUSE TRIGGER Afg trigger AFG NEXT DISP SUBEND SUB Rst Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 COM Afg OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Errmsg Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors COM Afg DIM Message 256 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform REPEAT OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue ENTER Afg Code Message PRINT Code Message UNTIL Code 0 STOP SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program SWP_TRIG FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program SWP_TRIG C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 189 Arming and Triggering a Frequency Sweep The SWP_STEP program show you how to control the start and advancing of a frequency sweep The program sets the sweep arm and sweep trigger sources to HOLD The AFG is armed and ad
296. ding 280 FSK control 161 sample rate 324 gating 200 393 marker available 205 206 361 363 phase modulation data 366 reference oscillator 78 115 154 197 371 sample arbitrary waveform 115 frequency lists 154 FSK 154 standard waveform 78 sweeping 154 start trigger 396 stop trigger 199 398 sweeping setting 297 Span Frequencies sweeping with 127 129 327 Specifying frequency lists 124 126 sweep times 158 Speed comparisons 224 increasing 223 280 Spiked Sine Waves generating 109 SPIKES Example Program 109 Square Waves doubling frequency 155 generating 61 64 minimum frequency 155 number of waveform points 157 polarity 369 SQUWAVE Example Program 63 64 SRE 425 SRE 425 Standard Event Status enable register 440 group 439 441 register 439 526 Agilent E1445A User s Manual Index S continued Standard Waveforms commands flowchart 54 55 frequencies setting 331 generating 53 82 ramp waves 65 68 sine waves 58 60 square waves 61 64 triangle waves 65 68 phase modulation data sources 366 default angle units 367 enabling disabling 367 selecting deviation units 80 365 using 75 77 program comments 78 selecting amplitude levels 72 74 output loads 69 71 output units 72 74 Start arm slope setting 293 arm source setting 294 DC calibration 300 301 frequencies 121 123 setting 328 sweeping with 127 129 trigger slope setting 395 sources 396 Start Arm In B
297. do not use the MINimum and MAXimum parameters Chapter 2 Generating Standard Waveforms 81 Notes 82 Generating Standard Waveforms Chapter 2 Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter Contents This chapter shows how to generate arbitrary waveforms using the Agilent E1445A 13 Bit Arbitrary Function Generator called the AFG The following sections show how to generate arbitrary waveforms Also included are example programs that generate various arbitrary waveforms The sections are as follows e Arbitrary Waveforms Flowchart oooooo ooo oo Page 84 e How the AFG Generates Arbitrary Waveforms Page 86 e Generating a Simple Arbitrary Waveform Page 88 e Executing Several Waveform Segments Page 93 e Using Different Frequency Generators Page 99 e Sample Programs 2 2 ese eee Hee betes Page 104 Generating a Sin X X Waveform Page 105 Generating a Damped Sine Wave Page 107 Generating an Exponential Change Discharge Waveform y eenaa ena ida ee Page 108 Generating a Sine Wave with Spikes Page 109 Generating a Y Rectified Sine Wave Page 111 Generating Noles sieis iinei eee eee eee Page 112 e Arbitrary Waveform Program Comments Page 113 Determining the Amount of Segment and Sequence Memory ec es atin ales cda diame ds hee ees Pa
298. do this you must assign a unique name use SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt for each waveform segment to be stored into memory This allows you to select one of many waveform segments which may exist in memory to be output Legal names must start with an alphabetic character but can contain alphabetic numeric and underscore _ characters The names can have a maximum length of 12 characters The AFG generates an error for duplicate names Besides the name the AFG must also know the size use SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine lt ength gt of the waveform segment that is the number of points The assigned segment size must be equal to or larger than the actual size of the waveform segment The AFG generates an error if the waveform segment is larger than the size sent The segment values can be either sent as voltage values use SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage lt voltage_list gt or DAC digital to analog converter codes use SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage DAC lt voltage_list gt If sent as voltage values the AFG converts them to DAC codes before storing them in memory 86 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter 3 The segment sequence determines the order in which the waveform segments in memory are to be output which order is assigned by the user use SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence lt segment_list gt Each segment sequence must be stored into the AFG s sequence memory To do thi
299. ds data directly to the dac Continued on Next Page 506 Register Based Programming Appendix C 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 CALL Dac_drive END SUB A24 offset A24 offset Subprogram which determines the base address for Ithe AFG registers in A24 address space then adds the loffset and register number to the base to get the Icomplete address COM Afg Addr ICONTROL 16 25 2 laccess A16 space with READIO and WRITEIO A16_addr DVAL D400 16 AFG A16 base address Offset READIO 16 A16_addr 6 read AFG offset register Base_addr Offset 256 Ishift offset for 24 bit address Add the register number of the high speed data register lto the A24 base address Addr Base_addr IVAL 26 16 SUBEND SUB Dac_drive Dac_drive Subprogram which computes a 128 point 5 Vpp triangle wave and writes the corresponding codes directly to the DAC via Ithe VXIbus and High Speed Data register COM Afg Addr ICONTROL 16 25 3 laccess A24 space with WRITEIO INTEGER l Waveform 1 128 ICalculate triangle wave dac codes FOR l 1 TO 64 Waveform l 1 0755 00125 Waveform SHIFT Waveform l 3 Ishift bits to dac code positions NEXT FOR l 65 TO 128 Waveform l 128 1 0755 00125 Waveform SHIFT Waveform l 3 Ishift bits to d
300. e 164 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 Initiating Waveforms After the AFG has been configured to output the desired waveform the AFG is set to the Wait for Arm state with the command INITiate IMMediate INITiate is an uncoupled command and is generally the last command executed before a waveform is output SUB Sine_wave Sine_wave Subprogram which outputs a sine wave COM Afg OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 1E3 frequency OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN function OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 V lamplitude OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM wait for arm state SUBEND If INITiate IMMediate is executed when the AFG is not in the Idle state Error 213 Init ignored is generated Arming the AFG In order for the AFG to accept trigger signals which output the amplitude points of the waveform the AFG must be armed The information in this section covers the commands and programming sequence used to arm the AFG for fixed frequency waveform generation Arming Commands The commands which arm the AFG allow you to specify the following the arm source the slope of an external arm signal the number of arms per INITiate IMMediate command the number of waveform cycles per arm The arming commands include ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 COUNt lt number gt LAYer2 COUNt lt number gt IMMediate SLOPe lt edge gt SOURce lt source gt Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 165
301. e AFG Impedance 500 AFG Impedance 750 For open circuit outputs the actual OPEN CIRCUITS output amplitude is twice the matched load amplitude Select the 50 Q or 75 Q Load Value OUTPut 1 LOAD INFinity AFG Impedance Open Circuit or Infinity command for the AFG to output the correct amplitude value for open circuits AFG Impedance 500 or 750 The OUTPLOAD program sets the AFG s output impedance to the output load value of 75 Q The commands are 1 Setup the AFG RST Use the RST command to setup the AFG You can also use the commands listed in the previous sections of this chapter Generating Sine Waves on page 58 to setup the AFG 2 Set the Amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt This command specifies the amplitude Refer to the section called Selecting the Amplitude Levels and Output Units on page 72 for more information 3 Select the Auto Load On Off or Once OUTPut 1 LOAD AUTO lt mode gt With this command the assumed load applied to the AFG s Output 50 75 Q terminals tracks the AFG output impedance The modes are ON load value tracks output impedance OFF load value does not track output impedance ONCE load value tracks output impedance once and then goes to OFF 4 Select the Output Impedance OUTPut 1 MPedance lt impedance gt This command selects the AFG output impedance The AFG output impedance can be either 50 Q or 75 Q
302. e lwaveform sequence Iwait for arm state Ramp_wave Subprogram which defines a ramp waveform with a marker pulse and the output sequence COM Afg Afg1 INTEGER Waveform 1 200 Calculate waveform points as dac codes FOR l 100 TO 99 STEP 1 IF I lt O THEN Idac codes for voltages lt OV Waveform 101 1 1 050505 00125 Ishift bits to dac code positions Waveform 101 1 SHIFT Waveform 101 1 3 32768 END IF IF I 0 THEN IOV dac code and marker pulse Waveform 101 32766 Iset marker bit with this amplitude point END IF IF I gt 0 THEN Idac codes for voltages gt OV Waveform 101 1 1 050505 00125 Ishift bits to dac code positions Waveform 101 1 SHIFT Waveform 101 1 3 32768 END IF NEXT OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC SOUR INT OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC FORM UNS OUTPUT Afg SOUR MARK FEED SOUR LIST1 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL RAMP OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 200 Idac data source Idac data format unsigned Idefine marker output Isegment name Isegment size OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SEGM COMB 0 OUTPUT Afg1 Waveform lindefinite length block OUTPUT Afg CHR 10 END lterminate with line feed LF and EOI OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL RAMP_OUT sequence name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ RAMP SUBEND SUB Rst Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 Continued on Next Page Isequence size Isegment order
303. e OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 4096 Isegment size OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SEGM COMB 0 Iwaveform points OUTPUT OAfg1 Waveform lindefinite length block OUTPUT Afg CHR 10 END lterminate with line feed LF and EOI OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM ADDR ENTER Afg Addr_seg1 Addr_seg1 Addr_seg1 8 1 8 to set starting address boundary of segment ISequence 1 is the repetition count and marker enable for Isegment SIN_X Sequence 2 is the starting address of segment SIN_X Sequence 1 SHIFT 4096 1 4 Addr_seg1 DIV 65536 Sequence 2 Addr_seg1 MOD 65536 65536 Addr_seg1 MOD 65536 gt 32767 Continued on Next Page 502 Register Based Programming Appendix C 1390 1400 1410 1420 1430 1440 1450 1460 1470 1480 1490 1500 1510 1520 1530 1540 1550 1560 1570 1580 1590 1600 1610 1620 1630 1640 1650 1660 1670 1680 1690 1700 1710 1720 1730 1740 1750 1760 1770 1780 1790 1800 1810 1820 1830 1840 1850 1860 1870 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL SEQ1 Isequence name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Isequence size OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SSEQ COMB 0 segm execution order OUTPUT Afg1 Sequence Isequence list in indefinite length block OUTPUT Afg CHR 10 END lterminate with Line Feed LF and EOI OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ ADDR Isequence location ENTER Afg Seq1_addr SUBEND SUB Sind_def Sind_def Compute the damped sine waveform Download the d
304. e ROSCillator The reference oscillator as selected by SOURce JROSCillator SOURce TRIGger STARt SEQuence 1 Outputs a nominal 12 nS marker pulse for each point of the segment list Chapter 8 Command Reference 361 SOURce MARKer Parameters Comments Example Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt source gt string ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 none ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer2 SOURce FREQuency 1 CHANge SOURce LIST 1 SOURce PM DEViation CHANge SOURce ROSCillator TRiGger STARt SEQuence 1 e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt STATe e RST Condition SOURce MARKer ECLTrg0 FEED ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 SOURce MARKer ECLTrg1 FEED TRIGger STARt SEQuence 1 Setting the VXI ECLTRGO Trigger Line Source MARK ECLTO FEED SOUR LIST Sets marker list as source ECLTrg lt n gt STATe Parameters Comments Example SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt STATe lt mode gt enables or disables the routing of the selected marker signal SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt FEED command to the specified VXIbus ECL trigger line ECLTRGO or ECLTRG1 Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt mode gt boolean OFF 0 ON 1 none e Executa
305. e RST Condition OUTPut1 STATe ON not SCPI compliant Disabling the Output OUTP OFF Disables output Chapter 8 Command Reference 311 SOURce SOURce Subsystem Syntax The SOURce subsystem is divided into multiple sections each of which control a particular aspect of the Agilent E1445A Each section of the subsystem is separately documented in the following sections of the command reference The SOURce node itself is optional The first level SOURCe syntax tree is SOURce ARBitrary Page 313 FREQuency i Page 319 FREQuency2 Page 330 FUNCtion Page 332 LIST cat toes asa Page 334 LIST Su 2 28 Scans Page 358 MARKer Page 361 PME Arents r ed 40 ohn Page 365 RAMP arica om Sas Page 368 ROSCillator Page 370 SWEEP area at Page 372 VOLTage Page 377 312 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce ARBitrary SOURce ARBitrary The SOURce ARBitrary subsystem controls The data format for the digital to analog converter DAC The DAC data source Direct downloading of DAC data to the waveform segment memory Subsystem Syntax SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat lt format gt SOURce lt source gt DOWNload lt source gt lt dest gt lt length gt no query COMPlete no query DAC FORMat SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat lt format gt specifies the format for the DAC codes The format controls how to send and receiv
306. e 445 e Arbitrary Waveform Description Page 446 e Generating Non Sinusoid Arbitrary Waveforms Page 447 Quiput DA Ci oa Page 447 Med Vos ir tent ieee Page 448 Reference Oscillator o ooooooooooomomomomoo Page 448 Frequency Generators 0 0 00 ee eee eee Page 448 Trigger CCU omita been ands lee Page 450 Output Circuitry e a A eee eee Page 450 JMICrOprocessor opor e ed se Peas Page 450 e Generating Sinusoid Waveforms 004 Page 450 e Output Circuitry Description 0005 Page 451 Attentato uy photic ace os eae ee ed Page 451 Filters Seo od ae bade Page 451 Output Amplifier 20 0 0 eee eee ee Page 451 Offset CArCuItry penis oh Page 451 e AFG Memory Description 0 0 2 0 ee eee Page 452 The AFG can output standard waveforms like sinusoid square triangle and ramp waveforms and user defined arbitrary i e USER function waveforms The AFG can also perform frequency sweeping frequency shift keying output frequency lists and DC volts All waveforms that the AFG generates except DC volts are arbitrary waveforms The only difference is that the AFG generates the data for the standard waveforms internally and the user supplies the data for the arbitrary waveforms Chapter 10 Block Diagram Description 445 Arbitrary Waveform Description Refer to Figure 10 1 An arbitrary waveform is equally divided int
307. e A AS Oh ah Al dee 19 Preparation for Use lot e o E ee ee A S 19 VXIbus Factory Settings o o e 20 The AFG Logical Address o ee 21 Addressing the AFG External Controller and PC 22 Setting the AFG Servant Area o eee 23 The AFG Bus Request Level o o e e e 24 AFG Installation in a Maintrame a 25 Instrument Language SCPI 0 2 2 2 002000220000 26 SCPI Progtamming 206 a ee A eA we Ree er ee ee 26 Command COMPUSO a Se ee oh ee 27 Program Languages 3 3 05 4 Se ok ys ok ee a a ewe 29 BASIC Language Programs 000000000002 eee 29 Visual BASIC Language Programs Using Agilent SICL 32 Visual C C Language Programs Using AgilentSICL 40 Introductory Programs 46 AFG Self Test soto nts bed aye o lo ace eke lend bee 46 BASIC Program Example SLFTST 47 Resetting and Clearing the AFG 0 0 2 000000005 47 BASIC Program Example RSTCLS o 47 Querying the Power On Reset Configuration o o 48 BASIC Program Example LRN 48 Checking for Errors it A hw te a ee E A 49 BASIC Program Example ERRORCHK o o 49 Generating Sine Waves e 51 BASIC Program Example RSTSINE 51 Chapter 2 Generating Standard Waveforms
308. e AFG Arming the AFG places the device in the Wait for Trigger state Figure 5 1 When a trigger occurs the AFG digital to analog converter DAC outputs one waveform amplitude point The information in this section covers the commands and programming sequence used to trigger the AFG when outputting fixed frequency waveforms Triggering The commands which trigger the AFG allow you to specify the following Commands the start trigger source the slope of an external start trigger signal the stop trigger source the slope of an external stop trigger signal the sample gating source the polarity of an external gating signal to enable sample gating The triggering commands include TRIGger STARt SEQuence 1 COUNt lt number gt GATE POLarity lt polarity gt SOURce lt source gt STATe lt state gt IMMediate SLOPe lt edge gt SOURce lt source gt STOP SEQuence2 IMMediate SLOPe lt edge gt SOURce lt source gt Note The trigger count TRIGger STARt COUNt is always equal to the number of amplitude points in the current waveform multiplied by the number of waveform cycles This value is not programmable other than 9 91E37 but 1s included for SCPI compatibility purposes only 172 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 The commands in the TRIGger subsystem are frequency coupled They are executed relative to other AFG commands in the sequence shown in Figure 5 3
309. e Agilent E1445A stores the security code in its non volatile calibration memory which remains intact even with power off e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands CALibration SECure STATe e RST Condition Unaffected Example Changing the Factory shipped Security Password CAL SEC STAT OFF E1445A Disables security CAL SEC CODE NEWCODE Sets new security code CAL SEC ON Re enables security 302 Command Reference Chapter 8 CALibration SECure STATe CALibration SECure STATe lt mode gt lt code gt enables or disables calibration security Calibration security must be disabled to calibrate the Agilent E1445A read or write calibration data change the security code or change the protected user data Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt mode gt boolean OFF 0 ON 1 none lt code gt string 0 through 15 characters none Comments Attempting to disable calibration security without providing the lt code gt parameter generates Error 109 Missing parameter The value supplied must match the currently programmed security code or Error 224 Illegal parameter value will be generated The Agilent E1445A will then wait 1 second before executing any subsequent commands e To enable security the lt code gt parameter is not not required but is checked if it is present e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Gro
310. e CD that came with your Agilent E1445A This program sends the combined list using Signed data as Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data It is thus very similar to the SIGN_DAT program beginning on page 227 and DACBLOK1 example program beginning on page 232 244 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 Using Combined Unsigned Data Note Using the Combined List with the Unsigned Number Format Transferring the List in the Unsigned Number Format Determining the Codes in the Unsigned Number Format The Combined Segment Lists transfers both the arbitrary waveform segment data and marker pulses to the AFG see Chapter 6 for information on marker pulses You can use either the Signed or Unsigned number format for the list The Combined Segment List can be sent as a comma separated list see Using Signed Data to Generate Waveforms on page 225 or as Definite Length or Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Data see Using Definite Length Arbitrary Blocks to Transfer Data on page 231 and Using Indefinite Length Arbitrary Blocks to Transfer Data on page 233 respectively This section shows how to transfer the lists as DAC codes using the Unsigned number format The AFG can only accept a single number format at a time Thus 1f the AFG currently contains Signed data and you wish to send Unsigned data you MUST delete the data in memory first before enabling the AFG to receive Unsigned data This section shows how to setup
311. e DAC codes and how the Agilent E1445A stores and interprets the waveform segment memory data Note The DAC code format cannot be changed after storing the waveform segment data Use SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete ALL to delete waveform segment data before changing the DAC code format Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt format gt discrete SIGNed UNSigned none Comments The available formats are SIGNed Selects the two s complement format The DAC code is a two s complement number where 0 represents 0 V output 4096 represents negative full scale output 4095 represents positive full scale The positive full scale output value is specified by the SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude command UNSigned Selects the unsigned format The DAC code is an unsigned number where 0 represents negative full scale output and 8191 represents positive full scale Chapter 8 Command Reference 313 SOURce ARBitrary e There is no need to specify the DAC format with waveforms programmed in volts The format should be specified if you are a Programming waveforms in DAC codes SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined or SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage DAC commands b Driving the DAC directly SOURce ARBitrary DAC SOURce c Directly downloading waveform segments SOURce ARBitrary DOWNloaad e Related Commands SOURce ARBitrary DAC SOURce S
312. e ENABle lt unmask gt lt unmask gt is the decimal hexadecimal H octal Q or binary B value of the Enable Register bit to be unmasked The decimal values of bits 5 and 8 are 32 and 256 The Enable Register is cleared at power on or by specifying an lt unmask gt value of 0 The QSSG_RQS program sets up the Questionable Signal Status Group Registers to monitor the output frequency generated by the SOURce FREQuency2 subsystem If the programmed frequency differs from the actual output frequency by greater than 1 a service request interrupt is sent to the computer which responds with a message indicating the condition The steps of the program are 1 Set the bit transition which will latch the event frequency error in the Event Register STATus QUEStionable NTRansition lt unmask gt or STATus QUEStionable PTRansition lt unmask gt 432 AFG Status Chapter 9 2 Unmask bit 4 FREQ in the Enable Register so that the event latched into the Event Register will generate a Questionable Signal Status Group summary bit STATus QUEStionable ENABle lt unmask gt 3 Unmask bit 3 QUE in the Service Request Enable Register so that a service request is generated when the Questionable Signal Status Group summary bit is received SRE lt unmask gt BASIC Program Example QSSG_RQS 260 270 280 290 300 IRE STORE QSSG_RQSs This program generates a service request when the output frequency generate
313. e MARKer SPOIint SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence SEGMents Appendix B Useful Tables 469 Frequency Limits Table B 3 Agilent E1445A Frequency Limits Trigger Start Frequency Function Source Low Limit High Limit DC N A N A N A SINusoid INTernal 1 0 Hz Ref Osc freq 4 SQUare INTernal 1 0 Hz Ref Osc freq 16 INTernal2 Ref Osc freq 4 Ref Osc freq 4 131072 TRlangle INTernal 1 0 Hz Ref Osc freq 4 Ramp Points INTernal2 Ref Osc freq Ref Osc freq 131072 Ramp Points Ramp Points RAMP INTernal 1 0 Hz Ref Osc freq 4 Ramp Points INTernal2 Ref Osc freq Ref Osc freq 131072 Ramp Points Ramp Points USER INTernal 1 0 Hz Ref Osc freq 4 INTernal2 Ref Osc freq Ref Osc freq 131072 Multiply High Limit frequency values by 2 if frequency doubling is selected by the SOURce FREQuency 1 RANGe command 470 Useful Tables Appendix B Amplitude Limits Table B 4 Agilent E1445A Amplitude Limits Amplitude Limits for Volts VPP Function V volts VPK volts peak volts peak to peak VRMS volts rms DC 5 12 to 5 11875 N A N A N A SINusoid 161869088 to 161869088 to 323738175 to 114458730 to 5 11875 5 11875 10 2375 3 61950284 SQUare 161869088 to 161869088 to 323738175 t
314. e MINimum and MAXimum values are context dependent See Coupling Rules on page 319 for a description of the coupling between STARt STOP CENTer and SPAN Comments Executable when Initiated Query form only e Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands TRIGger STARt SOURce SOURce FREQuency 1 CENTer MODE RANGe STARt and STOP SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SOURce ROSCillator commands e RST Condition SOURce FREQuency1 SPAN 10 73741824 MHz Example Setting the Frequency Span FREQ SPAN 1E3 Sets the frequency span to 1000 Hz Chapter 8 Command Reference 327 SOURce FREQuency 1 STARt SOURce FREQuency 1 STARt lt start_freq gt sets the starting sample rate or waveform frequency for a frequency swept waveform Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt start_freq gt numeric see below MINimum MAXimum Hz The legal range for lt start_freq gt as well as the MINimum and MAXimum values are context dependent See Coupling Rules on page 319 for a description of the coupling between STARt STOP CENTer and SPAN Comments Executable when Initiated Query form only e Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands TRIGger STARt SOURce SOURce FREQuency 1 CENTer MODE RANGe SPAN and STOP SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SOURce ROSCillator commands e RST Condition SOURce FREQuency1 STARt 0 0 Hz Example Setting the Starting Fre
315. e and lwrites the corresponding codes directly to the DAC via Ithe VXIbus and High Speed Data register COM Afg Addr ICONTROL 16 25 3 laccess A24 space with WRITEIO INTEGER l Waveform 1 128 Calculate triangle wave dac codes FOR l 1 TO 64 Waveform l 1 0755 00125 Waveform SHIFT Waveform l 3 Ishift bits to dac code positions NEXT FOR l 65 TO 128 Waveform l 128 1 0755 00125 Waveform SHIFT Waveform l 3 Ishift bits to dac code positions NEXT Continuously write data in 16 bit words to the dac via the VXlbus and High Speed Data register LOOP FOR l 1 TO 128 WRITEIO 16 Addr Waveform l NEXT END LOOP SUBEND SUB Rst Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 COM Afg Addr OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program VXISRCE FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program VXISRCE C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A The above example programs use the Agilent E1406A Command Module to download the data to the DAC However the command module is only used to demonstrate the downloading method for those programs A better method is to use an embedded controller Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 271 Using the Front Panel s Digital Port In Connector You can use the Digital Port In connector to download data to the segment memor
316. e command and are not sent to the AFG Suppose you send the following command ARM COUN 100 In this case the AFG responds as if you had executed the command as ARM STARt LAYer1 COUNt 100 Some commands will have what appears to be a variable syntax For example SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt STATe lt mode gt In this command lt n gt is replaced by a number No space is left between the keyword ECLTrg and the number because the number is part of the keyword Chapter 8 Command Reference 285 SCPI Command Parameters Parameters are enclosed in greater than less than symbols lt gt in the command syntax and must always be separated from the keywords by a space When more than one parameter is allowed the parameters are separated by a vertical line The following information contains explanations and examples of the parameter types found in this chapter Parameter Numeric Types Explanations and Examples Accepts all commonly used decimal representations of numbers including optional signs decimal points and scientific notation 123 123E2 123 1 23E2 123 1 23E 2 1 23000E 01 Special cases include MINimum MA Ximum and INFinity The Comments section within the Command Reference will state whether a numeric parameter can also be specified in hex octal and or binary H7B 40173 B1111011 e Boolean Represents a single binary condition that is either true or false Any non zero value i
317. e data that generates the form buttons etc ARBWAVE FRM This program generates a 100 points ramp The data to generate the ramp is transferred to the AFG as comma separated voltages Instrument GPIB address Const ShowAddr hpib7 9 10 Dim Addr As Integer Dim ChkName As String Sub CheckError SubName As String Check for any errors Dim Actual As Long Dim RdErr As String 256 Dim Work As String Dim ErrNum As Integer Dim TempName As String TempName ChkName ChkName CheckError Read error message Call iwrite Addr ByVal SYSTem ERRor Chr 10 14 1 Actual Call iread Addr ByVal RdErr 256 0 Actual If error was detected ErrNum Val RdErr If ErNum lt gt 0 Then Store message only into Work string Work Mid RdErr 1 Actual 1 Work Work in Sub SubName Enable and clear error list box ShoweErr Enabled True ShowErr Visible True ShoweErr Clear Continued on Next Page Chapter 1 Getting Started 33 Action Text The program generated the following error s Show error message ShowErr Addltem Work Loop until error message is O Do Read error message Call iwrite Addr ByVal SYSTem ERRor Chr 10 14 1 Actual Call iread Addr ByVal RdErr 256 0 Actual Store message only into Work string Work Mid RdErr 1 Actual 1 Get error number ErrNum Val Work If error show error message If ErrNum
318. e defined Deleting All Waveform Segments LIST DEL ALL Deletes all segments SEGMent DELete SELected SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete SELected deletes the currently selected waveform segment definition and makes its memory available for new waveform segment definitions Comments If the waveform segment is used in any segment sequence executing this command generates Error 1102 Segment in use The waveform segment will not be deleted After deleting the currently selected waveform segment no waveform segment is SELected Use SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete ALL to delete all waveform segment definitions with one command Executable when Initiated No Coupling Group None Related Commands SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete ALL SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect RST Condition None 340 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce LIST 1 e Power On Condition No waveform segments are defined Example Deleting a Waveform LIST SEL ABC Selects waveform segment ABC LIST DEL Deletes segment SEGMent FREE SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent FREE returns information on waveform segment memory availability and usage The return data format is lt numeric_value gt lt numeric_value gt The first numeric value shows the amount of waveform segment memory available in points the second the amount of waveform segment memory used in points Comments Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e RST
319. e g VO rather than VP 138 Suffix not allowed Parameter suffix is specified when one is not allowed 141 Invalid character data Discrete parameter specified is not a valid choice 144 Character data too long A segment or sequence name is too long or a discrete parameter is gt 12 characters Segment and sequence names must be 12 characters or less 148 Character data not allowed Discrete parameter was specified when another type e g numeric boolean is required 151 Invalid string data The string data specified e g for the SOUR MARK FEED lt source gt command is not a valid choice 158 String data not allowed A string was specified when another parameter type i e discrete numeric boolean is required Appendix B Useful Tables 475 Table B 6 Agilent E1445A Error Messages continued Code Message Description 161 Invalid block data The number of bytes in a definite length data block does not equal the number of bytes indicated by the block header 168 Block data not allowed Block data was specified when another parameter type i e discrete numeric boolean is required 178 Expression data not allowed The parameter was specified as an expression e g SOUR FREQ1 FIX A B 183 Invalid inside macro definition Voltage or segment list is inside a macro 211 Trigger ignored Trigger was received and the AFG was not in the wait fo
320. e modulation angle Downloading There are two ways to use the VXIbus backplane to download the data Segment Data downloading the list into memory to be executed later downloading directly to the DAC for immediate execution Downloading Download a Combined Segment List and a Combined Sequence List into Seg ment Data into memory using the requirements in this section Memory Combined Waveform Figure 7 4 shows a single 16 bit integer used to download a Combined Seg ment List Format Waveform Segment List Bits 3 through 15 are the DAC codes for the waveform voltage values bit 1 is the marker bit and bit O the last point Last Point Bit Unused pspshsiizlt1fiolefal7felsi 3 2 1 0 V J DAC Codes for the 13 Bit DAC Marker Bit Figure 7 4 Combined List Format for Downloading e Store the list either as Signed or Unsigned Combined Segment Lists into memory Use either Definite Length or Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Data to store the data The list uses a 16 bit word for each point of the waveform segment e Download the segment data directly into the AFG s High Speed Data Register The data must go to the register address with a 38 decimal 26 hex offset in the AFG s A24 address space e Be sure to set the last point bit bit 0 in the list This indicates to the AFG that all the segment data has been transferred Set the bit at the third to last point of the waveform segments the actual last point
321. e ones listed in Generating Multiple Marker Pulses in Multiple Waveform Segment Lists on page 207 except they only select single point wide marker pulses The exceptions are as follows 10 Store the Marker Pulse Location for the Second Waveform Segment SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer SPOint lt point gt This command selects the segment or point on a waveform where the marker pulse is to be output For example to output a marker pulse at point 5 of a 10 point waveform execute SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer SPOint 5 12 Select the Waveform Segment for Marker Output SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer SPOint lt point gt This command selects the waveform segment in a segment sequence that is to output the marker pulses The marker pulses must be selected by SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer SPOint lt point gt or SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer lt marker_list gt before they are output 212 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations Chapter 6 BASIC Program Example MARKSEG2 ROD 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 The MARKSEG2 program is the same as the MARKSEGI1 program on page 209 except it selects the marker pulses differently The differences are as follows IRE STORE MARKSEG2 This program computes a sine wave and a triangle wave as arbitrary lwaveforms A single marker
322. e the location of the sequence base address waveform index lto the Waveform Select register Write the base address of lof the sequence in sequence memory to the Sequence Base register Wav_sel BINAND READIO 16 Base_addr IVAL A 16 IVAL OOFF 16 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL A 16 BINIOR Wav_sel IVAL 0100 16 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL 20 16 Seq1_addr sequence mem base addr Wav_sel BINAND READIO 16 Base_addr IVAL A 16 IVAL OOFF 16 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL A 16 BINIOR Wav_sel IVAL 0200 16 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL 20 16 Seq2_addr sequence mem base addr Wav_sel BINAND READIO 16 Base_addr IVAL A 16 IVAL OOFF 16 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL A 16 BINIOR Wav_sel IVAL 0300 16 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL 20 16 Seq3_addr sequence mem base addr SUBEND SUB Wave_change Wave_change Once the AFG has been INITiated this subprogram changes Ithe output waveform sequence by writing the location of the Isequence s base address in sequence base memory to the Waveform Select register COM Afg Afg1 Base_addr Seq1_addr Seq2_addr Seq3_addr INTEGER CONTROL 16 25 3 access A24 space with READIO and WRITEIO Read the waveform select register and write back the value read in lorder to clear the WFUSED bit in the Status register Continued on Next Page Appendix C Register Based Programming 501 900 910 920 930 940 950 960 970 980 990 1000 1010 1020 1030 1040 1050 10
323. e triangle wave sine wave 210 land output waveform sequence 220 CALL Tri_wave 230 CALL Sine_wave 240 CALL Seq_def 250 ISelect the output sequence and start the waveform 260 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER WAVE_OUT 270 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM 280 290 WAIT 1 lallow interrupt to be serviced 300 OFF INTR 7 310 END 320 330 SUB Tri_wave 340 Tri_wave Subprogram which defines a triangle waveform and stores 350 litin a segment 360 COM Afg 370 DIM Waveform 1 2048 ICalculate waveform points 380 FOR l 1 TO 2048 390 IF 1 lt 1024 THEN 400 Waveform l 1 0048828 410 ELSE 420 Waveform l 2048 1 0048828 430 END IF 440 NEXT Continued on Next Page 96 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter 3 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 800 810 820 830 840 850 860 870 880 890 900 910 920 930 940 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL TRI Isegment name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 2048 Isegment size OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT Waveform waveform points SUBEND SUB Sine_wave Sine_wave Subprogram which computes a sine wave and stores lit in a segment COM Afg DIM Waveform 1 2048 Calculate sine wave FOR l 1 TO 2048 Waveform l 5 SIN 2 PI 1 2048 NEXT OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL SINEWAVE segment name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SE
324. e waves inherit the timing jitter characteristics given above for frequency generator 1 The sample period is 14 of the square wave period Triangles Ramps For the default setting of 100 points per cycle 0 0001 Hz to 107 3741824 kHz normal range 0 0002 Hz to 214 7483648 kHz doubled range Higher frequencies are possible with fewer than 100 points per cycle Points per cycle can be 4 to 262144 Appendix A Agilent E1445A Specifications 455 Frequency Agility The capabilities in this section apply to all built in standard waveforms and to all arbitrary waveforms generated with Frequency Generator 1 i e the DDS timebase Digital Sweep Linear and Log phase continuous 0 2 to 800 points sec typical Note 1 Frequency List Up to 256 points phase continuous 0 2 to 800 points sec typical Note 1 Frequency Shift Up to 2M or f ref 5 changes sec Keyed FSK phase continuous whichever is smaller Digital Phase See Interface Characteristics later in this Modulation appendix Note 1 Sine waves can be leveled at each step of a frequency sweep or list The speeds above include leveling Additional Waveform Control Characteristics Waveform repetitions per ARM STARt 1 to 65536 or INFinity Not specified for built in sine waves For other waveforms the final waveform repetition stops at the last sample point ARM STARt events per INITiate 1 to 65535 or INFinity 456 Agilent E1445A Specifications Appendix A
325. each start arm accepted Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt number gt numeric 1 through 65536 9 9E 37 none INFinity MINimum MAXimum 9 9E 37 is equivalent to INFinity MINimum selects 1 repetitions MAXimum selects 65536 repetitions Comments Use the ABORt or TRIGger STOP IMMediate command to terminate the output when ARM STARt LAYer1 COUNt is set to INFinity or 9 9E 37 e For standard function sine waves the actual number of cycles which appear at the output relative to the programmed count is approximate and is not specified Chapter 8 Command Reference 291 ARM e Executable when Initiated Query form only e Coupling Group None Related Commands ABORt TRIGger STOP MMediate e RST Condition ARM STARt LAYer1 COUNt INFinity Example Setting Waveform Repetitions per Arm ARM COUN 10 Sets 10 repetitions arm STARt LAYer2 COUNt ARM STARt LAYer2 COUNt lt number gt specifies the number of waveform start arms the Agilent E1445A will accept after an INITiate IMMediate command before returning the trigger system to the idle state Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt number gt numeric 1 through 65535 MINimum none MAXimum 9 9E 37 INFinity MINimum selects 1 arms MAXimum selects 65535 arms 9 9E 37 is equivalent to INFinity Comments Use the ABORt command to ret
326. ect the Arbitrary Waveform Function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe USER This command selects the arbitrary waveform function Couple the command to the previous frequency command 7 Set the Maximum Output Amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt This command specifies the maximum output amplitude The amplitude must be equal to or greater than the maximum voltage value of the waveform segment Refer to Table B 4 in Appendix B for the amplitude limits 8 Name the Waveform Segment SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt This command names the waveform segment Each waveform segment to be stored into memory must have a unique name Legal names must start with an alphabetic character but can contain alphabetic numeric and underscore _ characters The names can have a maximum length of 12 characters 9 Set the Waveform Segment Size SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine lt ength gt This command defines the size of the number of voltages or points in the selected waveform segment The size must be equal or greater than the number of points in the waveform segment minimum value is 8 points The command reserves enough memory needed for the waveform segment 10 Store the Waveform Segment as Voltages SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage lt voltage_list gt This command stores the points of the waveform segment into the AFG s segment memory These points are sent to the AFG as volts which are
327. ectory Versions VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 185 Arming and Triggering Frequency Sweeps and Lists Frequency sweeps and lists are started and advanced using the arm and trigger signals described in this section The commands used to set up the arming and triggering of sweeps and lists are ARM SWEep SEQuence3 COUNt lt number gt IMMediate LINK lt link gt SOURce lt source gt TRIGger SWEep SEQuence3 IMMediate LINK lt link gt SOURce lt source gt TlMer lt period gt The frequency sweep and frequency list arming and triggering commands are frequency coupled Thus they are executed in the sequence shown in the flowchart in Figure 4 1 on page 118 Frequency Sweeps The AFG can output frequency sweeps each time it is triggered However Using Trigge rs the maximum sweep time and frequency steps depend on the number of waveform repetitions and the average sweep frequency To determine the maximum sweep time SOURce SWEep TIMe lt number gt divide the number of waveform repetitions to be output 1 e maximum 1s 66536 by the average frequency For example STARt frequency is 1 kHz STOP frequency is 1 MHz then sweep time 66536 1000 1000000 2 66536 500 500 1329 To determine the maximum number of frequency steps or points SOURce SWEep POINts lt number gt divide the sweep time by the minimum time between
328. ectory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program MARKSEG2 C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A Chapter 6 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations 213 Generating Marker Pulses for Each Waveform Point The MARKTRG program shows how to generate and output a 12 nS wide marker pulse at each point of the waveform The pulses are output at the Marker Out BNC Since the pulses are output each time a segment is output the pulse rate is the same as the sample rate you can use this function as another way to lockstep multiple AFGs The example generates a 10 point 5 V ramp Although this example generates an arbitrary waveform the pulses can be generated in any function and sample source Chan A applied to AFG s Output Connector Chan B applied to AFG s Marker Out Connector Chan A 2V DIV Chan B 5V DIV Output applied to a 500 load value 1 pesec DIV The commands are 1 Reset the AFG RST 2 Clear the AFG Memory of All Sequence and Segment Data SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete ALL SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete ALL 3 Setup the AFG for Output SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FlXed lt frequency gt SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe USER SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt 4 Select the Marker Source SOURce MARKer FEED TRIGger STARt SEQuence 1
329. ed Commands TRIGger SWEep SOURce e RST Condition TRIGger SWEep LINK ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer2 Example Linking the Sweep Advance Trigger TRIG SWE LINK Links sweep advance trigger to start arm TRIG SWE LINK ARM LAY2 400 Command Reference Chapter 8 TRIGger SWEep SOURce TRIGger SWEep SOURce lt source gt selects the source that causes a frequency sweep or list to advance to the next frequency Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt source gt discrete BUS HOLD LINK TlMer none TTLTrgO through TTLTrg7 Comments The available sources are BUS The Group Execute Trigger GET GPIB command or the IEEE 488 2 TRG common command HOLD Suspend sweep or list frequency advance triggering Use TRIGger SWEep IMMediate to advance to the next frequency LINK The next valid start arm advances the sweep or list Thus the frequency change always occurs at the start of ARM STARt LAYer 1 COUNt repetitions of the waveform TIMer The SOURce SWEep TIME and TRIGger SWEep TIMer commands control the sweep or list frequency advance timing TTLTrg0 through TTLTrg1 The VXIbus TTL trigger lines e If TRIGger SWEep SOURce is set to TTLTrg lt n gt and you want to set ARM SWEep SOURCce to TTLTrg lt n gt both must be set to the same trigger line lt n gt e Executable when Initiated Query form only e Coupling Group Frequency e Rela
330. ed with bits in the Event Register are specified unmasked with the command STATus OPERation ENABle lt unmask gt lt unmask gt is the decimal hexadecimal H octal Q or binary B value of the Enable Register bit to be unmasked Bits 0 3 6 and 8 have corresponding decimal values of 1 8 64 and 256 The Enable Register is cleared at power on or by specifying an lt unmask gt value of 0 The OSG_RQS program sets up the Operation Status Group Registers to determine when the AFG enters the wait for arm state When the AFG enters that state a service request interrupt is sent to the computer which responds with a message indicating the state which exists The steps of the program are 1 Set the bit transition which will latch the event entering wait for arm state in the Event Register STATus OPERation NTRansition lt unmask gt or STATus OPERation PTRansition lt unmask gt 436 AFG Status Chapter 9 2 Unmask bit 6 ARM in the Enable Register so that the event latched into the Event Register will generate an Operation Status Group summary bit STATus OPERation ENABle lt unmask gt 3 Unmask bit 7 OPR in the Service Request Enable Register so that a service request is generated when the Operation Status Group summary bit is received SRE lt unmask gt BASIC Program Example OSG_RQS N 10 30 40 50 60 70 80 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 2
331. eep Spatii see ccarr ee ee eee eee eee Page 157 Sweep Direction 0 e eee ee eee ee Page 157 WS Weep Meir Swe te Oh eo ee be les Page 158 Output Frequency and Sample Rate Page 160 AC Leveling sosede Dali o Aca BG dee Re ee Page 160 FSK Control Sources 0 0 0 eee eee eee Page 161 Frequency Shift Delay 00 00004 Page 162 Driving the TTLTrg lt n gt Trigger Lines Page 162 Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 117 FSK Programming Flowchart SWEEPS FREQUENCY LISTS FREQUENCY SHIFT KEYING The flowchart in Figure 4 1 shows the commands used to program the AFG for frequency sweeps frequency lists and for frequency shift keying Shown with each command is its power on reset setting Since each example program begins by resetting the AFG many of the default settings are used Thus the examples which follow the sequence do not execute every command shown on the flowchart Remove the flowchart from the binder for easy accessibility Refer to the flowchart while doing the examples in this chapter if desired SET REFERENCE OSCILLATOR SOURCE TO INTernal1 SOURce ROSCillator SOURce SET SWEEP DIRECTION SOURce SWEep DIRection RESET VALUE INTernal1 RESET VALUE UP SET SAMPLE SOURCE TO INTernal1 TRIGger STARt SOURce SET SWEEP POINTS SOURce SWEep POINts RESET VALUE INTernal1 RESET VALUE 800 SET FR
332. efine segment execution order SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program SPIKES FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program SPIKES C is in directory Versions VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A 110 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter 3 Ge nerating a Yo The SIN_R program generates a Rectified sine wave using 4096 segments Rectified Sine Wave Ponts 5 V DIV Output applied to a 50Q load value 2 msec DIV BASIC Program Example SIN_R _ 180 190 200 210 220 230 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 This program is similar to the SIN_X BASIC program on page 105 with the following differences IRE STORE SIN_R This program outputs a rectified sine wave as an arbitrary waveform Call the subprogram which defines a rectified sine wave and Ithe output sequence CALL Sinr_def ISelect the output sequence and start the waveform OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER SIN_R_OUT OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM SUB Sinr_def Sinr_def Compute waveform rectified sine wave and define segment COM Afg DIM Waveform 1 4096 FOR l 1 TO 4096 Waveform SIN 2 PI I 4096 NEXT FOR 2048 TO 4096 Waveform 0 NEXT OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL SIN_R Define segment name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 4096 Def
333. efinite length block COMBSIGN y Downloads waveform amplitude and marker data as signed DAC codes in a definite length block COMBUNS y Downloads waveform amplitude and marker data as unsigned DAC codes in an indefinite length block COMBSEQ i Downloads waveform amplitude and marker data as signed DAC codes in definite length blocks Downloads the output sequence including repetition count marker and segment address in an indefinite length block VXIDOWN Downloads waveform amplitude and marker data over the VXlbus backplane VXISRCE Writes data directly to the DAC from the VXlbus backplane See also Appendix C WAVSELFP y Changes output waveform sequence by writing location of a sequence s base address to the Waveform Select Register AFG Status QSSG_RQS BASIC Visual C C Monitors conditions in the Questionable Signal Status Group Chapter 9 OSG_RQS E Monitors conditions in the Operation Status Group Monitors programming errors using the Standard Event ERRORCHK Status Group Register Based FREQ1REG BASIC Visual BASIC Changes the output frequency generated by the DDS Applications Visual C C Direct Digital Synthesis chip Frequency1 generator by writing directly to the registers Appendix C FREQ2REG y Changes the output frequency generated by the Divide by N chip Frequency2 generator by writing directly to the registers PHASCHNG X Changes the signal phase by writing directly to the registers WAVE_SEL y Changes the o
334. eforms 63 460 B SPOLL Afg 470 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 480 OUTPUT Afg 490 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 500 REPEAT 510 OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 520 ENTER Afg Code Message 530 PRINT Code Message 540 UNTIL Code 0 550 STOP 560 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program SQUWAVE FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program SQUWAVE C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A 64 Generating Standard Waveforms Chapter 2 Generating Triangle Ramp Waves 2 VIDIV Output applied to a 50 Q load 0 2 msec DIV The TRIWAVE program outputs a triangle wave at 10 kHz 4 V output level and 1 V offset The commands are 1 Reset the AFG RST This command aborts any waveform output and selects the 42 9 MHz reference oscillator source DDS sample source that is trigger start source sinusoid function arm start immediate O V offset and a 50 Q output impedance and output load 2 Select the Reference Oscillator SOURce JROSCillator SOURce INTernal 1 This command selects the reference oscillator source see Reference Oscillator Sources on page 78 Although RST selects 42 9 MHz reference oscillator it is selected here for good programming practice 3 Select the Sample Source TRIGger STARt SOURce INTernal 1 This command selects
335. eger Data how BASIC transfers 255 A A24 Address base address 484 486 query space 407 Abbreviated SCPI Commands 285 ABORt subsystem 290 using 196 waveforms 196 AC Calibration Corrections 304 AC Output Leveling 144 146 160 161 amplitude errors 160 161 Index Agilent E1445A User s Manual Accessing the Registers 484 486 Address A24 space query 407 command module GPIB port 22 GPIB 22 logical 21 22 primary GPIB 22 query segment sequence 347 waveform segment 336 secondary GPIB 22 AFG arming count 199 292 sources 199 the 165 171 291 297 block diagram description 445 452 bus request level setting 24 calibration 298 305 description 445 frequency modes 155 198 frequency synthesis modes 197 gating polarity 200 gating sources 200 high speed operation 223 280 initiating the 306 307 installing in mainframe 25 lock stepping multiple 176 180 memory description 452 operating multiple AFGs together 218 222 servant area 23 specifications 453 462 status 429 444 triggering the 172 185 AFGGEN1 Example Program 102 AFGGEN2 Example Program 104 Agilent E1446A settings conflict error messages 482 using AFG with 23 Amplitude characteristics 457 458 effects on DAC codes 280 errors AC leveling 160 161 levels selecting 72 74 limits 471 Agilent E1445A User s Manual Index 509 A continued output default voltage units 379 output setting 72 74 377 380 voltage li
336. egment Sequence List e Store the list as a 32 bit wide value for each waveform segment in the list Send the value as two 16 bit words with the most significant bit MSB sent first Download the word with the most significant bit into the AFG s Sequence Register with a 34 decimal 22 hex offset in the AFG s A24 address space Download the word with the least significant bit into the AFG s Sequence Register with a 36 decimal 24 hex offset in the AFG s A24 address space see Appendix C for information on registers 260 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 The VXIDOWN program shows how to download multiple Combined Segment Lists 1 e waveform segment and or marker bit of an arbitrary waveform and a single Combined Segment Sequence List waveform segments to be executed marker enables and repetition counts into the AFG s memory using the VXIbus backplane The combined segment lists are downloaded in the Signed format and as Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data The example generates two 5 V sine waves and a single O to 5 V triangle wave A marker is output at the center of the triangle The commands are 1 Reset the AFG RST 2 Clear the AFG Memory of All Sequence and Segment Data SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete ALL SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete ALL 3 Setup the AFG for Output SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FlXed lt frequency gt SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe USER SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude
337. elative to the full scale output voltage specified by SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude in effect at the time the voltage point list is created Subsequently changing the full scale output voltage will change the actual output voltages that are generated and also the values returned by the query form of this command Executable when Initiated No Coupling Group None Related Commands SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage DAC SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude RST Condition Unaffected Power On Condition No waveform segments are defined Chapter 8 Command Reference 345 Example SOURce LIST 1 Defining a Waveform Segment Voltage Point List LIST SEL ABC Selects waveform segment ABC LIST DEF 8 ABC is 8 points long LIST VOLT 5 1 5 0 5 1 5 0 Defines waveform voltages SEGMent VOLTage DAC Parameters Comments SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage DAC lt voltage_list gt defines the series of output voltage points that constitute a waveform segment The points are specified in terms of digital to analog converter DAC codes The lt voltage_list gt may be either a comma separated list of DAC codes or an TEEE 488 2 definite or indefinite length block containing the DAC codes in 16 bit integer format The DAC code is a 16 bit two s complement or unsigned number see the SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat command With SOURce VOLTage LEVel IM
338. emains the same depending on which command was most recently sent The other value is changed based on the new SWEep POINts value Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group Frequency Related Commands SOURce FREQuency 1 CENTer MODE SPAN START and STOP SOURce SWEep DIRection and SPACing RST Condition SOURce SWEep POINts 800 Example Setting the Number of Points in the Sweep SWE POIN 100 Sets 100 points in sweep 374 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce SWEep SPACing SOURce SWEep SPACing lt mode gt selects either linear or logarithmic frequency sweep mode Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt mode gt discrete LINear LOGarithmic none Comments The available modes are LiNear Selects the linear sweep mode The sample rate or waveform frequency increases or decreases linearly between the start and stop frequencies selected by SOURce FREQuency 1 STARt and STOP or CENTer and SPAN LOGarithmic Selects the logarithmic sweep mode The sample rate or waveform frequency increases or decreases logarithmically between the start and stop frequencies selected by SOURce FREQuency 1 STARt and STOP or CENTer and SPAN e Executable when Initiated Query form only e Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands SOURce FREQuency 1 CENTer MODE SPAN START and STOP SOURce SWEep DIRection and POINts RST Condition SOUR
339. en DEFined it must be deleted SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete SELected command before its reserved length may be redefined The contents and length of the list may be changed repeatedly without re executing the DEFine command e By using the SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt command up to 4096 repetitions of a waveform segment can take only one point in the segment sequence memory This factor should be considered when reserving segment sequence memory space e SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DEFine initializes the segment sequence s waveform segment list to a zero current length and the repetition count and marker enable lists to a length of 1 with a value of 1 single repetition of each segment marker pulse generation enabled for all segments e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect e RST Condition Unaffected e Power on Condition No segment sequences are defined Example Reserving Memory for a Segment Sequence LIST SSEQ SEL ABC Selects sequence ABC LIST SSEQ DEF 1024 Reserves 1024 points for ABC 350 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete ALL Comments Example SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete ALL deletes all defined segment sequence definitions from memory and makes all of the sequence memory available for new segment sequence definitions In use sequences cannot be deleted e Use SOURce LIST 1 SSEQue
340. ents into computer memory Wave_seg float malloc seg_size sizeof float Setup the AFG cmd_exe set_commands sizeof set_commands sizeof char gen_seg set_commands Call routine to check for AFG errors check_error gen_seg set_commands Calculate the segments for loop 0 loop lt seg_size loop Wave_seglloop loop 0505 Setup for iprintf function sprintf send_str S if n seg_commands seg_ size Call function to execute the final command with segment data if liprintf addr send_str Wave_seg time_out gen_seg Seg_commands Call routine to check for AFG errors check_error gen_seg seg_commands Setup the AFG for output cmd_exe out_commands sizeof out_commands sizeof char gen_seg out_commands Continued on Next Page Chapter 1 Getting Started 43 Call routine to check for AFG errors check_error gen_seg out_commands Free the allocated memory free Wave_seg KK KK KK KK KK IK KK KK KK IK IK IK IK KK IK IK IK IK IK KK KK KK void cmd_exe char commanas int length char func_tion int loop for loop 0 loop lt length loop if liprintf addr s n commands loop time_out func_tion KK KK KK KK KK IK KK IK IK IK IK IK IK IK IK IK IK IK IK IKK IK KK KKK KK void run_query void char mem_size 21 Query segment memory if lipromptf addr SOUR LIST1 SEGM FREE n t mem
341. equency generator to generate Sinusoid waveforms The generator output directly supplies the DAC data for the output DAC to generate the waveforms Output Reference Oscillator Figure 10 5 Generating Sinusoid Waveforms 450 Block Diagram Description Chapter 10 Output Circuitry Description Refer to Figure 10 6 The output circuitry consists of an output amplifier attenuator offset circuitry and filter The following describes the different parts of the circuitry Output Amplifier Output Erom Filt Attenuat ANNAN DAC ilter enuator 250 500 Offset Circuitry Figure 10 6 AFG Output Circuitry Attenuator The attenuator provides 30 dB attenuation in 01 dB steps for the output voltage The AFG automatically sets the attenuator to the appropriate value dependent on the output amplitude selected by the user The DC volts function does not use the attenuator For this function the output of the output DAC is directly output through the output amplifier to the Output connector Filter The AFG provides a 250 kHz low pass filter 10 MHz low pass filter or no filter The filters are used to filter the high frequency components such as clock signals of the output DAC s output signal Output Ampl ifier The output amplifier provides the necessary current to drive output loads of 50Q and 75Q loads applied to the Output connector For matched loads the output amplitude are from 5 12 V to 5 11
342. equent SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude commands Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt units gt discrete DBM DBMW V VPK VPP none VRMS W Comments The available default units are DBM DBMW dB referenced to 1 milliwatt V Volts This is equivalent to VPK for time varying waveforms VPK Volts peak VPP Volts peak to peak VRMS Volts RMS W Watts For W DBM and DBMW the amplitude is referenced to the OUTPut 1 LOAD value they are meaningless and therefore unavailable if OUTPut 1 LOAD INFinity is set e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands OUTPut 1 IMPedance OUTPut 1 LOAD SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude e RST Condition SOURce VOLTage LEVel lMMediate AMPLitude UNIT VOLTage V Example Setting the Default Voltage Units VOLT UNIT VOLT VPP Sets default units to volts peak to peak Chapter 8 Command Reference 379 SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate OFFSet SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate OFFSet lt offset gt sets the output offset voltage for all waveform shapes except DC Output offset amplitude is programmed in volts Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt offset gt numeric see below MINimum MAXimum volts DC Output When a matched load has been specified MINimum selects 5 0 V MA
343. erator OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ2 FIX 1E6 frequency OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SQU function OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5V amplitude OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state OUTPUT Afg STAT OPC INIT OFF OPC lwait for INIT to complete ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Divide_by_n Reference_osc Frequency Points Divide_by_n Subprogram which changes the output frequency by writing Ito the register which controls divide by n frequency Isynthesis COM Afg Base_addr INTEGER Divider CONTROL 16 25 3 laccess A24 space with READIO and WRITEIO Read register 63 Write to register 63 setting the SHOLD bit bit 7 Iso sample signals are ignored Sample_hold READIO 16 Base_addr IVAL 63 16 Sample_hold BINIOR Sample_hold 128 Iset bit 7 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL 63 16 Sample_hold ISet the reference oscillator divider based on the new frequency Also load the new divider value if n is greater than 3 Divider Reference_osc Frequency Points SELECT Divider CASE 1 Sample_hold BINAND Sample_hold 248 0 CASE 2 Sample_hold BINAND Sample_hold 248 1 CASE 3 Sample_hold BINAND Sample_hold 248 2 CASE ELSE Sample_hold BINAND Sample_hold 248 3 Divider Divider 2 1 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL 7D 16 SHIFT Divider 8 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL 7F 16 BINAND Divider 255 END SELECT WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL 63 16 Sample_hold IClear sample hold bit which activates new frequency Continued on Next Page
344. erator Ranges on page 79 Since RST automatically sets the range to the lower range it is executed in this program for good programming practice Chapter 2 Generating Standard Waveforms 61 5 Set the Frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 FlXed lt frequency gt This command specifies the frequency Refer to Table B 3 in Appendix B for the frequency limits 6 Select the Function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SQUare This command selects the square wave function 7 Select the Square Wave Polarity SOURce RAMP POLarity INVerted This command selects the square wave polarity For NORMal the initial voltage goes positive For INVerted the initial voltage goes negative 8 Set the Amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt This command specifies the amplitude Refer to the section called Selecting the Amplitude Levels and Output Units on page 72 for more information 9 Set the Offset SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate OFFSet lt offset gt This command specifies the offset Refer to the section called Selecting the Amplitude Levels and Output Units on page 72 for more information 10 Initiate the Waveform INITiate IMMediate This command generates an immediate output with the arm source set to IMMediate Refer to Chapter 5 for triggering information 62 Generating Standard Waveforms Chapter 2 BASIC Program Example SQUWAVE 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 3
345. es or if ARM STARt LAYer2 COUNt 1 is set TRIGger STOP IMMediate places the trigger system in the idle state at the end of the current waveform repetition An INITiate IMMediate command must be executed to restart waveform generation TRIGger STOP IMMediate differs from ABORt in that ABORt terminates all start arm cycles immediately whereas TRIGger STOP IMMediate terminates only the current arm cycle at the end of the current waveform repetition Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None Related Commands ABORT INITiate IMMediate TRIGger STARt COUNt RST Condition None Example Stopping an Arm Cycle ARM LAY2 COUN 5 Allows 5 arms ARM LAY2 SOUR HOLD Sets manual start arm ARM COUN 100 Sets 100 repetitions per arm INIT Initiates trigger system ARM LAY2 Starts arm waveform TRIG STOP Terminates arm cycle at end of waveform repetition ARM LAY2 Starts arm waveform again Chapter 8 Command Reference 397 TRIGger STOP SLOPe Parameters Comments TRIGger STOP SLOPe lt edge gt selects the edge rising or falling on the Agilent E1445A s front panel Stop Trig FSK Gate In BNC which terminates the current start arm cycle at the end of the current waveform repetition This edge is significant only with TRIGger STOP SOURce set to EXTernal The programmed value is retained but not used when other sources are selected Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type V
346. ess SUBEND SUB Output_function Output_function Subprogram which uses SCPI commands to set DDS frequency synthesis to set the output frequency lfunction amplitude to set up phase modulation and lto start the waveform COM Afg Base_addr OUTPUT Afg TRIG STAR SOUR INT1 Ifrequency generator OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 60 lfrequency OUTPUT Afg SOUR PM SOUR INT phase modulation source OUTPUT Afg SOUR PM STAT ON lenable phase modulation OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN lfunction Continued on Next Page 496 Register Based Programming Appendix C 410 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5V amplitude 420 OUTPUT Afg SOUR PM DEV ODEG Iphase modulation angle 430 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait_for_arm state 440 OUTPUT Afg STAT OPC INIT OFF OPC Iwait for INIT to complete 450 ENTER Afg Complete 460 SUBEND 470 480 SUB Phase_change Phase 490 Phase_change ISubprogram which changes the phase of the output signal 500 lby writing phase data to the registers on the AFG 510 COM Afg Base_addr 520 CONTROL 16 25 3 access A24 space with READIO and WRITEIO 530 540 ICalculate phase increment 550 Phase1 Phase MOD 360 560 IF Phase1 lt 0 THEN Phase1 Phase1 360 570 Phase_data IVAL 4096 16 Phase1 360 65536 Phase1 gt 180 16 580 590 Write the first byte of the phase increment to register B3 600 Write the second byte to register B1 610 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL B3 16 IVAL P
347. et by previous commands Often this results in Settings Conflict errors when the program executes To prevent these errors the AFG commands must be executed in Coupling Groups The coupling groups and associated commands are listed in Table B 2 in Appendix B The coupling groups identified in Table B 2 are frequency and voltage Some commands like SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe are associated with both groups These commands are a bridge linking coupling the two groups Commands not in a coupling group must precede or follow commands in the coupling groups Executing un coupled commands in a coupling group breaks the coupling and can cause a Settings Conflict error Command queries commands with are uncoupled commands and should be executed before or after coupled commands See Executing Coupled Commands on page 28 for information on executing coupled commands When MINimum or MAXimum is the parameter of a command in a coupling group that command should be the last command executed in the group Unlike other parameters that are set when an end of line indication is received MIN and MAX are evaluated by the AFG processor when the command is parsed Thus the value of MIN or MAX is based on the values of the other coupling group commands at that time Settings conflict errors will occur if the current values are incompatible with an intended MIN or MAX value As a result MIN and MAX are not recommended for specif
348. ext Page 256 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 540 Tri_wave Subprogram which computes a triangle wave and downloads 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 800 810 820 830 840 850 860 870 880 890 900 910 920 930 940 950 960 970 980 990 1000 1010 1020 1030 Ithe corresponding dac codes as signed numbers in a Idefinite length block to segment memory Marker pulses Icoincide with the output voltages of Waveform 1024 through Waveform 1033 COM Afg Afg1 INTEGER Waveform 1 2048 ICalculate triangle wave dac codes FOR l 1 TO 1023 Waveform l 1 0048828 00125 Waveform SHIFT Waveform l 3 Ishift bits to code positions NEXT FOR l 1024 TO 1033 Waveform l 1 0048828 00125 Waveform SHIFT Waveform l 3 2 Ishift bits set marker bit NEXT FOR 1034 TO 2048 Waveform l 2048 1 0048828 00125 Waveform SHIFT Waveform l 3 Ishift bits to code positions NEXT Output marker as defined by segment and sequence list OUTPUT Afg SOUR MARK FEED SOUR LIST1 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL M2 Isegment name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 2048 Isegment size OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SEGM COMB 44096 OUTPUT Afg1 Waveform 14096 bytes 4 digits 2 bytes ampl point OUTPUT Afg ICR LF SUBEND SUB Seq_list Seq_list This subprogram downloads the sequence list as a combined repetition cou
349. f a waveform segment The SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer SPOint command is the most efficient way to enable marker pulse generation on a single point e The waveform segment s marker pulse list length must be the same length as its voltage point list or must have a length of 1 If not executing the INITiate IMMediate command generates Error 1104 Segment lists of different lengths e A marker pulse list of length 1 is treated as though it were the same length as the voltage point list with all marker pulse values the same as the specified value e The marker pulse list length must be no longer than the reserved length specified by SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine If the marker pulse list length is less than the reserved length only the number of points specified by the most recent marker pulse and voltage point lists is generated when the waveform segment is output Changing marker pulse values preserves the waveform segment s voltage point list and vice versa Executable when Initiated No Coupling Group None Related Commands SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined e RST Condition Unaffected e Power On Condition No waveform segments are defined 342 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce LIST 1 Example Defining a Waveform Segment Marker Pulse List LIST SEL ABC Selects waveform segment ABC LIST DEF 8 ABC is 8 points long LIST VOLT 1 5 5 5 5 0 5 1 Defines waveform voltages LIST MARK 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
350. f each value must be sent first e The combined list must be no longer than the reserved length specified by SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DEFine If the combined list length is less than the reserved length only the number of points specified by the combined list is generated when outputting the segment sequence 348 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce LIST 1 Example Using combined lists is faster than separately defining the waveform segment marker enable and repetition count lists Executing this command with waveform segment marker pulse and repetition count lists defined with different lengths generates Error 221 Settings conflict unless the different length lists are the marker pulse and or repetition count list and have a length of 1 Executable when Initiated No Coupling Group None Related Commands SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence RST Condition Unaffected Power On Condition No segment sequences are defined Defining a Segment Sequence Combined List LIST SSEQ SEL ABC Selects sequence ABC LIST SSEQ DEF 1 ABC is 1 point long LIST SSEQ COMB 786432 Outputs segment at address O one time with markers enabled SSEQuence COMBined POINts Comments Example SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence COMBined POINts returns a number indicating the length of the currently selected segment sequence s combined waveform segment marker pul
351. f the signal are swept simultaneously Starting and stopping sample rates are specified such that Sin x x is swept from 1 kHz to 2 kHz The noise signal is a comb of frequencies separated by the repetition rate of the signal The pseudo random signal is repetitive Sweeping this signal effectively decreases the repetition rate by increasing the length of the signal The sampling bandwidth is 40 kHz with an effective bandwidth of 20 kHz The output is swept from 10 Hz to 20 Hz BASIC Program Example SWP_ARB IRE STORE SWP_ARB This program sweeps two arbitrary waveforms sin x x and pseudo lrandom noise The 4096 point waveforms are swept from 4 096 MHz to 18 192 MHz which results in an output frequency sweep from 1 kHz to 12 kHz Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg ISet up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 ICall the subprograms CALL Wvim_manage Abort the current waveform select and initiate either the sin x x 1 S1 or noise waveform N1 sequence Comment out the line of Ithe one you DO NOT want to select OUTPUT Afg ABORT OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER S1 Iselect waveform sequence Sin x OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER N1 Iselect waveform sequence Noise OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state Continued on Next Page Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Key
352. f transferring it directly to the AFG using GPIB IRE STORE VXIDOWN This program downloads two arbitrary waveforms from the VXlbus Ibackplane The program loads segment memory by writing to the AFG s high speed data register and loads sequence memory by writing to the Sequence register The program is written for a lAgilent E1480 V 360 embedded controller which allows direct access to Ithe registers via the VXIbus Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 1680 COM Afg Base_addr Set up error checking for the SCPI commands ON INTR 16 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 16 32 OUTPUT Afg CLS Continued on Next Page 264 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 ICall the subprograms CALL Rst CALL Wf_del CALL A24_ offset OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 2 048E6 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 11875V OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC FORM SIGN OUTPUT Afg SOUR MARK FEED SOUR LIST1 CALL Sine_wave CALL Tri_wave CALL Seq_list OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER WAVE_OUT OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 16 END SUB Si
353. fear a Agilent 75000 Series C Agilent E1445A Arbitrary Function Generator Module _ _ ___ _ ___ mm User s Manual and SCPI Programming Guide Where to Find it Online and Printed Information System installation hardware software VXIbus Configuration Guide Agilent VIC VXI installation software Module configuration and wiring This Manual SCPI programming This Manual SCPI example programs This Manual SCPI command reference This Manual Register Based Programming This Manual VXIplug amp play programming VXIplug amp play Online Help VXIplug amp play example programs VXIplug amp play Online Help VXIplug amp play function reference VXIplug amp play Online Help Soft Front Panel information VXIplug amp play Online Help VISA language information Agilent VISA User s Guide Agilent VEE programming information Agilent VEE User s Manual Supplied with Agilent Command Modules Embedded Controllers and VXLink oa Agilent Technologies Manual Part Number E1445 90005 Printed in Malaysia E0406 Contents Agilent E1445A User s Manual Warranty incre de di amp bl A heh lt MA ee ea ae Fed 13 WARNINGS 3 3 oo srgrat a Ee ee A ee al ee Gee 14 Safety SYMBOLS us dto Jets oe ak ote YE e Bel Te Ad wee ew a oe 14 Declaration of Conformity soa eee s i aea ee ee 15 Chapter 1 Getting Started o e 19 Chapter Contents i mes
354. ffected e Power on Condition STATus QUEStionable NTRansition 0 Example Setting the Questionable Signal Register Negative Transition Mask STAT QUES NTR H0008 Sets the Event bit when sweeping condition is cleared Chapter 8 Command Reference 387 STATus QUEStionable PTRansition STATus QUEStionable PTRansition lt unmask gt sets the positive transition mask For each bit unmasked a 0 to 1 transition of that bit in the Questionable Signal Condition Register will set the same bit in the Questionable Signal Event Register Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt unmask gt numeric or 0 through 32767 none non decimal numeric The non decimal numeric forms are the H Q or B formats specified by IEEE 488 2 Comments Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None Related Commands STATus commands SRE STB e RST Condition Unaffected e Power on Condition STATus QUEStionable PTRansition 32767 Example Setting the Questionable Signal Register Positive Transition Mask STAT QUES PTR H0040 Sets the event bit when Waiting for Arm condition is set 388 Command Reference Chapter 8 SYSTem SYSTem The SYSTem subsystem returns error messages and the SCPI version number to which the Agilent E1445A complies Subsystem Syntax SYSTem ERRor query only VERSion query only ERRor SYSTem ERRor returns the error messages in the error q
355. fg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform REPEAT OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue ENTER Afg Code Message PRINT Code Message UNTIL Code 0 STOP SUBEND Upon completion the program displays FSK frequencies ar 5 000000000E 006 1 000000000E 007 FSK control source 1s EXT Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program FSK1 FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program FSK1 C is in directory Versions VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 149 FSK Using the The FSK2 program sets up frequency shift keying using a TTLTrg lt n gt TTLTrg lt n gt Control tigger line as the control source The TTLTrg trigger line is driven by the Agilent E1406A Command Module Source Using the flowchart in Figure 4 1 as a guide the steps of this program are 1 Select the frequency shift keying mode SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE lt mode gt 2 Select the FSK frequencies SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey lt frequencyl gt lt frequency2 gt 3 Select the FSK control source SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey SOURce lt source gt 4 Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe lt shape gt 5 Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt 6 Place the AFG in the wait for arm state
356. fies the number of cycles per arm The cycle count is specified with the ARM STARt LAYer 1 COUNt lt number gt command The range for the cycle count is 1 through 65536 or INFinity The default value is INFinity Stop triggers abort the waveform cycle repetition count at the end of the current cycle The stop trigger sources set with the TRIGger STOP SOURce command are BUS The GPIB Group Execute Trigger GET command or the TEEE 488 2 TRG common command EXTernal The AFG s front panel Stop Trigger FSK Gate In BNC connector TTL levels HOLD Suspend stop triggering Use the TRIGger STOP IMMediate command to terminate a start arm cycle default source TTLTrg0 through TTLTrg7 The VXIbus TTL trigger lines Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 199 External Stop An external stop trigger signal is applied to the AFG s Stop Trig FSK Gate Trigger Slope In BNC connector The edge of the signal on which the AFG is triggered is set with the TRIGger STOP SLOPe command The edges are e POSitive Selects the rising edge of the signal e NEGative Selects the falling edge of the signal AFG Gatin The source which gates the triggers is specified with the 8 88 P Sources TRIGger STARt GATE SOURce command The available sources are e EXTernal The Agilent E1445A s front panel Stop Trig FSK Gate In BNC connector default source This BNC is driven by TTL levels e TTLTrgO through TTLTr
357. first 16 bit word array Add the First Segment List s Repetition Count Add the repetition count number of times the waveform segment is to be executed of the first element of the first 16 bit word array Select the Second Waveform Segment and Return its Address SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent ADDRess These commands select the second waveform segment and then returns its address Divide the address by 8 store it into the second element of the second 16 bit word array Add the most significant bit of the segment address to the first element of the second 16 bit word array Add the Marker Enable Add the value of the marker enable bit of the second waveform segment to the value in the first element of the second 16 bit word array Add the Second Segment List s Repetition Count Add the repetition count number of times the waveform segment is to be executed of the first element of the second 16 bit word array Add the Last Point Add the value of the last point bit to the first element of the second 16 bit word array Setup the Sequence List SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DEFine lt length gt Select the Download Source for the Segment Sequence List SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload lt source gt lt dest gt lt length gt This command selects the source used to download DAC data into segment sequence memory see DAC Sources on page 280 The l
358. frequency points i e 00125 S For example using the above calculated time 1329 00125 106 points The SWP_TRIG program shows how to output a sweep using a user selected trigger mode 186 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 The steps of this program are 1 10 11 12 13 14 Set the sweep mode SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE SWEep Set the start frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 STARt lt start_freq gt Set the stop frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 STOP lt stop_freg gt Set the number of sweeps SOURce SWEep COUNt INFinity Set the number of points in a sweep SOURce SWEep POINts lt number gt Set the sweep time SOURce SWEep TIME lt number gt Select the source to start a sweep ARM SWEep SOURce LINK Set the number of waveform repetitions ARM STARt LAYer 1 COUNt lt number gt Set the number of waveform arm starts ARM STARt LAYer2 COUNt lt number gt Select the source to start waveform output ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce lt source gt Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe lt shape gt Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt Place the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate MMediate Trigger the AFG to start a sweep use the source selected above in Step 10 Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 187 BASIC Program Example SWP_TRIG 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290
359. g 230 OUTPUT Afg SOUR ROSC SOUR INT2 Ireference oscillator 240 OUTPUT Afg TRIG STAR SOUR INT2 Ifrequency2 generator 250 OUTPUT Afg TRIG STAR GATE SOUR EXT Igate source 260 OUTPUT Afg TRIG STAR GATE POL NORM Igate polarity 270 OUTPUT Afg TRIG STAR GATE STAT ON lenable gate 280 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ2 FIX 1E6 frequency 290 OUTPUT EAfg SOUR FUNC SHAP TRI lfunction 300 OUTPUT Afg SOUR RAMP POIN 40 Iwaveform points 310 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5V lamplitude 320 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state 330 SUBEND 340 350 SUB Rst 360 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 370 COM Afg 380 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 390 ENTER Afg Complete 400 SUBEND 410 Continued on Next Page 184 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 SUB Errmsg Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors COM Afg DIM Message 256 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform REPEAT OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR lread AFG error queue ENTER Afg Code Message PRINT Code Message UNTIL Code 0 STOP SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program GATE FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program GATE C is in dir
360. g Afg1 Base_addr Seq1_addr Seq2_addr Seq3_addr 340 CALL Sinx_def 350 CALL Sind_def 360 CALL Spike_def 370 SUBEND 380 390 SUB A24_ offset Continued on Next Page 500 Register Based Programming Appendix C 400 A24 offset Subprogram which determines the base address for 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 800 810 820 830 840 850 860 870 880 890 Ithe AFG registers in A24 address space COM Afg Afg1 Base_addr Seq1_addr Seq2_addr Seq3_addr CONTROL 16 25 2 access A16 space with READIO and WRITEIO A16_addr DVAL D400 16 AFG A16 base address Offset READIO 16 A16_addr 6 Iread AFG offset register Base_addr Offset 256 Ishift offset for 24 bit address SUBEND SUB Build_ram Build_ram This subprogram configures the AFG s sequence base memory Isuch that there are valid sequence base addresses in memory before the AFG is INITiated and waveforms are selected COM Afg Afg1 Base_addr Seq1_addr Seq2_addr Seq3_addr CONTROL 16 25 3 access A24 space with READIO and WRITEIO IPreserve Traffic register contents Set bits 15 14 to 1 0 to set tthe Waveform Select register as the source which selects the output lwaveform sequence Traffic BINAND READIO 16 Base_addr IVAL 8 16 IVAL 3FFF 16 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL 8 16 BINIOR Traffic IVAL 8000 16 Writ
361. g Complete SUBEND SUB List_length List_length Subprogram which queries frequency list length COM Atg OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST2 FREQ POIN Continued on Next Page Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 125 440 ENTER Afg Points 450 DISP Number of frequencies in list Points 460 SUBEND 470 480 SUB Errmsg 490 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 500 COM Afg 510 DIM Message 256 520 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 530 B SPOLL Afg 540 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 550 OUTPUT Afg 560 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 570 REPEAT 580 OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR lread AFG error queue 590 ENTER Afg Code Message 600 PRINT Code Message 610 UNTIL Code 0 620 STOP 630 SUBEND Upon completion the program displays Number of frequencies inlist 4 Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program LIST1 FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program LIST1 C is in directory Versions VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A 126 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 Sweeping Using Start and Span Frequencies The SMPLSWP2 program specifies a start frequency and a frequency span to continuously sweep from 1 kHz to 21 kHz The program also queries the start frequency stop frequency center frequency and frequency span to s
362. g7 The VXIbus TTL trigger lines AFG Gate Polarity The polarity of the signal which gates the output is specified with the TRIGger STARt GATE POLarity command The polarities which can be selected are e NORMal Selects an active high gate When the gate signal is high the gate is active and the output is suspended at the last amplitude point triggered When the gate is low inactive the output resumes with the next point e INVerted Selects an active low gate default polarity When the gate signal is low the gate is active and the output is suspended at the last amplitude point triggered When the gate is high inactive the output resumes with the next point The gate polarity applies only to the EXTernal gate source front panel Gate In BNC If you are using a TTLTrg0 through TTLTrg7 trigger line as a gating source the gate is always active low Gating and Gating the triggers suspends the output at the last amplitude point triggered Signal Phase When the gate is inactive the waveform resumes with the next amplitude point Thus the phase of the signal remains continuous Enabling the Gate Before the AFG triggers can be gated the gate must be enabled This is done with the TRIGger STARt GATE STATe command When the mode is ON gating is enabled When OFF gating is disabled 200 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 Frequency Sweep List Arming Frequency Sweep List Advance Trigger I
363. ge 113 How to Free Segment and Sequence Memory Page 113 Amplitude Effects on Voltage Lists Page 113 Using DAC Codes to Send Segment Data Page 114 Sending Segment Sequences 0005 Page 114 Reference Oscillator Sources o ooo oooooomomooo o Page 115 Sample Sources 2 00 0 eee eee eee eee Page 115 Frequency Generator Range 00405 Page 116 Returning the Waveform Segment Names Page 116 Determining the Waveform Segment Size Page 116 Returning the Segment Sequence List Names Page 116 Returning the Repetition Count List Length Page 116 Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 83 Arbitrary Waveforms Flowchart FREQUENCY AND SAMPLING FUNCTION The flowchart in Figure 3 1 shows the commands and the command execution order to generate arbitrary waveforms The reset power on values of each command are also noted on the flowchart Note that the IEEE 488 2 RST command places the AFG into its power on state Thus it may be unnecessary to execute all of the commands on the flowchart Remove the flowchart from the binder for easy accessibility Refer to the flowchart while doing the examples in this chapter if desired START SET REFERENCE OSCILLATOR SOURCE TO INTernal1 SOURce ROSCillator SOURce RESET VALUE INTernal1 SET SAMPLE SOUR
364. ge Point List ARB DAC FORM SIGN Selects signed DAC code format LIST SEL ABC Selects waveform segment ABC LIST DEF 8 ABC is 8 points long LIST VOLT DAC 400 800 400 0 400 800 400 0 Defines waveform voltages SEGMent VOLTage POINts Comments Example SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage POINts returns a number indicating the length of the currently selected waveform segment s voltage point list e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e RST Condition None e Power On Condition No waveform segments are defined Query Voltage Point List Length LIST SEL ABC Selects waveform segment ABC LIST VOLT POIN Queries voltage point list length SSEQuence ADDRess Comments Example SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence ADDRess returns the address in the segment sequence memory at which the currently selected segment sequence is located e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e RST Condition None e Power On Condition No segment sequences are defined Query Segment Sequence Memory Address LIST SSEQ ADDR Queries sequence address Chapter 8 Command Reference 347 SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence CATalog Comments Example SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence CATalog returns a comma separated list of quoted strings each containing the name of a defined segment sequence If no segment sequence names are defined a single null string is returned e Executable when Initiated Yes
365. ges duties and taxes for products returned to Agilent from another country Agilent warrants that its software and firmware designated by Agilent for use with a product will execute its programming instructions when properly installed on that product Agilent does not warrant that the operation of the product or software or firmware will be uninterrupted or error free Limitation Of Warranty The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer Buyer supplied products or interfacing unauthorized modification or misuse operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product or improper site preparation or maintenance The design and implementation of any circuit on this product is the sole responsibility of the Buyer Agilent does not warrant the Buyer s circuitry or malfunctions of Agilent products that result from the Buyer s circuitry In addition Agilent does not warrant any damage that occurs as a result of the Buyer s circuit or any defects that result from Buyer supplied products NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED Agilent SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Exclusive Remedies THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES Agilent SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHETHER BASED ON CON TRACT TORT OR ANY
366. gilent standard software agreement for the product involved Agilent E1445A Arbitrary Function Generator User s Manual Edition 3 Rev 2 Copyright 1997 2006 Agilent Technologies Inc All Rights Reserved Agilent E1445A Arbitrary Function Generator User s Manual 13 Printing History The Printing History shown below lists all Editions and Updates of this manual and the printing date s The first printing of the manual is Edition 1 The Edition number increments by 1 whenever the manual is revised Updates which are issued between Editions contain replacement pages to correct the current Edition of the manual Updates are numbered sequentially starting with Update 1 When a new Edition is created it contains all the Update information for the previous Edition Each new Edition or Update also includes a revised copy of this printing history page Many product updates or revisions do not require manual changes and conversely manual corrections may be done without accompanying product changes Therefore do not expect a one to one correspondence between product updates and manual updates Edition Tipo a a GAS ole he ee PE TA November 1991 Editon Za Haas eels LOLS ee eb Me ets November 1992 Edition 3 Part Number E1445 90005 000 00 cece eee March 1997 Edition 3 Rev 2 Part Number E1445 90005 0005 April 2006 Safety Symbols Instruction manual symbol affixed to product Indicates that the user must refer to
367. gment Sequence SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DEFine lt length gt SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence lt segment_list gt Select the Waveform Segment for Marker Output SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer lt marker_list gt This command selects the waveform segment in a segment sequence that is to output the marker pulses The marker pulses must be selected by SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer lt marker_list gt or SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer SPOint lt point gt before they are output Generate the Output SOURce FUNCtion USER lt name gt INITiate MMediate 208 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations Chapter 6 BASIC Program Example MARKSEG1 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 IRE STORE MARKSEG1 This program computes a sine wave and a triangle wave as arbitrary lwaveforms A corresponding marker list is defined for the triangle Iwave The program sets the output sequence to consist of both Iwaveforms and enables marker pulses to be output with selected ltriangle waveform amplitude points Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg ISet up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 Call the subprograms which reset the AFG and delete all existing Iwaveform segments and sequences CALL Rst CALL
368. gments in sequence OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SSEQ COMB 0 OUTPUT OAfg1 Sequence Isequence list in indefinite length block OUTPUT Afg CHR 10 END lterminate with Line Feed LF and EOI SUBEND SUB Rst Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 COM Afg Afg1 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Wf_del Wf_del Subprogram which deletes all sequences and segments COM Afg Afg1 OUTPUT Afg FUNC USER NONE Iselect no sequences OUTPUT Afg LIST SSEQ DEL ALL IClear sequence memory OUTPUT Afg LIST SEGM DEL ALL IClear segment memory SUBEND SUB Errmsg Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors COM Afg Afg1 DIM Message 256 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform REPEAT OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR lread AFG error queue ENTER Afg Code Message PRINT Code Message UNTIL Code 0 STOP SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program COMBSEQ FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program COMBSEQ C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A 258 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 Using the VXlbus Backplane You can use the VXIbus backplane to download or transfer segment and sequence data to the AFG and to set the phas
369. gram VBPROG and the Visual C example program DACBLOK2 C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A 238 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 Using Combined Signed Data Note Combined Segment List Format The Combined Segment Lists transfers both the arbitrary waveform segment data and marker pulses to the AFG see Chapter 6 for information on marker pulses You can use either the Signed or Unsigned number format for the list The Combined Segment List can be sent as a comma separated list see Using Signed Data to Generate Waveforms on page 225 or as Definite Length or Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Data see Using Definite Length Arbitrary Blocks to Transfer Data on page 231 and Using Indefinite Length Arbitrary Blocks to Transfer Data on page 233 respectively This section shows how to transfer the lists as DAC codes using the Signed number format The AFG can only accept a single number format at a time Thus 1f the AFG currently contains Signed data and you wish to send Unsigned data you MUST delete the data in memory first before enabling the AFG to receive Unsigned data Refer to Figure 7 1 for the 16 bit Integer Combined Segment List Bit 1 bit value 2 sets the marker pulse Bits 3 to 15 are the DAC codes Reserved Unused shia 3 2h of 9 8 7161514 3 2 1 0 Ne J y DAC Codes for the 13 Bit DAC Marker B Figure 7 1 Combined
370. gram calls would be here 190 200 WAIT 1 allow error branch to occur before turning intr off 210 OFF INTR 7 220 END 230 240 SUB Errmsg 250 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 260 COM Afg 270 DIM Message 256 280 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 290 B SPOLL Afg 300 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 310 OUTPUT Afg 320 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 330 REPEAT 340 OUTPUT OAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 350 ENTER Afg Code Message 360 PRINT Code Message 370 UNTIL Code 0 380 STOP 390 SUBEND Comments e Clearing the service request bit bit 6 RQS in the Status Byte Register line 290 when the interrupt is serviced allows the bit to be set again when the next summary bit is received Chapter 9 AFG Status 441 Visual BASIC and Visual C C Program Versions The Status Byte Status Group The Status Byte The Visual BASIC example program ERRORCHK FRM is in directory VBPROG and the Visual C example program ERRORCHK C is in directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A The registers in the Status Byte Status Group enable conditions monitored by the other status groups to generate a service request The Status Byte Register contains the summary bits of the Questionable Register Signal Status Group QUES the Operation Status Group OPER and the Standard Event Status Group ESB
371. hase_data 1 2 16 620 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL B1 16 IVAL Phase_data 3 2 16 630 640 IGenerate pulse which loads the new phase Once the pulse is 650 lreceived it takes 14 reference oscillator clock cycles before 660 tthe new phase appears at the output 670 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL 8B 16 0 680 SUBEND 690 700 SUB Rst 710 ISubprogram which resets the E1445 720 COM Afg Base_addr 730 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC Ireset the AFG 740 ENTER Afg Complete 750 SUBEND Comments e To simplify the program SCPI commands are included to configure the AFG enable phase modulation and start the waveform Thus the only registers written to are the Phase Modulation and Phase Load Strobe Registers This program executes as intended when the SCPI commands in subprogram Output_function are executed before the registers are written to e Phase modulation is only available with standard function sine waves Standard function sine waves are only available with the DDS SOURce FREQuency 1 subsystem Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program PHASCHNG FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program PHASCHNG C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A Appendix C Register Based Programming 497 Selecting the Waveform Sequence This section shows how to select and output an arbitrary waveform without aborting the current waveform a
372. have been executed If ON is set WAI waits for waveform generation to complete before resuming command execution Comments Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands OPC OPC e RST Condition None Chapter 8 Command Reference 427 Common Commands Quick Reference This section describes the IEEE 488 2 Common Commands implemented in the Agilent E1445A The table below shows the commands listed by functional group however commands are listed alphabetically in the reference Examples are shown in the reference when the command has parameters or returns a non trivial response otherwise the command string is as shown in the table For additional information refer to IEEE Standard 488 2 1987 Table 8 4 Agilent E1445A Common Commands Category Command Title System Data IDN Identification Query PUD lt data gt Protected User Data Command PUD Protected User Data Query Internal Operations LRN Learn Device Setup Query RST Reset Command TST Self Test Query Synchronization OPC Operation Complete Command OPC Operation Complete Command WAI Wait to Continue Command Macro DMC lt name gt lt data gt Define Macro Command EMC lt enable gt Enable Macro Command EMC Enable Macro Query GMC lt name gt Get Macro Contents Query LMC Learn Macro Query PMC Purge Macros Command RMC lt name gt Remove Individual Macro Command Status and Event C
373. he AFG Memory of All Sequence Data SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete ALL This command clears all segment sequence data stored in the sequence memory 3 Clear the AFG Memory of All Segment Data SOURce LIST 1 DELete ALL This command clears all segment data stored in the segment memory 4 Set the Sample Rate SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FlXed lt frequency gt This command sets the rate at which the points are output by the AFG The frequency is sample frequency number of points Refer to Table B 3 in Appendix B for the frequency limits Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 93 10 11 12 13 14 Select the Arbitrary Waveform Function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe USER This command selects the arbitrary waveform function Couple the command to the previous frequency command Set the Maximum Output Amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt This command specifies the maximum output amplitude The amplitude must be equal or greater than the maximum voltage value of the waveform segment Refer to Table B 4 in Appendix B for the amplitude limits Name the First Waveform Segment SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt This command names the first waveform segment Set the First Waveform Segment Size SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine lt ength gt This command defines the size of the selected waveform segment Store the First Waveform Segment as V
374. he programs using SICL are Windows programs All programs are supplied on the CD that came with this manual see next section Example Program CD To determine the location of the different programs and the required libraries read the README files The different directories are e VBPROG for Visual BASIC programs e VCPROG for Visual C C programs BASIC Language The following information identifies the system on which the BASIC Prog rams programs were written and shows how the programs are structured System Configuration Except where noted the example programs in BASIC were developed on the following system Controller HP 9000 Series 300 Mainframe Agilent 75000 Series C Slot 0 Resource Manager Agilent E1406A Command Module Agilent E1445A Logical 80 Address Instrument Language SCPI Chapter 1 Getting Started 29 Typical BASIC The structure of an example program in BASIC is shown below This Example Program program enables output leveling by sweeping 1 IRE STORE SWP_LEVL 2 This program enables output leveling over the O Hz to 10 MHz sweep 3 10 Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM Afg 50 Set up error checking 60 ONINTR7 CALL Errmsg 70 ENABLE INTR 7 2 80 OUTPUT Afg CLS 90 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 100 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 120 ICall the subprograms 130 CALL Rst 140 CALL Swp_levi 150 160 WAIT 1 lallow interrupt to be serviced 170
375. hen INTernal 1 is the source There are four frequency modes available using the INTernal1 sample source DDS timebase The modes selected by the SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE command are CW FIXed single frequency mode FSKey frequency shift keying mode LIST frequency list mode SWEep frequency sweep mode The frequency range for sweeping or sampling depends on the reference oscillator used However for the INTernal1 42 94967296 MHz oscillator the range for swept sine square triangle and ramp waveforms and the swept sampling range for arbitrary waveforms is 0 Hz to 10 73741824 MHz The maximum number of frequencies in a frequency list is 256 The range of frequencies allowed in a frequency list or for frequency shift keying depends on the output function e Sine Wave and Arbitrary Waveforms The minimum frequency is 0 Hz the maximum frequency is the selected reference oscillator frequency divided by 4 e Square Waves The minimum frequency is 0 Hz the maximum frequency is the selected reference oscillator frequency divided by 16 e Ramp and Triangle Waveforms The minimum frequency is 0 Hz the maximum frequency is the selected reference oscillator frequency divided by four multiplied by the number of waveform points Rosc 4 npts For all waveforms except sine waves the sweeping or sampling range can be doubled using the SOURce FREQuency 1 RANGe command Frequency doubling is enabled by specifying a r
376. how the relationship between them Using the flowchart in Figure 4 1 as a guide the steps of this program are 1 Set the frequency sweep mode SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE lt mode gt Set the start frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 STARt lt start_freq gt Set the frequency span SOURce FREQuency 1 SPAN lt freg_span gt Set the number of sweeps SOURce SWEep COUNt lt number gt Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe lt shape gt Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt Place the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate IMMediate Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 127 BASIC Program Example SMPLSWP2 1 IRE STORE SMPLSWP2 2 This program continuously sweeps from 1 kHz to 21 kHz and specifies 3 la start frequency and a frequency span 4 10 Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM Afg 50 Set up error checking 60 ONINTR7 CALL Errmsg 70 ENABLE INTR 7 2 80 OUTPUT Afg CLS 90 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 100 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 120 ICall the subprograms 130 CALL Rst 140 CALL Sweep2 150 CALL Query 170 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced 180 OFF INTR 7 190 END 200 210 SUB Sweep2 220 Sweep2 Subprogram which outputs a swept sine wave from 1 kHz to 230 121 kHz 240 COM Afg 250 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 MODE SWE Isweep mode 260 OUTPUT
377. iNusoid SQUare none TRlangle USER Comments The lt shape gt parameter values are shown as follows DC Generates a DC output voltage RAMP Generates a stepped ramp The SOURce RAMP subsystem controls the polarity and number of points SlNusoid Generates a sinusoidal voltage SINusoid requires that TRIGger STARt SOURce INTernal1 be selected SQUare Generates a square wave The SOURce RAMP POLarity command controls the polarity TRlangle Generates a stepped triangle wave The SOURce RAMP subsystem controls the polarity and number of points USER Generates an arbitrary waveform The SOURce FUNCtion USER command selects the segment sequence to be generated e For the DC function The voltage level is specified by SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude e For the RAMP SiNusoid SQUare TRlangle and USER functions Use SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude to set output amplitude For arbitrary USER waveforms this command specifies the full scale output voltage SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate OFFSet specifies the offset voltage 332 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce FUNCtion USER Example Parameters Comments Example TRIGger STARt SOURce selects the sample source SINusoid requires that TRIGger STARt SOURce INTernal1 be selected The SOURce FREQuency 1 or SOURce FREQuency2 subsystems specify the sig
378. igger immediate commands Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM OAfg Pts ISet up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 ICall the subprograms CALL Rst CALL Swp_step WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB Swp_step Swp_step Subprogram which sets up a sweep from 1 kHz to 10 kHz lwhich is armed and advanced on IMMediate command COM Afg Pts OUTPUT Afg TRIG STAR SOUR INT1 IDDS time base OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 MODE SWE Isweep mode OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 STAR 1E3 Istart frequency OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 STOP 10E3 Istop frequency OUTPUT Afg SOUR SWE POIN 10 Ifrequency points OUTPUT Afg ARM SWE SOUR HOLD Isuspend sweep arm OUTPUT Afg TRIG SWE SOUR HOLD Isuspend sweep trigger OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN lfunction OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 V lamplitude OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state CALL Step SUBEND SUB Step Step Subprogram which starts and advances sweep COM Afg Pts DISP Press Continue to arm trigger system PAUSE OUTPUT OAfg ARM SWE IMM Istart sweep Sweep does not advance OUTPUT Afg SOUR SWE POIN Iquery number of waveform points Continued on Next Page Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 191 440 ENTER Afg Pts 450 FOR l 1 TO Pts 1 460 DISP
379. ignal In the AFG the Questionable Signal Status Group monitors the frequency accuracy of the divide by n subsystem and also error conditions in non volatile calibration memory Divide by n frequency accuracy and non volatile calibration memory errors are monitored with the following bits in the Condition Register All other bits are unused 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 unused CAL unused FREQ unused The Transition Filter FREQuency Bit 5 is set 1 when the frequency generated by the divide by n SOURce FREQuency2 subsystem differs from the programmed frequency by greater than 1 Otherwise the bit remains cleared 0 CALibration Bit 8 is set 1 when an error is detected in non volatile calibration memory Reading the Condition Register The settings of bits 5 and 8 can be determined by reading the Condition Register with the command STATus QUEStionable CONDition Bit 5 has a corresponding decimal value of 32 and bit 8 has a decimal value of 256 Reading the Condition Register does not affect the bit settings The bits are cleared following a reset RST Bit 8 calibration will remain set however if the error condition persists The Transition Filter specifies which type of bit transition in the Condition Register will set corresponding bits in the Event Register Transition filter bits may be set for positive transitions 0 to 1 or negative transitions 1
380. imum the maximum sample frequency is the Reference Oscillator frequency 2 The MAXimum setting worsens the frequency resolution by a factor of two and introduces some sample rate jitter Use SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent CATalog to return the names of the different waveform segments stored in memory The command returns comma separated strings that contain the names of the segment lists Use SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage POINts to determine the size in number of waveform segments or points of the currently selected waveform segment Use SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence CATalog to return the names of the different segment sequence lists stored in memory The command returns comma separated strings that contain the names of the segment sequence lists Use SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt POINts to determine the length of the currently selected segment sequence s repetition count list 116 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter 3 Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter Contents This chapter covers the sweeping frequency list and frequency shift keying FSK features of the Agilent E1445A 13 Bit Arbitrary Function Generator called the AFG The chapter is organized as follows e FSK Programming Flowchart o ooo ooooocoo oo Page 118 FSK Command Reference o ooocoocoocococcoooo Page 120 e Sweeping and Frequency Lists o o ooooooo oo Page 120 Sweeping Using S
381. ine 200 Note the following when specifying the number of waveform points Npts value passed to the Freq_change subprogram sine waves and arbitrary waveforms Npts 1 square waves Npts 4 ramp and triangle waves Npts RAMP POINts value Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program FREQIREG FRM is in directory Visual C C Program Versions VBPROG and the Visual C example program FREQIREG C is in directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A Appendix C Register Based Programming 491 Divide by N Frequency The FREQ2_REG program changes the signal frequency that is generated Control using the Divide by N SOURce FREQuency2 subsystem and the reference oscillator from any of the available sources The program accesses the Sample Hold and ROSC N Control Register and the ROSC N Divider Registers BASIC Program Example FREQ2_REG 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 IRE STORE FREQ2_REG This program changes the output frequency generated with the Idivide by n frequency synthesis method by writing frequency Idata to the Sample Hold and ROSC N Control register and to the IROSC N Divider registers ASSIGN Afg TO 1680 COM Afg Base_addr Call the subprograms which reset the AFG which determine the base laddress of the AFG registers in A24 address space and which set Ithe output function CALL Rst CALL A24_ offset CALL Output_fu
382. ine segment size OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT Waveform load waveform points OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL SIN_R_OUT Define sequence name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Define sequence size OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ SIN_R Set segment execution order SUBEND Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 111 Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program SIN_R FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program SIN_R C is in directory Versions VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A Ge nerating Noise The NOISE program generates pseudo noise BASIC Program Example NOISE _ 180 190 200 210 220 230 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 This program is similar to the SIN_X BASIC program on page 105 with the following differences IRE STORE NOISE This program outputs a pseudo random noise waveform as an larbitrary waveform Call the subprogram which defines the noise signal and loutput sequence CALL Noise_def ISelect the output sequence and start the waveform OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER NOISE_OUT OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM SUB Noise_def Noise_def Subprogram which defines the noise signal and output Isequence COM Afg DIM Waveform 1 4096 FOR l 1 TO 4096 Waveform 2 RND 1 NEXT OUTPUT Afg LIST SEGM SEL NOISE Iselect segment to be defined OUTPUT Afg LIST
383. ing waiting for an arm signal and the INITiate IMMediate command are monitored with the following bits in the Condition Register All other bits are unused 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 unused INIT ARM unused SWE unused CAL The Transition Filter CALibrating Bit 0 is set 1 during calibration The bit is cleared 0 otherwise SWEeping Bit 3 is set 1 while a frequency sweep or list is in progress The bit is cleared 0 when waveform generation is halted when frequency sweeping or lists are not selected and at the end of each sweep or list Waiting for ARM Bit 6 is set 1 when the AFG enters the wait for arm state The bit is cleared 0 when a start arm is received or when waveform generation is aborted INITiated Bit 8 is set 1 when the INITiate IMMediate command is executed The bit is cleared 0 when waveform generation is complete and the AFG returns to the Idle state Reading the Condition Register Bit settings in the Condition Register can be determined with the command STATus OPERation CONDition Bits 0 3 6 and 8 have corresponding decimal values of 1 8 64 and 256 Reading the Condition Register does not affect the bit settings The bits are cleared following a reset RST The Transition Filter specifies which type of bit transition in the Condition Register will set corresponding bits in the Event Register Transition fi
384. ing 141 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 WAIT 1 lallow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB Wvfm_manage Wvim_manage Subprogram which calls the subprograms which delete lall existing waveforms and define Sin x x and pseudo random noise COM Afg CALL Rst CALL Wf_del CALL Sinx_def Comment out this line if line 180 is commented CALL Noise _def Comment out this line if line 190 is commented SUBEND SUB Sinx_def Sinx_def Set sweep mode specify start and stop sample rates for a 11 kHz to 2 kHz sweep set arbitrary waveform function Compute waveform Sin x x define waveform segment and Isequence COM Afg OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 MODE SWE Isweep mode OUTPUT OAfg SOUR FREQ1 STAR 4 096E6 start sample rate OUTPUT OAfg SOUR FREQ1 STOP 8 192E6 stop sample rate OUTPUT Afg SOUR SWE COUN INF Isweep count OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER function arbitrary OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 1 1V scale arb values DIM Waveform 1 4096 FOR 2047 TO 2048 IF 0 THEN 1 E 38 Waveform 2048 SIN 2 PI 53125 1 256 53125 I 256 159154943092 NEXT OUTPUT Afg LIST SEGM SEL SIN_X Iselect segment OUTPUT Afg LIST SEGM DEF 4096 reserve memory OUTPUT Afg LIST
385. ing Appendix C Changing the Signal Phase The Phase Control Registers The Phase Modulation This section explains how the phase of a sine wave generated by the DDS SOURce FREQuency 1 subsystem is changed by writing phase data to the Phase Modulation Registers The following phase control registers are used to change the phase of the sine wave generated by the DDS subsystem e Phase Modulation Registers base_addr B316 through base_addr B116 e Phase Load Strobe Register base_addr 8B 16 Phase Modulation Registers B3 and B1 contain the 12 bit phase modulation Registers data that is added to the output of the phase accumulator Address 15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 base B316 unused Phase modulation value through base B116 The Phase Load Strobe Register Register B3 This register contains the eight most significant bits of the 12 bit phase modulation value bits 11 4 Register B1 Bits 7 4 of this register are the four least significant bits of the 12 bit phase modulation value bits 3 0 Bits 3 0 of register B1 are ignored Writing any value to the Phase Load Strobe Register adds the data in the Phase Modulation Registers to the output of the phase accumulator Address 15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 base 8B16 unused Strobe Data Stobe Data Writing any value to this register adds the data in the Phase Modulation Registers to the out
386. ints in a frequency sweep can be from 2 to 1 073 741 824 The default number is 800 The number of points is set with the SOURce SWEep POINts command and applies to sweeps only Sweep Spacing The spacing between the frequencies points in a sweep can be either linear or logarithmic as set by SOURce SWEep SPACing Linear sweeps can start at 0 Hz Logarithmic sweeps can start at the reference oscillator frequency 4 294 967 296 npts The number of waveform points npts for sine waves and arbitrary waveforms is 1 for square waves npts is 4 for ramp and triangle waves npts is the number of ramp points Sweep Direction The direction of the frequency sweep can be up or down When the direction is up the sweep begins at the specified start frequency and stops at the specified stop frequency When the direction is down the sweep begins at the stop frequency and stops at the start frequency You must stop abort the sweep before changing direction For arbitrary waveforms when the direction is up sampling begins at the start frequency and stops at the stop frequency When the direction is down sampling begins at the stop frequency and stops at the start frequency You must stop abort sampling before changing direction Frequency lists begin with the first frequency in the list and end with the last frequency There is no directional control Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 157 Sweep Time Sweep Advance Source Specif
387. ints available used Seg_mem PRINT PRINT Sequence memory points available used Seq_mem WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB Ramp_wave Ramp_wave Subprogram which defines a ramp waveform and output Isequence COM Afg Seg_mem Seq_mem DIM Waveform 1 100 ICalculate waveform points FOR l 1 TO 100 Waveform l I 0505 NEXT OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL RAMP Isegment name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 100 Isegment size OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT Waveform waveform points Continued on Next Page Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 91 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 800 810 820 830 840 850 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM FREE ENTER Afg Seg_mem OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL RAMP_OUT OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ RAMP OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ FREE ENTER Afg Seq_mem SUBEND SUB Rst Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 COM Afg Seg_mem Seq_mem OUTPUT Afg RST OPC ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Wf_del Isequence name Isequence size Isegment order lreset the AFG Wf_del Subprogram which deletes all sequences and segments COM Afg Seg_mem Seq_mem OUTPUT Afg FUNC USER NONE OUTPUT Afg LIST SSEQ DEL
388. inusoid function arm start immediate O V offset and a 50 Q output impedance and output load 2 Select the Output Units SOURce VOLTage LE Vel IMMediate AMPLitude UNIT VOLTage lt units gt This command selects the following output units V Volts VPK Volts peak VPP Volts peak to peak VRMS Volts rms W Watts DBM DBMW dB referenced to 1 milliwatt These units are assumed only if no other units are specified in the SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt command The output units are only valid for amplitude and not offsets volts is assumed for offsets 3 Set the Amplitude and the Offset SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate OFFSet lt offset gt These commands specify the amplitude and offset Refer to Table B 4 in Appendix B for the amplitude limits The maximum value of the combined amplitude and offset voltages must remain within the 6 025 V limit 4 Initiate the Waveform INITiate IMMediate This command generates an immediate output with the arm source set to IMMediate Refer to Chapter 5 for triggering information 72 Generating Standard Waveforms Chapter 2 BASIC Program Example OUTPUNIT 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 IRE STORE OUTPUNIT This programs sets the output amplitude units to volts peak
389. ion SECure CODE lt code gt CALibration SECure STATe lt mode gt lt code gt CALibration STATe lt state gt CALibration STATe AC lt state gt CALibration STATe DC lt state gt INITiate INITiate IMMediate OUTPut 1 OUTPut 1 FILTer LPASs FREQuency lt frequency gt OUTPut 1 FILTer LPASs STATe lt mode gt OUTPut 1 IMPedance lt impedance gt OUTPut 1 LOAD lt load gt OUTPut 1 LOAD AUTO lt mode gt OUTPut 1 STATe lt mode gt Chapter 8 Command Reference 409 Table 8 1 Agilent E1445A SCPI Commands continued Subsystem Commands SOURce ARBitrary SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat lt format gt SOURce ARBitrary DAC SOURce lt source gt SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload lt source gt lt dest gt lt length gt SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload COMPlete SOURce FREQuency 1 SOURce FREQuency 1 CENTer lt center_freq gt SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FlXed lt frequency gt SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey lt frequency1 gt lt frequency2 gt SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey SOURce lt source gt SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE lt mode gt SOURce FREQuency 1 RANGe lt range gt SOURce FREQuency 1 SPAN lt freg_span gt SOURce FREQuency 1 STARt lt start_freq gt SOURce FREQuency 1 STOP lt stop_freq gt SOURce FREQuency2 SOURce FREQuency2 CW FlXed lt frequency gt SOURce FUNCtion SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe lt shape gt SOURce
390. ion of f f2 f3 f4 fa Sweep Time the last frequency see below The duration t of each frequency except the last fp is specified sweep time frequency points 1 For multiple sweeps or repetitions through the list the duration of the last frequency fn is also t To maintain a constant rate between sweeps or repetitions the duration of fn must be accounted for as follows 158 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 Sweep timespecified Sweep repetition time desirea points 1 points Sweep Points Versus Time In SWP_PVST Sweep Points Versus Time on page 136 the program continually sweeps 100 frequency points in 0 125 seconds To maintain this rate continuously the time between the last frequency point and the first point is accounted for as follows Sweep timespecified 0 125 99 100 0 125 0 99 0 12375 Thus the actual sweep time specified is 0 12375 seconds Frequency Lists Versus Time In the LIST_TME program Frequency Lists Versus Time on page 139 the program outputs a new frequency every 1 second To maintain this rate continuously the time between the last frequency in the list and the first frequency is accounted for as follows Repetition ratespecified 4 3 4 4 0 75 3 Thus the actual repetition rate specified is 3 seconds The minimum and maximum sweep times and frequency list repetition rates are based on the number of points and frequencies and are
391. ions Appendix A VME Register Access General VXlbus Characteristics All hardware registers are mapped directly into VME A24 space permitting advanced users to bypass the on board uP The manual documents a functional subset While a waveform is running waveform memory may not be loaded but on the fly re selection Note 2 permits a new sequence to begin immediately upon completing the present sequence Note 2 Waveform Select Up to 128 waveforms sequences can be stored in memory and then selected re selected on the fly by digital words arriving on the Local Bus typ 7 Msa s the Faceplate Connector typ 1 M s or the VME bus typ 2 M s Size Slots Connectors Weight kg Device Type VXIbus Revision Compliance Register Level Documentation SCPI Revision Manufacturer Code Model Code Slave Master Currents in Amps 5 V 12 V 12 V Ipm lpm lpm lpm lem IDM 24V C 1 P1 P2 1 9 Message Based Servant 1 3 Subset 1991 0 4095 Decimal 418 Decimal A16 A24 D08 D16 A16 A24 D08 D16 The Agilent E1445A can control the Agilent E1446A Summing Amplifier DAC 24 V 5 2 V 2 V lom lpm lom IPM lpm lpm IDM 3 50 0 20 0 12 0 10 0 13 0 06 0 28 0 17 0 34 0 17 2 50 0 12 1 20 0 20 Average Watts Slot dPressure mm H20 Air Flow liters s 40 44 0 5 3 5 Appendix A Agilent E1445A Specifications 461 Notes 462 Agilent E1445A Specifications Appendix A
392. ions are not affected by this command e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e RST Condition Macro usage is disabled e Power On Condition Macro usage is enabled ESE lt mask gt enables one or more event bits of the Standard Event Status Register to be reported in bit 5 the Standard Event Status Summary Bit of the Status Byte Register The lt mask gt is the sum of the decimal weights of the bits to be enabled ESE returns the current enable mask Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt mask gt numeric 0 through 255 none A 1 ina bit position enables the corresponding event a O disables it e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None Related Commands ESR SRE STB e RST Condition Unaffected Chapter 8 Command Reference 417 e Power On Condition No events are enabled Example Enable All Error Events ESE 60 Enables error events ESR ESR returns the value of the Standard Event Status Register The register is then cleared all bits 0 Comments Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e RST Condition None e Power On Condition Register is cleared GMC GMC lt name gt returns the definition of the specified macro in IEEE 488 2 definite block format Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt name gt string data defined macro name none C
393. iption 286 288 VINStrument subsystem 403 408 Agilent E1445A User s Manual Index 523 marker pulses 337 338 342 343 S continued naming 86 output voltage 337 338 345 347 Secondary GPIB Address 22 query Security Code memory 336 341 enabling disabling 303 names 116 336 setting 302 reserving memory for 339 Segment selecting 251 344 data downloading storing in memory 86 into DAC 269 271 506 508 Select Code 22 into memory 259 268 Selecting using backplane 259 amplitude levels 72 74 list DAC data source 315 combined 239 250 deviation units 80 365 367 waveform format 259 marker enable 251 determining size 280 output 73 74 multiple 207 211 loads 69 71 310 311 marker pulses units 72 determining number 222 repetition count 251 multiple 207 211 waveform single 212 213 segments 251 344 memory sequence 498 505 characteristics 453 See also Setting determining amount 113 Self Test 46 freeing 113 codes 46 number of points 87 example program 47 sample rate 87 Sequence sequence base register 499 combined list 348 349 memory data 316 characteristics 454 defining 357 determining amount 113 outputs 352 353 freeing 113 deleting from memory 351 segment list combined list 348 349 combined 250 defining 357 format 250 260 outputs 352 353 determining size 280 deleting from memory 351 query length 357 determining marker pulses 222 marker pulses 354 355 marker pulses 354 355 quer
394. ires an 8 bit code the 16 bit integer must be sent as 2 8 bit values for each 16 bit integer For example to send a waveform segment consisting of 1000 DAC codes 1000 points the actual number of digits and 8 bit data bytes equals 1000 2 2000 Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 235 BASIC Program Example DACBLOK2 250 The DACBLOK2 program shows how to store a waveform segment Le points of an arbitrary waveform into the AFG s segment memory The waveform segment is stored as DAC codes in the Unsigned number format This program is the same program as UNS_DAT beginning on page 230 The data is transferred to the AFG using the Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block method The example generates a 200 point 5 V to 5 V negative going ramp To transfer Indefinite Length Block Data to the AFG requires that the data sent with the SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage DAC command must be contiguous To do this sent no carriage return CR and line feed LE before all the data is transferred Also since EOL is a data terminating string it must not be sent before the data transfer is complete The format in line 440 disables the CR LF and EOL The LF character and EOL string sent in line 460 tells the AFG that the data transfer is complete IRE STORE DACBLOK2 This program downloads arbitrary waveform data as unsigned IDAC codes The data is sent in an IEEE 488 2 indefinite length Iblock in 16 bit integer format The
395. irst compile and link the program to make an executable file using the Large memory model You can compile from the command line or the Windows interface The two methods are From the Command Line Make sure the program to be compiled and the appropriate libraries are in a project file Do this in the C C environment Then do the following 40 Getting Started Chapter 1 e For Borland compilers type MAKE lt project_name gt gt MAK and press Enter e For Microsoft compilers used in Windows type NMAKE lt project_name gt MAK and press Enter From the Windows Interface Select the C C Windows environment and make sure the program to be compiled and the appropriate libraries are in a project file Then do the following e For Borland compilers select Project Open Project to open the project then Compile Build All to compile the program e For Microsoft compilers used in Windows type Project Open to open the project then Project Re build All to compile the program Typical Visual C C Following is an example program written in Visual C C using the Example Program Agilent Standard Instrument Control Library The program Using Agilent SICL sends commands to the AFG to generate an arbitrary waveform receives data from the AFG shows how to send coupled commands and performs error checking of the AFG ARBWAVE C This program generates a 100 points ramp The data to generate
396. is required when programming over the backplane the logical address of the Agilent E1445A is combined with the VXI interface select code For example to send commands to the AFG with logical address 80 the OUTPUT statement in an BASIC program appears as OUTPUT 1680 SOUR ROSC SOUR INT1 TRIG STAR SOUR INT1 for device logical addresses from 01 to 99 or OUTPUT 160xxx SOUR ROSC SOUR INT1 TRIG STAR SOUR INT1 for device logical addresses from 100 to 255 Setting the AFG The Agilent E1445A servant area is set when the Agilent E1446A Summing Servant Area Amplifier DAC is used with the Arbitrary Function Generator Note the following when setting the AFG servant area e The Agilent E1445A servant area need only be set when the Agilent E1446A Summing Amplifier DAC is used with the AFG factory setting 0 e The Agilent E1446A must be in the AFG servant area in order for the AFG to control the Summing Amplifier DAC e The Agilent E1445A servant area is defined as Servant area logical address 1 through logical address servant area switch setting e The Agilent E1446A Summing Amplifier DAC should be the only device in the AFG servant area Other devices in the servant area would be inaccessible to other commanders Agilent E1406A Command Module for example The Agilent E1445A AFG servant area switch is shown in Figure 1 2 Chapter 1 Getting Started 23 The AFG Bus Request Level Bus Request Level Guide
397. ister works as follows When a condition occurs the appropriate bit in the Condition Register is set or cleared If the corresponding transition filter is enabled for that bit the same bit is set in the associated Event Register The contents of the Event Register and the enable mask are logically ANDed bit for bit if any bit of the result is set the Summary bit for that register is set in the status byte The Status Byte Summary bit for the Operation Status Register is bit 7 for the Questionable Signal Status Register bit 3 Operation Status Only bits 0 calibrating 3 sweeping 6 waiting for arm and 8 initiated are Register defined for the Agilent E1445A All other bits are always zero Bit 0 Calibrating Set 1 during the execution of the CALibration DC BEGin command Cleared 0 at the end of DC calibration or if calibration is aborted Bit 3 Sweeping Set 1 while a frequency sweep or list is in progress Cleared 0 when waveform generation is halted when frequency sweeping or lists are not selected and at the end of each sweep or list Bit 6 Waiting for Arm ARM Set 1 when waiting for a start arm Cleared 0 when a start arm is accepted or when waveform generation is aborted Bit 8 Initiated Set 1 by the INITiate IMMediate command Cleared 0 when waveform generation is complete and the trigger subsystem returns to the idle state Questionable Only bits 5 frequency and 8 calibration are define
398. it supports the VXI word serial protocol used to transfer ASCII command strings and is capable of converting the SCPI commands it receives to reads and writes of its hardware registers Register based programming allows the user to access the hardware registers directly This increases the speed at which events in the AFG occur since the parsing converting of SCPI commands is eliminated In addition to describing how to access selected AFG registers this appendix explains how to do the following functions with register reads and writes e Accessing the Registers 0 ce eee eee ee eee Page 484 Determining the A24 Base Address Page 484 e Changing the Output Frequency Page 487 The Frequency Control Registers Page 487 Frequency Control Programs 0005 Page 489 e Changing the Signal Phase oooo oooooomooo Page 495 The Phase Control RegisterS 0o ooooooooooo o Page 495 Phase Control Program 0 0 0 0 eee eee eee Page 496 e Selecting the Waveform Sequence Page 498 The Waveform Sequence Registers Page 498 Waveform Sequence Selection Program Page 500 e Loading the DAC from the VXIbus Page 506 This appendix does not identify all of the AFG registers nor does it cover all of the AFG functions from the register based programming standpoin
399. ith the amplitude set to maximum 5 11875V the following DAC codes generate the following outputs Code 0 outputs O V Code 4096 outputs 5 12 V or negative full scale voltage Code 4095 outputs 5 11875 V or positive full scale voltage To calculate DAC codes from voltage values use the formula DAC Code voltage value 00125 For example to output 2V DAC Code 2 00125 1600 The SIGN_DAT program shows how to store a waveform segment i e points of an arbitrary waveform into the AFG s segment memory The points are stored in the Signed DAC number format The data is transferred to the AFG as a comma separated list The example generates a 200 point 5 V to 5 V positive going ramp Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 225 The commands are 1 Reset the AFG RST 2 Clear the AFG Memory of All Sequence and Segment Data SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete ALL SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete ALL 3 Setup the AFG for Output SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FlXed lt frequency gt SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe USER SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt 4 Select the DAC Data Source SOURce ARBitrary DAC SOURce INTernal This command selects the source that transfers data to the DAC see DAC Sources on page 280 Use INTernal to transfer the data using the SOURce LIST 1 subsystem 5 Select the DAC Data Format SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat SIGNed This command selec
400. kHz to 100 kHz in a definite length arbitrary block COM Afg Afg1 DIM Freqlist 1 100 FOR l 1 TO 100 Freqlist l 1000 1 NEXT OUTPUT Afg SOUR ROSC SOUR INT1 Ireference oscillator OUTPUT Afg TRIG STAR SOUR INT1 Ifrequency1 generator OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 MODE LIST Ifrequency list mode OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST2 FREQ 3800 download freqs OUTPUT Afg1 Freqlist 1 800 bytes 3 digits OUTPUT Afg ICR LF OUTPUT Afg SOUR SWE TIME 100 Itime seconds through list OUTPUT OAfg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN function OUTPUT OAfg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 V lamplitude OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state SUBEND Continued on Next Page Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 131 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 630 SUB Rst ISubprogram which resets the E1445 COM Afg Afg1 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC Ireset the AFG ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Errmsg Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors COM Afg Afg1 DIM Message 256 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform REPEAT OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue ENTER Afg Code Message PRINT Code Message UNTIL Code 0 STOP SUBEND Program Modific
401. ker Out front panel terminals see Chapter 6 for information on other sources 7 Setup the Waveform Segment SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine lt length gt 8 Store the Waveform Segment as Combined Signed DAC Data SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined lt combined_list gt This command stores the waveform segment into segment memory in the Signed format set by the SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat SIGNed command The data is sent as a combined list with the marker bit selected 9 Setup the Sequence and Generate Output SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DEFine lt length gt SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence lt segment_list gt SOURce FUNCtion USER lt name gt INITiate MMediate BASIC Program Example COMBSIGN IRE STORE COMBSIGN This program downloads an arbitrary waveform as a combined voltage and marker list of signed 2 s complement DAC codes The data is sent in an IEEE 488 2 definite length block in 16 bit linteger format The waveform is a 200 point 5V to 5V ramp wave Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 ASSIGN Afg1 TO 70910 FORMAT OFF Ipath for binary data COM Afg Afg1 Set up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 ICall the subprograms which reset the AFG and erase all waveform Isegments
402. ks sweep arm to start arm ARM SWE LINK ARM 296 Command Reference Chapter 8 ARM SWEep SOURce ARM SWEep SOURce lt source gt selects the source that starts a frequency sweep or list The available sources are BUS The Group Execute Trigger GET GPIB command or the IEEE 488 2 TRG common command HOLD Suspend sweep or list arming Use ARM SWEep IMMediate to start the frequency sweep or list IMMediate Immediate sweep or list arming If the sweep advance trigger source TRIGger SWEep SOURce command is set to TlMer the first frequency sweep or list starts when the first start arm is received For multiple sweeps or lists the last frequency point of each sweep or list is output for the same TRIGger SWEep TlMer time as between all other points of the sweep or list If TRIGger SWEep SOURce is set to any other source the frequency sweep or list starts when the INITiate IMMediate command is executed For multiple sweeps or lists a last frequency is output until the next sweep advance trigger is received LINK The next valid start arm starts a sweep or list TTLTrg0 through TTLTrg7 The VXIbus TTL trigger lines Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt source gt discrete BUS HOLD IMMediate LINK none TTLTrgO through TTLTrg7 Comments If ARM SWEep SOURce is set to TTLTrg lt n gt and you want to set TRIGger SWEep SOURce to TTLTrg lt n gt
403. l NEXT OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DOWN COMP Idisable downloading SUBEND SUB Tri_wave Tri_wave Subprogram which computes a triangle wave and downloads Ithe corresponding dac codes to segment memory over the VXlbus Marker pulses coincide with the output voltages Waveform 1024 through Waveform 1033 COM Afg Base_addr CONTROL 16 25 3 laccess A24 space with WRITEIO OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL TRI Isegment name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 2048 Isegment size Calculate triangle wave dac codes and shift bits to code positions INTEGER Waveform 1 2048 FOR l 1 TO 1023 Waveform l I 0048828 00125 Waveform SHIFT Waveform I 3 NEXT FOR l 1024 TO 1033 Waveform l I 0048828 00125 Waveform SHIFT Waveform l 3 2 linclude marker bit NEXT FOR 1034 TO 2048 Waveform l 2048 1 0048828 00125 Waveform SHIFT Waveform I 3 NEXT ISet last point bit actual last point 3 Waveform 2045 Waveform 2045 1 Enable downloading from the VXlbus OUTPUT Afg ARB DOWN VXI TRI 2048 OUTPUT Afg OPC ENTER Afg Ready Download the waveform segment to segment memory using WRITEIO and tthe AFG s high speed data register The register s address is located in A24 address space FOR l 1 TO 2048 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL 26 16 Waveform l NEXT OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DOWN COMP Idisable downloading SUBEND Continued on Next Page 266 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 1080 1090 1
404. le ERRORCHK o 441 The Status Byte Status Group e 442 Chapter 10 Block Diagram Description oo 445 Chapter Contents tl Geek AA A a ed i ees 445 AFG Description s s uae 64 Be oY oe Pee Ge Pie fh ee 445 Arbitrary Waveform Description oo o 446 Generating Non Sinusoid Arbitrary Waveforms o o o 447 Output DAC woe ac eee we A A A ee eek Bw a eee 447 Mmo pui e ited ee ad Bea ee Wa cee he ole bd 448 Reference Oscillator sma ea ea we A ee es 448 Frequency Generators o 448 Trieter Circuitry is 26 ere AA A BAA BS Se Sea 450 Output Circ itiy s Pl ee ee oe Pa Oe Pes a ee So BO 450 Microprocessor amp 2 ARA Beak oe Pee ee a Ee bos de a 450 Generating Sinusoid Waveforms e 450 Output Circuitry Description ooa ee 451 Attenuator sania Sore sed ae Re kG ne Be ee we ae er 451 Ella arte a Jo Ge eae ae Sas a eee a fe E 451 Output Ampli ooe sql 8 a ra SE els er dee ye Sh ae 451 Offset Circultfy 32s eb a A SS a 451 AFG Memory Description e 452 Appendix A Agilent E1445A Specifications o o 453 Appendix Contents rt a a Se eed 453 Memory Characteristics a s sner imni odeti RE e D ee 453 Frequency and Sample Rate Characteristics o 454 Amplitude Characteristics o oo ee 457 Interface Characteristics o s oe o pue aa e aa a ee 459 10 Agilent E1445
405. le waveform segment in a segment sequence 206 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations Chapter 6 Generating Multiple Marker Pulses in Multiple Segment Lists The MARKSEGI program shows how to generate marker pulses using SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer and SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer The program generates a sine wave and triangle wave It generates a 10 points wide active low marker pulses starting at the center of the triangle waveform The program generates a 512 point 5 V sine wave and 5 V triangle wave Chan A applied to AFG s Output Connector Chan B applied to AFG s Marker Out Connector Chan A 5V DIV Chan B 5V DIV Output applied to a 50 load value 5 msec DIV The commands are 1 Reset the AFG RST 2 Clear the AFG Memory of All Sequence and Segment Data SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete ALL SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete ALL 3 Setup the AFG for Output SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FlXed lt frequency gt SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe USER SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt 4 Select the Marker Source SOURce MARKer FEED SOURce LIST 1 This command selects the marker source for the front panel s Marker Out connector to output marker pulses generated by arbitrary waveforms See Available Marker Sources on page 205 for the different sources 5 Select the Marker Polarity SOURce MARKer POLarity lt polarity gt NORMal lt pol
406. learing AFG 47 L LADDR 22 Linear Sweeping 375 Linking commands 288 sweep advance trigger 400 List of Example Programs 464 466 LIST1 Example Program 125 126 LIST_STP Example Program 194 195 LIST_TME Example Program 139 140 LISTDEF Example Program 131 132 LMC 419 Loading DAC from VXIbus 506 508 Local Bus operating mode 403 404 specifications 460 test data 406 testing configuration 405 518 Agilent E1445A User s Manual Index G continued Lock Stepping Multiple AFGs 176 180 LOCKSTEP Example Program 177 180 LOG_SWP Example Program 133 134 Logarithmic Sweeping 133 134 319 375 Logical Address 22 description 21 Low pass Output Filter cut off frequency 308 disabling 309 enabling 309 LRN 48 LRN Program Example 48 LRN 48 420 Mainframe installing removing modules 25 Marker enable 251 out BNC disabling marker signal 364 enabling marker signal 364 marker pulses 204 output pulse 342 selecting polarity 364 selecting sources 363 outputs 203 222 program comments 222 points determining number of 222 polarity 364 program comments 222 pulse arbitrary generated 206 commands 204 342 343 354 355 362 364 each waveform point 214 217 enable flowchart 204 front panel BNC 204 multiple 207 211 segment sequence 354 355 single 212 213 waveform segment 337 338 342 343 signal enabling disabling 362 364 sources available 205 206 361 363 front panel BNC 36
407. legal range of values for lt amplitude gt Default units are specified by the SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude UNIT VOLTage command For all waveform shapes other than DC output output amplitude control is implemented as a 0 to 30 dB attenuator with 01 dB resolution For DC output the amplitude is generated using the DAC resolution is 00125 V into a matched load 0025 V into an open circuit For DC output acceptable units are V volts For arbitrary waveform output acceptable units are V volts and VPK For ramp sine square and triangle outputs acceptable units are V volts VPK volts peak VPP volts peak to peak VRMS volts RMS W watts and DBM or DBMW GB referenced to 1 milliwatt For W DBM and DBMW the amplitude is referenced to the OUTPut 1 LOAD value they are meaningless and therefore unavailable if OUTPut 1 LOAD INFinity is set Comments Related Commands OUTPut 1 LOAD SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate OFFSet e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group Voltage e RST Condition SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude 16187 V Example Setting Output Voltage VOLT 5 VPP Sets output amplitude to 5 volts peak to peak 378 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude UNIT VOLTage SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude UNIT VOLTage lt units gt sets the default units for subs
408. level over the frequency sweep or frequency list AC leveling which is performed by the CALibration STATe AC ON command reset setting applies to the sine wave function only AC Leveling When AC leveling is enabled during a sweep or frequency list errors in the Amplitude Errors output amplitude still occur during a frequency change In most cases the errors are negligible However in applications where the step to step frequency changes are large 10 or greater or when frequency changes occur near the filter s cutoff frequency the error is such that settling times on the order of milliseconds are required for the output to settle to the correct amplitude Table 4 1 shows typical non warranted amplitude errors versus settling times when a frequency change occurs These worst case settling times represent frequency changes freq1 to freq2 of 10 and 1 from the filter s cutoff frequency 160 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 Table 4 1 Amplitude Errors Versus Settling Times Amplitude 5 Vpk 10 MHz filter frequency change 10 Freqi 10 7 MHz Freq2 0 9 Freq1 Error in Volts Settling Time ms Error dB Error 0 532 0 01 10 6 0 878 0 5 0 48 10 0 0 828 0 25 1 16 5 0 0 424 0 1 2 04 2 0 0 172 0 05 2 62 1 0 0 086 Amplitude 5 Vpk 10 MHz filter frequency change 1 Freqi 10 7 MHz Freq2 0 99 Freq Error in Volts Settling Time ms Error dB Error 0 056 0 01 1
409. lines The bus request level is a priority at which the A gilent E1445A can request the use of the Data Transfer Bus e There are four bus request lines BGO BG3 from which one is selected Figure 1 3 Bus request line 3 has the highest priority bus request line O has the lowest priority Itis not necessary to change the bus request level setting BG3 on the AFG More information on the Data Transfer Bus can be found in the C Size VXIbus Systems Configuration Guide Shown BG3 Selected Ce a Bus Request Level Location KIA R g R KR K K R R e x ps SEL BGO BG1 BG2 ji BGS L_ UNSEL Figure 1 3 Setting the AFG Bus Request Level 24 Getting Started Chapter 1 AFG Installation in The Agilent E1445A may be installed in any slot except slot 0 in a C size a Mainframe VXIbus mainframe If an Agilent E1446A Summing Amplifier DAC is part of your system the amplifier should be installed in a slot next to the E1445A To install in a mainframe 1 Set the extraction levers out Slide the module into any slot except slot 0 until the backplane connectors touch 2 Seat the module by moving the levers toward each other 3 Tighten the top and bottom screws to secure the module in the mainframe Note For compliance with European EMI standards order the Backplane Connector Shield Kit Agilent Part Number E14
410. ling Waveform repetitions burst Waveform arm count External arm slope Arm source Arbitrary waveform sequence Segment sequence return data format and length Frequency list return data format and length ECL trigger line 0 marker source Marker routing ECLTO line ECL trigger line 1 marker source Marker routing ECLT1 line Marker Out BNC source Marker Out signal polarity TRIG STOP SOUR ARM SWE SOUR TRIG SWE SOUR FUNC SHAP RAMP POIN RAMP POL VOLT AMPL VOLT OFFS OUTP IMP OUTP LOAD OUTP LOAD AUTO ARM COUN ARM LAY2 COUN ARM LAY2 SLOP ARM LAY2 SOUR FUNC USER LIST FORM LIST2 FORM MARK ECLTO FEED MARK ECLTO STAT MARK ECLT1 FEED MARK ECLT1 STAT MARK FEED MARK POL HOLD IMMediate TlMer SINusoid 100 NORMal 1 61869088E 001 0 00000000E 000 5 00000000E 001 5 00000000E 001 1 on 9 90000000E 037 1 00000000E 000 POS IMMediate NONE ASCii 9 ASGii 10 ARM 0 off TRIG 0 off ARM NORM Appendix B Useful Tables 473 Table B 5 Agilent E1445A Power On Reset Configuration continued Local bus automatic mode MODE AUTO Parameter Command Power on Reset Setting Marker Out BNC state MARK STAT 1 on Output state OUTP STAT 1 on Output filter frequency FILT FREQ 2 50000000E 005 Output filter state FILT STAT O off Phase modulation deviation PM DEV 0 00000000E 000 Phase modulation source P
411. load Sources a E e AE e aE E E R AE a 280 Determining the Size of the Combined Segment List 280 Determining the Size of the Combined Segment Sequence List 280 Chapter 8 Command Reference e 281 Command PES s ad a peed AR O re a ee eh 284 Common Command Format 0 0000 eee eee eee 284 SCPI Command Format 284 Command Separator ooo ee 285 Abbreviated Commands oaa ee 285 Implied Optional Commands a 285 Variable Command Syntax 2 2 a 285 SCPI Command Parameters ee 286 Parameter Types Explanations and Examples o o 286 Optional Parameters ee 287 Querying Parameter Settings ooa ee ee 287 SCPL Command Execution gae 2 2 aa R aE E a eee 288 Command Coupling a e a ee ee 288 Linking Commands s use a i Tee a ae i a e a a a aa a ae a ee 288 SCPI Command Reference noaa a 289 ABORT Tosap Hada EEA OSG SS O AE RE AAA A tind 290 ARM e timida o ri A A A IE e 291 STARt LAYer 1 COUNt o o ooo ooo o 291 STARt LAYer2 COUNt o o o e 292 STARt LAYer2 IMMediatel e 293 ESTARI LAY er SLOPE cia A a e o 293 ESTARt EAYer2 SQUICE 302 aod ek cb ete a e Ba eee Coe Is 294 SWEep COUNT v aa ra RA al ta EA e e 295 SWEep IMMediate e 295 ISW ESP LINK si a ee he EA ee AAA 296 SWEEP SOURCE ua A E Se A HOR Se
412. loutput load 270 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state 280 SUBEND 290 Continued on Next Page 70 Generating Standard Waveforms Chapter 2 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 SUB Rst Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 COM Afg OUTPUT OAfg RST OPC lreset the AFG ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Errmsg Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors COM Afg DIM Message 256 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform REPEAT OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR lread AFG error queue ENTER Afg Code Message PRINT Code Message UNTIL Code 0 STOP SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program OUTPLOAD FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program OUTPLOAD C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A Chapter 2 Generating Standard Waveforms 71 Selecting the Amplitude Levels and Output Units The OUTPUNIT program shows how to set the output amplitude using the VPP volts peak to peak output unit The commands are 1 Reset the AFG RST This command aborts any waveform output and selects the 42 9 MHz reference oscillator source DDS sample source that is trigger start source s
413. lter bits may be set for positive transitions 0 to 1 or negative transitions 1 to 0 The commands used to set the transitions are STATus OPERation NTRansition lt unmask gt STATus OPERation PTRansition lt unmask gt NTRansition sets the negative transition For each bit unmasked a 1 to 0 transition of that bit in the Condition Register sets the associated bit in the Event Register Chapter 9 AFG Status 435 The Event Register The Enable Register Program Example PTRansition sets the positive transition For each bit unmasked a 0 to 1 transition of that bit in the Condition Register sets the associated bit in the Event Register lt unmask gt is the decimal hexadecimal H octal HQ or binary B value of the Condition Register bit to be unmasked Bits 0 3 6 and 8 have corresponding decimal values of 1 8 64 and 256 The Event Register latches transition events from the Condition Register as specified by the Transition Filter Bits in the Event Register are latched and remain set until the register is cleared by one of the following commands STATus OPERation EVENt CLS The Enable Register specifies which bits in the Event Register can generate a summary bit which is subsequently used to generate a service request The AFG logically ANDs the bits in the Event Register with bits in the Enable Register and ORs the results to obtain a summary bit The bits in the Enable Register that are to be AND
414. ly useful with SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe USER e arbitrary waveform output SOURce PM DEViation CHANge Outputs a one sample period wide marker pulse that is output after a phase change occurs This shows that the new phase has been reached SOURce ROSCillator The reference oscillator as selected by SOURce JROSCillator SOURce TRIGger STARt SEQuence 1 Outputs a nominal 12 nS marker pulse for each point of the segment list Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt source gt string ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 none ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer2 SOURce FREQuency 1 CHANge SOURce LIST 1 SOURce PM DEViation CHANge SOURce ROSCillator TRIGger STARt SEQuence 1 Comments Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None Related Commands SOURce MARKer POLarity SOURce MARKer STATe RST Condition SOURce MARKer FEED ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 Chapter 8 Command Reference 363 SOURce MARKer Example Setting the Marker Out BNC Source MARK FEED SOUR LIST Sets marker list as source POLarity SOURce MARKer POLarity lt polarity gt selects the polarity of the marker signal at the front panel Marker Out BNC NORMal polarity selects an active high marker output INVerted an active low output Parameters Parameter Para
415. m lindefinite length block OUTPUT Afg CHR 10 END lterminate with line feed LF and EOI OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM ADDR ENTER Afg Addr_seg3 Addr_seg3 Addr_seg3 8 1 8 to set starting address boundary of segment ISequence 1 is the repetition count and marker enable for Isegment SPIKE Sequence 2 is the starting address of segment SPIKE Sequence 1 SHIFT 4096 1 4 Addr_seg3 DIV 65536 Sequence 2 Addr_seg3 MOD 65536 65536 Addr_seg3 MOD 65536 gt 32767 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL SEQ3 Isequence name Continued on Next Page 504 Register Based Programming Appendix C 2370 2380 2390 2400 2410 2420 2430 2440 2450 2460 2470 2480 2490 2500 2510 2520 2530 2540 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Isequence size OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SSEQ COMB 0 segm execution order OUTPUT OAfg1 Sequence Isequence list in indefinite length block OUTPUT Afg CHR 10 END Iterminate with Line Feed LF and EOI OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ ADDR ENTER Afg Seq3_addr SUBEND SUB Rst Isequence location Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 COM Afg Afg1 Base_addr Seq1_addr Seq2_addr Seq3_addr OUTPUT Afg RST CLS OPC Ireset the AFG ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Wf del Wf_del Subprogram which deletes all sequences and segments 2550 COM Afg Afg1 Base_addr Seq1_addr Seq2_addr Seq3_addr 2560 OUTPUT Afg FUNC USER NONE Iselect no sequences 257
416. m continued SEGMent FREE 341 SEGMent MARKer 342 SEGMent MARKer POINts 343 SEGMent MARKer SPOint 343 SEGMent SELect 344 SEGMent VOLTage 345 346 SEGMent VOLTage DAC 346 SEGMent VOLTage POINts 347 SSEQuence ADDRess 347 SSEQuence CATalog 348 SSEQuence COMBined 348 SSEQuence COMBined POINts 349 SSEQuence DEFine 350 SSEQuence DELete ALL 351 SSEQuence DELete SELected 351 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt 352 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt POINts 353 SSEQuence FREE 353 SSEQuence MARKer 354 SSEQuence MARKer POINts 355 SSEQuence MARKer SPOint 355 SSEQuence SELect 356 SSEQuence SEQuence 357 SSEQuence SEQuence SEGMents 357 SOURce LIST2 Subsystem 358 360 FORMat DATA 358 FREQuency 359 FREQuency POINts 360 SOURce MARKer Subsystem 361 364 ECLTrg lt n gt FEED 361 ECLTrg lt n gt STATe 362 FEED 363 POLarity 364 STATe 364 SOURce PM Subsystem 365 367 DEViation 365 SOURce 366 STATe 367 UNIT ANGLe 367 SOURce RAMP Subsystem 368 369 POINts 368 POLarity 369 SOURce ROSCillator Subsystem 370 371 FREQuency EXTernal 370 SOURCce 371 SOURce SWEep Subsystem 372 376 COUNt 372 DIRection 373 POINts 374 375 TIME 376 SOURce PM Subsystem 377 380 LEV IMM AMPL 377 378 LEV IMM AMPL UNIT VOLT 379 LEV IMM OFFSet 380 Sources arming 199 setting 166 168 294 DAC 280 315 downloa
417. maximum frequency but with lower resolution e For correct output amplitude values the load applied to the AFG Output 50 75 Q output terminals must be the same value as the selected AFG output impedance value e To output to an open circuit execute OUTPut 1 LOAD INFinity or 9 9E 37 this sets the auto load value off The Agilent E1445A then outputs the correct amplitude and offset for an open circuit The amplitude and offset range are doubled while resolution worsens by a factor of 2 Chapter 2 Generating Standard Waveforms 79 Output Units Comments e The selected unit type can be overridden by sending a unit suffix with the amplitude command For example if the selected unit is VPP sending SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude 5V changes the unit type to volts that is V for that command However the default unit type remains in effect for subsequent amplitude commands that are sent without the unit suffix The V volts suffix and VPK volts peak suffix generate the same amplitude values for all time varying waveforms like SINusoid SQUare TRlangle and RAMPS The default unit type only applies for amplitudes and not for offsets The unit for offsets is always specified in V for volts For example executing SOURce VOLTage OFFSet 1VPP causes an error To prevent the error execute either SOURce VOLTage OFFSet 0 1 or SOURce VOLTage OFFSet 0 1V The W DBM and DBMW unit types refere
418. ments and segment sequences can also be stored into memory using external sources like the VXIbus for user generated waveforms Reference The reference oscillator provides the clock signal for the frequency Oscillator generator Thus frequency stability depends on the stability of the reference oscillator The oscillator also determines the frequency range of the frequency generators The AFG allows for user supplied reference oscillator sources for custom frequency values Frequency The frequency generator generates the clock pulses to enable both the Generators output DAC and memory to output a segment The frequency generator thus determines the rate i e the sample rate at which the points of a waveform segment are output The AFG uses two different generators One generator Frequency 1 generator uses a Direct Digital Synthesis NCO technique to generate the sample frequencies The other generator Frequency2 generator is a Divide by n generator 448 Block Diagram Description Chapter 10 DDS Frequency Refer to Figure 10 3 This generator has excellent resolution and allows for Generator Frequency1 frequency sweeping frequency shift keying and output frequency lists Generator However its maximum frequency is the Reference Oscillator frequency divided by 4 Output Output Output AE Clock Reference Oscillator Trigger Figure 10 3 Generating Waveforms Using a Frequency1 Generator To generate preci
419. meter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt polarity gt discrete INVerted NORMal none Comments Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce MARKer FEED SOURce MARKer STATe e RST Condition SOURce MARKer POLarity NORMal Example Setting the Marker Out BNC Polarity MARK POL INV Sets active low output STATe SOURce MARKer STATe lt mode gt enables or disables the routing of the currently selected marker signal SOURce MARKer FEED command to the front panel Marker Out BNC Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt mode gt boolean OFF 0 ON 1 none Comments Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce MARKer FEED SOURce MARKer POLarity e RST Condition SOURce MARKer STATe ON Example Enabling Marker Output to Marker Out BNC MARK ON Enables Marker Out BNC 364 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce PM SOURce PM The SOURce PM Phase Modulation subsystem controls the modulation for sine wave output only Phase modulation is not possible with other waveform shapes Subsystem Syntax SOURce PM DEViation lt phase gt SOURce lt source gt STATe lt mode gt UNIT ANGLe lt units gt DEViation SOURce PM DEViation lt phase gt sets the modulation DEViation for a sine wave output when
420. ming errors COM Afg DIM Message 256 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform REPEAT OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue ENTER Afg Code Message PRINT Code Message UNTIL Code 0 STOP SUBEND The start stop center and span values returned are 006 000E 005 SPAN 1 000E 006 Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program SMPLSWP1 FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program SMPLSWP1 C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 123 Specifying a The LIST program shows the basic steps involved in setting up and Frequency List hopping through a frequency list The program also shows how to query the number of frequencies in the list Using the flowchart in Figure 4 1 as a guide the steps of this program are 1 Select the 42 9 MHz reference oscillator SOURce JROSCillator SOURce lt source gt 2 Select the frequency generator which allows frequency lists hopping TRIGger STARt SOURce lt source gt 3 Select the frequency list mode SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE lt mode gt 4 Specify the frequency list SOURce LIST2 FREQuency lt freg_list gt 5 Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe
421. mmands prevents the AFG from receiving data over the VXIbus until it executes all the previous commands If OPC is not sent the AFG will try to receive data and thus generate an error even before it completes executing the previous commands Generate Download and Store the Second Waveform Segment as a Combined Signed List This step stores the Combined waveform segment into segment memory using the Signed number format set by the SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat SIGNed command The command or downloading method used depends on the device that downloads the data For example the device may be an embedded 262 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 controller You can also use the command module like the E1406A Command Module but at a slower data transfer rate Be sure to set the last point bit and marker bits at the appropriate points on the waveform Notify the AFG that Downloading is Completed SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload COMPlete Send this command to the AFG after all data is downloaded Select the First Waveform Segment and Return its Address SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent ADDRess These commands select the first waveform segment and then returns its address Divide the address by 8 store it into the second element of the first 16 bit word array Add the most significant bit of the segment address to the first element of the
422. mmediate Arming and Triggering The source which arms the frequency sweep or list is set with the ARM SWEep SOURce command The available sources are e BUS The GPIB Group Execute Trigger GET command or the TEEE 488 2 TRG common command e HOLD Suspend sweep or frequency list arming Arm using ARM SWEepl MMediate e IMMediate Immediate sweep or frequency list arming If the sweep or frequency list advance trigger TRIGger SWEep SOURCe is set to TIMer the sweep or list starts when the first start arm is received If the sweep or frequency list advance source is set to any other source the sweep or list starts when INITiate IMMediate is executed e LINK The next valid start arm starts the sweep or frequency list e TTLTrgO through TTLTrg7 The VXIbus TTL trigger lines After the AFG is armed the first frequency in the sweep or list is output Trigger signals output the remaining frequencies The source which advances the sweep or frequency list to the next frequency is set with the TRIGger SWEep SOURce command The available sources are e BUS The GPIB Group Execute Trigger GET command or the TEEE 488 2 TRG common command e HOLD Suspend sweep or frequency list advance triggering Advance to the next frequency using TRIGger SWEep IMMediate e LINK The next valid start arm advances the sweep or frequency list e TiMer The SOURce SWEep TIME and TRIGger SWEep TlMer commands control the sweep
423. ms shape selection 332 using signed data 225 228 using unsigned data 229 230 Generators frequency characteristics 454 description 449 range 116 SCPI commands 319 329 frequency2 characteristics 455 description 449 SCPI commands 330 331 Getting Started 19 52 GPIB address 22 command module port 22 interface card 22 primary address 22 secondary address 22 GMC 418 H Half Rectified Sine Waves generating 111 High Speed Data Register 506 High Speed Operation 223 280 program comments 280 How BASIC transfers 32 bit integer data 255 the AFG generates arbitrary waveforms 86 87 to free memory 113 Idle State 164 IDN 419 TEEE 488 2 Common Commands See Common Commands Immediate arming and triggering 201 of waveform 293 frequency sweep or list 295 Impedance Output setting 69 71 309 Implied SCPI Commands 27 285 Increasing Speed 223 280 Indefinite Length Arbitrary Blocks 130 132 157 data byte size 235 data format 235 transferring data using 235 238 INITiate Subsystem 306 307 INIT IMMediate 306 307 Initiating the AFG 306 307 waveforms 165 Installing Module 25 Instrument action state 164 language SCPI 26 virtual commands 403 408 Interface characteristics 459 local bus 403 406 select code 22 Introductory Programs 46 AFG self test 46 checking for errors 49 generating sine waves 51 query power on reset configuration 48 resetting and c
424. n 295 ESTA Teleco ado aora 309 COUNT o a ei eth bien id 295 IMPedance ics s teed oi sillin 309 IMMediate eee eee 295 LOAD nero niera heeds cneees beaeecl 310 LINK otitis Nate 296 AUTO Sata 311 SQUACE cua iden 297 ESTA TO iii 311 CALibrati0N seesinane 298 SOUR CO leticia ia 313 COUN noise guia 298 ARBIt Dl Y sinisiraan 313 DATA aiii ica iccinain Aleka 299 DA Ciconia 313 A thames cetera ced 299 FORMA oonessssceeessssseesssssseessssssseees 313 ACZ nenia 299 O inan N 315 DC osk acter enae 300 DOWNload D 316 Eo A A eects 300 COMPlete coccccncconninnnconnnonncinnianano 318 A rete rs 300 OA eee 301 SECUIC vrai 302 CODE cent id 302 o A ens on 303 Chapter 8 Command Reference 281 SOURCES lecitina ta 319 FREQuencyll ooocccocccocnnoccnonconncnnocnnos 319 AA 321 CW FIX d c ocooooococcocccconcconcconornonno 322 ESKCY cocci n tr 323 SOU Rceualia ca 324 MODE coto cial 325 RAN uc 326 SPAN iiaiai tt 327 STA Raid 328 STOP ui on 329 SOUR lis csc ostia 330 FPREQUEBNCy2 coccoccccoccconinoninonannncnccrnnannns 330 CW FIX d coccccocoooncoonccnccconccanananinnos 331 SOURCE Ji ieman E 332 FUNGON tido 332 ESHAP O jonniin iari 332 USE tad 333 AO geet edgeeeens 334 LIST lena is 334 FORMato aisse diegia 335 EDATAJ mereen ER 335 SEGMent siini 336 ADDRESS iniri 336 CATA haci iii 336 COMBined coccooccccoccnonccnnonccananinnnoos 337 PONS oocaliiaii da 338 DEFING
425. n Agilent Technologies Sales and Service Office for service and repair to ensure that safety features are maintained 14 Agilent E1445A Arbitrary Function Generator User s Manual ECLARATION OF NFORMITY Agilent Technologies DEG O oe CONS According to ISO IEC Guide 22 and CEN CENELEC EN 45014 Manufacturer s Name Agilent Technologies Incorporated Manufacturer s Address 815 14 St SW Loveland Colorado 80537 USA Declares that the product Product Name Arbitrary Function Generator Model Number E1445A Product Options This declaration covers all options of the above product s Conforms with the following European Directives The product herewith complies with the requirements of the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC and the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC including 93 68 EEC and carries the CE Marking accordingly Conforms with the following product standards EMC Standard Limit IEC 61326 1 1997 A1 1998 EN 61326 1 1997 A1 1998 CISPR 11 1990 EN 55011 1991 Group 1 Class A IEC 61000 4 2 1995 A1 1998 EN 61000 4 2 1995 4kV CD 8kV AD IEC 61000 4 3 1995 EN 61000 4 3 1995 3 V m 80 1000 MHz IEC 61000 4 4 1995 EN 61000 4 4 1995 0 5kV signal lines 1kV power lines IEC 61000 4 5 1995 EN 61000 4 5 1995 0 5 kV line line 1 kV line ground IEC 61000 4 6 1996 EN 61000 4 6 1996 3V 0 15 80 MHz cycle 100 IEC 61000 4 11 1994 EN 61000 4 11 1994 Dips 30 10ms 60 100ms Interrupt gt 95 5000ms Canada
426. n the ECLTrg0 trigger line Although RST automatically enables the AFG for marker outputs 1t 1s given here for good programming practice Select the Master AFG s ECLTrg1 Feed Trigger Source SOURce MARKer ECLTrg1 FEED lt source gt ARM STARt LAYer2 This source outputs a marker pulse when the master s waveform output starts The marker is output on the ECLTrg 1 trigger line Enable the ECLTrg1 Line SOURce MARKer ECLTrg1 STATe ON This enables the arm output on the ECLTrg 1 trigger line Select the Servant AFG s Reference Oscillator Source SOURce JROSCillator SOURce ECLTrg lt n gt SOURce JROSCillator FREQuency EXTernal 40M This command selects the Reference Oscillator Source To synchronize the servant AFG with the master select the ECLTrg0 trigger line The ECLTRGO line is a 40 MHz clock Select the Servant AFG s Sample Source TRIGger STARt SEQuence 1 SOURce INT2 Select the Divide by n time base for the sample source Setup the Servant AFG For a 5 V Square Wave Output SOURce FREQuency 1 FlXed lt frequency gt SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SQUare Setup the Servant AFG Arm Source to be the ECLTrg1 Line ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce ECLTrg1 This command tells the servant AFG to start on the arm signal from the master AFG Generate the Servant AFG s Output INITiate MMediate Wait for the Servant AFG to Complete its Setup STATus OPC INITiate OFF OPC Generate the Master AFG
427. n the wait for arm state INITiate MMediate BASIC Program Example EXT_ARM 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 IRE STORE EXT_ARM This program arms the AFG with an external signal applied to the AFG Start Arm In port When armed a 10 kHz 1 VPP square wave is loutput lAssign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg ISet up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 ICall the subprograms CALL Rst CALL External_arm WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB External_arm External_arm Subprogram which externally arms the AFG and outputs la square wave COM Afg OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 MODE FIX lfrequency mode OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 3 Ifrequency OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SQU function OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 1VPP lamplitude OUTPUT Afg ARM STAR LAY2 SOUR EXT larm source OUTPUT Afg ARM STAR LAY2 SLOP NEG Isignal edge OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state SUBEND SUB Rst Continued on Next Page Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 167 340 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 350 COM Afg 360 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 370 ENTER Atfg Complete 380 SUBEND 390 400 SUB Errmsg 410 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors
428. nal frequency for RAMP SINusoid SQUare and TRlangle waveforms They specify the sample rate for arbitrary USER waveforms e When SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe RAMP or TRlangle is selected the greater of the SOURce RAMP POINts value and 8 points of contiguous waveform segment memory must be available When SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SQUare is selected 8 points of contiguous waveform segment memory must be available Attempting to select one of these functions with less contiguous waveform segment memory available or to set SOURce RAMP POINts to a value larger than the largest contiguous amount of available waveform segment memory when ramp or triangle wave output is selected will generate Error 1000 Out of memory e Executable when Initiated Query form only e Coupling Group Frequency and voltage e RST Condition SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SINusoid Selecting Square Wave Generation Mode FUNC SQU Selects square wave mode SOURce FUNCtion USER lt name gt selects which one of the 128 possible stored segment sequences the Agilent E1445A generates when arbitrary waveform generation is selected by SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe USER Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt name gt character data defined waveform none sequence name NONE NONE selects no segment sequence e Executable when Initiated Query form only e Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe e RS
429. nce DELete SELected to delete a single segment sequence definition e Executable when Initiated No e Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete SELected e RST Condition None e Power On Condition No segment sequences are defined Deleting All Segment Sequences LIST SSEQ DEL ALL Deletes all segments SSEQuence DELete SELected Comments Example SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete SELected deletes a single segment sequence definition and makes its memory available for new segment sequence definitions e Use SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete ALL to delete all segment sequence definitions with one command e Executable when Initiated No e Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete ALL SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect e RST Condition None e Power On Condition No segment sequences are defined Deleting a Segment Sequence LIST SSEQ SEL ABC Selects segment sequence ABC LIST SSEQ DEL Deletes segment Chapter 8 Command Reference 351 SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt lt repetition_list gt defines for each waveform segment of a segment sequence how many times the waveform segment will be output before advancing to the next segment in the sequence Parameters The lt repetition_list gt may be either a comma separated list of repetition counts or an IEEE 488 2 definite or indefinite length
430. nces the amplitude levels to the 50 Q or 75 Q output load values set by the OUTPut 1 LOAD command Thus the W DBM and DBMW values are meaningless and not available when selecting an open circuit load Selecting the Use either degrees or radians to change the phase in the phase modulation Deviation Units for Phase Modulation function There are two ways to select the units either send the unit type with the deviation command like SOURce PM DEViation 90DEG or select the unit type with the unit command like SOURce PM UNIT ANGLe DEG or SOURce PM DEViation 90 80 Generating Standard Waveforms Chapter 2 Using MINimum and MAXimum Parameters You can execute many commands like SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FIXed using the MINimum or MAXimum parameters instead of a number value However when using the parameters the commands are immediately executed when received This happens even if the commands are coupled to other commands in a coupling group This is different than sending the commands with number values where the commands are executed after a new coupling group is sent Thus if a group of coupled commands are sent where the MINimum and MAXimum parameters conflict with the current AFG setting the AFG generates an error This happens even though the commands that follow may set the AFG to a state that does not conflict with the MINimum and MAXimum parameters For best results use values in the commands and
431. nction DISP Press Continue to change frequency register writes PAUSE DISP ICall the subprogram which changes the output frequency Pass the Ireference oscillator frequency the new output frequency and Ithe number of waveform points Note arbitrary waveforms npts 1 Isquare waves npts 4 ramp triangle waves Inpts RAMP POINts value CALL Divide_by_n 4 E 7 2 5E 6 4 END SUB A24 offset A24 offset Subprogram which determines the base address for Ithe AFG registers in A24 address space COM Afg Base_addr CONTROL 16 25 2 laccess A16 space with READIO and WRITEIO A16_addr DVAL D400 16 AFG A16 base address Offset READIO 16 A16_addr 6 Iread AFG offset register Base_addr Offset 256 Ishift offset for 24 bit address SUBEND SUB Output_function Continued on Next Page 492 Register Based Programming Appendix C 340 Output function ISubprogram which uses SCPI commands to set the 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 800 810 820 140 MHz reference oscillator to set divide by n frequency synthesis to set the output frequency function amplitude and to start the waveform COM Afg Base_addr OUTPUT Afg SOUR ROSC SOUR INT2 Ireference oscillator 40 MHz OUTPUT Afg TRIG STAR SOUR INT2 Ifrequency gen
432. nd re initializing the AFG The Waveform The following Waveform Sequence Registers are used to change the output Seq uence Registers waveform sequence e Traffic Register base_addr 816 e Waveform Select Register base_addr A16 e Sequence Base Register base_addr 2016 e Status Register base_addr 216 The Traffic Register The Traffic Register specifies the source which selects the waveform sequence Address 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 0 base 816 Sequencer High speed clock High speed data source other control data source source bits Sequencer Data Source The Sequencer data source field specifies the source which selects addresses in sequence base memory that in turn select the waveform sequences The available sources are 0 0 sequencer data source is Local Bus 0 1 sequencer data source is Front Panel 1 0 sequencer data source is Waveform Select Register The source specified in the Sequence Selection program is the Waveform Select Register Note that when the sequencer data source is specified the contents of the other register fields must remain unchanged 498 Register Based Programming Appendix C The Waveform Select The Waveform Select Register contains the location of the output Register sequence s base address in sequence base memory Address 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 0 base A16 Waveform Index other control bits
433. nd start the waveform Continued on Next Page 152 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER SIN_X_OUT OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB Sinx_def Sinx_def Define Sin x x waveform and output sequence COM Afg DIM Waveform 1 4096 FOR 2047 TO 2048 IF 1 0 THEN 1 E 38 Waveform 2048 SIN 2 PI 53125 1 256 53125 1 256 159154943092 NEXT OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL SIN_X Iselect segment OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 4096 reserve memory OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT Waveform load points OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL SIN_X_OUT Iselect sequence OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Inumber of segments OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ SIN_X Isegment order SUBEND SUB Rst Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 COM Afg OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Wf_del Wf_del Subprogram which deletes all sequences and segments COM Afg OUTPUT Afg FUNC USER NONE Iselect no sequences OUTPUT Afg LIST SSEQ DEL ALL Idelete all sequences OUTPUT Afg LIST SEGM DEL ALL Idelete all segments SUBEND SUB Errmsg
434. ne e Related Commands STATus commands SRE STB e RST Condition None Example Presetting the Status Subsystem STAT PRES Presets the status subsystem Chapter 8 Command Reference 385 STATus QUEStionable CONDition Comments Example STATus QUEStionable CONDition returns the contents of the Questionable Signal Condition Register Reading the register does not affect its contents e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands STATus commands SRE STB e RST Condition All bits of the Condition Register are cleared as a result of the state present after RST except for the Calibration bit which will remain set if the condition persists Querying the Questionable Signal Condition Register STAT QUES COND Queries Questionable Signal Condition Register QUEStionable ENABle Parameters Comments Example STATus QUEStionable ENABle lt unmask gt specifies which bits of the Questionable Signal Event Register are included in its Summary bit The Summary bit is the bit for bit logical AND of the Event Register and the unmasked bit s Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt unmask gt numeric or 0 through 32767 none non decimal numeric The non decimal numeric forms are the H Q or B formats specified by TEEE 488 2 e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands STATus commands SRE ST
435. ne remains high the AFG re uses the last selected sequence 3 The AFG now latches the least significant byte on the FPDxx i e FPDOO through FPD15 data lines to select a new sequence These data lines contain the address of the sequence to be selected 4 Once the AFG uses the data to select a new sequence it generates a new FPPACE signal and the process completes For correct operation the FPCLK should occur 150 nS before the next FPPACE occurs The minimum response delay ts is 0 as is also the minimum data hold time ts The minimum FPPACE pulse width tp is 20 nS its width depends on the selected sample rate To change the sequence the sequence base memory must be loaded See the WAVSELFP example program beginning on page 272 to determine how to load the memory with the sequences Usi ng the Dig Ital To download data ignore the FPPACE line but provide a FPCLK for Port In Connector each data point to de downloaded The timing relationship between FPCLK and FPDDxx is as shown in Figure 7 7 except without the to Download Data FPPACE line The data format is the same that is used to download segment data using the SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload command Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 279 High Speed Operation Program Comments Amplitude Effects on DAC Codes Incorrect AFG Operation from Incorrect DAC Codes DAC Sources Download Sources Determining the Size of the Combined Segment List De
436. ne wave frequency sweep from 0 Hz to 10 MHz and uses the AFG s 10 MHz filter and AC output leveling to maintain a constant amplitude over the span With the flowchart in Figure 4 1 as a guide the steps of this program are 1 Select the frequency sweep mode SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE lt mode gt 2 Set the start frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 STARt lt start_freg gt 3 Set the stop frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 STOP lt stop_freg gt 4 Set the number of sweeps SOURce SWEep COUNt lt number gt 5 Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe lt shape gt 6 Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel MMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt 7 Select the output filter OUTPut 1 FILTer LPASs FREQuency lt frequency gt 8 Enable the output filter OUTPut 1 FILTer LPASs STATe lt mode gt 9 Place the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate MMediate 144 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 BASIC Program Example SWP_LEVL 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 IRE STORE SWP_LEVL This program enables output leveling over the 0 Hz to 10 MHz Isweep Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg ISet up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 ICall the subprogram
437. ne_wave frequency function lamplitude Idac data format signed Imarker pulse source lwaveform sequence Iwait for arm state Sine_wave Subprogram which computes a sine wave and downloads Ithe corresponding dac codes to segment memory over the VXlbus A combined list is used but no marker pulse is Ispecified COM Afg Base_addr CONTROL 16 25 3 laccess A24 space with WRITEIO OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL SINE OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 2048 INTEGER Waveform 1 2048 Isegment name Isegment size ICalculate sine wave dac codes and shift bits to dac code positions FOR l 1 TO 2048 Waveform l 5 SIN 2 PI 1 2048 00125 Waveform SHIFT Waveform I 3 NEXT ISet last point bit actual last point 3 Waveform 2045 Waveform 2045 1 Enable downloading from the VXIbus OUTPUT Afg ARB DOWN VXI SINE 2048 OUTPUT Afg OPC ENTER Afg Ready Continued on Next Page Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 265 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 800 810 820 830 840 850 860 870 880 890 900 910 920 930 940 950 960 970 980 990 1000 1010 1020 1030 1040 1050 1060 1070 Download the waveform segment to segment memory using WRITEIO and tthe AFG s high speed data register The register s address is located in A24 address space FOR l 1 TO 2048 WRITEIO 16 Base_addr IVAL 26 16 Waveform
438. ned data combined 245 249 number format 229 230 245 to generate waveforms 229 230 VXIbus backplane 259 271 506 508 V Variable Command Syntax 285 VINStrument Subsystem 403 408 VINS CONF LBUS MODE 403 VINS CONF LBUS MODE AUTO 404 VINS CONF TEST CONF 405 VINS CONF TEST DATA 406 VINS CONF VME MODE 406 VINS CONF VME REC ADDR DATA 407 VINS CONF VME REC ADDR READ 407 VINS IDENtity 408 Virtual Instrument Commands 403 408 Agilent E1445A User s Manual Index 529 V continued Visual BASIC Language Programs 32 39 ARBWAVE FRM 33 39 list of 464 466 running a program 32 system configuration 32 using SICL 32 Visual C C Language Programs 40 45 ARBWAVE C 41 45 compiler used 40 list of 464 466 running a program 40 system configuration 40 using Agilent SICL 40 VME Register Access 461 Voltage generating DC 56 57 list amplitude effect on 113 output offset 380 waveform segment 337 338 345 347 VXIplug amp play Example Programs See VXIplug amp play Online Help VXIplug play Function Reference See VXIplug amp play Online Help VXIplug amp play Programming See VXIplug amp play Online Help VXIplug play Soft Front Panel See VXIplug amp play Online Help VXIbus A24 address space query 407 backplane downloading segment data 259 268 using 259 271 506 508 characteristics 461 data transfer bus operating mode 406 ECL trigger lines 361 362 factory setti
439. nerated when SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE is set to LIST Frequency list generation requires that TRIGger STARt SOURce INTernal1 and SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE LIST be set Frequency list generation is started by a sweep arm ARM SWEep subsystem and is advanced by a sweep advance trigger TRIGger SWEep subsystem Subsystem Syntax SOURce LIST2 FORMat DATA lt format gt lt length gt FREQuency lt freq_list gt POINts query only FORMat DATA SOURce LIST2 FORMat DATA lt format gt lt length gt specifies the format of frequency list return data for the SOURce LIST2 FREQuency command The available frequency list return data formats are ASCii Returns the frequency list as NR3 numbers as defined in IEEE 488 2 REAL Returns data in IEEE 488 2 definite block format containing the frequency values in IEEE 754 64 bit floating point format Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt format gt discrete ASGii REAL none lt length gt numeric see below MINimum MAXimum none If ASCII format is specified lt ength gt must either be omitted or must be 10 or MINimum or MAXimum If REAL format is specified lt ength gt must either be omitted or must be 64 or MINimum or MAXimum Comments Executable when Initiated Query form only Example e Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce LIST2 FREQuency e RST Condition SOURce LI
440. nerator Ranges Page 79 Number of Points versus Frequency Page 79 Output Load Comments 0 2 0005 Page 79 Output Units Comments 00 00005 Page 80 Selecting the Deviation Units for Phase Modulation 00 00 02 ee eee Page 80 Using MINimum and MAXimum Parameters Page 81 Note For information on how the AFG electronically generates the Standard Waveforms refer to Chapter 10 of this manual Chapter 2 Generating Standard Waveforms 53 Standard Waveforms Flowchart FREQUENCY AND SAMPLING PHASE MODULATION The flowchart in Figure 2 1 shows the sequence used to generate standard waveforms The reset power on values of each command are also noted on the flowchart The programs in this chapter begins with a reset the IEEE 488 2 RST command which places the AFG into its power on state Thus the programs do not execute all of the commands on the flowchart Remove the flowchart from the binder for easy accessibility Refer to the flowchart while doing the examples in this chapter if desired START SET REFERENCE OSCILLATOR SOURCE TO INTernal1 SOURce ROSCillator SOURce RESET VALUE INTernal1 SET SAMPLE SOURCE TO INTernal1 TRIGger STARt SOURce RESET VALUE INTernal1 SET FREQUENCY MODE TO CW OR FlXed SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE RESET VALUE FlXed SET THE FREQUENCY RANGE NON SINE
441. ng or previous AFG commands have completed Note that bits 7 5 4 3 2 and O have corresponding decimal values of 128 32 16 8 4 and 1 Reading the Standard Event Status Register The settings of the Standard Event Status Register can be read with the command ESR The bits are cleared at power on or by ESR or CLS Chapter 9 AFG Status 439 The Standard Event Status Enable Register Program Example The Standard Event Status Enable Register specifies which bits in the Standard Event Status Register can generate a summary bit which is subsequently used to generate a service request The AFG logically ANDs the bits in the Event Register with bits in the Enable Register and ORs the results to obtain a summary bit The bits in the Enable Register that are to be ANDed with bits in the Event Register are specified unmasked with the command ESE lt unmask gt lt unmask gt is the decimal hexadecimal H octal HQ or binary B value of the Enable Register bit to be unmasked Bits 7 5 4 3 2 O have corresponding decimal values of 128 32 16 8 4 1 All unmasked bits in the Enable Register can be determined with the command ESE The Standard Event Status Enable Register is cleared at power on or with an lt unmask gt value of 0 The ERRORCHK program sets up the Standard Event Status Group Registers to monitor programming errors When a command error execution error device dependen
442. ngs 20 loading DAC from 506 508 local bus operating mode 403 404 testing 405 406 VXIDOWN Example Program 264 268 VXISRCE Example Program 270 271 506 508 WwW WAI 427 Wait for Arm State 164 Wait for Trigger State 164 WARNINGS 14 Warranty 13 WAVE_SEL Example Program 500 505 Waveform Select Register 499 Waveforms aborting 196 arming immediately 293 FSK using arbitrary 152 153 generating arbitrary 83 116 command flowchart 84 85 damped sine waves 107 108 description 86 87 exponential charge discharge waveform 108 109 half rectified sine waves 111 noise 112 sample programs 104 109 111 112 rate setting 331 simple 88 92 sin x x 105 106 spiked sine waves 109 with different frequency generators 99 102 104 with different waveform segments 93 98 with single waveform segment 88 92 generating standard 53 82 command flowchart 54 55 frequencies setting 331 ramp waves 65 68 selecting amplitude levels 72 74 output loads 69 71 output units 72 74 sine waves 58 60 square waves 61 64 triangle waves 65 68 generating using signed data 225 228 unsigned data 229 230 initiating 165 outputting 86 87 phase modulation data sources 366 default angle units 367 enabling disabling 367 selecting deviation units 80 365 point marker pulses for each 214 217 repetition count 199 291 frequency determining 87 per start arm 291 segment data 316 deleting from memory 340 determining
443. nitiated Query form only e Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE e RST Condition SOURce FSKey SOURce EXTernal Example Setting the FSK Control Source FREQ FSK SOUR TTLTO Selects VXIbus trigger line TTLTRGO as FSK control source 324 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE lt mode gt determines which set of commands control the frequency subsystem Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt mode gt discrete CW FlXed FSKey LIST none SWEep Comments The lt mode gt parameter has the following meanings CW or FIXed Selects single frequency mode SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FIXed selects the sample rate or waveform frequency CW and FlXed are equivalent FSKey Selects frequency shift keying mode SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey and the front panel s Stop Trig FSK Gate In BNC select the two sample rate or waveform frequencies LIST Selects frequency list mode SOURce LIST2 FREQuency sets the sample rate or waveform frequencies SWEep Selects frequency sweep mode SOURce FREQuency 1 CENTer SPAN STARt and STOP commands set the sample or waveform frequency range The SOURce SWEep ARM SWEep and TRIGger SWEep subsystems control the sweep e Executable when Initiated Query form only e Coupling Group Frequency e
444. nt Do the following to set the Repetition Count repetition count 1 Select the Repetition Count Value The repetition count bit value 4096 desired repetition count For example 2 repetition counts 4096 2 4094 2 Shift the Repetition Count Value left by 20 3 Add the Shifted Repetition Count Value to the Data Byte in the Combined Segment Sequence List Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 251 The COMBSEQ program shows how to transfer multiple Combined Segment Lists 1 e waveform segments and or marker bit of an arbitrary waveform and a Combined Sequence List waveform segments to be executed marker enables and repetition counts into the AFG s memory The waveform segments are transferred in the Signed number format and transferred as Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data The segment sequence is transferred as Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Data in the Unsigned number format The example generates two 5 V sine waves and a single 0 V to 5 V triangle wave A marker is output at the center of the triangle Chan A applied to AFG s Output Terminal Chan B applied to AFG s Marker Out Terminal Chan A 5V DIV Chan B 5V DIV Output applied to a 50 load value 5 msec DIV The commands are 1 Reset the AFG RST 2 Clear the AFG Memory of All Sequence and Segment Data SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete ALL SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete AL
445. nt marker segment address list in an lindefinite length arbitrary block INTEGER Sequence 1 2 1 2 REAL Addrm1 Addrm2 COM Afg Afg1 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL M1 Idetermine segment address OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM ADDR ENTER Afg Addrm1 Addrm1 Addrm1 4 4 to set starting address boundary of segment ISequence 1 1 is the repetition count and marker enable for Isegment M1 Sequence 1 2 is the starting address of segment M1 Sequence 1 1 SHIFT 4096 2 4 Addrm1 DIV 65536 Sequence 1 2 Addrm1 MOD 65536 65536 Addrm1 MOD 65536 gt 32767 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL M2 Idetermine segment address OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM ADDR ENTER Afg Addrm2 Addrm2 Addrm2 4 4 to set starting address boundary of segment Continued on Next Page Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 257 1040 1050 1060 1070 1080 1090 1100 1110 1120 1130 1140 1150 1160 1170 1180 1190 1200 1210 1220 1230 1240 1250 1260 1270 1280 1290 1300 1310 1320 1330 1340 1350 1360 1370 1380 1390 1400 1410 1420 1430 1440 1450 1460 1470 ISequence 2 1 is the repetition count and marker enable for Isegment M2 Sequence 2 2 is the starting address of segment M2 Sequence 2 1 SHIFT 4096 1 4 Addrm2 DIV 65536 4 enable marker Sequence 2 2 Addrm2 MOD 65536 65536 Addrm2 MOD 65536 gt 32767 OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL M_OUT Isequence name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 2 Ise
446. nt E1445A AFG uses an ARM TRIG triggering configuration to output these points When initiated an arm signal enables the AFG to output one amplitude point each time a trigger signal is received The arm trigger model is shown in Figure 5 1 ABORt RST Idle State INITiate IMMediate YES Have ARM STARt LAYer2 COUNt Wait for arm State Arm received Wait for trigger State Trigger received Instrument Action Figure 5 1 The ARM TRIG Triggering Model arms occurred Have ARM STARt LAYer 1 COUNt cycles occurred 2 The AFG operates within four states Idle Wait for Arm Wait for Trigger and Instrument Action see Figure 5 1 When power is applied or following a reset or an abort the AFG is in the Idle state The AFG is set to the Wait for Arm state with the INITiate IMMediate command The AFG moves to the Wait for Trigger state when an arm from the specified arm source is received The AFG moves to the Instrument Action state when a trigger is received After the Instrument Action amplitude point is output occurs the AFG returns to the Wait for Trigger state until the next trigger occurs When enough triggers have occurred such that the specified waveform cycle repetition count has been reached the AFG returns to the Wait for Arm state until the next arm occurs When the specified arm count has been reached the AFG returns to the Idle stat
447. o 170 Triggering the AFG foi aa E e a ted 172 Triggering Commands A gina aa a a a E ee 172 Using the Divide by N Frequency Generator oouo 174 BASIC Program Example DIV_N 174 Lock Stepping Multiple AFGs o a 176 BASIC Program Example LOCKSTEP o o 177 Using Stop THegers feo a lo a ee Bat As dla E 180 BASIC Program Example STOPTRIO o 181 Gating Trigger Signals o e a 183 BASIC Program Example GATE o o e 184 Arming and Triggering Frequency Sweeps and Lists o 186 Frequency Sweeps Using Triggers o o e e 186 BASIC Program Example SWP_TRIG o 188 Arming and Triggering a Frequency Sweep o o e 190 BASIC Program Example SWP_STEP o 191 Arming and Triggering a Frequency List oo o 193 BASIC Program Example LIST_STP o o 194 Aborting Waveforms sce ow aone aS ee G e a E ee 196 Using ABORt Stop Triggers or Gating o a 196 Arming and Triggering Program Comments ooa e 197 Reference Oscillator Sources o oo o 197 AFG Frequency Synthesis Modes o a 197 AFG Frequency Modes o oo naue ener a ee 198 AFG Armin Sources coda a E A ees 199 AFG Arm Count i645 b a ek e e T 19
448. o 161869088 to 5 11875 5 11875 10 2375 5 11875 TRlangle 161869088 to 161869088 to 323738175 to 0934551614 to 5 11875 5 11875 10 2375 2 9553117 RAMP 161869088 to 161869088 to 323738175 to 0934551614 to 5 11875 5 11875 10 2375 2 9553117 USER 161869088 to 161869088 to N A N A 5 11875 5 11875 Amplitude Limits for Watts and dB WwW WwW DBM DBMW DBM DBMW Function Watt 2509 load Watt 0750 load dBmW 50Q load dBmW 0750 load DC N A N A N A N A SINusoid 000262016016 to 000174677344 to 5 81672162 to 7 57763421 to 262016016 174677344 24 1832784 22 4223658 SQUare 000524032031 to 000349354678 to 2 80642166 to 4 56733425 to 524032031 349354678 27 1935783 25 4326657 TRlangle 000174677344 to 000116451562 to 7 57763421 to 9 33854680 to 174677344 116451562 22 4223658 20 6614532 RAMP 000174677344 to 000116451562 to 7 57763421 to 9 33854680 to 174677344 116451562 22 4223658 20 6614532 Double the values for Open Circuit Loads selected by OUTPut 1 LOAD INFinity Not available with OUTPut 1 LOAD INFinity selected Appendix B Useful Tables 471 Power On Reset Configuration Table B 5 Agilent E1445A Power On Reset Configuration as returned by LRN Gating State Output frequency Frequency shift keying FSK frequencies FSK trigger source Frequency mode Frequency range Sweep start frequency Sweep stop frequency Output frequen
449. o points that are the actual voltage points of the waveform The AFG stores these points as a waveform segment in its segment memory The waveform segments are stored as Digital to Analog Converter DAC codes The codes set the output DAC to the voltage values of the waveform Voltage Y Points of a Waveform _ oo gt Segment Sequence Figure 10 1 Arbitrary Waveform The segment sequence selects the waveform segment to be output for waveform generation The segment sequence is stored in the AFG s sequence memory For square ramp and triangle functions the AFG calculates the waveform segments and segment sequences and stores them in memory For the user generated waveforms the user transfers the waveform segments and segment sequences to the AFG which stores them into memory See Generating Sinusoid Waveforms on page 450 for sinusoid waveforms 446 Block Diagram Description Chapter 10 Generating Non Sinusoid Arbitrary Waveforms Refer to Figure 10 2 The following describes the blocks that generate non sinusoid waveforms LBUS LBUS VXI DPORt a ee DAC ein Circuitry Reference Clock EE Pt EE BUS HOLD Figure 10 2 AFG Simplified Block Diagram EXTernal CLK10 ECLTrg lt n gt INTernal Micro processor TTLTrg lt n gt ECLTrg lt n gt EXTernal INTernal 1 INTernal2 Output DAC The AFG uses the 13 bit DAC
450. o read the Status Byte Register if a service request is generated by a message available MAV condition e STB is a query Thus sending the command in response to a MAV condition will generate Error 410 Query interrupted e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands SRE e RST Condition None TRG is the command equivalent of the GPIB Group Execute Trigger and the VXIbus Trigger word serial command and has exactly the same effect e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands ARM and TRIGger subsystem SOURce commands e RST Condition None TST causes the Agilent E1445A to execute its internal self test and return a value indicating the results of the test A zero 0 response indicates that the self test passed A one 1 response indicates that the test failed The failure also generates an error message with additional information on why the test failed When the test completes all waveform segment and segment sequence definitions are deleted and all other commands are set to their RST values Comments Executable when Initiated No e Coupling Group None e RST Condition None 426 Command Reference Chapter 8 WAI WAI causes the Agilent E1445A to wait for all pending operations to complete before executing any further commands If STATus OPC INITiate OFF is set command execution resumes when all commands received prior to the WAI
451. oltages SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage lt voltage_list gt This command stores the first waveform segment into the AFG s segment memory Name the Second Waveform Segment SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt This command names the second waveform segment Set the Second Waveform Segment Size SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine lt ength gt This command defines the size of the selected waveform segment Store the Second Waveform Segment as Voltages SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage lt voltage_list gt This command stores the second waveform segment into the AFG s segment memory Name the Segment Sequence SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect lt name gt This command names the segment sequence The name must be different from any segment names stored in memory Set the Segment Sequence Length SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DEFine lt length gt This command defines the length of the selected segment sequence The length must be equal or greater than the number of the waveform segments stored in memory 94 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter 3 15 16 17 18 Define the Segment Sequence Order SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence lt segment_list gt This command determines the order in which the waveform segments are to be executed The names of each waveform segment to be output must be separated by a comma for example A B C See Sending Segment Sequences on page 114 for more information
452. omments Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands DMC e RST Condition None e Power On Condition No macros are defined Example Query Macro Definition GMC RESTART Queries macro definition 418 Command Reference Chapter 8 IDN LMC Note Comments Comments IDN returns identification information for the Agilent E1445A The response consists of four fields HEWLETT PACKARD E1445A 0 A 01 00 The first two fields identify this instrument as model number E1445A manufactured by Agilent Agilent was spun off from Hewlett Packard in 1999 and firmware will return Hewlett Packard The third field is 0 since the serial number of the Agilent E1445A is unknown to the firmware The last field indicates the revision level of the firmware The firmware revision field will change whenever the firmware is revised A 01 00 is the initial revision The first two digits indicate the major revision number and increment when functional changes are made The last two digits indicate bug fix level e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e RST Condition None e Power On Condition Register is cleared LMC returns a comma separated list of quoted strings each containing the name of a macro If no macros are defined a single null string is returned e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands DMC e RST Condition None e Po
453. on constants 299 300 combined list in signed number format 240 in unsigned number format 245 DAC codes in signed number format 225 240 in unsigned number format 229 245 data 32 bit integer in BASIC 255 using definite length arbitrary blocks 231 234 indefinite length arbitrary blocks 235 238 Transition Filters negative 384 387 431 435 operation status group 435 positive 385 388 431 435 questionable signal status group 431 TRG 426 Triangle Waves doubling frequency 156 generating 65 68 minimum frequency 155 number of waveform points 157 368 polarity 369 Trigger circuitry description 450 gating signals 183 185 lines ECLTrg lt n gt 204 205 361 362 TTLTrg lt n gt 150 151 162 slope setting 395 398 stop triggers external slope 200 sources 199 using 180 182 196 system ABORt command 290 ARM commands 291 297 INITiate command 306 307 528 Agilent E1445A User s Manual Index T continued TRIGger Subsystem 391 402 TRIG STARt COUNt 392 TRIG STARt GATE POLarity 393 TRIG STARt GATE SOURCce 393 TRIG STARt GATE STATe 394 TRIG STARt IMMediate 395 TRIG STARt SLOPe 395 TRIG STARt SOURce 396 TRIG STOP IMMediate 397 TRIG STOP SLOPe 398 TRIG STOP SOURce 398 TRIG SWEep IMMediate 399 TRIG SWEep LINK 400 TRIG SWEep SOURCce 401 TRIG SWEep TIMer 402 Triggering and arming 163 202 a frequency list 193 195 a frequency sweep 190 192 frequency sweeps and list
454. on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A 234 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 Using Indefinite Length Arbitrary Blocks to Transfer Data The AFG can receive DAC codes as Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Data using either the Signed or Unsigned number format This is a much faster method to transfer data than using a comma separated list that was used in Using Signed Data to Generate Waveforms on page 225 and Using Unsigned Data to Generate Waveforms on page 229 The speed is about the same as the method used in Using Definite Length Arbitrary Blocks to Transfer Data on page 231 Indefinite Length A typical data block using the indefinite length format consists of Block Data Format lt 8 bit data bytes gt LF E Start of Data mS Le of Line A 0 Value Data Bytes where e 4 Shows that the data to be sent is in an arbitrary block format e 0 Shows that the format is an indefinite length arbitrary block format the 0 number must be sent since a different number shows the definite length arbitrary block format e lt 8 bit data bytes gt Is the data i e DAC codes sent to the AFG e LF END Means line feed LF sent with END EOI asserted It indicates to the AFG that the end of data has been reached Data Byte Size The DAC codes are transferred to the AFG as 16 bit integer values that meet the coding set by the IEEE 488 2 standard Since IEEE 488 2 requ
455. or Waveform Frequency FREQ 1E3 Sets the frequency to 1000 Hz 322 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey lt frequency1 gt lt frequency2 gt sets the two sample rates or waveform frequencies for frequency shift keying SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey SOURce sets the source which selects between the two sample rates or waveform frequencies A TTL high level on the selected source generates frequency1 a TTL low level generates frequency2 Parameters Parameter Parameter Range o f Default Name Type Values Units lt frequencyl gt numeric see below MINimum MAXimum Hz lt frequency2 gt MINimum selects O Hz Arbitrary Waveforms and Sine Wave Outputs MAXimum selects the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 4 Square Wave Outputs MAXimum selects the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 16 Ramps and Triangle Outputs MAXimum selects the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 4 further divided by the SOURce RAMP POINts value For non sine wave outputs multiply the MAXimum value by 2 if frequency doubling is in effect see the SOURce FREQuency 1 RANGe command The above values bound the legal range for lt frequency1 gt and lt frequency2 gt Comments Executable when Initiated Yes However the frequency being generated will not change until the FSK control source changes levels e Coupling Group Fre
456. or the master AFG waveform Feed the master trigger source to the slave AFG via ECL trigger line ECLTO OUTPUT Afg_m SOUR ROSC SOUR INT15 OUTPUT Afg_m TRIG STAR SOUR INT1 OUTPUT Afg_m SOUR FREQ1 MODE FIXED OUTPUT Afg_m SOUR FREQ1 FIX 4 096E6 OUTPUT Afg_m SOUR FUNC SHAP USER OUTPUT Afg_m SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 1 1V OUTPUT EAfg_m SOUR MARK ECLTO FEED TRIG STAR OUTPUT EAfg_m SOUR MARK ECLTO STAT ON Define the waveform segment and download the amplitude points Define the output waveform sequence OUTPUT Afg_m SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL SIN_X Iselect segment OUTPUT Afg_m SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 4096 lreserve memory OUTPUT Afg_m SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT Waveform lload points OUTPUT Afg_m SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL SINX_M Iselect sequence OUTPUT Afg_m SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Ispecify segments OUTPUT Afg_m SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ SIN_X Isegment order SUBEND SUB Sinx_s Sinx_s Set the trigger source frequency mode function and lamplitude for the slave AFG waveform COM Afg_m Afg_s Waveform OUTPUT Afg_s TRIG STAR SOUR ECLTO OUTPUT Afg_s SOUR FREQ1 MODE FIXED OUTPUT Afg_s SOUR FUNC SHAP USER OUTPUT Afg_s SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 1 1V Define the waveform segment and download the amplitude points Define the output waveform sequence Select the sequence for loutput and place the slave AFG in the Wait for arm state Continued on Next Page 178 Arming an
457. ory data directly driving the main output DAC and providing phase deviations for sine waves OFF The Local Bus interface is disabled Local Bus data is neither used nor passed through PIPeline Local Bus data is passed through and not used Select this mode when data should be transparently passed through the Agilent E1445A Chapter 8 Command Reference 403 VINStrument e With VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE J AUTO ON set the Local Bus Operation mode is automatically set to CONSume when downloading segment or segment sequence data SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload LBUS command directly driving the main output DAC SOURce ARBitrary DAC SOURce LBUS command or providing phase deviation data SOURce PM SOURce LBUS command the mode is set to OFF when none of these are active Executing the VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE command sets VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE AUTO OFF e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce ARBitrary DAC SOURce SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload SOURce PM SOURce VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE AUTO e RST Condition VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE OFF Example Setting the Local Bus Operation Mode VINS CONF LBUS PIP CONFigure LBUS MODE AUTO VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE AUTO lt mode gt indicates whether the VXIbus Local Bus operation mode should be automatically set to CONSume when downloading segment or segmen
458. ple Selecting a Segment Sequence LIST SSEQ SEL ABC Selects segment sequence ABC 356 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence Parameters Comments Example SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence lt segment_list gt defines the ordered sequence of waveform segments that constitute a full waveform The lt segment_list gt is a comma separated list of waveform segment names The waveform segment names must have been previously defined e The maximum length of the segment sequence is 32 768 points By using the SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt command up to 4096 repetitions of a segment sequence name take only one point in the segment sequence memory e Executable when Initiated No e Coupling Group None e RST Condition Unaffected Defining a Segment Sequence LIST SSEQ SEQ A B C Defines segment sequence SSEQuence SEQuence SEGMents Comments Example SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence SEGMents returns a number indicating the length of the currently selected segment sequence s waveform segment list e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e RST Condition None e Power On Condition No segment sequences are defined Query Segment Sequence Length LIST SSEQ SEQ SEGM Queries segment sequence length Chapter 8 Command Reference 357 SOURce LIST2 SOURce LIST2 The SOURce LIST2 subsystem defines the sample rate or frequencies list to be ge
459. ple generation INIT Initiates trigger system TRIG Advances waveform TRIGger STARt SLOPe lt edge gt selects the edge rising or falling at the Agilent E1445A s front panel Ref Sample In BNC to advance the waveform This edge is significant only with TRIGger STARt SOURce set to EXTernal The programmed value is retained but not used when other sources are selected Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt edge gt discrete NEGative POSitive none e Executable when Initiated Query form only e Coupling Group None e Related Commands TRIGger STARt SOURce e RST Condition TRIGger STARt SLOPe POSitive Setting the Start Trigger Slope TRIG SLOP NEG Sets negative trigger slope Chapter 8 Command Reference 395 TRIGger STARt SOURce TRIGger STARt SOURce lt source gt selects the source that advances the waveform to the next sample point Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt source gt discrete BUS ECLTrgO ECLTrg1 none EXTernal HOLD INTernal 1 INTernal2 TTLTrgO through TTLTrg7 Comments The sources available are BUS The Group Execute Trigger GET GPIB command or the IEEE 488 2 TRG common command ECLTrg0 and ECLTrgl The VXIbus ECL trigger lines EXTernal The Agilent E1445A s front panel Ref Sample In BNC connector HOLD Suspends sample generation Use the
460. program FSK2 C is in directory Versions VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A FSK Using an The FSK_ARB program uses frequency shift keying with an arbitrary Arbitra ry Waveform _ waveform to shift between two sample rates The control source is a 5 V signal applied to the AFG s front panel FSK In BNC connector BASIC Program Example FSK_ARB 1 IRE STORE FSK_ARB 2 This program shifts the frequency of an arbitrary waveform 3 Ibased on a control signal applied to the FSK In BNC connector 4 10 Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM Afg 50 Set up error checking 60 ONINTR 7 CALL Errmsg 70 ENABLE INTR 7 2 80 OUTPUT Afg CLS 90 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 100 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 120 Call the subprogram which resets and clears the AFG 130 CALL Rst 140 CALL Wf_del 150 ISet the FSK mode the FSK sample frequencies for 1 kHz and 160 12 kHz output frequencies the FSK source the function and 170 loutput level 180 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 MODE FSK IFSK mode 190 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FSK 4 096E6 8 192E6 Isample frequencies 200 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FSK SOUR EXT IFSK source 210 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER function 220 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 1 1V lamplitude 230 ICall the subprogram which defines the Sin x x waveform and 240 loutput sequence 250 CALL Sinx_def 260 ISelect the output sequence a
461. pter 1 Getting Started 35 Dim Actual As Long Use the SetCommands array to setup the AFG SetCommands 1 SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEL ALL Clear sequence memory SetCommands 2 SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEL ALL Clear segment memory SetCommands 3 SOUR ROSC SOUR INT1 Select the Ref Oscillator SetCommands 3 SetCommands 3 TRIG STAR SOUR INT1 Select the sample source SetCommands 3 SetCommands 3 SOUR FREQ1 FIX 100E3 Set the sample frequency pes oun SetCommands 3 SOUR FUNC SHAP USER Command to select the user unction SetCommands 3 SetCommands 3 SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 1V Set the amplitude SetCommands 4 SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL ramp Define the ramp segment name SetCommands 5 SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 100 Define the segment size Use the OutCommands array to generate output OutCommands 1 SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL ramp_out Define the sequence name as ramp_out OutCommands 2 SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Define the sequence size OutCommands 3 SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ ramp Set the segment execution order OutCommands 4 SOUR FUNC USER ramp_out Define the user name OutCommands 5 INIT IMM Start waveform generation Use SegCommand to store segments SegCommand SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT Command to send volts data Setup the AFG Call CmdExe SetCommands Call sub to check for AFG errors Call CheckError GenSeg SetCommands Gener
462. pulse is output with amplitude point 256 lof the triangle wave ISet up the AFG OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 512E3 lfrequency OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER lfunction OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 1V lamplitude OUTPUT Afg SOUR MARK FEED SOUR LIST1 Imarker source OUTPUT Afg SOUR MARK POL NORM Imarker polarity OUTPUT Afg SOUR MARK STAT ON lenable marker Tri_wave Subprogram which computes a triangle wave and specifies la marker pulse to be output with amplitude point 256 COM Afg DIM Waveform 1 512 FOR l 1 TO 256 Calculate triangle wave Waveform l 1 0195313 NEXT FOR 257 TO 512 Waveform l 512 1 0195313 NEXT Load waveform points and specify a single marker pulse OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL TRI Isegment name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 512 Isegment size OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT Waveform amplitude points OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM MARK SPO 256 Imarker on point 256 SUBEND SUB Seq_list Seq_list This subprogram defines the sequence list and enables la marker signal to be output with the triangle wave Isegment COM Afg OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL WAVE_OUT Isequence name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 2 Inumber of segments OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ SINE TRI Isegments in sequence OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ MARK SPO 2 lenable marker on segment TRI SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program MARKSEG2 FRM is in dir
463. put of the phase accumulator Once the phase has been added it takes 14 reference oscillator clock cycles for the new phase to appear at the output Appendix C Register Based Programming 495 Phase Control The PHAS_CHNG program demonstrates how to change the sine wave Prog ram _ signal phase while the waveform is currently at the AFG output BASIC Program Example PHAS_CHNG 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 IRE STORE PHAS_CHNG This program changes the phase of the output signal by writing Iphase offset data to the phase modulation registers ASSIGN Afg TO 1680 COM Afg Base_addr Call the subprograms which reset the AFG which determine the base laddress of the AFG registers in A24 address space and which set the output function CALL Rst CALL A24_ offset CALL Output_function DISP Press Continue to change the signal phase register writes PAUSE DISP we Call the subprogram which changes the signal phase and pass the new Iphase value CALL Phase_change 180 END SUB A24 offset A24 offset Subprogram which determines the base address for Ithe AFG registers in A24 address space COM Afg Base_addr CONTROL 16 25 2 laccess A16 space with READIO and WRITEIO A16_addr DVAL D400 16 AFG A16 base address Offset READIO 16 A16_addr 6 read AFG offset register Base_addr Offset 256 Ishift offset for 24 bit addr
464. quence repetition query 353 single 343 355 triangle waves 368 versus time 135 137 159 Polarity gating 200 marker signal 364 ramp waves 369 sample gate 393 square waves 369 triangle waves 369 Positive Transition Filter 385 388 Power On Configuration 48 472 474 Preparation For Use 19 Primary GPIB Address 22 Program frequency control 489 494 introductory 46 languages 29 register based 483 508 Program Comments arbitrary waveforms 113 116 arming and triggering 197 201 high speed operation 280 marker outputs 222 multiple AFG operations 222 standard waveforms 78 sweeping and FSK 154 162 Pseudo Noise generating 112 sweeping 141 143 PUD 422 PUD 422 Q QSSG_RQS Example Program 433 434 Query A24 address space offset 407 calibration 298 error queue 389 frequency list length 360 marker list size 222 operation condition register 383 event register 384 parameter settings 287 power on reset configuration 48 questionable signal condition register 386 event register 387 repetition count list length 116 353 SCPI version number 390 segment sequence address 347 combined list 349 list length 357 list names 116 348 marker pulse list 355 memory 353 Agilent E1445A User s Manual Index 521 Q continued Query continued virtual instrument capacity 408 VXIbus local bus test data 406 waveform segment address 336 combined list 338 marker pulse list 343 memory
465. quency FREQ STAR 1 KHZ Sets the starting frequency to 1000 Hz 328 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce FREQuency 1 STOP SOURce FREQuency 1 STOP lt stop_freg gt sets the stopping sample rate or waveform frequency for a frequency swept waveform Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt stop_freq gt numeric see below MINimum MAXimum Hz The legal range for lt stop_freq gt as well as the MINimum and MAXimum values are context dependent See Coupling Rules on page 319 for a description of the coupling between STARt STOP CENTer and SPAN Comments Executable when Initiated Query form only e Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands TRIGger STARt SOURce SOURce FREQuency 1 CENTer MODE RANGe SPAN and STARt SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SOURce ROSCillator commands e RST Condition SOURce FREQuency1 STOP 10 73741824 MHz Example Setting the Stopping Frequency FREQ STOP 1E3 Sets the stopping frequency to 1000 Hz Chapter 8 Command Reference 329 SOURce FREQuency2 SOURce FREQuency2 The SOURce FREQuency2 subsystem controls the second of the Agilent E1445A s two frequency generators SOURce FREQuency 1 controls the first generator This second generator consists of a simple divide by n of the currently selected reference oscillator source where n may be 1 2 3 or any even value between 4 and 131 072 This gene
466. quency e Related Commands TRIGger STARt SOURce SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE SOURce FREQuency 1 RANGe SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SOURce ROSCillator commands e RST Condition SOURce FREQuency1 FSKey 10 kHz 10 MHz Example Setting the Frequency Shift Frequencies FREQ FSK 1E6 1 KHZ Sets 1 MHz and 1 kHz frequencies Chapter 8 Command Reference 323 SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey SOURce SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey SOURce lt source gt sets the source which will control which of the two FSKey sample rates or waveform frequencies is generated when SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE FSKey is selected A high level on the source selects SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey lt frequency gt a low level selects lt frequency2 gt Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt source gt discrete EXTernal TTLTrgO through none TTLTrg7 Comments The available sources are EXTernal The Agilent E1445A s front panel Stop Trig FSK Gate In BNC connector TTLTrg0 through TTLTrg7 The VXIbus TTL trigger lines e The front panel s Stop Trig FSK Gate In BNC is a three use connector for FSK control as a stop trigger source or as a sample gate source Only one of these uses may be active at any time e Ifa VXIbus TTLTrg trigger line is used for FSK control then no TTLTrg trigger lines can be used as a stop trigger source or as a sample gate source e Executable when I
467. quency arbitrary waveform 160 changing 487 impedance setting 69 71 309 leveling AC 144 146 160 161 loads comments 79 selecting 69 71 310 311 marker 203 222 program comments 222 pulse 342 343 354 355 offset voltage 380 relay 311 units comments 80 selecting 72 74 voltage waveform segment 337 338 345 347 waveforms 86 87 suspending 183 OUTPut 1 Subsystem 308 311 OUTP FILT LPAS FREQ 308 OUTP FILT LPAS STAT 309 OUTP IMPedance 309 OUTP LOAD 310 OUTP LOAD AUTO 311 OUTP STATe 311 520 Agilent E1445A User s Manual Index P PACKed Data Format 335 Parameters arbitrary block 286 boolean 286 discrete 286 MAXimun using 81 MINimum using 81 numeric 286 optional 287 query settings 287 SCPI commands 286 287 Password changing 302 PHAS_CHNG Example Program 496 497 Phase control program 496 497 registers 495 increment registers 487 load strobe register 495 Phase Modulation 75 commands 365 367 data source 366 default units 367 deviation 76 365 enabling disabling 367 registers 495 selecting deviation units 80 365 using 75 77 PHS_MOD Example Program 76 77 Pinout digital port in connector 278 279 plug amp play See VXIplug amp play Online Help PM See Phase Modulation PMC 421 Points combined list length query 338 349 frequency sweep 374 marker pulse list length query 343 355 output voltage 345 347 list length query 347 ramp waves 368 segment se
468. quest bit 480 B SPOLL Afg 490 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 500 OUTPUT Afg 510 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 520 REPEAT 530 OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 540 ENTER Afg Code Message 550 PRINT Code Message 560 UNTIL Code 0 570 STOP 580 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program PHS_MOD FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program PHS_MOD C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A Chapter 2 Generating Standard Waveforms 77 Standard Waveform Program Comments The following comments give additional details on the program examples in this chapter i i i e sinusoid requires that the sample source see Sample Sources below is Sinusoid Function Th d requires that the sampl see Sample S below Requirements set to INTernal 1 that is TRIGger STARt SOURce INTernal 1 This selects the DDS frequency generator No other sample source can generate a sinewave Reference e The SINusoid SQUare TRlangle and RAMP functions can use any Oscillator Sources of the reference oscillator sources The sources selected by SOURce JROSCillator SOURce are INTernal 1 42 94967296 MHz power on value INTernal2 40 MHz CLK10 10 MHz the VXIbus CLK line EXTernal User provided value the front panel Ref Smpl In BNC ECLTrg0 or 1 User provided v
469. r 1 kHz to 10 73741824 MHz 0 2 dB These flatness values are achieved by active compensation for filter frequency response in sine wave mode only and do not imply dynamic characteristics of arbitrary waveforms Appendix A Agilent E1445A Specifications 457 Sine Wave Spectral Purity Output frequencies less than 250 kHz are characterized using the 250 kHz filter higher output frequencies with the 10 MHz filter Frequencies given below refer to the desired output sine wave fc Total Harmonic Distortion through 9th harmonic 10 Hz 250 kHz 60 dBc 250 kHz 4 MHz 60 20 logio fc 250k dBc 4 MHz 10 MHz 36 dBc Nonharmonic Spurious and Clock Components to 150 MHz 10 Hz 1 MHz the greater of 60 dBc or 60 dBm 1 MHz 4 MHz 50dBc 4 MHz 10 MHz 45 dBc Arbitrary Waveforms includes square triangle and ramp waveforms DAC Full Scale into 50 Q or 75 Q 0 16187 to 5 11875 volts into open circuit 0 32374 to 10 2375 volts The output voltage corresponding to DAC full scale can be adjusted over the indicated 30 dB range with resolution equivalent to steps of 0 01 dB DC Accuracy 0 9 of setting add for each C beyond Tcal 5 0 05 of setting Add DC Offset see below Step Response no filter typical Rise Fall Time 10 90 17 nsec Precursors Overshoot lt 1 Slew Rate no filter typical into 50 Q 750 V us into open circuit 1470 V us DC Offset Resolution 12 bits including sign Limit
470. r 1 bit user programmable Size 262144 256K 1K 1024 Segment Length from gt 4 points to 262 144 points Number of Segments 1 to 256 System Use while one of the following waveforms is selected Square 4 points Triangle Ramp 100 points default number unless changed by user Appendix A Agilent E1445A Specifications 453 Sequence Memory This memory concatenates segments into larger waveforms Size Sequence Length Number of Sequences 32768 entries 1 to 32768 entries 1 to 128 Contents of Each Entry Designator of which segment to output Loop Count times to repeat the designated segment 1 to 4096 default 1 Marker Enable Bit a mask default enabled for the System Use Frequency and Sample Rate Characteristics Tolerances Aging rate is 20 ppm year Arbitrary Waveform Sample Rates 40MSa s Frequency Generator 1 Internal Reference Rate Generation Method Basic Range Minimum Maximum Resolution Jitter Extended Range Minimum Maximum Resolution Jitter Pertinent SCPI Commands Frequency Agility see page 456 Recommendation marker data in the specified segment When square triangle or ramp waveform is selected one entry is used All internally generated frequencies and rates are 0 005 initial tolerance Maximum arbitrary waveform sample rate internal or external rate Sa s Samples per second 42 94967296 MHz
471. r CALL A24_ offset END SUB A24 offset A24 offset Subprogram which determines the base address for Ithe AFG registers in A24 address space COM Afg Base_addr CONTROL 16 25 2 access A16 space with READIO and WRITEIO A16_addr DVAL D400 16 Iconvert A16 base address to decimal number Offset READIO 16 A16_addr 6 read AFG offset register Base_addr Offset 256 Imultiply offset for 24 bit address SUBEND As mentioned multiplying the value of the Offset Register by 256 or 10016 converts the 16 bit register value to a 24 bit address 486 Register Based Programming Appendix C Changing the Output Frequency This section explains how the frequency of the output signal is changed instantaneously by writing frequency codes to the appropriate registers The section shows how to change the frequency when either the direct digital synthesis SOURce FREQuency 1 or divide by n SOURce FREQuency2 frequency synthesis method is used The Frequency The following Frequency Control Registers are used to change the output Control Registers frequency generated with the direct digital synthesis DDS and divide by n methods e Phase Increment Registers DDS base_addr A716 through base_addr A116 e Frequency Load Strobe Register DDS base_addr 8D16 e Sample Hold and ROSC N Control Register DIV N base_addr 6316 e ROSC N Divider Registers DIV N base_addr 7D16 through base_addr 7F16 The Phase Increment Phase In
472. r each point of a waveform segment Arbitrary Generated Marker Pulses To generate marker pulses for arbitrary waveforms do the following e Select the SOURce LIST 1 source for the front panel Marker Out BNC connector using SOURce MARKer FEED SOURce LIST 1 e Select the marker pulse polarity using SOURce MARKer POL arity lt polarity gt e Enable the AFG to output a marker list using SOURce MARKer STATe lt mode gt e Define a marker list in a waveform segment using SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer lt marker_list gt or SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer SPOint lt point gt e Enable the waveform segment in a segment sequence to output the marker list using SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer lt marker_list gt or SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer SPOint lt point gt Ge nerating Marker The following programs show how to generate the marker pulses using two Pulses for Arbitrary different methods The two methods are Waveforms 1 SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer defines for each point in a waveform segment where a marker is to be output Likewise SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer enables or disables marker outputs for each waveform segment in a segment sequence 2 SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer SPOint defines a single segment or point in a waveform segment where the marker pulse is to be output Likewise SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer SPOint enables a marker output for a sing
473. r the AFG Memory of All Sequence Data SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete ALL This command clears all segment sequence data stored in the sequence memory 3 Clear the AFG Memory of All Segment Data SOURce LIST 1 DELete ALL This command clears all segment data stored in the segment memory Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 99 4 Select the Reference Oscillator SOURce JROSCillator SOURce INTernal 1 This command selects the 42 9 MHz Internal 1 reference oscillator source to be used with the DDS frequency generator see Reference Oscillator Sources on page 115 Although RST selects the 42 9 MHz reference oscillator it is selected here for good programming practice If you wish to use the Divide by N frequency generator use SOURce JROSCillator SOURce INTernal2 5 Select the Sample Source TRIGger STARt SOURce INTernal 1 This command selects the sample source for the DDS generator that is trigger start source INTernal 1 Although RST selects this trigger start source it is selected here for good programming practice The USER that is arbitrary waveform function can use any of the trigger start sources see Sample Sources on page 115 If you wish to use the Divide by N generator use TRIGger STARt SOURce INTernal2 6 Set the Sample Frequency Range SOURce FREQuency 1 RANGe lt range gt This command specifies the upper sample frequency limit see Frequencyl Generator Range on page 11
474. r trigger state Or a trigger was received from a source other than the specified source 212 Arm ignored Arm was received and the AFG was not in the wait for arm state Or an arm was received from a source other than the specified source 213 Init ignored INITiate IMMediate received while the AFG was currently initiated 221 Settings conflict See Settings Conflict Error Messages at the end of this table 222 Data out of range Parameter value is out of range for any AFG configuration e g SOUR FREQ1 FIX 1E9 224 Illegal parameter value The calibration security code required to disable calibration security does not match the stored code 241 Hardware missing Command was intended for the Agilent E1446A which was not present or is outside the servant area of the Agilent E1445A AFG 270 Macro error RMC lt name gt was executed and name is not defined 272 Macro execution error Macro program data sequence could not be executed due to a syntax error within the macro definition 273 Illegal macro label The macro label defined in the DMC command was too long the same as a common command keyword or contained invalid header syntax 276 Macro recursion error A macro program data sequence could not be executed because the sequence leads to the execution of a macro being defined 277 Macro redefinition not allowed A macro label in the DMC command could not be executed because the macro label was already defined
475. rated by the direct Idigital synthesis DDS method by writing frequency value data to Ithe AFG s Phase Increment registers ASSIGN Afg TO 1680 COM Afg Base_addr Call the subprograms which reset the AFG which determine the base laddress of the AFG registers in A24 address space and which set the output function CALL Rst CALL A24_ offset CALL Output_function DISP Press Continue to change frequency register writes PAUSE DISP Call the subprogram which changes the output frequency and pass the Ifrequency the number of waveform points the reference oscillator lfrequency and the frequency range SOUR FREQ1 RANGe command Note sine waves and arb waves npts 1 square waves npts 4 Iramp triangle waves npts RAMP POINts value CALL Freg_change 2000 1 4 294967296E 7 0 END SUB A24 offset A24 offset Subprogram which determines the base address for Ithe AFG registers in A24 address space COM Afg Base_addr CONTROL 16 25 2 access A16 space with READIO and WRITEIO A16_addr DVAL D400 16 AFG A16 base address Offset READIO 16 A16_addr 6 read AFG offset register Base_addr Offset 256 shift offset for 24 bit address SUBEND SUB Output_function Continued on Next Page Appendix C Register Based Programming 489 340 Output function ISubprogram which uses SCPI commands to set the 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 5
476. rated list that was used in Using Signed Data to Generate Waveforms on page 225 and Using Unsigned Data to Generate Waveforms on page 229 The speed is about the same as the method used in Using Indefinite Length Arbitrary Blocks to Transfer Data on page 235 Definite Le ngth A typical data block using the definite length format consists of Block Data Format E zero digit gt lt digits gt lt 8 bit dat ioe Start of Data Block L Data Bytes Number of Digits in digits Number of Bytes in Data where e Shows that the data to be sent is in an arbitrary block format e lt non zero digit gt is a single digit number that shows the number of digits contained in lt digits gt for example if the lt digits gt value equals 100 or 2000 the lt non zero digit gt value equals 3 or 4 respectively e lt digits gt Shows the number of data bytes to be sent for example if 100 data bytes are to be sent lt digits gt equals 100 see Data Byte Size below e lt 8 bit data bytes gt Is the data 1 e DAC codes sent to the AFG A typical example of a data block sending 2000 8 bit data bytes is 42000 lt data bytes gt Data Byte Size The DAC codes are transferred to the AFG as 16 bit integer values that meet the coding set by the IEEE 488 2 standard Since IEEE 488 2 requires an 8 bit code the 16 bit integer must be sent as 2 8 bit values for each 16 bit integer
477. rates an immediate output with the arm source set to IMMediate Refer to Chapter 5 for triggering information Query the Segment Memory Optional SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent FREE This command returns the amount of segment memory remaining first number in the AFG and the amount of memory used second number Query the Segment Sequence Memory Optional SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence FREE This command returns the amount of segment memory remaining in the AFG the first number and the amount of memory used the second number 90 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter 3 BASIC Program Example ARBWAVE 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 IRE STORE ARBWAVE This program demonstrates the procedure for developing and loutputting an arbitrary waveform Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg Seg_mem 256 Seq_mem 256 Set up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 ICall the subprograms CALL Rst CALL Wf_del OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 100E3 lfrequency OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER function OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 1V lamplitude CALL Ramp_wave OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER RAMP_OUT lwaveform sequence OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state PRINT Segment memory po
478. rator has better phase noise characteristics and permits higher frequency operation than the direct digital synthesis NCO technique used by the first generator The first generator has finer resolution and frequency sweeping capability Also sine wave output is possible only with the first generator Either generator may be used for square ramp triangle and arbitrary waveform output The values programmed by this subsystem are only used when TRIGger STARt SOURce is set to INTernal2 Subsystem Syntax SOURce FREQuency2 CW FlXed lt frequency gt 330 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce FREQuency2 CW FIXed SOURce FREQuency2 CW FlXed lt frequency gt selects the sample rate for arbitrary waveforms or the frequency for the standard waveforms square ramp triangle Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt frequency gt numeric see below MINimum MAXimum Hz Arbitrary Waveforms MINimum selects the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 131 072 MAXimum selects the current reference oscillator frequency Square Wave Outputs MINimum selects the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 524 288 MAXimum selects the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 4 Ramps and Triangles Outputs MINimum selects the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 131 072 further divided by the SOURce RAMP POINts value MAXimum select
479. rees to 180 degrees Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg Set up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 Call the subprograms CALL Rst CALL Phase_mod WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END Continued on Next Page 76 Generating Standard Waveforms Chapter 2 190 200 SUB Phase_mod 210 Phase_mode Subprogram which outputs a sine wave 220 COM Afg 230 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 60 lfrequency 240 OUTPUT Afg SOUR PM SOUR INT phase modulation source 250 OUTPUT Afg SOUR PM STAT ON lenable phase modulation 260 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN lfunction 270 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5V lamplitude 280 OUTPUT Afg SOUR PM DEV ODEG Iphase modulation 290 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state 300 DISP Press Continue to shift phase 180 degrees 310 PAUSE 320 OUTPUT Afg SOUR PM DEV 180DEG Ishift phase 180 degrees 330 DISP 340 SUBEND 350 360 SUB Rst 370 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 380 COM Afg 390 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 400 ENTER Afg Complete 410 SUBEND 420 430 SUB Errmsg 440 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 450 COM Afg 460 DIM Message 256 470 Read AFG status byte register and clear service re
480. requency in the frequency list when SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE LIST is set INITiate IMMediate no query INITiate IMMediate initiates the trigger system and places all trigger sequences in the wait for arm or wait for trigger state as appropriate Waveform generation begins when the next start arm is received When ARM STARt LAYer2 COUNt full arm cycles complete the trigger system returns to the idle state and waveform generation halts This command is an overlapped command as described by IEEE 488 2 Section 12 The exit from the idle state caused by INITiate IMMediate shall cause its Pending Operation Flag to be set true This Pending Operation Flag will be set false when the idle state is re entered either when the trigger cycle completes or when an ABORT or RST command is executed The STATus OPC INITiate command controls whether OPC OPC and WAI will test the Pending Operation Flag and wait until it is false trigger system in the idle state 306 Command Reference Chapter 8 INITiate Comments Use the ABORt command to prematurely halt the waveform generation and place Example the trigger system in the idle state e Waveform output begins immediately if ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce IMMediate is set e Executing this command when SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe DC is set when SOURce ARBitrary DAC SOURCe is not set to INTernal or the trigger system is not in the idle state Error 213 Init ignored is generated
481. requency point is output for the same length of time as all other points The SWEep TIME value is the time from the start of the sweep or list until the last frequency begins to be output and does not include the time for the last frequency point Therefore if a specific sweep repetition time is desired SWEep TIME should be set according to the following equation SWEep TIME time points 1 points Thus to set a repetition time of 1 S for a 5 point sweep SWEep TIME should be set to 8 S e Executable when Initiated Query form only e Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands SOURce LIST2 FREQuency SOURce SWEep POINts TRIGger SWEep SOURce TRIGger SWEep TIMer e RST Condition SOURce SWEep TIME 1 Example Setting the Duration of the Sweep SWE TIME 10 Sets sweep to take 10 seconds 376 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce VOLTage SOURce VOLTage Subsystem Syntax The SOURce VOLTage subsystem controls the amplitude and offset values for all output waveform shapes SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt UNIT VOLTage lt units gt OFFSet lt offset gt LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt sets the output amplitude when SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe is set to DC RAMP SINusoid SQUare or TRlangle It sets the positive full scale output amplitude for arbitrary waveforms SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe USER
482. revious commands Generate Download and Store the First Waveform Segment as a Combined Signed List This step stores the Combined waveform segment into segment memory using the Signed number format set by the SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat SIGNed command The command or downloading method used depends on the device that downloads the data For example the device may be an embedded controller You can also use the command module like the E1406A Command Module but at a slower data transfer rate Be sure to the last point bit at the appropriate point on the waveform Notify the AFG that Downloading is Completed SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload COMPlete Send this command to the AFG after all data is downloaded Setup the Second Combined Segment List SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine lt length gt Select the Download Source for the Second Segment List SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload lt source gt lt dest gt lt length gt This command selects the source used to download DAC data into segment memory see DAC Sources on page 280 The lt source gt parameter selects the download source lt dest gt contains the name of the waveform segment to be downloaded and lt length gt contains the size of the waveform segment in number of points i e the same size set in SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine lt length gt Place the AFG Into Hold Until All Commands are Executed OPC This co
483. rial poll SPOLL does clear bit 6 All bits in the Status Byte Register with the exception of MAV are cleared with the command CLS CLS also aborts the current waveform MAV is cleared when data is read from the output queue 442 AFG Status Chapter 9 The Service Request Enable Register Presetting the Enable Register and Transition Filter The Service Request Enable Register specifies which status group summary bit s will send a service request message to the computer over GPIB The bits are specified unmasked with the command SRE lt unmask gt All unmasked bits in the Enable Register can be determined with the command SRE The Service Request Enable Register is cleared at power on or by specifying an lt unmask gt value of 0 The Enable Registers and Transition Filters in the Questionable Signal and Operation Status Groups can be preset initialized with the command STATus PRESet All bits in the Enable Registers are masked i e lt unmask gt is 0 and all bits in the Condition Registers set corresponding bits in the Event Registers on positive 0 to 1 transitions Chapter 9 AFG Status 443 Notes 444 AFG Status Chapter 9 Chapter Contents AFG Description Chapter 10 Block Diagram Description This chapter shows how the Agilent E1445A 13 Bit Arbitrary Function Generator AFG operates The sections are as follows e AFG Description scs seceru sie neveti eee eee Pag
484. rker and defines the repetition count for the segment lists Reserved Unused 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 2 Jao a8 76 15 4 31 2 1 iro 9 8 716 5 4 3 2 1 Jol 12 Bit Code that sets the Address of the Segment segment repetition count List in Memory 17 Bits Marker Enable Bit Figure 7 2 Combined Sequence List Format 250 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 Selecting the To select a waveform segment determine the address of the waveform Waveform Segments segment and include the address in the Combined Sequence List Do the following to determine the address 1 Select the Waveform Segment Use the SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt command where lt name gt is the name of the waveform segment to be output 2 Get the Selected Waveform Segment Address Use the SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent ADDRess query command to get the address The address is the start location of the waveform segment in segment memory To use the returned value in the Combined Sequence List divide the returned value by 8 For example if the returned value is 2048 the actual address is 2048 8 256 This is necessary due to the hardware requirements of the AFG 3 Add the Address to a Data Value in the Combined Segment Sequence List Selecting the To select the marker enable add the value of bit 18 to the Data Byte in the Marker Enable Combined Segment Sequence List Selecting the Bits 20 through 31 select the repetition cou
485. rm segment and or marker bit of an arbitrary waveform into the AFG s segment memory The list is stored in the Unsigned number format The data is transferred to the AFG using the Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Data method The example generates a 200 point 5 V to 5 V negative going ramp Chan A applied to AFG s Output Terminal Chan B applied to AFG s Marker Out Terminal Chan A 5V DIV Chan B 5V DIV Output applied to a 50 load value 2 msec DIV A marker is output at the zero crossing or center of the ramp 246 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 The commands are the same ones listed on page 241 except on how to select the Unsigned format and how to generate the data These exceptions are as follows 5 Select the DAC Data Format SOURce JARBitrary DAC FORMat UNSigned This command selects the UNSigned data number format 8 Store the Waveform Segment as Combined Signed DAC Data SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined lt combined_list gt This command stores the waveform segment into segment memory in the Unsigned format set by the SOURce JARBitrary DAC FORMat UNSigned command The data is sent as a comma separated combined list with the marker bit selected BASIC Program Example COMBUNS 150 160 170 The COMBUNS program is similar to the COMBSIGN program on page 242 The only differences are that this program generates and transfers
486. rm Segment Names LIST CAT Catalog waveform segments 336 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined Parameters Comments SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined lt combined_list gt defines in one step both the output voltage and marker pulse lists that constitute a waveform segment The lt combined_list gt may be either a comma separated list of values or an TEEE 488 2 definite or indefinite length block containing the values in 16 bit integer format Each value has the following format Bits 15 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 DAC code unused marker reserved The DAC code is a 13 bit two s complement or unsigned number see the SOURce JARBitrary DAC FORMat command With SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude 5 11875 V set and a matched output load the least significant bit LSB represents 1 25 mV If the marker bit is 1 a marker pulse will be output with this point if the marker bit in the segment sequence memory location generating this segment is also a 1 MINimum and MAXimum cannot be used with this command e If the comma separated list of values format is used the values must be in two s complement format i e values should range from 32768 to 32767 If block format is used the most significant byte of each value must be sent first e The combined list must be at least four points long but no longer than the reserved length specified by SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent
487. rmat unsigned OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL RAMP segment name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 200 Isegment size OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT DAC 0 OUTPUT Afg1 Waveform OUTPUT Afg CHR 10 END lterminate with line feed LF and EOI OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL RAMP_OUT sequence name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Isequence size OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ RAMP Isegment order SUBEND SUB Rst Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 COM Afg Afg1 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Wf_del Wf_del Subprogram which deletes all sequences and segments COM Afg Afg1 OUTPUT Afg FUNC USER NONE Iselect no sequences OUTPUT Afg LIST SSEQ DEL ALL IClear sequence memory OUTPUT Afg LIST SEGM DEL ALL IClear segment memory SUBEND SUB Errmsg Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors COM Afg Afg1 DIM Message 256 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg Continued on Next Page Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 237 760 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 770 REPEAT 780 OUTPUT OAfg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 790 ENTER Afg Code Message 800 PRINT Code Message 810 UNTIL Code 0 820 STOP 830 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program DACBLOK2 FRM is in directory Visual C C Pro
488. rms Page 225 Using the Signed Number Format Page 225 e Using Unsigned Data to Generate Waveforms Page 229 Using the Unsigned Number Format Page 229 e Using Definite Length Arbitrary Blocks to Transfer Datar sc cites is PEASE een eh ae Page 231 Definite Length Block Data Format Page 231 Data Byte SIZE 0 wa dark ia eer ee ate eee Page 231 e Using Indefinite Length Arbitrary Blocks to Transfer Dita Oso tae at a vrei ed tech oh Satara Page 235 Indefinite Length Block Data Format Page 235 Data Byte Size wi eco kee en gs bee BE Sees oe hoes Page 235 e Using Combined Signed Data 0 Page 239 Combined Segment List Format Page 239 Using the Combined List with the Signed Number Format srame ass er Mot ah are ils Seve E Go ES Page 240 e Using Combined Unsigned Data Page 245 Using the Combined List with the Unsigned Number Eo rt ae Page 245 e Using Combined Waveform Segments and Segment SEQUENCE Ses rta atar Page 250 Combined Segment Sequence List Format Page 250 e Using the VXIbus Backplane 0 0 Page 259 Downloading Segment Data 040 Page 259 Downloading Segment Data into Memory Page 259 Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 223 Downloading Data Directly into the DAC Page
489. rogram 184 185 Gating and signal phase 200 disabling 394 enabling 200 394 polarity 200 393 sources 200 393 trigger signals 183 185 using 196 Generating arbitrary wave ramp Visual BASIC program 33 39 arbitrary wave ramp Visual C C program 41 45 arbitrary waveforms 83 116 damped sine waves 107 108 description 86 87 exponential charge discharge waveform 108 109 half rectified sine waves 111 noise 112 non sinusoid 447 sample programs 104 109 111 112 sample rate 331 simple 88 92 sin x x 105 106 spiked sine waves 109 with different frequency generators 99 102 104 with different waveform segments 93 98 with single waveform segment 88 92 DC voltages 56 57 exponential charge discharge waveform 108 109 marker pulses arbitrary waveforms 206 each waveform point 214 217 multiple 207 211 single 212 213 noise 112 ramp waves 65 68 sine waves 51 58 60 450 damped 107 108 half rectified 111 spiked 109 square waves 61 64 standard waveforms 53 82 frequencies 331 phase modulation data sources 366 default angle units 367 disabling 367 enabling 367 selecting deviation units 80 365 using 75 77 Agilent E1445A User s Manual Index 517 G continued Generating continued ramp waves 65 68 selecting amplitude levels 72 74 selecting output loads 69 71 selecting output units 72 74 sine waves 58 60 square waves 61 64 triangle waves 65 68 triangle waves 65 68 wavefor
490. rogram changes the output waveform sequence once the AFG has been 3 INITiated by writing the location of a sequence s base address to the 4 Waveform Select register All register reads and writes are 16 bit 5 10 Assign an I O path between the computer and the AFG 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 1680 30 ASSIGN Afg1 TO 1680 FORMAT OFF Ipath for binary data 40 COM Afg Afg1 Base_addr Seq1_addr Seq2_addr Seq3_addr 50 60 ISubprograms which reset the AFG and erase all existing waveforms 70 CALL Rst 80 CALL Wf_del 90 100 ISCPI commands which configure the AFG 110 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 4 096E6 Sample rate 120 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER lfunction 130 OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 2 1V lamplitude 140 OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC SOUR INT Idac data source 150 OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC FORM SIGN Idac data format 160 170 ISubprograms which define waveforms and load them into segment 180 land sequence memory which determine the AFG s register locations 190 lin A24 and which configure the AFG s sequence base memory 200 CALL Waveform_def 210 CALL A24_ offset 220 CALL Build_ram 230 240 ISelect an output sequence and initiate start waveform output 250 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER SEQ1 lwaveform sequence 260 OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state 270 280 ISubprogram which changes the output sequence with register writes 290 CALL Wave_change 300 END 310 320 SUB Waveform _def 330 COM Af
491. rol source FSK_ARB kl Frequency shift keying of an arbitrary waveform Arming and EXT_ARM BASIC Visual BASIC Arming the AFG with a signal applied to the Start Arm In Triggering Visual C C BNC Chapter 5 BURST 5 cycle burst for each external arm DIV_N 10 MHZ using the frequency2 generator LOCKSTEP d Triggering Two AFGs with a common trigger signal STOPTRIG s Aborting a cycle count using stop triggers GATE E Gating the output on and off SWP_TRIG H Arming and triggering a sweep using group execute trigger SWP_STEP Arming and triggering a sweep LIST_STP y Arming and triggering a frequency list Marker Outputs MARKSEG1 BASIC Visual BASIC Outputting marker pulses with selected amplitude points Visual C C Chapter 6 MARKSEG2 ll Outputting a single marker pulse MARKTRG E Outputting a marker pulse with each amplitude point DRIFT Two AFGs using the same reference osc Appendix B Useful Tables 465 Table B 1 Agilent E1445A Example Program Listing continued Program Type Program Name Language Description High Speed SIGN_DAT BASIC Visual BASIC Downloads arbitrary waveform data as signed DAC Data Visual C C codes Transfer UNS_DAT E Downloads arbitrary waveform data as unsigned DAC Chapter 7 codes DACBLOK1 if Downloads arbitrary waveform data as signed DAC codes in a definite length block DACBLOK2 ll Downloads arbitrary waveform data as unsigned DAC codes in an ind
492. rom 10 MHz by more than 1 420 COM Afg 430 Read Status Byte Register and clear service request bit RQS 440 B SPOLL Afg 450 LOOP 460 DISP Output frequency error 470 WAIT 1 480 DISP 490 WAIT 1 500 END LOOP 510 SUBEND 520 530 SUB Rst 540 Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 550 COM Afg 560 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG 570 ENTER Afg Complete 580 SUBEND Comments e This program runs continuously until a frequency change greater than 1 occurs between the programmed frequency and the output frequency Resetting the computer stops the program e Clearing the Questionable Signal Event Register line 130 allows new events to be latched into the Register Clearing the service request bit bit 6 RQS in the Status Byte Register line 440 when the interrupt is serviced allows the bit to be set again when the next summary bit is received Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program QSSG_RQS FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program QSSG_RQS C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A 434 AFG Status Chapter 9 The Operation Status Group The Condition Register The Operation Status Group monitors current operating conditions within the AFG The specific conditions include calibrating sweeping entering the wait for arm state and execution of the INITiate MMediate command Calibration sweep
493. ry DAC SOURce SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload SOURce PM SOURce e RST Condition The VXI data transfer bus is not active Querying the A24 Address Space Offset LIST SEL ABC DEF 100 Creates waveform segment ARB DOWN VXI ABC 100 Starts download to segment VINS VME REC ADDR DATA Queries A24 offset for data writes CONFigure VME RECeive ADDRess READy Comments VINStrument CONFigure VME RECeive ADDRess READy returns two values A24 112 A24 indicates that the Agilent E1445A s A24 address space when writing waveform segment segment sequence DAC or phase deviation data and 112 is the offset into the A24 address space to be checked Actually this indicated Status Register need never be checked The Agilent E1445A will always handshake any data written to it however the data will be ignored if none of the above operations are active Nevertheless bit 1 of the Status Register indicates whether the Agilent E1445A is in the initiated state or the idle state 1 indicates initiated 0 indicates idle This may useful when writing DAC and phase deviation data as it can be checked to indicate when these types of data will be ignored e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce ARBitrary DAC SOURce SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload SOURce PM SOURce Chapter 8 Command Reference 407 VINStrument Example IDENtity Comments Example e RST Condition None Querying the A24 A
494. s 186 189 immediately 201 program comments 197 201 commands 172 391 402 the AFG 172 185 TRIWAVE Example Program 67 68 TST 46 426 TTLTrg lt n gt control source 150 151 functions 460 trigger lines driving the 162 oes A A lee rora U UNS_DAT Example Program 230 Unsigned data combined 245 249 generating waveforms with 229 230 number format 229 245 Useful Tables 463 482 amplitude limits 471 command coupling groups 467 469 error messages 475 479 settings conflict 480 482 example program listing 464 466 frequency limits 470 power on reset configuration 472 474 Using ABORt 196 Agilent E1446A with AFG 23 arbitrary blocks 130 132 definite length 231 234 indefinite length 235 238 arbitrary waveforms 152 153 combined waveform segments 250 258 sequences 250 258 DAC codes to send data 114 different frequency generators 99 102 104 digital port in connector 272 279 divide by n frequency generator 174 175 embedded controller 23 FSK control source 147 149 gating 196 maximum parameters 81 minimum parameters 81 operation status group 436 437 phase modulation 75 77 80 365 367 questionable signal status group 432 434 signed data combined 239 244 number format 225 228 240 to generate waveforms 225 228 standard event status group 440 441 start and span frequencies 127 129 stop frequencies 121 123 stop triggers 180 182 196 TTLTrgn control source 150 151 unsig
495. s 250 258 sequences using 250 258 signed data using 239 244 unsigned data using 245 249 waveform segment list format 259 COMBSEQ Example Program 255 258 COMBSIGN Example Program 242 244 COMBUNS Example Program 247 249 Command Module GPIB port address 22 Command Reference 281 312 ABORt subsystem 290 ARM subsystem 291 297 CALibration subsystem 298 305 CLS 47 416 DMC 416 EMC 417 EMC 417 ESE 417 ESE 417 ESR 418 GMC 418 IDN 419 INITiate subsystem 306 307 LMC 419 LRN 48 420 OPC 420 OPC 421 OUTPut 1 subsystem 308 311 PMC 421 PUD 422 PUD 422 RCL 423 RMC 423 RST 47 424 SAV 424 SOURce SOURce SOURce SOURce SOURce SOURce SOURce SOURce SOURce SOURce subsystem 312 380 ARBitrary subsystem 313 318 FREQuency 1 subsystem 319 329 FREQuency2 subsystem 330 331 FUNCtion subsystem 332 333 LIST 1 subsystem 334 357 LIST2 subsystem 358 360 MARKer subsystem 361 364 PM subsystem 365 367 RAMP subsystem 368 369 RA A OS SOURce ROSCillator subsystem 370 371 SOURce SWEep subsystem 372 376 SOURce VOLTage subsystem 377 380 SRE 425 SRE 425 STATus subsystem 381 388 STB 426 SYSTem subsystem 389 390 TRG 426 TRIGger subsystem 391 402 TST 46 426 VINStrument subsystem 403 408 WAI 427 Commander assigning AFG to 21 Commands ABORt 290 arbitrary waveform generation 84 85 ARM 291 297 arming
496. s CALL Rst CALL Swp_levi WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB Swp_levl Swp_levl Subprogram which sets output leveling for sweeping from 10 TO 10 MHz COM Afg OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 MODE SWE OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 STAR 0 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 STOP 10E6 OUTPUT Afg SOUR SWE COUN INF OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 V OUTPUT Afg OUTP1 FILT LPAS FREQ 10 MHZ OUTPUT Afg OUTP1 FILT LPAS STAT ON OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM SUBEND SUB Rst Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 COM Afg OUTPUT Afg RST OPC ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Errmsg Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors COM Afg Continued on Next Page Isweep mode Istart frequency Istop frequency Isweep count function lamplitude tfilter cutoff frequency lenable output filter Iwait for arm state lreset the AFG Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 145 450 DIM Message 256 460 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 470 B SPOLL Afg 480 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 490 OUTPUT Afg 500 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 510 REPEAT 520 OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR lread AFG error queue 530 ENTER Afg Code Message 540 PRINT Code Message 550 UNTIL Code 0 560 STOP 570 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program SWP
497. s the current reference oscillator frequency divided by the SOURce RAMP POINts value The above values bound the valid range for lt frequency gt The lt frequency gt value is rounded to the nearest frequency that can be produced using the divide by n technique of this generator Comments If the actual frequency generated differs from the specified frequency by greater than 1 the Frequency bit of the Questionable Signal Status Register will be set See the STATus subsystem for more information e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands TRIGger STARt SOURce SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SOURce ROSCillator commands STATus subsystem e RST Condition SOURce FREQuency2 FlXed 10E3 Example Setting the Sample Rate or Waveform Frequency FREQ2 1E3 Sets frequency to 1000 Hz Chapter 8 Command Reference 331 SOURce FUNCtion SOURce FUNCtion The SOURce FUNCtion subsystem controls what waveform shape arbitrary sinusoid etc the Agilent E1445A generates For arbitrary waveforms generation the subsystem controls which of the 128 possible segment sequences are selected Subsystem Syntax SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe lt shape gt USER lt name gt SHAPe SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe lt shape gt selects what waveform shape the Agilent E1445A generates Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt shape gt discrete DC RAMP S
498. s you must assign a unique name use SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect lt name gt for each segment sequence to be stored into memory This allows you to select one of many segment sequences which may exist in memory to be output Legal names must start with an alphabetic character but can contain alphabetic numeric and underscore _ characters The names can have a maximum length of 12 characters The AFG generates an error for duplicate names The waveform segment names in a segment sequence can either be sent as names or as an address value see Chapter 7 for more information To output a waveform the AFG sets the DAC to the voltage value of each waveform segment in the segment sequence The sample frequency determines the rate at which the DAC is set to the different voltage values Depending on the sample source selected by TRIGger STARt SOURce lt source gt the sample rate is set by the DDS frequency1 frequency generator SOURce FREQuency 1 Divide by N frequency2 frequency generator SOURce FREQuency2 or the samples rates of the external sample sources The sample rate and the number of points in the waveform segment determine the waveform repetition frequency The repetition frequency is the sample rate number of points Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 87 Generating a Simple Arbitrary Waveform Ramp generated as an Arbitrary Waveform 2 V DN
499. s 297 CALibration sash a eo ee AAA A A A eb Sea 298 COUN A rn ir Ge eh ht ate A A a PA o 298 DATASACIO doo Bat A AT i cee eR Ri Bok Sr 299 DATA AGC mpra tel got ha des ch Mahe era hol oh pee Sl Ll oe pon dal 299 DATAEDE oe 2 SE Od ee A ee EAS BEd ES ee 300 EDEE BEGIN fino aes ee a ep ha ee ee ee ee ne ae le 300 DE POINE A maeka Ce See ee es By Me ee ETE ee Get a 301 SEGure CODE T s 4 4h fetes thal tote sey hg IS EE Bel aes Bh eon ce Be 302 SECGure S TATE ir Sopa ol ae ae re Se Pio dod Gea a Gh See 3 303 STATE A go a ook eo ae ok a OE ee eS Ee Pale bol 304 STATE AC da to te oy A i Be ae Ge a hh atte God deat io Bae G 304 SEAT EDC a SOAR ae Ss PIES Pd Sk MPR BY Ge ba 305 6 Agilent E1445A User s Manual Contents Chapter 8 Command Reference continued IND ate er e AA A ad a a O o i 306 IMMediatel 2000000 e to be a ee Rat dd ads oe La S 306 OUTPUTA i a a ee ae A IED es ek Me 308 FIE Ter EPASs FREQUENCY e s o a es ee a elk Ee ees 308 FIL Teri EPASS ESTATE is S a ae Ae Be aoe ee eo a as 309 IMPedance mte ao cc A Rk ote a aero Hoan 309 OAD ELE Bet Merced AA By AO Moneta cad A rc Bee oy Maen tec oe 310 LOAD AUTO a cede tek id Eke OE ee Oe A EAS eres 311 ESTATE es ieee th te Ae hint ach cat fac A O eat Me oa ates See age thas Pde Actes ds Fe beat oo 311 SOURCE 010 00 ek Mie re whe Sieh tat Vu a ea EE LO fe Bo OY 312 SOURCE ARB ttraty lt a E i A i BD 313 DACFORMAat tad OW alt e ek
500. s 373 AO conicccccccccnnninnnnnncnnnnnoninanononnnnos 374 SPAGCIN Oesoto dictada 375 MIME ta lid 376 SOU Re sc2 tei tancia aN 377 VOL TO uc 377 ELEVA a att 377 IMMediate oooooconconniiocincccccccnoss 377 AMPLitude oooooccoioccconoc0mm 377 UN Ticos tetas 379 MOL Tage c onocccicnnnnnnnn 379 O FEO din 380 STATUS cositas od 381 O eR 382 SIND Tiate cto 382 OPERARON ccocccnnnnoccncnnnnnananancnnnnnnnnanns 383 COND tiON coocoonccocccncnnnnnonancnnnnonanono 383 ENABle kisaa 383 EEVEN Piscinas t 384 INTRANSItION ooonncocccnonincnanancncninnninn 384 IPTRANSItION ooonncocccnoninnnncannnnnnnnnnnn 385 A A 385 QUEStiO0Nabl8 ooonccocconnnnoninonnnnnnncnnnnn 386 COND tiON coococnncccccncnnnnnonancnnnnnnonono 386 ENABIO aione perirent 386 ELEVEN Socios calas 387 NTRansitiON ooonncccccnoninnnanannncninaninn 387 PTRansitiON oooonncocccccnnnnanannnnnnnnnnnnn 388 SAM a e a 389 ERROR 389 VERSION cococccccnnnnnononcnnnnnanananoncnnnnnnnnno 390 o cit iterated ead cena 391 STARt SEQuence 1 392 COUNT coid dene 392 GATE A ERER 393 POL arity cnn 393 SOURCE wasp coccion aladdin 393 STAT Cicchetti ns 394 IMMediate oooonnoonnninnonncnnncccccccnccnos 395 SO Petanca indio dla 395 SOURCE ivan 396 TRIGger STOP SEQuence2 ssassn enesenn 397 IMMediate cooonnonconnncnncnncccccconccnos 397 SOPA 398 SOURCE aiaa a dir 398 TRIGger SWEep SEQuence3 seeen 3
501. s Long Dim Length As Integer Length 10 Executes the commands that resets the module and clears its error register Call iwrite Addr ByVal RST OPC Chr 10 11 1 Actual Call iread Addr ByVal RdMsg Length 0 Actual Length 10 Call iwrite Addr ByVal CLS OPC Chr 10 11 1 Actual Call iread Addr ByVal RdMsg Length 0 Actual End Sub Sub RunQuery Dim GetMem As String Dim RdMsg As String 100 Dim Actual As Long ShowQuery Visible True ShowQuery Enabled True Query segment memory GetMem SOUR LIST1 SEGM FREE Call iwrite Addr ByVal GetMem Chr 10 Len GetMem 1 1 Actual Call iread Addr ByVal RdMsg 100 0 Actual ShowQuery Addltem Segment Memory Available Used Mid RdMsg 1 Actual 1 Query sequence memory GetMem SOUR LIST1 SSEQ FREE Call iwrite Addr ByVal GetMem Chr 10 Len GetMem 1 1 Actual Call iread Addr ByVal RdMsg 100 0 Actual ShowQuery Addltem Sequence Memory Available Used Mid RdMsg 1 Actual 1 End Sub Sub TimeOut Shows timeout message and exits program Continued on Next Page 38 Getting Started Chapter 1 Dim ShowTimeMsg As String Dim ErrMsg As String Set error routine On Error Resume Next Get error message ErrMsg igeterrstr igeterrno ShowTimeMsg The program generated error message Chr 34 ErrMsg Chr 34 Chr 10 ShowTimeMsg ShowTimeMsg in Sub Function
502. s considered true ON OFF 1 0 e Discrete Selects from a finite number of values These parameters use mnemonics to represent each valid setting An example is the TRIGger STARt SOURce lt source gt command where source can be BUS ECLTrg0 ECLTrg1 EXTernal HOLD INTernal 1 INTernal 2 or TTLTrgO through TTLTrg1 e Arbitrary Block Program Data This parameter type is used to transfer a block of data in the form of bytes The block of data bytes is preceded by a header which indicates either 1 The number of data bytes which follow definite length block or 2 That the following data block will be terminated upon receipt of a New Line message with the EOI signal true indefinite length block 286 Command Reference Chapter 8 Optional Parameters Querying Parameter Settings The syntax for data in the blocks is as follows Definite length block lt non zero digit gt lt digit s gt lt data byte s gt Where the value of lt non zero digit gt equals the number of lt digit s gt The value of lt digit s gt taken as a decimal integer indicates the number of lt data byte s gt in the block Indefinite length block 0 lt data byte s gt lt NLAEND gt Examples of sending 4 data bytes 14 lt byte gt lt byte gt lt byte gt lt byte gt 3004 lt byte gt lt byte gt lt byte gt lt byte gt 0 lt byte gt lt byte gt lt byte gt lt byte gt lt NL END gt Command parameters shown within square brackets
503. s will therefore complete immediately e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands OPC OPC WAI INITiate IMMediate e RST Condition RST places the Agilent E1445A in the trigger idle state as if executing an ABORt command Example Aborting a Waveform ABOR Places Agilent El445A in idle state 290 Command Reference Chapter 8 ARM ARM Subsystem Syntax The ARM subsystem operates with the TRIGger subsystem to control the starting of waveform output and frequency sweeps or list generation as follows The source and slope for arming starting waveform generation The number of waveform start arms the Agilent E1445A will accept before trigger system returns to the idle state The number of repetitions of a waveform that will be output for each start arm accepted The number of sweep arms the Agilent E1445A will accept before the sweep system returns to the idle state The source and slope for arming starting a frequency sweep or list generation ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer 1 COUNt lt number gt LAYer2 COUNt lt number gt IMMediate no query SLOPe lt edge gt SOURce lt source gt SWEep SEQuence3 COUNt lt number gt IMMediate no query LINK lt link gt SOURce lt source gt STARt LAYer 1 COUNt ARM STARt LAYer 1 COUNt lt number gt selects the number of waveform repetitions to be output for
504. se and repetition count list Executing this command with waveform segment marker pulse and repetition count lists defined with different lengths generates Error 221 Settings conflict unless the different length lists are the marker pulse and or repetition count list and have a length of 1 In this case the length of the waveform segment list is returned Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None RST Condition None Power On Condition No waveform segments are defined Query Combined Point List Length LIST SSEQ SEL ABC Selects sequence ABC LIST SSEQ COMB POIN Queries combined point list length Chapter 8 Command Reference 349 SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DEFine SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DEFine lt length gt reserves enough segment sequence memory for a segment sequence of length segment names for the sequence currently selected by SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt length gt numeric see below MINimum MAXimum none The segment sequence memory can store a maximum of 32 768 points 32 767 points if a square ramp or triangle wave exists All defined segment sequences share this memory Any one sequence can use any part of or all of this memory MINimum reserves 1 point MAXimum reserves the largest available contiguous piece of segment sequence memory Comments Once a segment sequence has be
505. segment memory The list is stored in the Signed number format The data is transferred to the AFG using the Definite Length Arbitrary Block Data method The example generates a 200 point 5 V to 5 V positive going ramp A marker is output at the zero crossing or center of the ramp Chan A applied to AFG s Output Terminal Chan B applied to AFG s Marker Out Terminal Chan A 5V DIV Chan B 5V DIV Output applied to a 500 load value 2 msec DIV The commands are 1 Reset the AFG RST 2 Clear the AFG Memory of All Sequence and Segment Data SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete ALL SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete ALL 3 Setup the AFG for Output SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FlXed lt frequency gt SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe USER SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt 4 Select the DAC Data Source SOURce ARBitrary DAC SOURce INTernal This command selects the source that transfers data to the DAC see DAC Sources on page 280 Use INTernal to transfer the data using the SOURce LIST 1 subsystem 5 Select the DAC Data Format SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat SIGNed This command selects the SIGNed data number format Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 241 6 Set the Marker Output Source SOURce MARKer FEED SOURce LIST 1 This command selects the LIST 1 source as the source that outputs a marker pulse at the Mar
506. sent in IEEE 488 2 definite or indefinite block format or as a quoted string Parameters Comments Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt name gt string data 1 through 12 characters none lt data gt block data any valid command sequence none or string Legal macro names must start with an alphabetic character and contain only alphabetic numeric and underscore _ characters Alphabetic character case upper vs lower is ignored The name is allowed to be the same as a SCPI command but may be not be the same as aCommon Command When the name is the same as a SCPI command the macro rather than the command will be executed when the name is received if macro usage is enabled The SCPI command will be executed if macro usage is disabled Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group None Related Commands EMC GMC LMC RMC RST Condition None macro definitions are unaffected 416 Command Reference Chapter 8 Example EMC and EMC Comments ESE and ESE Parameters Comments e Power On Condition No macros are defined Define Macro to Restart Waveform DMC RESTART 19ABOR INIT Defines macro EMC lt enable gt enables and disables macro usage When lt enable gt is zero macro usage is disabled Any non zero value in the range of 32768 to 32767 enables macro usage EMC returns 1 if macro usage is enabled 0 if disabled e Macro definit
507. ship between them Using the flowchart in Figure 4 1 as a guide the steps of this program are 1 Select the 42 9 MHz reference oscillator SOURce JROSCillator SOURce lt source gt Select the frequency generator that allows frequency sweeping TRIGger STARt SOURce lt source gt Select the frequency sweep mode SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE lt mode gt Set the start frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 STARt lt start_freq gt Set the stop frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 STOP lt stop_freq gt Set the number of sweeps SOURce SWEep COUNt lt number gt Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe lt shape gt Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt Place the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate IMMediate Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 121 BASIC Program Example SMPLSWP1 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 IRE STORE SMPLSWP1 This program specifies start and stop frequencies to sweep la sine wave from 0 to 1 MHz Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg Set up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 ICall the subprograms CALL Rst CALL Sweep1 CALL Query WAIT 1 allow interr
508. shows how to operate multiple AFGs together to synchronize their outputs to each other One AFG the master AFG uses its Reference Oscillator Output as the Reference Oscillator source for the second AFG the servant AFG Thus any frequency change caused by drift of the master AFG reference results in the same amount of change in the servant AFG The master AFG generates a 1 MHz square wave the servant a 500 KHz square wave E1445A E1445A Master Servant Oscilloscope AFG Master AFG Servant i CH B 5 V DIV ECLTO 1 Lines on Backplane O Output applied to a 502 load value 5 psec DV Channel A Logical Address 80 Logical Address 88 The commands are 1 Reset the Master and Servant AFGs RST 2 Setup the Master AFG For Output SOURce ROSCillator SOURce INT2 TRIGger STARt SOURce INTernal2 SOURce FREQuency 1 FlXed lt frequency gt SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SQUare SOURce VOLTage LEVel MMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt 3 Select the Master AFG s Marker Source SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt FEED SOURce JROSCillator This command selects the marker source for the ECLTrg0 trigger line to output the Reference Oscillator clock pulses 218 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations Chapter 6 10 11 12 13 Enable the ECLTrg0 Line SOURce MARKer ECLTrg0 STATe ON This enables the marker output o
509. sion frequencies for the memory and output DAC clock the output of the DDS frequency generator is applied to a DAC The DAC output is filtered and the resultant clock signals clocks the memory and output DAC to create the waveforms Divide by N Frequency Refer to Figure 10 4 This generator has better phase noise characteristics Generator Frequency2 and permits higher frequency operation up to the Reference Oscillator Ge nerator Frequency The output of this filter directly clocks the memory and output DAC Reference foe Oscillator Divide en Figure 10 4 Generating Waveforms Using a Frequency2 Generator Chapter 10 Block Diagram Description 449 Trigger Circu itry The trigger circuitry advances the waveform to the next segment The external trigger sources advances the waveform directly Thus the sample rate and resultant waveform frequency depend on the frequency of the applied triggers Output Circu itry The output circuitry outputs the waveform at the front panel s Output connector The circuitry sets the output amplitude offset voltages output impedances and has a 250 kHz and a 10 MHz low pass filter See Output Circuitry Description on page 451 for more information Microprocessor The AFG uses a Motorola 68000 microprocessor to generates the waveform segments and segment sequences for the standard waveforms Generating Sinusoid Waveforms Refer to Figure 10 5 The AFG uses the DDS Frequency 1 fr
510. st effect 113 Arbitrary Block data 156 157 frequency lists using 130 132 SCPI command parameters 286 Arbitrary Waveforms commands flowchart 84 85 description 446 doubling frequency 155 FSK using 152 153 generating 83 116 damped sine waves 107 108 description 86 87 exponential charge discharge waveform 108 109 half rectified sine waves 111 marker pulses 206 noise 112 non sinusoid 447 sample programs 104 109 111 112 simple 88 92 sin x x 105 106 spiked sine waves 109 with different frequency generators 99 102 104 with different waveform segments 93 98 with single waveform segment 88 92 minimum frequency 155 number of waveform points 157 output frequency 160 program comments 113 116 sample rate setting 331 sweep direction 157 sweeping 141 Arming and triggering 163 202 a frequency list 193 195 a frequency sweeps 190 192 frequency sweeps and lists 186 189 immediately 201 program comments 197 201 commands 165 291 297 count 199 292 frequency sweeps or lists 295 setting number of 169 171 slope setting 293 sources 199 setting 166 168 294 sweep sources 297 sweeps linking 296 setting 295 372 sources 297 the AFG 165 171 291 297 waveforms immediately 293 ASCii Data Format 335 358 Assigning the AFG to a Commander 21 Attenuator Description 451 B Backplane downloading segment data 259 268 using VXIbus 259 271 506 508 Base Address 484 486 BASIC how to tr
511. status group 436 query contents 384 387 questionable signal status group 432 summary bit 383 386 Example Programs AFGGEN 1 102 AFGGEN2 104 ARBWAVE C 41 45 ARBWAVE FRM 33 39 91 92 BURST 170 171 CHARGE 108 109 COMBSEQ 255 258 COMBSIGN 242 244 COMBUNS 247 249 DACBLOK1 232 234 DACBLOK2 236 238 DCVOLTS 56 57 DIV_N 174 175 DRIFT 220 222 ERRORCHK 49 441 EXT_ARM 167 168 FREQ1_REG 489 491 FREQ2_REG 492 494 FSK1 148 149 FSK2 150 151 FSK_ARB 152 153 GATE 184 185 list of 464 466 LIST1 125 126 LIST_STP 194 195 LIST_TME 139 140 LISTDEF 131 132 LOCKSTEP 177 180 LOG_SWP 133 134 LRN 48 MARKSEG1 209 211 MARKSEG2 213 MARKTRG 215 217 MULSEG 96 98 NOISE 112 OSG_RQS 437 OUTPLOAD 70 71 OUTPUNIT 73 74 PHAS_CHNG 496 497 PHS_MOD 76 77 QSSG_RQS 433 434 RSTCLS 47 RSTSINE 51 SIGN_DAT 227 228 SIN_D 107 108 SIN_R 111 SIN_X 105 106 SINEWAVE 59 60 SLFTST 47 SMPLSWPI 122 123 SMPLSWP2 128 129 SPIKES 109 Agilent E1445A User s Manual Index 515 E continued Example Programs continued SQUWAVE 63 64 STOPTRIG 181 182 SWP_ARB 141 143 SWP_LEVL 30 31 145 146 SWP_PVST 136 137 SWP_STEP 191 192 SWP_TRIG 188 189 TRIWAVE 67 68 UNS_DAT 230 VXIDOWN 264 268 VXISRCE 270 271 506 508 WAVE_SEL 500 505 WAVSELFP 272 277 Executing coupled commands 28 288 SCPI commands 288 several waveform segments 93 98 Exponential Charge Discharge Waveform generating 108 10
512. ster 488 logarithmic spacing 133 134 low pass output filter 308 modes 155 198 output arbitrary waveform 160 changing 487 points 157 range doubling 155 326 frequency lists and FSK 155 sweeping and sampling 155 repetition determining 87 span 327 standard waveform setting 331 start and span 127 129 start and stop 121 123 516 Agilent E1445A User s Manual Index F continued Frequency continued sweep advance source 158 advance trigger 201 arming 190 192 201 295 commands flowchart 118 119 count 372 direction 157 373 sweep points 374 sample rate 160 spacing 157 375 time 158 159 376 triggering 190 192 399 402 using triggers 186 189 synthesis modes 197 vs number of points 79 Frequency Control programs 489 494 registers 487 488 Frequency Shift Keying See FSK Frequency 1 Generator characteristics 454 coupling rules 319 description 449 range 116 SCPI commands 319 329 Frequency2 Generator characteristics 455 description 449 SCPI commands 330 331 FSK 147 153 and sweeping 117 162 command reference 120 control sources 161 delay 162 frequency range 155 program comments 154 162 programming flowchart 118 119 sample rate setting 323 source 324 using arbitrary waveform 152 153 FSK control source 147 149 TTLTrg lt n gt control source 150 151 FSK1 Example Program 148 149 FSK2 Example Program 150 151 FSK_ARB Example Program 152 153 G GATE Example P
513. sumes when the gate is unasserted Parameters Comments Sets active high gate EXTernal TTLTrgO through TT LTrg7 Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt source gt discrete none e The available sources are EXTernal The Agilent E1445A s front panel Stop Trig FSK Gate In BNC connector TTLTrg0 through TTLTrg7 The VXIbus TTL trigger lines e When a VXIbus TTLTrg lt n gt line is selected as the gate source the low level on the line asserts the gate The TRIGger STARt GATE POLarity command selects Chapter 8 Command Reference 393 TRIGger Example the active level for the front panel s Stop Trig FSK Gate In BNC when used as the gate source The front panel s Stop Trig FSK Gate In BNC is a three use connector for FSK control as a stop trigger source or as a sample gate source Only one of these uses may be active at any time If a VXIbus TTLTrg trigger line is used as the sample gate source then no TTLTrg trigger lines can be used for FSK control or as a stop trigger source Executable when Initiated Query form only Coupling Group Frequency Related Commands TRIGger STARt GATE POLarity SOURce FREQuency 1 FSK SOURce TRIGger STOP SOURce RST Condition TRIGger STARt GATE SOURce EXTernal Setting the Sample Gate Source TRIG GATE SOUR TTLTO Selects VXIbus trigger line TTLTRGO as sample gate source STARt
514. t Appendix C Register Based Programming 483 System Configuration The example programs and programming techniques shown in this appendix are based on the following system configuration Mainframe Agilent 75000 Series C Agilent E1401 Controller Agilent E1480A V 360 select code 16 Programming Language BASIC UX 6 0 Agilent E1445A AFG Logical address 80 Each program uses a combination of SCPI commands and register reads writes In most cases SCPI commands set up the AFG and initiate the waveform Register reads writes are used to change the frequency phase waveform etc instantaneously Accessing the Registers Determining the A24 Base Address Access to the AFG s operational registers is through addresses mapped into A24 address space At power on the system resource manager reads the AFG s Device Type Register in A16 address space to determine the amount of A24 memory the AFG requires Once known the resource manager allocates a block of A24 memory to the AFG and writes the base starting address into the AFG s Offset Register When you are reading or writing to an AFG register a hexadecimal or decimal register address is specified The register address is the sum of A24 base address register number The base address of the AFG operational registers in A24 address space is determined by reading the AFG s Offset Register and multiplying the value by 256 10016 This converts the 16 bit value of
515. t Data The format for downloaded waveform segment data is Bits 15 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 DAC code unused marker last point The DAC code is a 13 bit two s complement or unsigned number see the SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat command on page 313 With SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude 5 11875 V set and a matched output load the least significant bit LSB represents 1 25 mV If the marker bit is 1 a marker pulse will be output with this point if the marker bit in the segment sequence memory location generating this segment is also a 1 Last point is 1 for the waveform segment s third to last point actual last point 3 When downloading waveform segment data from the VXIbus data transfer bus the address for writing the data is offset 38 decimal 26 hex in the Agilent E1445A s A24 address space Segment The segment sequence data consists of a 32 bit wide value for each segment in the Sequence Data sequence The value should be sent as two 16 bit words with the most significant word sent first The format for downloaded segment sequence data is Bits 31 20 Bit 19 Bit 18 Bit 17 Bits 16 0 repetition last marker unused segment count point enable address The repetition count is 12 bit unsigned value that is 4096 the desired repetition count a value of 4095 in these bits indicates 1 repetition a value of O indicates 4096 repetitions Last point is 1 for the segment sequence
516. t as signed or unsigned DAC codes data Since the AFG always Data stores DAC codes into memory setting the amplitude levels is not necessary if sending segment data as DAC codes instead of voltages See Chapter 7 on how to store DAC codes Sending Segment e SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence lt segment_list gt selects Sequences the sequence in which the waveform segments are to be executed The waveform segments must be in memory or the AFG generates an error Each waveform segment name to be executed must be separated by a comma For example to execute the sine and tri waveform segments send the command as SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ sine tri e A waveform segment can be executed more than once in a single segment sequence There are two different methods In one method a waveform segment is placed in the SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence lt segment_list gt command several times The other method uses an additional command the SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt lt repetition_list gt command The following examples illustrates the two methods The examples show how to execute waveform segment sine three times and segment list tri once Method 1 SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence sine sine sine tri Method 2 SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence sine tri SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DWELI COUNt 3 1 Method 1 requires more memory since the minimum segment sequence length SOURce LIST 1 SSEQ
517. t error or query error occurs a service request interrupt is sent to the computer which then reads the AFG error queue and displays the error code and message The steps of the program are 1 Unmask bits 5 CME 4 EXE 3 DDE 2 QYE in the Standard Event Status Enable Register so that the error will generate a Standard Event Status Group summary bit ESE lt unmask gt 2 Unmask bit 5 ESB in the Service Request Enable Register so that a service request is generated when the Standard Event Status Group summary bit is received SRE lt unmask gt 440 AFG Status Chapter 9 BASIC Program Example ERRORCHK 1 IRE STORE ERRORCHK 2 This program represents the method used to check for programming 3 lerrors in BASIC programs 4 10 lAssign I O path between the computer and E1445A 20 ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 30 COM Afg 40 Define branch to be taken when an E1445A error occurs 50 Enable GPIB interface to generate an interrupt when an error 60 loccurs 70 ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg 80 ENABLE INTR 7 2 90 Clear all bits in the Standard Event Status Register unmask the 100 IStandard Event Status Group summary bit in the E1445A Status Byte 110 Iregister decimal weight 32 unmask the query error device 120 Idependent error execution error and command error bits 130 decimal sum 60 in the E1445A Standard Event Status Register 140 OUTPUT Afg CLS 150 OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 160 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 170 180 ISubpro
518. t memory available The second number shows in points the amount of segment memory used Use SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete SELected to delete the currently selected segment sequence data that was last selected by the SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect command SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DELete ALL deletes all segment sequence data stored in the AFG s sequence memory Use the command if there is insufficient segment sequence memory available to store new segment sequences Note that a segment sequence cannot be deleted if it is currently selected by the SOURce FUNCtion USER lt name gt command Use SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete SELected to delete the currently selected segment data that was last selected by the SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect command SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete ALL deletes all segment data currently in the segment memory Use the command if there is insufficient segment memory available to store new segments If the segment data is sent as voltage values the AFG changes the data into digital to analog converter DAC codes This requires that the voltage value of the segment data MUST NOT exceed the AFG s current amplitude level set by SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude If it does the AFG generates an error Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 113 Using DAC Codes Besides sending the points in a waveform segment as voltage data they can to Send Seg ment alo be sen
519. t mode gt selects the operating mode for the VXIbus data transfer bus The only available mode is CONSume There is no need to send this command since there is only one available mode The command is only included for compatibility with the Agilent Virtual Instrument Local Bus System Specification Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt mode gt discrete CONSume none e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e RST Condition VINStrument CONFigure VME MODE CONSume Setting the VXIbus Data Transfer Bus Operation Mode VINS VME CONS Sets CONSume mode 406 Command Reference Chapter 8 VINStrument CONFigure VME RECeive ADDRess DATA Comments Example VINStrument CONFigure VME RECeive ADDRess DATA returns two values A24 offset A24 indicates that the Agilent E1445A s A24 address space should be used for writing waveform segment segment sequence DAC or phase deviation data and offset is the offset into the A24 address space to be written to The offset returned depends on which of the above operations is active when the ADDRess DATA query is executed If none are active Error 1022 VXI data transfer bus not active is generated e For segment sequence and phase deviation data the offset returned is the offset of the first of the two words that must be written e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce ARBitra
520. t or segment sequence length The waveform segment or segment sequence must have been previously defined see the SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine and SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DEFine commands e When downloading is complete use the SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload COMPlete command to restore normal operation e No error checking is performed on downloaded data Erratic operation may occur if invalid data length or format is downloaded e Executable when Initiated No e Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce LIST 1 commands e RST Condition Downloading disabled Set up to download 512 points from the VXI backplane to waveform segment ABC LIST SEL ABC Creates segment name LIST DEF 512 Reserves 512 points of segment memory ARB DOWN VXI ABC 512 Sets up for download download data ARB DOWN COMP Indicates download complete Chapter 8 Command Reference 317 SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload COMPlete SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload COMPlete disables direct downloading mode Send it when downloading is complete Comments Executable when Initiated No e Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload e RST Condition Downloading disabled Example Set up to download 512 points from the VXIbus to waveform segment ABC LIST SEL ABC Creates segment name LIST DEF 512 Reserves 512 points of segment memory ARB DOWN VXI ABC 512 Sets up for download download data A
521. t sequence data SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload LBUS command directly driving the main output DAC SOURce ARBitrary DAC SOURce LBUS command or providing phase deviation data SOURce PM SOURce LBUS command and set to OFF when none of these are active If AUTO ON is set the Local Bus operation mode is changed as needed if OFF is set the mode must be explicitly set by the VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE command Sets pipeline pass through mode Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt mode gt boolean OFF 0 ON 1 none Comments Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands SOURce ARBitrary DAC SOURce SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload SOURce PM SOURce VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE 404 Command Reference Chapter 8 VINStrument e RST Condition VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE AUTO ON Example Uncoupling Local Bus Operation Mode VINS CONF LBUS AUTO OFF CONFigure TEST CONFigure Uncouple operation mode VINStrument CONFigure TEST CONFigure lt length gt configures the Agilent E1445A for Local Bus testing The lt ength gt parameter indicates that during the test that number of bytes will be sent to the Agilent E1445A The data will be placed into unused waveform segment memory When all data has been sent use the VINStrument CONFigure TEST DATA query to retrieve what the Agilent E1445A received
522. t source gt parameter selects the download source lt dest gt contains the Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 263 name of the segment sequence list to be downloaded and lt length gt contains the size of the segment sequence list in number of segment lists i e the same size set in SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DEFine lt length gt 24 Place the AFG into Hold Until All Commands are Executed OPC This commands prevents the AFG from receiving data over the VXIbus until 1t executes all the previous commands If OPC is not sent the AFG will try to receive data and thus generate an error even before it completes executing the previous commands 25 Download and Store the Segment Sequence List as a Combined List This step stores the segment sequence list into memory The command or downloading method used depends on the device that downloads the data For example the device may be an embedded controller You can also use the command module like the E1406A Command Module but at a slower data transfer rate 26 Notify the AFG that Downloading is Completed SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload COMPlete Send this command to the AFG after all data is downloaded 27 Generate the Output INITiate MMediate BASIC Program Example VXIDOWN This program is similar to the COMBSEQ program beginning on page 255 except on how the data is transferred to the AFG The program uses a V360 Controller to download the data using the VXIbus instead o
523. t up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 Call the subprograms which reset the AFG and erase all waveform Isegments and sequences CALL Rst CALL Wf_del OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 200E3 frequency OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER function arbitrary OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 11875V lamplitude CALL Ramp_wave OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER RAMP_OUT lwaveform sequence OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB Ramp_wave Ramp_wave Subprogram which defines a ramp waveform and output Isequence COM Afg DIM Waveform 1 200 ICalculate waveform points as dac codes FOR l 100 TO 99 Waveform l 101 1 050505 00125 NEXT Continued on Next Page Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 227 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 800 OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC SOUR INT Idac data source OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC FORM SIGN Idac data format signed OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM SEL RAMP Isegment name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM DEF 200 Isegment size OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT DAC Waveform waveform pts OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL RAMP_OUT sequence name OUTPU
524. tart and Stop Frequencies Page 121 Specifying a Frequency LiSt o ooo ooo oooooooo Page 124 Sweeping Using Start and Span Frequencies Page 127 Frequency Lists Using Definite and Indefinite Length Arbitrary Blocks 0 0 00 ce eee eee eee Page 130 Logarithmic Sweeping 0 20 eee eee Page 133 Sweep Points Versus Time 0005 Page 135 Frequency Lists Versus Time 2045 Page 138 Sweeping Arbitrary Waveforms 4 Page 141 AC Output Leveling 0 0 00 2 eee eee Page 144 e Frequency Shift Keying 0 0 0 0 eee eee Page 147 FSK Using the FSK Control Source Page 147 FSK Using the TTLTrg lt n gt Control Source Page 150 FSK Using an Arbitrary Waveform Page 152 e Sweeping and FSK Program Comments Page 154 Reference Oscillator Sources oooooooooooooo o Page 154 Sample Sources 2 0 0 cece cece eee eee eee Page 154 AFG Frequency Modes 200 e eee eee Page 155 Frequency Range Sweeping and Sampling Page 155 Frequency Range Frequency Lists and FSK Page 155 Sweep Count and Frequency List Repetition COUNE aid neh e ci Page 156 Arbitrary Block Data 0 0 00 ee eee eee Page 156 Frequency Points oriol eae EG ee ee E Page 157 Sw
525. te Waveforms Note Using the Unsigned Number Format Transferring DAC Codes in the Unsigned Number Format Determining DAC Codes in the Unsigned Number Format Transferring waveform segments as Digital to Analog Converter DAC Codes to the AFG is faster than transferring a voltage list This section shows how to transfer the lists as DAC codes using the Unsigned number format The DAC 6699 codes are transferred to the AFG as a comma separated list The AFG can only accept a single number format at a time Thus if the AFG currently contains Unsigned data and you wish to send Signed data you MUST delete the data in memory first before enabling the AFG to receive Signed data This section shows how to setup the AFG to receive DAC codes in the Unsigned number format and how to generate the codes from voltage values With the AFG set to receive DAC codes in the UNSigned number format it receives the codes as unsigned or offset binary numbers Use the SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat UNSigned command to select the format For outputs into matched loads and with the amplitude set to maximum 5 11875V the following DAC codes generate the following outputs Code 0 outputs 5 12 V or negative full scale voltage Code 4096 outputs 0 V Code 8191 outputs 5 11875 V or positive full scale voltage To calculate DAC codes from voltage values use the formula DAC Code voltage value 00125 4096 For example to outp
526. te register and clear service request bit 510 B SPOLL Afg 520 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 530 OUTPUT Afg 540 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 550 REPEAT 560 OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR lread AFG error queue 570 ENTER Afg Code Message 580 PRINT Code Message 590 UNTIL Code 0 600 STOP 610 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program STOPTRIG FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program STOPTRIG C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A 182 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 Gati ng Trigger Gating is the process of suspending the output waveform When the gate is Signals active AFG triggering is suspended The output remains at the last amplitude point triggered When the gate is inactive the output resumes with the next amplitude point The gating commands are frequency coupled and are executed relative to other AFG commands as shown in Figure 5 3 The GATE example shows how to use the AFG s Gate In BNC to suspend AFG triggering and thus generation of the output signal A high TTL levels on the BNC activates the gate The steps of program are as follows 1 10 Set the reference oscillator source SOURce JROSCillator SOURce lt source gt Set the start trigger source TRIGger STARt SOURce lt source gt Set the trigger gating source TRIGger STARt
527. ted Commands SOURce SWEep TIME e RST Condition TRIGger SWEep SOURce TlMer Example Setting the Sweep Advance Trigger Source TRIG SWE SOUR TTLT1 Selects VXIbus trigger line TTLTRG1 as sweep advance source Chapter 8 Command Reference 401 TRIGger SWEep TIMer TRIGger SWEep TlMer lt period gt selects the time between frequency values for sweep or frequency list generation when TRIGger SWEep SOURce is set to TlMer This value set by command is coupled to the SOURce SWEep TIME command value by the following equation TIME TlMer points 1 where points 1s the SOURce SWEep POINts value for frequency sweeps or the length of the frequency list for frequency list generation When changing the frequency list length when SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE LIST is set or the SOURce SWEep POINts value when any other MODE is set the TIME or TlMer value remains the same depending on which command SOURce SWEep TIME or TRIGger SWEep TIMer respectively was most recently sent The other value is changed based on the new points value Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt period gt numeric 00125 through 4 19430375 seconds MINimum MAXimum MINimum selects 1 25 mS MAXimum selects 4 19430375 S The above values bound the valid range for lt period gt Comments Executable when Initiated Query form only e Coupling Group Frequency Related
528. ter 1 Getting Started 47 Querying the After resetting the Agilent E1445A or cycling power the AFG parameters Power On Reset are set to their power on values These values are listed in Table B 5 in Configuration Pen B The command which queries each AFG parameter setting is LRN BASIC Program Example LRN 1 IRE STORE LRN 10 Assign an I O path between the computer and AFG 20 ASSIGN Afg to 70910 30 Call the subprogram 40 Lrn_conf Afg 50 END 60 70 SUB Lrn_conf Afg 80 Lrn_conf subprogram which queries the AFG configuration 90 DIM Lrn 5000 100 OUTPUT Afg LRN 110 ENTER Afg Lrn 120 Lrn Lrn amp 130 REPEAT 140 I POS Lrn 150 PRINT Lrn 1 1 1 160 Lrn Lrn l 1 170 UNTIL Lrn 180 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program LRN FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C C example program LRN C is in Versions directory VCPROG on the CD that came with your Agilent E1445A 48 Getting Started Chapter 1 Checking for Errors The following BASIC program shows the lines and subprogram which are added to the BASIC programs to check for errors Line 140 clears the AFG Standard Event Status Register Lines 150 and 160 unmask the appropriate bits in the AFGs Status Byte Register and Standard Event Status Register When an error occurs the subprogram Errmsg reads the AFG error queue and displays the code and message
529. ter can be found in Chapter 8 Command Reference The commands in this chapter are shown in their entirety optional headers included to help you locate them in the reference Sweeping and Frequency Lists The AFG offers linear frequency sweeping of standard waveforms that is sine square triangle ramp and arbitrary waveforms from 0 0 Hz to 10 73741824 MHz and logarithmic sweeping of standard and arbitrary waveforms from 0 01 Hz to 10 73741824 MHz The AFG can also frequency hop where the AFG outputs a sequence of discrete frequencies from a pre defined list Up to 256 frequencies from 0 0 Hz to 10 73741824 MHz can be specified in a single list and the AFG can sequence through the list at up to 800 frequencies per second Sweeps and frequency lists are programmed with the same commands The command subsystems covered in this section include e SOURce ROSCillator TRIGger e SOURce FREQuency 1 Sweep mode and related commands Frequency list mode and related commands e SOURce SWEep e ARM SWEep The following programs show how to perform sweeps and frequency lists 120 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 Sweeping Using St art and Stop Frequencies The SMPLSWP1 program specifies a start frequency and a stop frequency and continuously sweeps between O and 1 MHz The program also queries the start frequency stop frequency center frequency and frequency span to show the relation
530. termining the Size of the Combined Segment Sequence List The following comments give additional details on the program examples in this chapter The AFG stores the Signed or Unsigned DAC codes directly into memory Thus the amplitude setting has no affect on the codes Unlike sending a voltage list the output amplitude can be set to any of the values listed in Appendix B The amplitude does not have to be gt to the maximum DAC code value The AFG requires that the data it receives must be correct or it will not execute it correctly Unlike using other data transfer methods the AFG does not perform any error checking on the data when it is directly downloaded The AFG has the following DAC sources available to download data to the DAC INTernal The SOURce LIST 1 subsystem built in waveforms DPORt The front panel s Digital Port In connector LBUS The VXIbus Local Bus VXI The VXIbus backplane The AFG has the following sources available to download waveform segments and segment sequences into memory DPORt The front panel s Digital Port In connector LBUS The VXIbus Local Bus VXI The VXIbus backplane Use SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined POINts to determine the size of the number of points of the waveform segment and marker pulse list of the currently selected waveform segment Use SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence COMBined POINts to determine the size of the number of waveform segments m
531. the AFG to receive a combined list in the Unsigned number format and how to generate the list from voltage values With the AFG set to receive codes in the Unsigned number format it receives the codes as unsigned or offset binary numbers Use the SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat UNSigned command to select the format For outputs into matched loads and with the amplitude set to maximum 5 11875V the following DAC codes generate the following outputs Code 32768 outputs 0 V Code 0 outputs 5 12 V or negative full scale voltage Code 8 outputs 5 11875 V or positive full scale voltage Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 245 To calculate combined list codes from NEGATIVE voltage values use the formula DAC Code voltage value 00125 shift left by 3 32768 For example to output 2V DAC Code 2 00125 shift left by 3 32768 12800 32768 19968 To calculate combined list codes from POSITIVE voltage values use the formula DAC Code voltage value 00125 shift left by 3 32768 For example to output 5V DAC Code 5 00125 shift left by 3 32768 32000 32768 768 To output a marker at a particular point add 2 to the combined list DAC code value of the point For example to add a marker bit of a point with a voltage value of 5 V Code 5 00125 shift left by 3 32768 2 32000 32768 2 766 The COMBUNS program shows how to store a combined list 1 e wavefo
532. the combined list using the Unsigned number format instead of the Signed format and the list is transferred as Indefinite Length Arbitrary Block Data IRE STORE COMBUNS This program downloads an arbitrary waveform as a combined voltage and marker list of unsigned DAC codes The data is sent lin an IEEE 488 2 indefinite length block in 16 bit integer format The waveform is a 200 point 5V to 5V ramp wave Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 ASSIGN Afg1 TO 70910 FORMAT OFF Ipath for binary data COM Afg Afg1 ISet up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 Call the subprograms which reset the AFG and erase all waveform Isegments and sequences CALL Rst CALL Wf_del Continued on Next Page Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 247 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 200E3 OUTPUT OAfg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 11875V CALL Ramp_wave OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER RAMP_OUT OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB Ramp_wave lfrequency function lamplitud
533. the flowchart in Figure 4 1 on page 118 as a guide the steps of this program are 1 Select the frequency generator which allows frequency lists hopping TRIGger STARt SOURce lt source gt 2 Select the frequency list mode SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE lt mode gt 3 Set the frequency list SOURce LIST 2 FREQuency lt freq_list gt 4 Set the source which starts the frequency list ARM SWEep SOURce lt source gt 5 Set the source which advances the list to the next frequency TRIGger SWEep SOURce lt source gt 6 Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe lt shape gt 7 Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel MMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt 8 Place the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate MMediate Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering 193 BASIC Program Example LIST_STP 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 IRE STORE LIST_STP The following program configures the AFG to step through a frequency list when an GPIB group execute trigger is received Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM OAfg Pts Set up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 Call the subprograms CALL Rst CALL List_stp WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END
534. the frequency shift keying mode SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE lt mode gt 4 Select the FSK frequencies SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey lt frequencyl gt lt frequency2 gt 5 Select the FSK control source SOURce FREQuency 1 FSKey SOURce lt source gt 6 Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe lt shape gt Chapter 4 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying 147 7 Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt 8 Place the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate MMediate BASIC Program Example FSK1 akWND o 10 30 40 50 60 70 80 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 IRE STORE FSK1 This program shifts between 5 MHz and 10 MHz based on a 1 MHz Icontrol signal applied to the FSK control source The program also queries the FSK frequencies and the FSK control Isource Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg Set up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 ICall the subprograms CALL Rst CALL Fsk CALL Fsk_info WAIT 1 lallow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB Fsk Fsk Subprogram which sets up frequency shift keying and the front Ipanel FSK In BNC as the control source COM Afg OUT
535. the man A Alternating current AC ual for specific WARNING or CAUTION information to avoid personal injury or dam age to the product Direct current DC AN Indicates hazardous voltages Indicates the field wiring terminal that must _ be connected to earth ground before operating the equipment protects against electrical Calls attention to a procedure practice or con shock in case of fault WARNING dition that could cause bodily injury or death i i Calls attention to a procedure practice or con or _ __ Frame or chassis ground terminal typically CAUTION dition that could possibly cause damage to connects to the equipment s metal frame equipment or permanent loss of data WARNINGS The following general safety precautions must be observed during all phases of operation service and repair of this product Failure to comply with these precautions or with specific warnings elsewhere in this manual violates safety standards of design manufacture and intended use of the product Agilent Technologies assumes no liability for the customer s failure to comply with these requirements Ground the equipment For Safety Class 1 equipment equipment having a protective earth terminal an uninterruptible safety earth ground must be provided from the mains power source to the product input wiring terminals or supplied power cable DO NOT operate the product in an explosive atmosphere or in the presence of flammable g
536. the output voltage points that constitutes the waveform segment Chapter 3 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms 89 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Name the Segment Sequence SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect lt name gt This command names the segment sequence Each sequence stored into memory must have a unique name Legal names must start with an alphabetic character but can contain alphabetic numeric and underscore _ characters The names can have a maximum length of 12 characters The names MUST be different from any waveform segment names stored in memory Set the Segment Sequence Length SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DEFine lt length gt This command defines the length of the selected segment sequence The length must be equal to or greater than the number of waveform segments in the sequence next step Define the Segment Sequence Order SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence lt segment_list gt This command determines the order in which the waveform segments are to be executed Each waveform segment name must be separated by a comma for example A B C see Executing Several Waveform Segments on page 93 for more information Select the User Name SOURce FUNCtion USER lt name gt This command selects the segment sequences to be output Make the lt name gt in this command the same name as the stored segment sequence to be output Initiate the Waveform INITiate IMMediate This command gene
537. the start arm source e Executable when Initiated Query form only e Coupling Group None e Related Commands ARM STARt LAYer2 SLOPe e RST Condition ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce IMMediate Example Setting the Start Arm Source ARM LAY2 SOUR EXT Start arm source is front panel s Start Arm In BNC 294 Command Reference Chapter 8 SWEep COUNt Parameters Comments Example ARM ARM SWEep COUNt lt number gt specifies the number of sweep arms the Agilent E1445A will accept after an INITiate MMediate command before the sweep trigger sequence returns to the idle state This command is equivalent to the SOURce SWEep COUNt command either command may be used and executing either one changes the value of the other Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt number gt numeric 1 through 2147483647 9 9E 37 none INFinity MINimum selects 1 arm MAXimum selects 2147483647 arms 9 9E 37 is equivalent to INFinity e Executable when Initiated Query form only e Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands NITiate IMMediate e RST Condition ARM SWEep COUNt 1 Setting the Sweep Arm Count ARM SWE COUN 10 Sets 10 sweep arms per INITiate SWEep IMMediate Comments ARM SWEep IMMediate starts a frequency sweep or list regardless of the selected sweep arm source The trigger system must be initiated and the sweep trigger sequence must be in the wait for arm st
538. the sweep trigger sequence must be in the wait for trigger state The selected trigger source remains unchanged Executing this command when frequency sweeps or lists are not enabled or with the sweep trigger sequence not in the wait for trigger state generates Error 211 Trigger ignored Executable when Initiated Yes Coupling Group none Related Commands INITiate IMMediate SOURce SWEep commands Chapter 8 Command Reference 399 TRIGger e RST Condition None Example Advancing a Frequency Sweep SWE STAR 1E3 STOP 10E3 Sets sweep frequency limits SWE POIN 10 Sets 1 kHz steps ARM LAY2 SOUR IMM Sets output to start immediately ARM SWE SOUR IMM Sets sweep to start immediately TRIG SWE SOUR HOLD Sets sweep to advance sweep manually INIT Initiates trigger system TRIG SWE Advances to next frequency SWEep LINK TRIGger SWEep LINK lt link gt selects the internal event that advances a frequency sweep or list when TRIGger SWEep SOURce is set to LINK The only defined internal event to advance a sweep or list is ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer2 There is no need to send this command since there is only one defined internal event The command is included for SCPI compatibility purposes only Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt link gt string ARM STARt SEQuence1 LAYer2 none Comments Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Relat
539. the voltage point list is returned e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e RST Condition None e Power On Condition No waveform segments are defined Example Query Combined Point List Length LIST SEL ABC Selects waveform segment ABC LIST COMB POIN Queries combined point list length 338 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine lt ength gt reserves enough waveform segment memory for a waveform segment of length points for the segment currently selected by SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt length gt numeric see below MINimum MAXimum none The length will be rounded up if needed to a multiple of 8 points All defined waveform segments share the waveform segment memory Any one segment may use any part of or all of this memory MINimum reserves 8 points MAXimum reserves the largest available contiguous piece of waveform segment memory up to 262 144 points if no waveforms other than standard function sine waves exist Comments Once a waveform segment has been DEFined it must be deleted SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DELete SELected command before its reserved length may be redefined The voltage point and marker pulse list values and length may be changed repeatedly without re executing the DEFine command e SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DE
540. tion is in progress The RST command may be used to prematurely terminate the calibration procedure without affecting the stored calibration constants Executable when Initiated No Coupling Group None Related Commands CALibration DC BEGin CALibration SECure STATe RST Condition None Chapter 8 Command Reference 301 CALibration SECure CODE CALibration SECure CODE lt code gt sets the code which is required to disable calibration security Calibration security must have been previously disabled Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt code gt character data 0 through 12 characters none The code must start with a letter A through 2 and may contain letters digits and underscores Lower case letters are converted to upper case Comments Executing this command with calibration security enabled CALibration SECure STATe ON set generates the Error 1002 Calibration security enabled Disabling calibration security requires knowledge of the previous security code e Before shipping the factory sets the calibration security code to E1445A You should change it before you use your Agilent E1445A to prevent unauthorized calibration Record the new security code and store it in a secure place If you forget the new code defeating the security involves instrument disassembly See the Agilent E1445A Service Manual if this is required e Th
541. tly refer to Chapter 7 The High Speed Data Waveform data from the VXIbus is loaded into the DAC via the following Register register e High Speed Data Register base_addr 2616 Address 5 14 13 12 11110 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 11 0 base 2616 DAC code unused DAC Code The DAC code is a 13 bit signed 2 s complement or unsigned number With SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude set to 5 12 V anda matched output load the least significant bit LSB is 1 25 mV BASIC Program Example VXISRCE The program uses the V360 Controller to download the data using the VXIbus instead of transferring it directly to the AFG using GPIB IRE STORE VXISRCE This program uses the V 360 embedded controller to send waveform Idata directly to the AFG dac over the VXlbus backplane Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 1680 COM Afg Addr Call the subprograms which reset the AFG and determine the base laddress of the registers in A24 address space CALL Rst CALL A24_ offset IScale the amplitude set the dac data format and dac data source OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 11875V lamplitude OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC FORM SIGN Idac data format signed OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC SOUR VXI Idac data source OUTPUT Afg OPC IWait for the SCPI commands to complete ENTER Afg Complete Call the subprogram which sen
542. to 0 The commands used to set the transitions are STATus QUEStionable NTRansition lt unmask gt STATus QUEStionable PTRansition lt unmask gt NTRansition sets the negative transition For each bit unmasked a 1 to 0 transition of that bit in the Condition Register sets the associated bit in the Event Register PTRansition sets the positive transition For each bit unmasked a 0 to 1 transition of that bit in the Condition Register sets the associated bit in the Event Register Chapter 9 AFG Status 431 The Event Register The Enable Register Program Example lt unmask gt is the decimal hexadecimal H octal HQ or binary B value of the Condition Register bit to be unmasked The decimal values of bits 5 and 8 are 32 and 256 The Event Register latches transition events from the Condition Register as specified by the Transition Filter Bits in the Event Register are latched and remain set until the register is cleared by one of the following commands STATus QUEStionable EVENt CLS The Enable Register specifies which bits in the Event Register can generate a summary bit which is subsequently used to generate a service request The AFG logically ANDs the bits in the Event Register with bits in the Enable Register and ORs the results to obtain a summary bit The bits in the Enable Register that are to be ANDed with bits in the Event Register are specified unmasked with the command STATus QUEStionabl
543. to generate the waveforms Each time the AFG s frequency generator clocks the DAC the DAC outputs a voltage value that corresponds to the point value in the waveform segment The bits set in the DAC determine the voltage value For non sinusoid functions the DAC codes in the AFG s segment memory set the appropriate bits of the DAC For the sinusoid function the output of the frequency generator sets the bits to the appropriate value see Generating Sinusoid Waveforms on page 450 The DAC can also receive segment data from external sources like the VXIbus The external sources immediately set the DAC to an output voltage that corresponds to the DAC code value sent by the source Each time the DAC receives a new code the DAC s output is set to the value in the new code Thus the waveform frequency depends on the rate at which the DAC receives the codes The output DAC s voltage range is from 5 12 V to 5 11875 V Chapter 10 Block Diagram Description 447 Memory Concurrent with the DAC the frequency generator also clocks the segment memory to output the next code to set the DAC bits to the next point on the waveform By clocking both the memory and DAC at a certain clock rate i e sample rate the AFG outputs a waveform at a frequency determined by the length and number of waveform segments and the sample rate See AFG Memory Description on page 452 for more information on how the memory operates Waveform seg
544. to peak Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg ISet up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT OAfg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 ICall the subprograms CALL Rst CALL Out_unit WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB Out_unit Out_unit Subprogram which sets the amplitude units COM Afg OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL UNIT VOLT VPP amplitude units OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 8 lamplitude OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM OFFS 1 loffset OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state SUBEND SUB Rst Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 COM Afg OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Errmsg Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors COM Afg DIM Message 256 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform REPEAT Continued on Next Page Chapter 2 Generating Standard Waveforms 73 460 OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR Iread AFG error queue 470 ENTER Afg Code Message 480 PRINT Code Message 490 UNTIL Code 0 500 STOP 510 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program OUTPUNIT FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPR
545. topping 329 sources arbitrary waveforms 115 frequency lists 154 FSK 154 standard waveforms 78 sweeping 154 Sample Hold and ROSC N Control Register 488 SAV 424 SCPI conformance information 414 415 instrument language 26 programming 26 version number 390 SCPI Commands 281 abbreviated 285 ABORt subsystem 290 arbitrary block parameters 286 ARM subsystem 291 297 boolean parameters 286 CALibration subsystem 298 305 command separator 285 conformance information 414 415 coupling 27 28 288 467 469 discrete parameters 286 execution 288 format 284 285 implied 27 implied optional 285 INITiate subsystem 306 307 linking 27 288 numeric parameters 286 optional 27 OUTPut 1 subsystem 308 311 parameters 286 287 quick reference 409 413 reference 281 312 root keyword 26 SOURce subsystem 312 380 SOURce ARBitrary subsystem 313 318 SOURce FREQuency 1 subsystem 319 329 SOURce FREQuency2 subsystem 330 331 SOURce FUNCtion subsystem 332 333 SOURce LIST 1 subsystem 334 357 SOURce LIST2 subsystem 358 360 SOURce MARKer subsystem 361 364 SOURce PM subsystem 365 367 SOURce RAMP subsystem 368 369 SOURce ROSCillator subsystem 370 371 SOURce SWEep subsystem 372 376 SOURce VOLTage subsystem 377 380 square bracket description 287 STATus subsystem 381 388 structure 26 SYSTem subsystem 389 390 TRIGger subsystem 391 402 variable command syntax 285 vertical line descr
546. tor SOURce lt source gt Set the trigger source of the master AFG as desired Set the trigger source of the slave AFG to the source driven by the master TRIGger STARt SOURce lt source gt Set the frequency mode SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE lt mode gt Set the output frequency of the master SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FlXed lt frequency gt Or SOURce FREQuency2 CW FlXed lt frequency gt Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe lt shape gt Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt 176 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 7 Feed the master AFG trigger to the trigger source of the slave AFG SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt FEED lt source gt 8 Enable the routing of the trigger signal SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt STATe lt mode gt 9 Place the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate MMediate BASIC Program Example LOCKSTEP 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 IRE STORE LOCKSTEP This program lock steps two AFGs The trigger source which ladvances the waveform of the master AFG DDS time base is shared by Ithe slave AFG Thus changing the frequency of the master AFG Ichanges the frequency of the slave AFG simultaneously Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A dimension an array Ivariable for the sin x x waveform amplitude points ASSIGN Afg_m TO 70910 ASSIGN Afg_s TO 709
547. tor commands e RST Condition SOURce FREQuency1 CENTer 5 36870912 MHz Example Setting the Center Frequency FREQ CENT 1E3 Sets the center frequency to 1000 Hz Chapter 8 Command Reference 321 CW FIXed SOURce FREQuency 1 SOURce FREQuency 1 CW FlXed lt frequency gt selects the non swept sample rate for arbitrary waveforms or waveform frequency for the built in waveforms sine square etc Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt frequency gt numeric see below MINimum MAXimum Hz divided by 16 MINimum selects O Hz The above values bound the legal range for lt frequency gt Arbitrary Waveforms and Sine Wave Outputs MAXimum selects the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 4 Square Wave Outputs MAXimum selects the current reference oscillator frequency Ramps and Triangle Outputs MAXimum selects the current reference oscillator frequency divided by 4 further divided by the SOURce RAMP POINts value For non sine wave outputs multiply the MAXimum value by 2 if frequency doubling is in effect see the SOURce FREQuency 1 RANGe command Comments Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands TRIGger STARt SOURce SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe SOURce ROSCillator commands e RST Condition SOURce FREQuency1 FlXed 10 kHz Example Setting the Sample Rate
548. ts peak to peak PHS_ MOD y Shifts sine wave phase from 0 to 180 degrees Arbitrary ARBWAVE BASIC Visual BASIC Procedure for generating an arbitrary waveform Waveforms Visual C C Chapter 3 MULSEG j Arbitrary waveform with two segments AFGGEN1 kl Ramp arbitrary waveform using the frequency1 generator AFGGEN2 Ramp arbitrary waveform using the frequency2 generator SIN_X x Sin x x arbitrary waveform SIN_D y Damped sine wave arbitrary waveform CHARGE i Exponential charge discharge waveform SPIKES Sine wave with spikes SIN_R y 1 2 wave rectified sine wave NOISE d Pseudo random noise 464 Useful Tables Appendix B Table B 1 Agilent E1445A Example Program Listing continued Program Type Program Name Language Description Sweeping SMPLSWP1 BASIC Visual BASIC 0 Hz to 1 MHz sweep using start and stop frequencies Frequency Lists Visual C C Frequency Shift Keying LIST1 1 kHz 10 kHz 100 kHz 1 MHz frequency list Chapter 4 SMPLSWP2 1 kHz to 21 kHz sweep using start and span frequencies LISTDEF m Definite length arbitrary block frequency list LOG_SWP E Seven point logarithmic frequency sweep SWP_PVST 4 Setting the sweep time LIST_TME Setting the time through a frequency list SWP_ARB Sweeping an arbitrary waveform SWP_LEVL i Sweep with output leveling FSK1 E Frequency shift keying with the FSK In control source FSK2 k Frequency shift keying with the TTLTrg cont
549. ts the SIGNed number format 6 Setup the Waveform Segment SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent DEFine lt length gt 7 Store the Waveform Segment as Signed DAC Data SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage DAC lt voltage_list gt This command stores the waveform segment into segment memory using the Signed number format set by the SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat SIGNed command 8 Setup the Segment Sequence and Generate Output SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SELect lt name gt SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence DEFine lt length gt SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence SEQuence lt segment_list gt SOURce FUNCtion USER lt name gt INITiate MMediate 226 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 BASIC Program Example SIGN_DAT BhOn 10 30 40 50 60 70 80 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 The SIGN_DAT program is very similar to the example programs used in Chapter 3 The only difference is that this program generates in line 360 and transfers in line 430 segment data as DAC codes in the Signed number format instead of voltage values IRE STORE SIGN_DAT This program downloads arbitrary waveform data as signed 2 s complement DAC codes The waveform defined is a 200 point 5V to 5V ramp wave Assign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 COM Afg ISe
550. ubprogram which sets up master AFG COM Afg_m Afg_s OUTPUT Afg_m SOUR ROSC SOUR INT2 lreference osc source OUTPUT Afg_m TRIG STAR SOUR INT2 Itrigger source OUTPUT EAfg_m SOUR FREQ2 FIX 1E6 Ifrequency OUTPUT Afg_m SOUR FUNC SHAP SQU function OUTPUT Afg_m SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5V lamplitude Continued on Next Page 220 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations Chapter 6 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 800 810 820 830 840 850 860 870 880 890 900 OUTPUT EAfg_m SOUR MARK ECLTO FEED SOUR ROSC Ifeed ref osc OUTPUT Afg_m SOUR MARK ECLTO STAT ON lenable ECLTO trig line OUTPUT Afg_m SOUR MARK ECLT1 FEED ARM STAR LAY2 feed arm source OUTPUT Afg_m SOUR MARK ECLT1 STAT ON lenable ECLT1 trig line SUBEND SUB Square_wave_s Square_wave_s Subprogram which sets up servant AFG square wave lin phase with master AFG reference oscillator source lexternal COM Afg_m Afg_s OUTPUT Afg_s SOUR ROSC SOUR ECLTO reference source OUTPUT Afg_s SOUR ROSC FREQ EXT 40E6 lreference frequency OUTPUT Afg_s TRIG STAR SOUR INT2 Itrigger source OUTPUT Afg_s SOUR FREQ2 FIX 5E6 frequency OUTPUT Afg_s SOUR FUNC SHAP SQU function OUTPUT Afg_s SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5V lamplitude OUTPUT Afg_s ARM STAR LAY2 SOUR ECLT1 larm source OU
551. uch as 1 5 10 and 20 MHz for arbitrary waveform sample rates e The reference oscillator is used to generate the sample rate and waveform frequencies specified in the SOURce FREQuency 1 and SOURce FREQuency2 subsystems e Use SOURce ROSCillator FREQuency EXTernal to indicate the frequency of an external reference oscillator e Executable when Initiated Query form only e Coupling Group Frequency e Related Commands SOURce ROSCillator FREQuency EXTernal SOURce FREQuency 1 commands SOURce FREQuency2 commands e RST Condition SOURce ROSCillator SOURce INTernal1 Example Setting the Reference Oscillator Source ROSC SOUR CLK10 Selects VXI CLKIO line as oscillator source Chapter 8 Command Reference 371 SOURce SWEep SOURce SWEep Subsystem Syntax The SOURce SWEep subsystem selects The number of frequency sweeps or repetitions of a frequency list to be performed The direction of a frequency sweep The number of points in a frequency sweep A linear or logarithmic frequency sweep with respect to time The sweep rate for frequency sweeps and frequency lists when TRIGger SWEep SOURce TlMer is set Frequency sweeping generation requires that TRIGger STARt ISOURce INTernal1 and SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE SWEep be set A sweep is started by a sweep arm ARM SWEep subsystem and is advanced by a sweep advance trigger TRIGger SWEep subsystem SOURce SWEep COUNt lt number gt
552. uence DEFine lt length gt must be at least the number of waveform segments in the sequence 1 e sine sin sine tri a length of 4 Since in Method 2 the waveform segments consist of sine tr1 the sequence length is only 2 Method 1 is required if the marker outputs set by the SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer command are to be different for the various repetitions see Chapters 6 and 7 for marker output information 114 Generating Arbitrary Waveforms Chapter 3 Reference e The USER function can use any of the reference oscillator sources Oscillator Sources selected by the SOURce ROSCillator SOURce command The reference oscillator sources are INTernal 1 42 94967296 MHz power on value INTernal2 40 MHz CLK10 10 MHz the VXIbus CLK line EXTernal User provided value the front panel Ref Smpl In BNC ECLTrg0 or 1 User provided value the VXIbus ECL trigger lines e If using either the EXTernal or ECLTrg0O or 1 reference oscillator sources enter the source frequency to the AFG using SOURce ROSCillator FREQuency EXTernal lt frequency gt e For best frequency linearity use the 42 9 MHz i e INTernal 1 reference oscillator source with the DDS frequency1 frequency generator This combination provides 01 Hz resolution For higher frequency values use the 40 MHz e INTernal2 reference oscillator source with the Divide by N frequency2 frequency generator Use the EXTernal or ECL
553. ueue See Table B 6 in Appendix B for a listing of possible error numbers and messages Comments The Agilent E1445A places any generated errors into the error queue The queue is first in first out With several errors waiting in the queue the SYSTem ERRor command returns the oldest unread error message first e The error queue can hold 30 error messages If the Agilent E1445A generates more than 30 messages that are not read it replaces the last error message in the queue with Error 350 Too many errors No additional messages are placed into the queue until SYSTem ERRor reads some messages or the CLS clear status command clears the queue e When the error queue is empty SYSTem ERRor returns 0 No error e Executable when Initiated Yes e RST Condition Unaffected e Power On Condition No errors are in the error queue Example Reading the Error Queue SYST ERR Queries the error queue Chapter 8 Command Reference 389 SYSTem VERSion SYSTem VERSion returns the SCPI version number to which the Agilent E1445A complies 1991 0 Comment Executable when Initiated Yes e RST Condition None Example Querying the SCPI Revision SYST VERS Queries SCPI revision 390 Command Reference Chapter 8 TRIGger TRIGger The TRIGger subsystem operates with the ARM subsystem to control the behavior of the trigger system as follows The source and slope for generating the individual samples of a
554. ulses Page 206 Generating Marker Pulses for Arbitrary Wavetorms coi Page 206 Generating Multiple Marker Pulses in Multiple Segment Lists iu aney nean tasa e eee eee eee eee Page 207 Generating Single Marker Pulses in Single Waveform SOSMENIS vit ia Page 212 e Generating Marker Pulses for Each Waveform Pol aeee eaae n ea a glantarede Mey ORA det oaks Page 214 e Operating Multiple AFGs Together o o o o oo Page 218 e Marker Program Comments ooococcoocoooococ o Page 222 Determining the Number of Marker Points of a Waveform SegMeMt o ooocococcocccocccco Page 222 Determining the Number of Marker Points of a Segment Sequence 00 ce eee eee eee Page 222 Chapter 6 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations 203 Marker Pulse Enable Flowchart The flowchart in Figure 6 1 shows how to select and output the different marker pulses at the front panel Marker Out BNC and the ECL trigger lines Remove the flowchart from the binder for easy accessibility Refer to the flowchart while doing the examples in this chapter if desired START Are the Marker Pulses for the front panel Marker Out connector NO YES SELECT THE MARKER SOURCE SELECT THE MARKER SOURCE FOR ECL TRIGGERS SOURce MARKer FEED SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt FEED RESET VALUE RESET VALUE ECLTrg0 ARM STARt SEQuencel 1 LAYer 1 ARM STARt SEQuence 1 L
555. up None e Related Commands CALibration DC BEGin CALibration DATA AC 1 CALibration DATA AC2 CALibration SECure CODE PUD e RST Condition Unaffected Power On Condition CALibration SECure STATe ON Example Disabling Calibration Security CAL SEC STATe OFF E1445A Disables security assuming factory set security code Chapter 8 Command Reference 303 CALibration STATe Parameters Comments CALibration STATe lt state gt specifies whether corrections using the calibration constants are made or not If STATe is OFF then no corrections are made If STATe is ON DC and or AC corrections will be made or not according to the states of the CALibration STATE DC and AC commands Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt state gt boolean OFF 0 ON 1 none e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None Example STATe AC e Related Commands CALibration STATe AC CALibration STATe DC e RST Condition CALibration STATe ON Disabling Calibration Corrections CAL STAT OFF Disables corrections CALibration STATe AC lt state gt specifies whether AC corrections using the calibration constants are made or not If state is OFF then no AC corrections are made If state is ON AC corrections will be made if CALibration STATe ON is also Parameters Comments Example set Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units
556. upt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB Sweep1 Sweep1 Subprogram which outputs a swept sine wave from O Hz to 1 MHz COM Afg OUTPUT Afg SOUR ROSC SOUR INT1 Ireference oscillator OUTPUT Afg TRIG STAR SOUR INT1 Ifrequency1 generator DDS OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 MODE SWE Isweep mode OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 STAR 0 Istart frequency OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 STOP 1E6 Istop frequency OUTPUT Afg SOUR SWE COUN INF Isweep count OUTPUT OAfg SOUR FUNC SHAP SIN5 function OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 V lamplitude OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state SUBEND SUB Rst Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 COM Afg OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Query Query Subprogram which queries sweep parameters COM Afg Continued on Next Page 122 Sweeping and Frequency Shift Keying Chapter 4 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 790 700 710 START 0 000000000E 000 STOP 1 000000000E CENTER 5 000000 000000 OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 CENT ENTER Afg Center OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 SPAN ENTER Afg Span OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 STAR ENTER Afg Start OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 STOP ENTER Afg Stop DISP START Start STOP Stop CENTER Center SPAN Span SUBEND SUB Errmsg Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 program
557. urn the trigger system to the idle state when ARM STARt LAYer2 COUNt set to INFinity or 9 9E 37 e Executable when Initiated Query form only e Coupling Group None e Related Commands ABORT INITiate IMMediate e RST Condition ARM STARt LAYer2 COUNt 1 Example Setting the Start Arm Count ARM LAY2 COUN 10 Sets 10 start arms per INITiate 292 Command Reference Chapter 8 ARM STARt LAYer2 IMMediate Comments Example ARM STARt LAYer2 IMMediate immediately arms the waveform regardless of the selected arm source The trigger system must be initiated and the start trigger sequence must be in the wait for arm state The selected start arm source remains unchanged e Executing this command with the start trigger sequence not in the wait for arm state generates Error 212 Arm ignored e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands NITiate IMMediate e RST Condition None Starting a Waveform ARM LAY2 SOUR HOLD Sets manual arm source INIT Initiates trigger system ARM LAY2 Starts waveform STARt LAYer2 SLOPe Parameters Comments Example ARM STARt LAYer2 SLOPe lt edge gt selects the edge rising or falling on the Agilent E1445A s front panel Start Arm In BNC which starts waveform generation This edge is significant only with ARM STARt LAYer2 SOURce set to EXTernal The programmed value is retained but not used when other sources are selected
558. ust be able to sink 1 Ma Appendix A Agilent E1445A Specifications 459 VXI ECLTrg Functions Input Functions Output Functions VXI TTLTrg Functions Input Functions Output Functions Front Panel Digital Port In Connector Connector Type Signal Lines Logic Compatibility Functions Data Rate Local Bus Bus Type Functions Data Rate typical reference frequency in trigger source in i e the waveform clock start arm in enables waveform clock marker bits stored with arbitrary waveforms reference frequency waveform clock a pulse indicating each waveform repetition a level change at the start and the end of each burst of waveform repetitions frequency change phase change trigger source i e the waveform clock waveform clock gate FSK Input start arm enables waveform clock waveform clock stop causes the current waveform repetition to be the last sweep arm starts sweep or frequency list sweep trigger go to next point in sweep or frequency list none 25 pin D type receptacle 16 data ext clock int clock TTL data to DAC download to segment memory waveform select Note 2 phase modulation 8 bits 1M transfers s typical ECL data to DAC download to segment memory waveform select Note 2 phase modulation 8 bits data pass through 7Msa s 2M s for phase modulation 460 Agilent E1445A Specificat
559. ut 2V DAC Code 2 00125 4096 1600 4096 2496 The UNS_DAT program shows how to store a waveform segment i e points of an arbitrary waveform into the AFG s segment memory The waveform segment is stored in the Unsigned number format The data is transferred to the AFG as a comma separated list The example generates a 200 point 5 V to 5 V negative going ramp The commands are the same ones listed on page 226 except on how to select the Unsigned format and how generate the data These exceptions are as follows Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 229 5 Select the DAC Data Format SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat UNSigned This command selects the UNSigned number format 7 Store the Waveform Segment as Unsigned DAC Data SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent VOLTage DAC lt voltage_list gt This command stores the waveform segment into segment memory according to the Unsigned number format set by the SOURce ARBitrary DAC FORMat UNSigned command BASIC Program Example UNS_DAT 4 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 Use the same BASIC program as the SIGN_DAT program beginning on page 227 The only difference is that this program generates in line 360 and transfers in line 400 the segment data as DAC codes in the Unsigned number format instead of the Signed format The following lines show the differences of the two program examples IRE STORE
560. utput waveform sequence by writing directly to the registers VXISRCE y Writes data directly to the DAC from the VXIbus backplane 466 Useful Tables Appendix B Command Coupling Groups Table B 2 Agilent E1445A Command Coupling Groups Coupling Group Commands None SOURce LIST2 FORMat DATA SOURce LIST2 FREQuency POINts SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt FEED SOURce MARKer ECLTrg lt n gt STATe SOURce MARKer FEED SOURce MARKer POLarity SOURce MARKer STATEe SOURce PM DEViation SOURce PM UNIT ANGLe SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude UNIT VOLTage STATus OPC INITiate STATus OPERation CONDition STATus OPERation ENABle STATus OPERation EVENt STATus OPERation NTRansition STATus OPERation PTRansition STATus QUEStionable CONDition STATus QUEStionable ENABle STATus QUEStionable EVENt STATus QUEStionable NT Ransition STATus QUEStionable PTRansition STATus PRESet TRIGger STARt IMMediate TRIGger STARt SLOPe TRIGger STOP MMediate TRIGger SWEepl lMMediate VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE VINStrument CONFigure LBUS MODE AUTO VINStrument CONFigure TEST CONFigure VINStrument CONFigure TEST DATA VINStrument CONFigure VME MODE VINStrument CONFigure VME RECeive ADDRess DATA VINStrument CONFigure VME RECeive ADDRess READy VINStrument IDENtity Frequency ARM SWEep COUNt ARM SWEep SOURce
561. vances to the next frequency in the sweep using the ARM SWEep IMMediate and TRIGger SWEep IMMediate commands respectively Using the flowchart in Figure 4 1 on page 118 as a guide the steps of the program are 1 10 Select the frequency generator that allows frequency sweeping TRIGger STARt SOURce lt source gt Select the frequency sweep mode SOURce FREQuency 1 MODE lt mode gt Set the start frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 STARt lt start_freq gt Set the stop frequency SOURce FREQuency 1 STOP lt stop_freg gt Set the number of points frequencies in the frequency sweep SOURce SWEep POINts lt number gt Set the source which starts the frequency sweep ARM SWEep SOURce lt source gt Set the source which advances the sweep to the next frequency TRIGger SWEep SOURce lt source gt Set the output function SOURce FUNCtion SHAPe lt shape gt Set the signal amplitude SOURce VOLTage LEVel IMMediate AMPLitude lt amplitude gt Place the AFG in the wait for arm state INITiate MMediate 190 Arming and Triggering Chapter 5 BASIC Program Example SWP_STEP 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 IRE STORE SWP_STEP This program sets the AFG arm source and trigger source to IHOLD The AFG is armed and advanced through the sweep points lusing arm immediate and tr
562. veform 1400 bytes 3 digits 2 bytes ampl point OUTPUT Afg ICR LF OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL RAMP_OUT sequence name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Isequence size OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ RAMP Isegment order SUBEND SUB Rst Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 COM Afg Afg1 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG ENTER Afg Complete Continued on Next Page Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 243 660 SUBEND 670 680 SUB Wf_del 690 Wf_del Subprogram which deletes all sequences and segments 700 COM Afg Afg1 710 OUTPUT Afg FUNC USER NONE Iselect no sequences 720 OUTPUT Afg LIST SSEQ DEL ALL IClear sequence memory 630 OUTPUT Afg LIST SEGM DEL ALL IClear segment memory 740 SUBEND 750 760 SUB Errmsg 770 Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors 780 COM Afg Afg1 790 DIM Message 256 800 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit 810 B SPOLL Afg 820 End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands 830 OUTPUT Afg 840 OUTPUT Afg ABORT labort output waveform 850 REPEAT 860 OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR lread AFG error queue 870 ENTER Afg Code Message 880 PRINT Code Message 890 UNTIL Code 0 900 STOP 910 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program COMBSIGN FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program COMBSIGN C is in Versions directory VCPROG on th
563. waveform is a 200 point l 5V to 5V ramp wave lAssign I O path between the computer and E1445A ASSIGN Afg TO 70910 ASSIGN Afg1 TO 70910 FORMAT OFF Ipath for binary data COM Afg Afg1 ISet up error checking ON INTR 7 CALL Errmsg ENABLE INTR 7 2 OUTPUT Afg CLS OUTPUT Afg SRE 32 OUTPUT Afg ESE 60 Call the subprograms which reset the AFG and erase all waveform Isegments and sequences CALL Rst CALL Wf_del OUTPUT Afg SOUR FREQ1 FIX 200E3 lfrequency OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC SHAP USER lfunction OUTPUT Afg SOUR VOLT LEV IMM AMPL 5 11875V lamplitude CALL Ramp_wave OUTPUT Afg SOUR FUNC USER RAMP_OUT Iwaveform sequence OUTPUT Afg INIT IMM Iwait for arm state Continued on Next Page 236 High Speed Operation Chapter 7 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 WAIT 1 allow interrupt to be serviced OFF INTR 7 END SUB Ramp_wave Ramp_wave Subprogram which defines a ramp waveform and output Isequence COM Afg Afg1 INTEGER Waveform 1 200 ICalculate waveform points as dac codes FOR l 100 TO 99 STEP 1 Waveform 101 1 1 050505 00125 4096 NEXT OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC SOUR INT Idac data source OUTPUT Afg SOUR ARB DAC FORM UNS Idac data fo
564. wer On Condition No macros are defined Chapter 8 Command Reference 419 LRN OPC Note Comments Comments LRN returns a sequence of commands that may be resent to the Agilent E1445A to return it to its current programming state Only those commands that are affected by RST are included in the sequence Notable exceptions include the DAC code format signed vs unsigned the SOURce LIST commands including waveform segment segment sequence and frequency list definitions the STATus subsystem commands and the CALibration SECure command state LRN should be sent singly in a program message since the number of commands in the returned sequence is large and may vary depending on firmware revision e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands RCL RST SAV e RST Condition None OPC causes the Agilent E1445A to wait for all pending operations to complete The Operation Complete bit bit 0 in the Standard Event Status Register is then set If STATus OPC INITiate OFF is set the Operation Complete bit will be set when all commands received prior to the OPC have been executed If ON is set OPC waits for waveform generation to complete before setting the Operation Complete bit No other commands will be executed until the Operation Complete bit is set e Executable when Initiated Yes e Coupling Group None e Related Commands OPC WAI e RST Condition None
565. y SOURce ARBitrary DOWNload command to change segment sequences without aborting the present operation or to drive the DAC directly SOURce ARBitrary DAC SOURce command The WAVSELPP program selects three different sequences using the Digital Port In connector Sequence 1 is a Sin X X waveform sequence 2 is a damped sine waveform and sequence 3 is a sine wave with spikes waveform The program downloads segment data as indefinite length arbitrary block data using the SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent COMBined command Select the sequences as follows FPCLK is clocked other data lines open Sequence 3 FPCLK is clocked FPO00 to low Sequence 2 FPCLK is clocked FP001 to low Sequence 1 BASIC Program Example WAVSELFP IRE STORE WAVSELFP This program changes the output waveform sequence once the AFG has been INITiated by writing the location of a sequence s base address to the Waveform Select register All register reads and writes are 16 bit The program uses the front panel Digital Port In connector to Ichange the sequences as follows IFPCLK is clocked other data lines open Sequence 3 IFPCLK is clocked FP000 to low Sequence 2 9 IFPCLK is clocked FP001 to low Sequence 1 10 20 Assign an I O path between the computer and the AFG 30 ASSIGN Cmd TO 80900 40 ASSIGN Afg TO 80910 ONOoaRWD 50 ASSIGN Afg1 TO 80910 FORMAT OFF Ipath for binary data 60 Laddr 80 llogical address for AFG 70
566. y control 487 488 load strobe 488 high speed data 506 offset reading 485 486 Registers continued operation status 381 436 437 group 435 phase control 495 increment 487 load strobe 495 modulation 495 questionable signal status 381 431 434 ROSC N divider 488 sample hold and ROSC N control 488 sequence base 499 standard event status 439 enable 440 group 439 441 status byte 442 status group 442 status register 499 traffic register 498 transition filter 431 435 waveform select 499 sequence 498 499 Removing Modules 25 522 Agilent E1445A User s Manual Index R continued Repetition Count 251 segment sequence list 353 output 352 Repetition Frequency determining 87 Reset Configuration list 472 474 query 48 Resetting AFG 47 example program 47 Returning ASCii data format 335 358 definite block data format 335 358 PACKed data format 335 REAL data format 358 repetition count list length 116 segment sequence list names 116 waveform segment names 116 RMC 423 ROSC N Divider Register 488 RST 47 424 RSTCLS Program Example 47 RSTSINE Program Example 51 S Safety Warnings 14 Sample frequency range 155 gate enabling disabling 394 polarity 393 source 393 programs 104 109 111 112 rate 87 160 arbitrary waveforms 331 454 characteristics 454 456 frequency span 327 FSK source 324 non swept 322 setting center 321 setting FSK 323 starting 328 s
567. y query list names 116 348 list length 357 memory 347 353 list names 116 348 repetition count list 116 memory 347 353 reserving memory for 350 repetition count list 116 selecting 356 reserving memory for 350 sending 114 selecting 356 storing in memory 87 sending 114 single storing in memory 87 marker pulses 212 213 selecting 498 505 waveform 212 213 selection program 500 505 using different segments 93 98 Servant Area waveform setting 23 deleting from memory 340 switch 23 524 Agilent E1445A User s Manual Index S continued Setting AFG bus request level 24 arming sources 166 168 294 sweeps 295 296 372 sources 297 frequency lists 124 126 logical address switch 22 number of arms 169 171 output amplitude 72 74 377 380 impedance 69 71 309 phase modulation deviation 76 365 security code 302 servant area 23 switch 23 start arm slope 293 source 294 start trigger slope 395 stop trigger slope 398 waveform cycles per arm 169 171 See also Selecting SIGN_DAT Example Program 227 228 Signal marker enabling disabling 362 364 polarity 364 phase and gating 200 changing with registers 495 questionable status register 381 431 434 Signed data combined 239 244 generating waveforms with 225 228 number format 225 226 240 Sin X X Waveforms 105 106 sweeping 141 143 SIN_D Example Program 107 108 SIN_R Example Program 111 SIN_X Example Program 105 106 Sine Waves gener
568. y waveforms the marker level changes with the first point on the waveform of the first waveform repetition The source then outputs a marker pulse at the last waveform point of each repetition For SINUsoid outputs the marker is a 50 duty cycle square wave at the waveform frequency ARM STARt SEQuence 1 LAYer2 The AFG asserts a marker when triggering the first amplitude point after receiving a start arm The AFG unasserts a marker with the last amplitude point of the last waveform repetition or following an ABORt SOURce FREQuency 1 CHANge The source outputs a one sample period wide marker pulse after a frequency change occurs This shows that the steady state frequency was reached SOURce LIST 1 The source outputs marker pulses specified by the SOURce LIST 1 SEGMent MARKer and SOURce LIST 1 SSEQuence MARKer commands Increase the pulse size by selecting marker output for consecutive points on the waveform Can only be used with arbitrary waveforms see Chapters 3 and 7 on how to generate arbitrary waveforms SOURce PM DEViation CHANge This source outputs a one sample period wide marker pulse after a phase change occurs This shows that the new phase was reached Chapter 6 Marker Outputs Multiple AFG Operations 205 SOURce ROSCillator The source outputs the reference oscillator selected by SOURce JROSCillator SOURce TRIGger STARt SEQuence 1 The source outputs a nominal 12 nS marker pulse fo
569. ying a Sweep Time The number of frequencies points in a sweep and the number of frequencies in a frequency list change the duration of the sweep or pass through the list The relationship between the sweep or list time SOURce SWEep TIME the time between frequencies TRIGger SWEep TIMer and the number of frequencies points is shown below TIME TlMer points 1 Changing the number of points keeps the value set by the last command sent either SOURce SWEep TIME or TRIGger SWEep TIMer and changes the other Changing TIME or TlMer affects the other The source which advances the sweep or list to the next frequency is set with the TRIGger SWEep SOURce command The available sources are e BUS The GPIB Group Execute Trigger GET command or the TEEE 488 2 TRG common command e HOLD Suspend sweep or frequency list advance triggering Advance to the next frequency sweeping or in a list using TRIGger SWEep IMMediate e LINK The next valid start arm advances the sweep or list e TiMer The SOURce SWEep TIME and or TRIGger SWEep TIMer commands control the sweep and frequency list advance timing default source e TTLTrgO through TTLTrg7 The VXIbus TTL trigger lines More information on the sweep advance source can be found in Chapter 5 Arming and Triggering The sweep time set by SOURce SWEep TIME is the period from the generation of the first frequency in the sweep or list to the generat
570. ying the value of a parameter Linking IEEE 488 2 Common Commands Use a semicolon between the commands For example RST CLS OPC Linking Multiple SCPI Commands Use both a semicolon and a colon between the commands For example SOUR ROSC SOUR INT1 TRIG STAR SOUR INT1 Some commands are listed as two commands separated with a vertical bar I This means that either command name can be used For example use either CW or FIXed when CW FlXed is shown 288 Command Reference Chapter 8 SCPI Command Reference This section describes the SCPI commands for the Agilent E1445A Arbitrary Function Generator Commands are listed alphabetically by subsystem and also within each subsystem A command guide is printed in the top margin of each page The guide indicates the subsystem listed on that page Chapter 8 Command Reference 289 ABORt ABORt The ABORt command places the TRIGger subsystem in the idle state regardless of any other settings The command halts waveform generation but keeps the output voltage at the value generated when ABORt was executed Only another INITiate IMMediate command will restart waveform output Subsystem Syntax ABORt no query Comments ABORt does not affect any other settings of the Agilent E1445A e The Pending Operation Flag set true by the INITiate IMMediate command will be set false as a consequence of entering the trigger idle state Subsequent OPC OPC and WAI command
571. z MAXimum selects 42 94967296 MHz Comments Indicating an incorrect frequency for an external reference oscillator will cause incorrect sample rate and waveform frequencies to be generated by the SOURce FREQuency 1 and SOURce FREQuency2 subsystems e Executable when Initiated Query form only e Coupling Group Frequency e RST Condition SOURce ROSCillator FREQuency EXTernal 42 94967296 MHz Example Specifying the External Reference Oscillator Frequency ROSC FREQ EXT 5 MHZ External oscillator is 5 MHz 370 Command Reference Chapter 8 SOURce ROSCillator SOURce SOURce ROSCillator SOURce lt source gt selects the reference oscillator source Parameters Parameter Parameter Range of Default Name Type Values Units lt source gt discrete CLK10 ECLTrgO ECLTrg1 none EXTernal INTernal 1 INTernal2 Comments The available sources are CLK10 The VXIbus CLK10 10 MHz line EXTernal The Agilent E1445A s front panel Ref Sample In BNC ECLTrg0 and ECLTrg1 The VXIbus ECL trigger lines INTernal 1 The internal 42 94967296 MHz oscillator Using this oscillator in conjunction with the SOURce FREQuency 1 subsystem gives a resolution of 01 Hz for sine waves and arbitrary waveform sample rates INTernal2 The internal 40 MHz oscillator Using this oscillator in conjunction with the SOURce FREQuency2 subsystem allows that subsystem to exactly produce frequencies s
572. ze OUTPUT Afg USING K SOUR LIST1 SEGM VOLT DAC 3400 OUTPUT Afg1 Waveform 1400 bytes 3 digits 2 bytes ampl point OUTPUT Afg ICR LF OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEL RAMP_OUT sequence name OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ DEF 1 Isequence size OUTPUT Afg SOUR LIST1 SSEQ SEQ RAMP Isegment order SUBEND SUB Rst Rst Subprogram which resets the E1445 COM Afg Afg1 OUTPUT Afg RST OPC lreset the AFG ENTER Afg Complete SUBEND SUB Wf_del Wf_del Subprogram which deletes all sequences and segments COM Afg Afg1 OUTPUT Afg FUNC USER NONE OUTPUT Afg LIST SSEQ DEL ALL OUTPUT Afg LIST SEGM DEL ALL Iselect no sequences IClear sequence memory IClear segment memory SUBEND SUB Errmsg Errmsg Subprogram which displays E1445 programming errors COM Afg Afg1 DIM Message 256 Read AFG status byte register and clear service request bit B SPOLL Afg End of statement if error occurs among coupled commands OUTPUT Afg OUTPUT Afg ABORT REPEAT OUTPUT Afg SYST ERR Continued on Next Page labort output waveform lread AFG error queue Chapter 7 High Speed Operation 233 790 ENTER Afg Code Message 800 PRINT Code Message 810 UNTIL Code 0 820 STOP 830 SUBEND Visual BASIC and The Visual BASIC example program DACBLOK1 FRM is in directory Visual C C Program VBPROG and the Visual C example program DACBLOKL C is in Versions directory VCPROG

here - Keysight

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents